JP7392815B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which a lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the lottery. Further, a general configuration is such that an effect is performed to make the player predict or recognize the result of the lottery. These gaming machines are equipped with display devices, speakers, light emitting devices, movable objects, etc., and depending on the progress of the game, visual effects, sound effects, light effects, effects using movable objects, etc. are executed. Ru.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, a performance selected by lottery is executed by operating a start lever. Further, an opening effect is executed when a predetermined gaming state is started, and an ending effect is executed when a predetermined end opportunity occurs (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-192800

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to suitably control the execution of performances, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably control the execution of performances.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1 provides a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means for controlling the execution of a performance.
The performance control means is
a first effect control means for controlling the execution of the first effect according to the first effect information based on the occurrence of a first execution opportunity during the execution of the effect;
If a second execution opportunity occurs during execution of the performance, a second performance control means controls the execution of the second performance according to the second performance information based on the subsequent occurrence of a predetermined start opportunity;
means for controlling the execution of a specific performance according to specific performance information based on the occurrence of a specific opportunity;
means for reading out the first performance information and the specific performance information into separate storage areas in a predetermined situation in which the second performance is not executed;
means for reading out the first performance information, the specific performance information, and the second performance information into the same storage area in a specific situation in which the second performance is executed;
Equipped with
A plurality of display effects are set as the display effects to be executed as the first effect,
The plurality of display effects executed as the first effect include a common effect that may be executed as a display effect of the second effect .

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably control the execution of the performance.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the slot machine in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing. It is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of each reel. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern and a combination line that can be visually recognized from a display window. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between winning modes and benefits provided. (a) It is a front view of a common display area, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of information corresponding to a stop order displayed on a dual-purpose display section. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device and the display content of the stop order on the dual-purpose display unit. It is a front view of a ratio display. FIG. 2 is an electrical configuration diagram of a slot machine. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the combination performed by main side MPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining a lottery table for normal mode. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stop order of the reels and the winning pattern that is established when the normal mode lottery table is selected. It is an explanatory view for explaining a lottery table for the first RT mode. It is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the stop order of the reels and the winning pattern that is established when the first RT mode lottery table is selected. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a second RT mode lottery table. It is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels and the winning pattern when the second RT mode lottery table is selected. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining index values with different winning probabilities between setting values of “1” to “6”; FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an offset table. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition data acquisition process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control process performed by main side MPU. 3 is a flowchart illustrating processing corresponding to a stop operation executed by the main MPU. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming state and a gaming section that exist in a slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st control processing of the game section performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart showing the corresponding processing when the game ends, which is executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd control process of the game section performed by main side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU. 12 is a flowchart showing additional processing executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing preparation state processing executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing ART state processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for bonuses performed by main side MPU. 7 is a flowchart showing bonus processing at the start of a game executed by the main MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing ending handling processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the freeze setting process performed by main side MPU. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a display layer. (a) to (h) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the performance contents of various performances executed in the normal gaming state. (a) to (e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the performance contents of the first expected performance and the second expected performance, and (f) the correspondence relationship between the type of the first expected performance and the expectation level of bonus winning; It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the type of second expected performance and the expectation degree of BB winning when a bonus winning occurs. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the production-side ROM for executing various productions in the normal gaming state, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the production-side RAM for executing the various productions. It is a diagram. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the composition of each layer, (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the composition of the setting area for sound output, and (c) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the composition of the setting area for display. FIG. (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the manner in which the performance table is read in a case where neither the bonus announcement performance nor the re-variation performance is an execution target game. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the manner of reading out the performance table in the case where the game is a target game for executing a bonus announcement performance or a re-variation performance. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a second composite effect table. It is a time chart showing how the second expected performance is started based on the second composite performance table. It is a flowchart which shows the production execution process performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the display control process performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a bonus announcement performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the production content determination process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart showing normal production control processing executed by the production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st performance information setting process performed by performance side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd performance information setting process performed by performance side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for read-out performed by production side MPU. (a) It is a flowchart showing the winning result handling process executed by the performance side MPU, and (b) It is a flowchart showing the performance setting process at the time of bonus start executed by the performance side MPU. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device in the base performance for ART and the normal performance for ART. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device in the additional main effect and the additional sub effect in the ART state. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device in the additional main effect and the additional sub effect in the ART state. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the performance-side ROM for executing various performances in the ART state, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the performance-side RAM for executing various performances in the ART state. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a high-speed first additional sub effect table. It is a flow chart showing non-normal performance control processing executed by the performance side MPU. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the performance setting process at the time of ART start performed by the performance side MPU, and (b) It is a flowchart which shows the game start process during ART which is performed by the performance side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the production adjustment process performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for additional effects performed by the effect side MPU. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the flag clearing process performed by production side MPU, and (b) It is a flowchart which shows the process for updating the number of games performed by production side MPU. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how an additional main effect and an additional sub effect are executed in the ART state. It is a flowchart which shows accessory management processing performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory initialization process performed by performance side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the origin setting process performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the origin return process for accessories performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the start setting process of the correction|amendment operation|movement performed by production side MPU. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the standby setting process performed by production side MPU, and (b) It is a flowchart which shows the standby management process which is performed by production side MPU. (a) to (f) are time charts showing how the correction operation standby state and accessory error state are set. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of a drive table for bonus announcement. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the accessory drive setting process performed by production side MPU, and (b) It is a flowchart which shows the accessory drive control process performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory flag setting process performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart showing accessory setting processing at the time of bonus winning, which is executed by the production side MPU. (a) to (i) are time charts showing how the accessory object action effect is executed after the accessory object error state is canceled; (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a history image displayed on an image display device, and (b) it is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the generation trigger of history configuration data and the type of image included in the history image. FIG. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the composition of performance side RAM for displaying a history image, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the composition of the composition data storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the process for history images performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows history information storage processing performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of number information performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the generation process of history structure data performed by production side MPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the types of selection condition tables and word specification data set in the selection condition tables, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the types of selection condition tables and word specification data set in the selection condition tables. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a history storage area. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a second selection condition table at the end of ART. It is a flowchart which shows the word selection process performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the headline setting process performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the point calculation process performed by production side MPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a heading point table, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining an additional point table. It is a flowchart which shows the plate setting process performed by production side MPU. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the plate lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the game start correspondence process performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the management process for history images performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the completion|finish production corresponding process performed by production side MPU. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents of a history menu screen displayed on an image display device. It is a flowchart which shows the display operation correspondence process performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the selection correspondence process performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during mode selection performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the past history selection process performed by production side MPU. 3 is a flowchart showing management processing executed by the main MPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device in the base performance for ART and the normal performance for ART in the second embodiment, and (b) and (c) image display in the additional performance in the ART state. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining display contents of the device. (a), (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device in the reduction additional effect. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the performance-side ROM for executing various performances in the ART state, and (b) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the performance-side RAM for executing various performances in the ART state. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game start process during ART performed by the performance side MPU. (a) It is a flowchart which shows the production adjustment process performed by production side MPU, and (b) It is a flowchart which shows the process for additional production performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the flag clearing process performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for updating the number of games executed by the production side MPU. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how additional effects are executed in the ART state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for past history selection performed by the performance side MPU in 3rd Embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine 10, which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail based on the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing 11.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 forming an outer shell thereof. The casing 11 has a plurality of wooden panels fixed to it, so that the casing 11 is formed into a box-like shape that is open toward the front.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. The front door 12 is supported by the casing 11 using a shaft portion 12a provided on the left side thereof as a rotation axis so as to be able to open and close the internal space of the casing 11. Note that the front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the back side thereof, and this locked state is released by unlocking the key cylinder 14 with a predetermined key.

As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12. The game panel 20 is formed with three vertically long display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R arranged side by side. The display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R are made of a transparent or semi-transparent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through each of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 11a, and a reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is formed into a cylindrical shape. Each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported so that its central axis becomes the rotational axis of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis that extends substantially horizontally, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one with each display window portion 21L, 21M, and 21R. There is. Therefore, a portion of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 21L, 21M, 21R. Furthermore, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed as if they were moving from top to bottom through the respective display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R.

As shown in FIG. 1, a start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20, which is operated to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. When the start lever 41 is operated while game media such as medals and virtual medals are being bet, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are provided that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each stop button 42, 43, 44 is arranged directly below the display window portion 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the reel 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped. Each stop button 42, 43, 44 becomes in a state where it can be stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the left reel 32L started rotating.

The rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped based on the operation of each stop button 42, 43, 44. The period until the execution of various processes such as the granting of a number and the management of the gaming state is completed corresponds to one game (game round).

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals as investment value is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 are guided to the hopper device 53 by the selector 52 provided on the back of the front door 12 if the acceptance is permitted, and if the acceptance is prohibited, the medals are guided to the hopper device 53. The medals are led to a medal receiving tray 59 from a medal outlet 58 provided at the lower front of the front door 12 (see FIG. 1). The hopper device 53 has a function of dispensing the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal receiving tray 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when a winning corresponding to the provision of game media on the active line is established. There is.

As shown in FIG. 1, below the medal slot 45, a return button 46 is provided which is pressed when the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 become stuck in the selector 52. Further, on the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, there is a first credit input button 47 for inputting the maximum amount of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time, and a first credit input button 47 for inputting two virtual medals at a time. A second credit input button 48 for inputting virtual medals and a third credit input button 49 for inputting virtual medals one at a time are provided.

A settlement button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores surplus input medals and paid-out medals at the time of winning as virtual medals until a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the payment button 51 is operated under the condition that the virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal ejection port 58 as real medals.

Inside the housing 11, on the left side of the hopper device 53, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a power supply device 54 is provided. The power supply device 54 includes a power switch 55 that is operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 that resets various states of the slot machine 10, and a reset button 56 that changes the setting state of the slot machine 10 from "Setting 1" to "Setting 1". A setting key insertion hole 57 is provided which is operated to change the setting within the range of ``Setting 6''.

Next, the symbols attached to each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R will be explained.

FIG. 4 shows the symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, numbers "0" to "20" are assigned to correspond to each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and these numbers can be visually recognized by the main controller 70, which will be described later, from the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. This is a number to recognize the symbols in a certain state, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, in the following explanation, the numbers will be used.

Symbols include "Bell" symbol (for example, 20th on left reel 32L), "Replay" symbol (for example, 19th on left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (for example, 18th on left reel 32L), " Red 7” symbol (for example, 15th on left reel 32L), “BAR” symbol (for example, 10th on left reel 32L), “Cherry” symbol (for example, 9th on left reel 32L), “White 7” symbol (For example, the 5th position on the left reel 32L). The number and arrangement order of various symbols are different on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIG. 5 is a front view of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. Each of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R.

In this slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect the positions where the symbols of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbols of the right reel 32R. When the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is started with a specified number of gaming media bet, and if a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the profit of giving gaming media, Either the benefit of re-gaming or the transition of gaming status is granted.

In other words, in this slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line on which winnings can be achieved. The main line ML is set as a line extending in a straight line. Therefore, the subline SL1 connecting the upper row symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle row symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the lower row symbols of the right reel 32R, the upper row symbols of the left reel 32L, the upper row symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the upper row symbols of the right reel 32R. The connected subline SL2, the subline SL3 that connects the lower symbols of the left reel 32L, the lower symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbols of the right reel 32R, the lower symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. Even if a combination of winning symbols is established on a line extending in a straight line, such as the subline SL4 connecting the upper row symbols, the winning will not be established.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 6, a description will be given of the correspondence between the symbol combinations that result in winnings and the benefits that will be awarded when the winnings occur. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the combination of symbols that result in a winning combination and the benefits that are awarded when the winning combination occurs.

Minor prizes for which game media are given include 1st supplementary prize, 2nd supplementary prize, 3rd supplementary prize, 1st bell prize, 2nd bell prize, 1st watermelon prize, 2nd watermelon prize, and cherry prize. There is. Specifically, on the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, This will be the first supplementary prize. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the second supplementary prize will be won. becomes. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the third supplementary prize will be won. becomes. If one of the first to third supplementary prizes is won, the number of game media to be awarded becomes "1".

On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Bell" symbol, the first bell will be won. becomes. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, the second bell will be won. becomes. If one of the first to second bell wins, the number of game media to be awarded becomes "11".

On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "watermelon" symbol, the first watermelon prize is won. becomes. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Watermelon" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Watermelon" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, the second watermelon is won. becomes. If one of the first to second watermelon prizes is won, the number of game media to be awarded becomes "5". When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L becomes a "Cherry" symbol on the main line ML, a cherry prize is awarded regardless of which of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. In the case of a cherry prize, the number of game media to be awarded becomes "2".

Winnings that give you the privilege of replaying the next game without betting game media include regular replay winnings, 1st special replay winnings, 2nd special replay winnings, 1st RT replay winnings, and 1st RT replay winnings. There are 2RT replay wins, 1st fall replay wins, and 2nd fall replay wins. Specifically, on the main line ML, if the stopped symbols on the left reel 32L are "Replay" symbols, the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M are "Replay" symbols, and the stopped symbols on the right reel 32R are "Replay" symbols, On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, or on the main line ML In the above case, when the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, a normal replay win is obtained.

On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the first special replay It will be a prize. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, the second special replay It will be a prize.

On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, the 1st RT replay prize is won. becomes. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Watermelon" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Replay" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Replay" symbol, the 2nd RT Replay prize is won. becomes.

On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, the first falling replay It will be a prize. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the second falling replay It will be a prize.

If any of the above-mentioned replay wins occur, a replay benefit will be granted that will allow you to play the next game without having to bet on game media. Specifically, if one of the replays wins in a game in which "3" gaming media is bet, there is no need to bet on the gaming media, but the next game is played with "3" gaming media bet. It becomes possible to start playing the game.

Among the various replay winnings mentioned above, the first RT replay winning, the second RT replay winning, the first falling replay winning, and the second falling replay winning not only trigger the award of the replay winning privilege but also trigger the transition to the lottery mode. In this slot machine 10, a plurality of lottery modes are set so that the types of winning combinations to be drawn and the probability of winning for each winning combination are different in the winning lottery process (FIG. 14), and the transition between these lottery modes is This occurs when a replay prize that triggers a shift to the lottery mode is established. The contents of each lottery mode and the conditions for transition to each lottery mode will be explained in detail later.

The state transition prizes in which only the gaming state transition is performed include the 1st BB prize, the 2nd BB prize, the 3rd BB prize, the 4th BB prize, the 1st RB prize, and the 2nd RB prize. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is the "Red 7" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "Red 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is the "Red 7" symbol. If there is, the 1st BB prize will be awarded. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "white 7" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white 7" symbol, then the 2BB prize winner. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Red 7" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Red 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "White 7" symbol, then the 3BB prize winner. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "white 7" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" symbol, then 4BB prize winner. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "Red 7" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "Red 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, the 1st RB It will be a prize. On the main line ML, if the stopping symbol on the left reel 32L is a "white 7" symbol, the stopping symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" symbol, and the stopping symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, the second RB It will be a prize.

When the first BB prize, the second BB prize, the third BB prize, or the fourth BB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. Further, when the first RB winning or the second RB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the RB state. Both the BB state and the RB state correspond to bonus states. The bonus state is a game state in which the expected number of game media awarded per unit number of games is higher than in game states other than the bonus state. Specifically, in addition to winning the winning combination that makes it possible to win the first bell with a higher probability (for example, approximately 1/1.5) than in other gaming states, if you win the winning combination, each The first bell prize is achieved regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. On the other hand, the number of game media required to start one game in the bonus state is the same as in other game states. Therefore, in the bonus state, the expected net increase in gaming media per unit number of games is higher than in gaming states other than the bonus state. Note that the number of game media required to start one game in the bonus state may be smaller than in other game states, and in the bonus state, the number of game media required per unit number of games may be smaller than in game states other than the bonus state. If the expected net increase value is high, the number of game media required to start one game in the bonus state may be greater than in other game states.

Among the bonus states, the BB state continues over a plurality of games and ends when a termination condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event according to the content of the game execution. The termination condition is arbitrary, but in this slot machine 10, the termination condition is that the total number of game media awarded since the start of the BB state is equal to or greater than the BB termination reference number (specifically, "350"). is set as . Note that the termination condition may be satisfied when the number of games executed in the BB state reaches the BB termination reference number of games.

Among the bonus states, the RB state continues over a plurality of games, and ends when a termination condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event according to the execution content of the game. The termination condition is arbitrary, but in this slot machine 10, the termination condition is that the total number of game media awarded since the start of the RB state is equal to or greater than the RB termination reference number (specifically, "150"). is set as . This RB end reference number is smaller than the BB end reference number. Therefore, the BB state is a more advantageous gaming state for the player than the RB state. Note that the termination condition may be satisfied when the number of games executed in the RB state reaches the RB termination reference number of games. In this case, by setting the RB end standard number of games to be smaller than the BB end standard number of games, it is possible to make the BB state a more advantageous gaming state for the player than the RB state.

Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61, an image display device 63, and an accessory 75 are provided at the top of the front door 12, and a speaker 62 is provided at the bottom of the front door 12. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and is also controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light so that a light emitting effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed. The speakers 62 are provided as a pair of left and right speakers, and the sound output is controlled so that when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, a sound or sound corresponding to the abnormality is output, and a sound or sound corresponding to the winning result is output. The sound output is controlled so that it is output. Further, the speaker 62 is controlled to output sound so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. Other display devices having a display surface may be used, or a dot matrix display may be used. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the display is controlled so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display screen. Further, the image display device 63 is controlled to display images corresponding to the winning results of the combinations in the internal lottery and the winning results in each game on the display screen. That is, the image display device 63 executes a display effect.

As shown in FIG. 1, the accessory 75 includes an accessory main body part 76 fixed to the front side of the game panel 20, and an accessory movable part that protrudes downward from the accessory main body 76 and is movable up and down. It is equipped with 77. The accessory main body part 76 is a hollow casing, and an accessory drive part 78 that allows the accessory movable part 77 to move up and down is housed inside the accessory main body part 76. The accessory drive section 78 is electrically connected to a performance control device 90 described later, and moves the accessory movable section 77 up and down based on drive data output from the performance control device 90.

The accessory movable part 77 includes a rod-shaped support part 77a extending vertically downward from the lower end of the accessory drive part 78. A through hole (not shown) is provided at the bottom of the accessory main body portion 76, which vertically passes through the bottom. The support portion 77a is inserted into the through hole and extends below the bottom. The accessory movable part 77 includes a spherical production part 77b provided at a free end (lower end) on the opposite side of the accessory drive part 78 in the support part 77a.

A detection protrusion 79 is provided on the outer circumferential surface of the support portion 77a to enable detection of the position of the accessory movable portion 77. The accessory movable part 77 changes from a state in which the spherical performance part 77b stays at the initial position, which is the upper end of the range of motion of the spherical performance part 77b, to a displaced position, where the spherical performance part 77b stays at the lower end of the range of motion. It can be moved up and down until it is in the same state. The accessory main body part 76 includes an initial position sensor 75a for detecting the detection protrusion 79 when the spherical effect part 77b stays at the initial position, and an initial position sensor 75a for detecting the detection protrusion 79 when the spherical effect part 77b stays at the displaced position. A displacement position sensor 75b for detecting the detection protrusion 79 is provided.

The accessory drive section 78 moves the accessory movable section 77 upward when receiving first drive data from the production control device 90, which will be described later, and when receiving second drive data from the production control device 90. The accessory movable part 77 is moved downward. The first drive data is output to the accessory drive section 78 on the condition that the initial position sensor 75a is in the OFF state. If the accessory movable part 77 is already staying at the initial position, the initial position sensor 75a is in the ON state. In this case, since the output of the first drive data is canceled, no additional first drive data is output. Further, the second drive data is output to the accessory drive section 78 on the condition that the displacement position sensor 75b is in the OFF state. When the accessory movable part 77 is already staying at the displacement position, the displacement position sensor 75b is in the ON state. In this case, since the output of the second drive data is canceled, the second drive data is not additionally output.

The spherical effect section 77b is present in front of the game panel 20 and exposed to the outside, allowing the player to touch the spherical effect section 77b. When an upward external force is applied to the spherical effect section 77b, the spherical effect section 77b can move upward to an initial position which is the upper end of the range of motion of the spherical effect section 77b. Furthermore, when a downward external force is applied to the spherical effect section 77b, the spherical effect section 77b can move downward to a displacement position that is the lower end of the movable range of the spherical effect section 77b.

As shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the return button 46 on the front door 12, there is provided an effect operation device 64 that is manually operated by the player to change the display content on the image display device 63. The production operation device 64 includes a center button 64a, an upper button 64b arranged above the center button 64a, and a lower button 64c arranged below the center button 64a. By performing predetermined operations on the center button 64a, upper button 64b, and lower button 64c, the display content on the image display device 63 is changed. The relationship between the operation of the production operation device 64 and the display content on the image display device 63 will be explained in detail later.

On the game panel 20 of the front door 12, below the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, there is a credit display section 65 that displays the number of virtual medals stored and stored, and a credit display section 65 that displays the number of virtual medals that are awarded when winning a small prize. A dual-purpose display section 66 that displays the number of gaming media and also displays a display corresponding to the notified content when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified on the image display device 63, and a section where the gaming section is an advantageous section. An advantageous section display section 67 is provided in which a display corresponding to the above is displayed. The credit display section 65 is composed of a 7-segment display, and each segment uses a monochromatic LED such as green.

FIG. 7A is a front view of a common display area 68 in which a dual-purpose display section 66 and an advantageous section display section 67 are provided. The common display area 68 includes a dual-purpose display section 66 provided by two 7-segment displays 66a and 66b arranged side by side in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. 7(a), and a light-emitting section. The advantageous section display section 67 is summarized.

If any of the minor prizes (1st to 3rd supplementary prizes, 1st to 2nd bell prizes, 1st to 2nd watermelon prizes, or cherry prizes) corresponding to the provision of game media is achieved, that small prize At the end of the game in which the winning combination has been achieved, the number of game media awarded corresponding to the winning winning combination is displayed on the combined display section 66. Specifically, if any of the first to third supplementary winnings is achieved, the 7-segment display 66a on the left will not be displayed, and "1" will be displayed on the 7-segment display 66b on the right. It is notified that "1" game media has been awarded. If any of the first to second bell wins is achieved, "1" is displayed on each of the left 7-segment display 66a and the right 7-segment display 66b, and "11" game media is awarded. You will be notified that it has been granted. Furthermore, if any of the first to second watermelon prizes is won, the left 7-segment display 66a will not be displayed, and the right 7-segment display 66b will display "5". ” will be notified that the game media has been awarded. Furthermore, when a cherry prize is achieved, the 7-segment display 66a on the left is hidden and "2" is displayed on the 7-segment display 66b on the right, so that "2" game media is awarded. This will be announced. On the other hand, even if a winning is achieved in which no gaming media is awarded, such as any replay winning, any BB winning, or any RB winning, the display corresponding to the winning will not be displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66. In this case, each seven segment display 66a, 66b is maintained in a non-display state. The display of the number of game media awarded on the dual-purpose display section 66 ends when the game media is bet to start the next game after the game in which the display was made, and each 7-segment display is displayed at the timing of this bet. The containers 66a and 66b are in a non-display state.

When the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified on the image display device 63, information corresponding to the notified stopping order is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66. FIG. 7B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66. As shown in FIG. 7(b), in this slot machine 10, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified by the image display device 63, and the first stop is the left reel 32L, and the second stop is the middle reel. 32M and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop is is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The stop order is that the left reel 32L is the first stop, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop is the right reel 32R and the second stop is the middle reel 32M. A stop order in which the second stop is the middle reel 32M and the third stop is the left reel 32L, a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are arbitrary, and a stop order in which the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest are arbitrary. There is an arbitrary stopping order and a stopping order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary.

The notification of the stop order on the image display device 63 includes the winning combination including the first bell winning data in the winning lottery process, the winning winning combination including the first RT replay winning data, and the second RT replay winning data. It can be executed when a winning combination is won, when a winning combination including the first falling replay winning data is won, or when a winning winning combination including the second falling replay winning data is won. Specifically, when winning a combination including the 1st bell winning data, the 1st bell will be won if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stopping orders. holds true. Then, if the first bell is won, the player is given "11" game media as already explained.

When winning a winning combination including the first RT replay winning data, the first RT replay winning is established when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stopping orders. Then, when the first RT replay winning is achieved, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode in which it is easier to win a winning combination that includes any replay winning data (that is, it is easier to achieve any replay winning) than in the normal mode. . In addition, if you win a winning combination that includes the 2nd RT replay winning data, the 2nd RT replay winning will be established if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order that corresponds to the current winning combination among the above stopping orders. . If the 2nd RT replay winning is achieved, the lottery mode shifts to the 2nd RT mode in which it is easier to win a combination that includes any of the replay winning data than in the 1st RT mode (that is, it is easier to achieve any of the replay winnings). do.

If you win a combination that includes the first falling replay winning data, the first falling replay winning will be avoided if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stopping orders. Ru. If the first fall replay winning is achieved, the lottery mode will shift from the first RT mode to the normal mode, but by avoiding the establishment of the first falling replay winning, this transition to the normal mode can be avoided. . In addition, if you win a combination that includes the 2nd falling replay winning data, the 2nd falling replay winning will be won if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order that corresponds to the current winning combination among the above stopping orders. Avoided. When the second falling replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts from the second RT mode to the first RT mode, but the transition to the first RT mode is avoided by avoiding the establishment of the second falling replay winning. I can do it.

When any of the above stop orders is notified on the image display device 63, the left 7-segment display 66a in the dual-purpose display section 66 remains in a non-display state, while the right 7-segment display 66b , a display corresponding to the stop order of the notification target is displayed. This display content is as shown in FIG. 7(b), and the display content of the stop order on the dual-purpose display unit 66 is set in one-to-one correspondence with the content of the stop order notification on the image display device 63. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of display contents on the dual-purpose display section 66 may be set to correspond to some or all of the stop order notification contents on the image display device 63. Good too.

The display content of the stop order on the dual-purpose display section 66 is different from the display content that is displayed when the dual-purpose display section 66 displays a display corresponding to the provision of game media. This makes it easy to distinguish whether the content displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66 corresponds to the number of game media awarded or the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIGS. 8A and 8B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device 63 and the display content of the stop order on the dual-purpose display unit 66.

When the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified on the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. Unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed, and in each unit display image G1 to G3, images corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed. Specifically, a left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. FIG. 8(a) shows how the stop order is notified when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. , the left unit display image G1 displays an image "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L, and the middle unit display image G2 displays an image "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M. , an image of "3" corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R is displayed on the right unit display image G3. The unit display images G1 to G3 are set in a second notification display layer 108 (FIG. 38), which will be described later, and are displayed in a manner that they are located closer to the screen than the presentation images. The unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed in a transparent manner. As a result, even in a situation where unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed, images set further back on the screen than the unit display images G1 to G3 can be viewed.

The image display device 63 displays an image notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as described above, while the dual-purpose display section 66 displays the images that notify the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. 8(b). "L" is displayed corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, and 32R. That is, on the image display device 63, unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed, and in each unit display image G1 to G3, the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the same order. While a corresponding image is displayed, the dual-purpose display section 66 displays a display that is unrelated to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Thereby, even if a display corresponding to the notification content of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display content on the image display device 63.

The display range of the dual-purpose display section 66 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 63. Also from this point of view, it is possible to reduce the degree of attention of the player to the dual-purpose display section 66 compared to the image display device 63. Further, the dual-purpose display section 66 is located on the opposite side to the image display device 63 across the display window sections 21L, 21M, and 21R that make the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R visible. As a result, the dual-purpose display section 66 is placed at a position separated from the image display device 63, which also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the dual-purpose display section 66.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, the display corresponds to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the dual-purpose display section 66, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display device 63 is displayed. This display is started after the winning lottery process is performed and before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is activated. In this case, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the dual-purpose display section 66 is started earlier than the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63. However, these displays may be started at the same time or substantially at the same time, or the display start order may be reversed. In addition, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the dual-purpose display unit 66 and the image display device 63 is a command to stop all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed. will be terminated if this occurs.

The dual-purpose display section 66 is arranged at the center of the common display area 68, whereas the advantageous section display section 67 is arranged at the corner side of the common display area 68. The advantageous section display section 67 is a display section for informing that the game section is an advantageous section out of the normal section and the advantageous section. An advantageous section is a stop of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible for the player to make a win that is advantageous to the player when winning a winning combination that is different depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This section corresponds to either a section where the order is announced or a section where the probability of transition to the ART state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, is higher than the normal section. On the other hand, the normal section refers to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the player to achieve a win that is advantageous to the player if the winning combination is different depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This is a section in which the stopping order of the game is not notified, and the probability of transition to the ART state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, is lower than the advantageous zone, or a zone in which transition to the ART state does not occur.

When the conditions for transition to an advantageous section are satisfied in the normal section and the transition is made to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display section 67 turns on to start notifying that the section is in an advantageous section. Further, when the conditions for transition to the normal section are satisfied in the advantageous section and the transition is made to the normal section, the advantageous section display section 67 is turned off and the notification that it is the advantageous section is terminated. This makes it possible to notify the game hall manager, etc. that this is an advantageous section. Further, the dual-purpose display section 66, which is provided collectively in the common display area 68, is turned on when a game medium is given, and turned off when the next game starts, and also displays the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. When the stop order of the game is displayed on the image display device 63, the light is turned on, and when the game ends, the light is turned off. Therefore, in a configuration in which the advantageous section display section 67 is arranged in the common display area 68 to prevent it from becoming too conspicuous to the player, in a situation where the advantageous section is an advantageous section, the advantageous section display section 67 is placed in the common display area 68. It becomes possible to actively create a situation where only 67 is in a lit state, and it becomes easier for the manager of the game hall to check the advantageous section display section 67.

Note that instead of the configuration in which the advantageous area display section 67 remains lit during the advantageous section, a configuration may be adopted in which the advantageous section display section 67 flashes at a predetermined cycle during the advantageous section. Furthermore, other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used as the dual-purpose display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67.

The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main controller 70 is attached to a back plate 11b that forms the back surface of the housing 11. The main control device 70 includes a main control board 71 housed in a board box 81. An MPU 72 and a ratio display 85 for displaying the results of game history management are mounted on the element mounting surface, which is one board surface of the main control board 71. The board box 81 is formed transparent so that the MPU 72 and the ratio display 85 housed in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81. Although the board box 81 is formed to be colorless and transparent, it may be formed to be colored and transparent if it is possible to visually see the MPU 72 and the ratio display 85 housed in the board box 81 from the outside of the board box 81. You can leave it there. The main controller 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 in a board box 81 such that an opposing wall 82 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 faces the front of the slot machine 10. Therefore, by opening the front door 12 toward the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 and exposing the internal space of the housing 11, it becomes possible to visually see the opposing wall 82 of the board box 81, and also to expose the internal space of the housing 11. It becomes possible to visually observe the MPU 72 and the ratio display 85 through the opposing wall portion 82.

FIG. 9 is a front view of the ratio display 85. As shown in FIG. 9, on the display surface of the ratio display 85, an identifier display section 86 and a ratio display section 87 are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. The identifier display section 86 includes a 7-segment display 86a on the left, a 7-segment display 86b on the right, and an auxiliary display section 86c for the identifier. Further, the ratio display section 87 includes a 7-segment display 87a on the left, a 7-segment display 87b on the right, and an auxiliary display section 87c for the ratio. Each of the 7-segment displays 86a, 86b, 87a, and 87b displays not only numbers "0" to "9" but also various characters including alphabetical characters. In the slot machine 10, the game history management result is reported using the ratio display 85, and the content of this notification will be explained in detail later. The display of the game history management results on the display surface of the ratio display 85 is visible through the opposing wall 82 of the board box 81. Note that the ratio display 85 may be a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL display.

As shown in FIG. 3, the board box 81 is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies back and forth. A connecting portion 83 is provided to leave a trace during the process. A plurality of coupling portions 83 are arranged in parallel on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped substrate box 81 . As a result, even if some of the joints 83 are broken and the case body is separated in a state in which separation of the case body is prevented using some of the joints 83, another joint 83 By bringing these into a connected state, it becomes possible to prevent the case body from separating again. Furthermore, when the case body is separated, the joint part 83 is destroyed and traces thereof remain, so by visually checking the joint part 83, it is possible to ascertain whether or not the case body has been illegally separated. Become. Further, a sealing sticker 84 is pasted on one side of the board box 81 other than the one side on which the coupling portion 83 is arranged so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies. When the seal 84 is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case body. This makes it possible to leave traces of the seal 84 if it is peeled off when the case body is separated.

As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 is provided with an effect control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70. The production control device 90 is arranged behind the image display device 63 in the front door 12 in an overlapping manner. The performance control device 90 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, the image display device 63, and the accessory 75 based on the command received from the main control device 70. Note that, like the main control device 70, the production control device 90 includes a control board housed in a board box.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram of FIG. 10.

As shown in FIG. 10, the MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71 of the main control device 70 as already explained. The MPU 72 includes a ROM 73 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 72, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 73. A certain RAM 74, a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, etc. are built in. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 73 and RAM 74 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 72, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. On the input side of the MPU 72, there is a reel unit 31, a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a that individually detect the operation of each stop button 42, 43, 44, and a medal input. An inserted medal detection sensor 45a detects medals inserted from the mouth 45, a credit insertion detection sensor 47a, 48a, 49a detects the operation of each credit insertion button 47, 48, 49 individually, and an operation of the settlement button 51 is detected. A settlement detection sensor 51a, a payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, a reset detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54, and a setting that detects that a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57. Various sensors such as a key detection sensor are connected, and signals from these sensors are input to the MPU 72.

On the output side of the MPU 72, there are a reel unit 31, a selector drive section 52a provided in the selector 52, a payout motor of the hopper device 53, a credit display section 65, a dual-purpose display section 66, an advantageous section display section 67, a performance control device 90, etc. is connected. In each game, the MPU 72 controls the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R of the reel unit 31. The selector 52 guides the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 to the hopper device 53 after detecting them with the inserted medal detection sensor 45a if acceptance is permitted, and directs them to the hopper device 53 after detecting them with the inserted medal detection sensor 45a if acceptance is prohibited. It has a function of discharging medals to the medal receiving tray 59 without detecting them. The selector drive unit 52a has a function of switching the state of the selector 52 between an acceptance permission state and an acceptance prohibition state, and specifically, moves the passage switching piece provided on the selector 52 to the reception permission position. and the position for prohibiting reception. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between an acceptance permission state and an acceptance prohibition state by switching the output state and stop state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a.

Further, the MPU 72 executes drive control of the hopper device 53 when a small winning combination is established and medals are to be paid out. Furthermore, the MPU 72 controls the display of the credit display unit 65 so that the number of game media stored as virtual medals is displayed. Further, the MPU 72 controls the display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 so that when the award of game media occurs, the number of game media to which the award is made is displayed. Furthermore, the MPU 72 controls the display of the advantageous section display section 67 so that, when the section is an advantageous section, a notification that it is an advantageous section is provided. Furthermore, the MPU 72 controls the display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the game management result is displayed. In addition, the MPU 72 transmits a command to the production control device 90 at each timing of each game, and also transmits a command to the production control device 90 to notify the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display device 63. In this case, display control of the dual-purpose display section 66 is executed so that a display corresponding to the content to be notified is performed. In this case, direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the effect control device 90, whereas direct display control of the dual-purpose display section 66 is performed by the MPU 72. In other words, direct display control is performed in the production control device 90 for the image display device 63, which is the target of relatively complicated display control, and the dual-purpose display unit 66, which is the target of relatively simple display control. Direct display control is executed by the MPU 72. Thereby, while reducing the processing load on the MPU 72, it is possible to perform both a display that emphasizes increasing attention to the performance and a display that emphasizes reliability.

A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply device 54 is equipped with a power supply section and a power outage monitoring circuit that supply drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 70, and the power outage monitoring circuit supplies power to the power supply section from an external power source. monitors the current voltage, and outputs a power outage signal to the MPU 72 when the voltage falls below the reference voltage. The MPU 72 executes processing at the time of a power outage by receiving a power outage signal, and after the power is restored, it is possible to return to the processing state before the power outage. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power outage power supply section for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power outage in a situation where the supply of operating power from an external power source is cut off. As a result, even if the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off, data is retained in the RAM 74 when backup power can be supplied from the power supply unit during a power outage (for example, on the 1st or 2nd day). be done. However, by pressing the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54 and turning on the power of the slot machine 10, the data stored and held in the RAM 74 is initialized.

The production control device 90 includes a production control board 91 for controlling execution of various notifications and various productions. The production control board 91 is equipped with an MPU 92. The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 92, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 93. A certain RAM 94 is built in, as well as a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like.

Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into separate chips. In addition, although backup power is not supplied to the RAM 94 from the power-off power supply part of the power supply unit 54 in a situation where the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off, the configuration is such that backup power is supplied to the RAM 94. Good too.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. As already explained, the MPU 72 (FIG. 10) of the main controller 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and receives various commands from the MPU 72. On the input side of the MPU 92, there are an initial position sensor 75a that detects the detection protrusion 79 of the accessory 75 existing at the above-mentioned initial position, and a displacement position sensor 75b that detects the detection protrusion 79 that has moved to the above-mentioned displacement position. , a central operation sensor 64d that detects the operation of the center button 64a in the production operation device 64, an upper operation sensor 64e that detects the operation of the upper button 64b, and a lower operation sensor 64f that detects the operation of the lower button 64c are connected. The signals from each of these sensors are input to the MPU 92. An upper lamp 61, a speaker 62, an image display device 63, and an accessory drive unit 78 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. The MPU 92 controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61, the sound output of the speaker 62, the display control of the image display device 63, and the drive control of the accessory 75 based on the commands received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70. To ensure that various notifications and various performances are carried out.

As shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 94 is provided with a reading area 94a from which data tables for performing various notifications and various effects are read. Although details will be described later, the reading area 94a is provided with 11 layers, and data tables for performing various notifications and various effects are read out to corresponding layers in the reading area 94a. The MPU 92 controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61, controls the sound output of the speaker 62, controls the display of the image display device 63, and controls the drive of the accessory 75 based on the data table read out in each layer of the readout area 94a. By doing this, various notifications and various performances are executed.

In this slot machine 10, game history data is stored in the RAM 94 while a game is in progress, and history image display is performed in which a history image is displayed on the image display device 63 based on the game history data stored in the RAM 94. The player can check the game history by displaying the history image displayed based on the game history data on the image display device 63 at an arbitrary timing.

As shown in FIG. 10, the RAM 94 includes a history storage area 94b in which game history data used for displaying history images is stored, and an image in which history configuration data indicating the configuration of history images generated in the past is stored. A playback storage area 94c is provided. The MPU 92 generates history configuration data based on the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b. The history configuration data is data that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the types of the plurality of images that constitute the history image, and the history configuration data includes a plurality of designation data that specify the plurality of images that constitute the history image. I'm here. The image reproduction storage area 94c is a storage area that can store a plurality of pieces (specifically, 32 pieces) of history configuration data. Note that details of the history image, the history storage area 94b, the image playback storage area 94c, and various designated data will be described later.

In addition to the MPU 92, the production control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor 95 (VDP95), a character ROM (not shown), a video RAM 96, and the like. The VDP 95 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the image display device 63. The VDP 95 intervenes in the reading and writing of data in the video RAM 96, reads out image data to be stored in the video RAM 96 from the character ROM at a predetermined timing, and displays it on the image display device 63. The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the image display device 63. This character ROM stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM 96 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63. When the MPU 92 determines the execution content of the effect based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 sends to the VDP 95 a drawing list that instructs the content of the image corresponding to each update timing according to the determined execution content of the effect. Output. The VDP 95 reads image data from the character ROM according to the drawing list received from the MPU 92, and creates display data in the video RAM 96 using the read image data. The display data is created in the frame area of the video RAM 96. The video RAM 96 is provided with two frame areas, and display data is created alternately in the two frame areas. The VDP 95 outputs an image signal corresponding to the created display data to the image display device 63, thereby causing the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data.

Since the video RAM 96 is provided with two frame areas, in a situation where display data created in one frame area is being used to display data on the image display device 63 (output of an image signal), other frame areas can be Display data to be used in the future is created for the frame area. In other words, a double buffer method is adopted, and the image signal is output to the image display device 63 in parallel with the creation of display data corresponding to an update timing that is one frame later than the frame related to the output. It will be done.

In the following explanation, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73, and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are respectively referred to as the main side MPU 72, the main side ROM 73, and the main side RAM 74, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the production control device 90 are respectively referred to as the production side. They are called MPU92, production side ROM93, and production side RAM94.

Next, the processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained. First, the main processing executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 11.

In the main processing, initialization processing is first performed (step S101). In the initialization process, an interrupt by a timer interrupt process is enabled, and various initial settings are made for the register group, I/O device, etc. in the main MPU 72.

Thereafter, an accessory initialization command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S102). The accessory initialization command is a command for causing the performance side MPU 92 to execute a process for returning the spherical performance part 77b of the accessory 75 to the initial position. The production-side MPU 92 that has received the accessory initialization command executes accessory initialization processing (FIG. 69), which will be described later.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and the power is turned on (step S103). If the power is turned on with the setting key inserted (step S103: YES), and if the reset button 56 is not turned on when the power is turned on (step S104: NO), the winning probability remains unchanged. Setting processing is executed (step S106). On the other hand, if the reset button 56 is turned on when the power is turned on (step S104: YES), after executing the clearing process (step S105), the winning probability setting process is executed (step S106).

In the clearing process, all areas in the main RAM 74 are initialized. In this case, in the main side RAM 74, an area for storing the setting values of the slot machine 10, an area for storing data indicating whether or not it is in the bonus state, and data indicating the total number of game media given in the bonus state were stored. area, an area where data indicating the gaming status is stored, an area where data for specifying the end condition of the ART status is stored, an area where data indicating the gaming section is stored, and data on the management results of the gaming history are stored. Clear each area of the main side RAM 74 to "0" including the area where the data has been deleted. As a result, when the clearing process is executed, the game will be in the normal gaming state and enter the normal section regardless of the state before the power was cut off, and the progress of the game will be changed due to the occurrence of an abnormality in the state before the power cut off. If it is in a regulated state, the abnormal state is canceled. In addition, in the clearing process, the area in which the data of the management results of the gaming history is stored (specifically, the total number of games counter 74a and the number of advantageous games counter 74b, which will be described later) is configured to be excluded from the target of "0" clearing. Good too.

In the winning probability setting process, the current setting value is read on the condition that the setting key is inserted and turned on, and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display section 65. In addition, when the main side RAM 74 clearing process (step S105) is executed, a display corresponding to "setting 1" is displayed on the credit display section 65 at the start of the winning probability setting process, and the clearing process (step S105) If not executed, a display corresponding to the set value in the state before the power was shut off is displayed. In the winning probability setting process, each time the reset button 56 is operated, the set value is updated by 1, and the updated set value is displayed on the credit display section 65. Note that if the reset button 56 is operated in a situation where the setting value is "Setting 6", the setting value is updated to "Setting 1". When the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 41 is operated, a setting end command is sent to the production side MPU 92, and processing is performed to end the display of the set value on the credit display section 65. , the winning probability setting process ends. The setting end command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the setting value update has ended. Numerical information indicating the current setting value is set in the setting end command, and the production side MPU 92 grasps the current setting value based on the numerical information set in the received setting end command.

After executing the winning probability setting process, an advantageous section initialization process is executed (step S107). In the advantageous section initialization process, processing for initializing information regarding the advantageous section is executed. The content of the initialization process for the advantageous section is the same as step S1007 and step S1014, which will be described later. Thereby, when the winning probability setting process is executed, the game section will definitely become the normal section. Note that the specific processing contents of the advantageous section initialization processing will be explained later. After performing the initialization process for the advantageous section, the process shifts to normal processing (step S108). The normal processing will be explained in detail later.

If the setting key is not turned on in the main process (step S103: NO), the power recovery process from step S109 onwards is executed. The power restoration process is a process for restoring the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power was shut off. In the power restoration process, it is determined whether the setting values of the slot machine 10 are normal by checking the main side RAM 74 (step S109). Specifically, the setting value is determined to be normal if it is one of "setting 1" to "setting 6", and determined to be abnormal if it is "0" or "7" or more. If the set value is normal, it is determined whether the power outage flag is set to "1" (step S110). A power outage flag is provided in the main side RAM 74, and when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped and a predetermined power outage process is normally executed, the power outage flag is set to "1". will be set. If the power outage flag is set to "1", it is checked whether the RAM determination value is normal (step S111). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is checked to see if the value is normal.

If an affirmative determination is made in all steps S109 to S111, it means that the power outage processing at the previous power outage was executed normally. In this case, by writing the value of the stack pointer saved in the main side RAM 74 to the stack pointer of the main side MPU 72 and restoring the data saved in the main side RAM 74 to the register of the main side MPU 72, the register of the main side MPU 72 can be changed. The state is restored to the state before the power was cut off (step S112). Furthermore, the power failure flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S113). Thereafter, after transmitting a power restoration command for recognizing the execution of the power restoration process to the production side MPU 92 (step S114), the process returns to the address before the power was cut off (step S115).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in any of steps S109 to S111, an operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, the execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 12) is prohibited (step S116), and by clearing all output ports of the main MPU 72 to "0", all actuators connected to the relevant output ports are disabled. is turned off (step S117), and an error notification process is executed to notify the hall manager and the like of the occurrence of an error (step S118). And it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing the clear process (step S105).

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 12. Note that the timer interrupt process is activated, for example, every 1.49 milliseconds.

In the register saving process (step S201), the values of all registers in the main MPU 72 used in normal processing to be described later are saved in the main RAM 74. In step S202, it is checked whether the power outage flag is set to "1" or not. If the power outage flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S203, and a power outage process is executed.

The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply device 54 is input to the main MPU 72. In the power outage processing, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed, and if the transmission has not been completed, this processing is ended, the process returns to the timer interrupt processing, and the command transmission is completed. If the command transmission has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is stored in the main RAM 74. Thereafter, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, a determination value for determining whether the data in the main side RAM 74 is normal is calculated and stored in the main side RAM 74 when the power outage is resolved, and subsequent access to the RAM is prohibited. After performing the above processing, the system enters an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

If the power outage flag is not set to "1" in step S202, various processes from step S204 onwards are performed. In step S204, a watchdog timer clearing process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S205, interrupt end declaration processing is performed to enable the next timer interrupt to be set for the main MPU 72 itself. In step S206, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motor provided on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In step S207, the status of various sensors connected to the input port is read, and sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether the read results are normal or not.

In step S208, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to any of the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are operated, a stop operation is performed to transmit a command corresponding to the operation to the production side MPU 92. Corresponding processing (FIG. 25) is performed. The production side MPU 92 grasps that the stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has been performed based on the command received from the main side MPU 72. Note that the stop operation response process (FIG. 25) will be described in detail later.

In step S209, timer subtraction processing is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S210, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the outside. In step S211, command output processing is performed to send various commands to the production side MPU 92. In step S212, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port. In step S213, the values of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S201 are restored to the corresponding registers in the main MPU 72. In step S214, a management process (FIG. 102) is executed to manage the game history and display the content corresponding to the management result on the combined display section 66. Thereafter, in step S215, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the management process (FIG. 102) in step S214 will be explained in detail later.

Next, normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 13.

First, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt (step S301). Thereafter, a start waiting process is executed (step S302). In the start waiting process, it is determined whether any replay winnings have occurred in the previous game. If any replay winning has occurred, a replay process is performed in which the same number of bets as the previous bet number is set, and the start waiting process is ended. If no replay winnings have occurred, it is determined whether the settlement button 51 has been operated, and if the settlement button 51 has been operated, the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals are paid out. Perform medal return processing. After the end of the medal return process or when the payment button 51 is not operated, it is determined whether the medal insertion or credit input buttons 47 to 49 were operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one of them is performed, a medal insertion process is performed to change the number of bets, etc., and the start waiting process is ended. Further, if both medal insertion and credit input buttons 47 to 49 have not been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is ended.

After executing the start waiting process in step S302, it is determined whether the number of bets on medals has reached a specified number (specifically "3") (step S303), and if the number of bets has not reached the specified number Then, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S302). If the number of bets has reached the specified number (step S303: YES), it is determined whether the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304), and if the start lever 41 has not been operated (step S304: NO). ), the process returns to the start waiting process (step S302). On the other hand, if the start lever 41 is operated (step S304: YES), the main line ML is activated, and then reception prohibition processing is executed (step S305). By executing the reception prohibition process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 45, the medal is discharged to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a. After that, a winning combination lottery process is executed to perform a winning combination lottery process for the current game (step S306), and on condition that the value of the freeze counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is "0" (step S307: YES), a reel control process is executed to drive and control each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the current combination (step S308).

After that, a medium attachment process is executed (step S309). In the media granting process, when a minor winning combination is achieved in the current game, a process for granting the player a number of game media corresponding to the minor winning combination is executed. Specifically, when awarding virtual medals, a value corresponding to the current minor win is added to the credit counter provided in the main side RAM 74, and when the value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit storage number, drives and controls the hopper device 53 so that the number of medals exceeding the upper limit storage number is dispensed to the medal receiving tray 59. In addition, in the media awarding process, the dual-purpose display unit 66 is display-controlled so that a display corresponding to the number of game media that is currently subject to award is displayed. The display corresponding to the number of game media on the dual-purpose display section 66 continues until a new bet on game media is placed.

Thereafter, a corresponding process at the end of the game is executed to enable setting of the game state and game period corresponding to the result of the current game (step S310). Further, an external output setting process for outputting the status of the slot machine 10 to the management computer of the gaming hall is executed (step S311).

After that, it is determined whether the second expected performance flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S312), and if the second expected performance flag is set to "1" (step S312: YES), the process of step S312 is repeated until the second expected performance flag is cleared to "0". The second expected performance flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to recognize that the game is a target game for execution of a second expected performance, which will be described later. If a negative determination is made in step S312, it is determined whether the re-variation effect flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S313), and the re-variation effect flag is set to "1". If set (step S313: YES), the process of step S313 is repeated until the re-variation effect flag is cleared to "0". The re-variation performance flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to recognize that the game is a target game for execution of a re-variation performance, which will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S313, the reception permission process is executed (step S315) on the condition that the value of the freeze counter in the main side RAM 74 is "0" (step S314: YES). ), the process returns to step S301. By executing the acceptance permission process, the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 are detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a and then collected by the hopper device 53.

<Lottery process for roles>
Next, the winning combination lottery process executed in step S306 of the normal process (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 14.

First, random number acquisition processing is executed (step S401). In the random number acquisition process, random numbers are acquired to be used when determining the validity of a winning combination. This slot machine 10 is configured such that when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free run counter at that time. The free run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the main MPU 72 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the main RAM 74. With this configuration, it becomes possible to obtain a random number promptly at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it becomes possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After executing the random number acquisition process in step S401, a lottery table for determining the validity of the combination is read from the main side ROM 73 (step S402). In this slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are prepared in advance, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on, and the predetermined operation is performed. Accordingly, it is possible to set based on which winning probability the winning combination processing is to be executed. "Setting n+1" has a more advantageous winning probability for the player than "Setting n". Specifically, since the winning probability of the winning combination that triggers the transition to the BB state is higher in "setting n+1" than in "setting n," players It will be advantageous for. Furthermore, there are three types of lottery modes in which the lottery tables are different in the main MPU 72 even if the setting values are the same level: the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. Furthermore, as gaming states, bonus states (BB state and RB state) exist separately from the states of each of these lottery modes. In step S402, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current setting value, the current lottery mode, and the current gaming state is selected.

Taking "Setting 3" as an example, the lottery tables corresponding to each of the normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode in the non-bonus state will be described. First, the normal mode lottery table that is selected in the normal mode will be explained. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal mode lottery table. Note that in the following description, reference is made to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 16 as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 15, index values IV are set in the normal mode lottery table, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery winning combination in relation to the maximum value ("65535") of the free run counter.

Specifically, the index value IV=1 is set with first bell winning data and first supplementary winning data. In the case of a win with index value IV=1, as shown in FIG. The first bell prize is guaranteed to occur regardless of the types of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first supplementary prize is guaranteed to occur.

In this slot machine 10, reel control is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, allowing the reels to slide for up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. In other words, reel control is performed for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop the reel before a predetermined time (190 milliseconds) elapses after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. By performing such reel control, it is possible to make it easier to win a prize corresponding to a winning combination, and to avoid winning a prize corresponding to a non-winning combination. becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, one reel 32L, 32M, and 32R constitutes a combination of symbols for winning a prize. If five or more symbols exist between the constituent symbols, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML depending on the timing of operation of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 (this phenomenon is also referred to as a "missing shot"). say). The 1st to 3rd supplementary winnings, 1st bell winnings, 2nd bell winnings, and various replay winnings are winnings that will not be missed if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the corresponding order. 1st watermelon prize, 2nd watermelon prize, cherry prize, 1st BB prize, 2nd BB prize, 3rd BB prize, 4th BB prize, 1st RB prize, and 2nd RB prize are determined by the stop button 42 corresponding to the rotational position of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This is a winning mode in which a prize may be missed depending on the timing of the stop operation of ~44.

As shown in FIG. 15, the index value IV=2 is set with first bell winning data and second supplementary winning data. In the case of winning with index value IV=2, as shown in FIG. The first bell prize is definitely achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second supplementary prize is surely achieved.

As shown in FIG. 15, the index value IV=3 is set with the first bell winning data and the third supplementary winning data. In the case of winning with index value IV=3, as shown in FIG. The first bell prize is definitely achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the third supplementary prize is surely achieved.

As shown in FIG. 15, only the first bell winning data is set to the index value IV=4. In the case of a win with the index value IV=4, as shown in FIG. 16, the first bell prize is guaranteed regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. . As shown in FIG. 15, only the second bell winning data is set to the index value IV=17. In the case of a win with the index value IV=17, as shown in FIG. 16, the second bell prize is guaranteed regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. .

As shown in FIG. 15, only the first watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV=5. In the case of winning with index value IV=5, as shown in FIG. 16, the first watermelon prize can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first watermelon prize will not be achieved. As shown in FIG. 15, only the second watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV=18. In the case of winning with index value IV=18, as shown in FIG. 16, the second watermelon prize can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the second watermelon prize will not be achieved.

As shown in FIG. 15, only the cherry winning data is set to the index value IV=6. In the case of a win with the index value IV=6, as shown in FIG. 16, a cherry win can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 32L, there is a possibility that a cherry prize will not be achieved.

As shown in FIG. 15, only the third BB winning data is set to the index value IV=7. In the case of winning with index value IV=7, as shown in FIG. 16, the 3rd BB winning can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the 3rd BB prize will not be achieved. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 15, only the 4th BB winning data is set to the index value IV=8. In the case of winning with index value IV=8, as shown in FIG. 16, the 4th BB winning can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the 4th BB prize will not be achieved. Further, as shown in FIG. 15, only the first RB winning data is set to the index value IV=9. In the case of a win with the index value IV=9, as shown in FIG. 16, the first RB win can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first RB prize will not be achieved.

As shown in FIG. 15, only the first BB winning data is set to the index value IV=19. In the case of winning with the index value IV=19, as shown in FIG. 16, the 1st BB winning can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first BB prize will not be achieved. Further, as shown in FIG. 15, only the second BB winning data is set to the index value IV=20. In the case of winning with the index value IV=20, as shown in FIG. 16, the 2nd BB winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the second BB prize will not be achieved. Further, as shown in FIG. 15, only the second RB winning data is set to the index value IV=21. In the case of winning with index value IV=21, as shown in FIG. 16, the second RB winning can be achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the second RB winning will not be achieved.

Here, the winning data other than the bonus winning data including the 1st to 4th BB winning data and the 1st to 2nd RB winning data will be deleted in the winning game regardless of whether or not the winning data was won. It does not carry over to subsequent games. On the other hand, the above-mentioned bonus winning data is stored and retained until the corresponding bonus winning is achieved, even in the subsequent games after the winning game, unless the main side RAM 74 is cleared. . In this case, in a game in which bonus winning data is carried over, index values IV corresponding to all bonus winning data are excluded from lottery targets. This makes it possible to prevent new bonus winning data from being stored even though the bonus winning data has already been stored, and prevents multiple bonus winning data from being stored cumulatively. It becomes possible to do so.

As shown in FIG. 15, only the first special replay winning data is set to the index value IV=10. If a win is achieved with the index value IV=10, as shown in FIG. 16, the first special replay win is guaranteed regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. do. Further, as shown in FIG. 15, only the second special replay winning data is set to the index value IV=22. In the case of winning with index value IV=22, as shown in FIG. 16, the second special replay winning is guaranteed regardless of the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. do.

As shown in FIG. 15, the index values IV=11 to 16 are set with normal replay winning data and first RT replay winning data. In this case, if you win with index value IV = 11, as shown in FIG. , if the third stop (the reel where the last stop command occurred) is the right reel 32R, the first RT replay win will definitely be achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases In this case, a normal replay winning is guaranteed regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, if you win with the index value IV = 12, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42 to A first RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of the stop button 44, and in other cases, a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Also, if you win with index value IV = 13, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, each stop button 42 to A first RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of the stop button 44, and in other cases, a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Also, if you win with index value IV = 14, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to A first RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of the stop button 44, and in other cases, a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, if you win with index value IV = 15, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42 to A first RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of the stop button 44, and in other cases, a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, if you win with index value IV = 16, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to A first RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of the stop button 44, and in other cases, a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 42 to 44.

When the normal mode lottery table in FIG. 15 is selected, the probability of winning when index value IV=1, the probability of winning when index value IV=2, and the probability of winning when index value IV=3 The probability of each is approximately 1/6.6. Furthermore, the probability of winning when the index value IV=4 is approximately 1/13.1. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV=5 is approximately 1/164. Furthermore, the probability of winning when the index value IV=6 is approximately 1/423. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV=7 and the probability of winning when the index value IV=8 are each about 1/437. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV=9 is approximately 1/328. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV=10 is approximately 1/655. Also, the probability of winning when index value IV = 11, the probability of winning when index value IV = 12, the probability of winning when index value IV = 13, and the probability of winning when index value IV = 14. The probability of winning when index value IV=15, and the probability of winning when index value IV=16 are each about 1/41. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is approximately 1/16.4. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV=18 is approximately 1/146. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV=19 and the probability of winning when the index value IV=20 are each about 1/437. Further, the probability of winning when the index value IV=21 is approximately 1/328. Furthermore, the probability of winning when the index value IV=22 is approximately 1/655.

Here, as already explained, in the normal mode lottery table, the first RT replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data as the winning data of index values IV=11 to 16. The probability of winning one of these index values IV=11 to 16 is about 1/41. If a win is achieved with index value IV = 11 to 16, the stop order of the first stop, second stop, and third stop of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds to the winning combination. When the order is reached, the first RT replay prize is established and the lottery mode shifts from the normal mode to the first RT mode. When shifting to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14) becomes the first RT mode lottery table.

Next, a first RT mode lottery table that is selected when the first RT mode is "setting 3" will be described. FIGS. 17 and 18 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first RT mode lottery table.

In the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 17, the winning data set for each index value IV=1 to 10 and the winning probability of each index value IV are ) is the same as In addition, the winning data set for each index value IV = 23 to 28 in the first RT mode lottery table and the winning probability of each index value IV are different from each of the index values IV = 17 to 22 in the normal mode lottery table. is the same as

In this case, the index values IV=1 to 6 and 23 to 24 are set with winnings that enable the awarding of game media, and the combinations are set for each of the index values IV=1 to 6 and 23 to 24. Since the winning data and each winning probability are the same as the index values IV = 1 to 6 and 17 to 18 in the normal mode lottery table, the types of winnings that can be awarded with gaming media and the winnings The probability of winning is the same in both the normal mode and the first RT mode.

In addition, bonus winning data is set in the index values IV=7 to 9 and 25 to 27 in the first RT mode lottery table, similar to the index values IV=7 to 9 and 19 to 21 in the normal mode lottery table. , the winning probability is the same as the normal mode lottery table. In other words, the probability of winning each bonus combination is the same in the normal mode and the first RT mode. In addition, special replay winning data is set for the index value IV = 10, 28 in the first RT mode lottery table, similar to the index value IV = 10, 22 in the normal mode lottery table, and the winning probability is set in the normal mode lottery table. It is the same as the lottery table for In other words, the probability of winning each special replay combination is the same in the normal mode and the first RT mode.

The winning combination data set to index values IV=11 to 22 are different from the normal mode. Specifically, in the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 17, the second RT replay winning data is set in addition to the normal replay winning data as the winning data of index values IV=11 to 16. The probability of winning one of these index values IV=11 to 16 is approximately 1/6.8.

If you win with index value IV=11, as shown in FIG. 18, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. A second RT replay prize is surely achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, a normal replay prize is surely achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, if you win with the index value IV = 12, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42 to A second RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 42 to 44 in other cases. Also, if you win with index value IV = 13, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, each stop button 42 to A second RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 42 to 44 in other cases. Also, if you win with index value IV = 14, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to A second RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 42 to 44 in other cases. In addition, if you win with index value IV = 15, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, each stop button 42 to A second RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 42 to 44 in other cases. In addition, if you win with index value IV = 16, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, each stop button 42 to A second RT replay winning is ensured regardless of the operating timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and a normal replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the operating timing of each stop button 42 to 44 in other cases.

In the 1st RT mode, if the index value IV is any one of 11 to 16, it will be won, and the stop order of the first stop, second stop, and third stop of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be the stop order corresponding to the winning combination. If this happens, the second RT replay prize is established and the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. When shifting to the second RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14) becomes the second RT mode lottery table.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the first RT mode lottery table, first fall replay winning data is set as winning data for index values IV=17 to 22 in addition to the normal replay winning data. The probability of winning one of these index values IV=17 to 22 is approximately 1/10.9.

If you win with index value IV=17 in the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 18, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. If the right reel is 32R, the normal replay win will definitely occur regardless of the timing of operation of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the first falling replay win will occur at the timing of operation of each stop button 42-44. It will definitely happen regardless. Also, if you win with index value IV = 18, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay winnings will be This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In addition, if you win with index value IV = 19, if the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the normal replay winnings are This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Also, if you win with index value IV = 20, if the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay winnings will be This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Also, if you win with index value IV = 21, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay winnings will be This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Also, if you win with index value IV = 22, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay winnings will be This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the first fall replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode. When shifting to the normal mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14) becomes the normal mode lottery table.

In the first RT mode lottery table, combinations that enable replay winnings are set at index values IV=10 to 22 and 28. Since the winning probabilities of these winning combinations are set to the probabilities already explained, the winning probability of the winning combination (hereinafter also referred to as replay probability) that makes it possible to achieve a replay prize in the first RT mode is approximately 1/1. It is 4.1. On the other hand, the replay probability in normal mode is approximately 1/6.7. In other words, the first RT mode is a lottery mode with a higher replay probability than the normal mode.

Next, the lottery table for the second RT mode that is selected when the second RT mode is "Setting 3" will be explained. 19 and 20 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the second RT mode lottery table.

In the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 19, the winning data set for each index value IV=1 to 10 and the winning probability of each index value IV are ) and the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 17). In addition, the winning data set for each index value IV = 18 to 23 in the second RT mode lottery table and the winning probability of each index value IV are These are the same as index values IV=23 to 28 in the 2RT mode lottery table.

In this case, the index values IV=1 to 6 and 18 to 19 are set with winnings that enable the awarding of game media, and the combinations are set for each of the index values IV=1 to 6 and 18 to 19. The winning data and each winning probability are the same as the index values IV=1 to 6, 17 to 22 in the normal mode lottery table, and the index values IV=1 to 6, 1 to 22 in the first RT mode lottery table. 23 to 24, the types of winning combinations for which game media can be awarded and the winning probabilities of those winning combinations are the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. It has become.

In addition, the index values IV = 7 to 9, 20 to 22 in the second RT mode lottery table are the index values IV = 7 to 9, 19 to 21 in the normal mode lottery table, and the index values IV = 7 to 9, 19 to 21 in the first RT mode lottery table. The bonus winning data is set similarly to =7 to 9 and 25 to 27, and the winning probability is the same as that of the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table. In other words, the probability of winning each bonus combination is the same in the normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode. Also, the index value IV = 10, 23 in the second RT mode lottery table has a special value similar to the index value IV = 10, 22 in the normal mode lottery table and the index value IV = 10, 28 in the first RT mode lottery table. Replay winning data is set, and the winning probability is the same as that of the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table. In other words, the probability of winning each special replay combination is the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode.

The winning combination data set to index values IV=11 to 17 are different from those in the normal mode and the first RT mode. Specifically, in the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 19, second fall replay winning data is set as winning data for index values IV=11 to 16, in addition to the normal replay winning data. . The probability of winning one of these index values IV=11 to 16 is approximately 1/6.8.

If you win with index value IV=11 in the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 20, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. If the right reel is 32R, the normal replay win will definitely occur regardless of the timing of the operation of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the second falling replay win will occur at the timing of the operation of each stop button 42-44. It will definitely happen regardless. Also, if you win with index value IV = 12, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay winnings will be This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Also, if you win with index value IV = 13, if the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the normal replay winnings will be This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Also, if you win with index value IV = 14, if the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay winnings will be This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Also, if you win with index value IV = 15, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay winnings will be This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In addition, if you win with index value IV = 16, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay winnings are This occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning occurs reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the second fall replay winning is established, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode. When shifting to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14) becomes the first RT mode lottery table.

In the second RT mode lottery table, only normal replay winning data is set at index value IV=17. The probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is set higher than the probability of winning other combinations, and specifically, the probability of winning is about 1/5.5. If a win is achieved with this index value IV=17, a normal replay win will be achieved regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42-44.

In the second RT mode lottery table, combinations that enable replay winnings are set at index values IV=10 to 17 and 23. Since the winning probabilities of these winning combinations are set to the probabilities already explained, the winning probability of the winning combination (hereinafter also referred to as replay probability) that makes it possible to achieve a replay prize in the second RT mode is approximately 1. /3.0. On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1/6.7, and the replay probability in the first RT mode is about 1/4.1. Therefore, the second RT mode is a lottery mode with a higher replay probability than the normal mode and the first RT mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the replay probability is the same in the first RT mode and the second RT mode. They may have the same configuration.

In addition, in addition to the normal mode lottery table, the 1st RT mode lottery table, and the 2nd RT mode lottery table, the main ROM 73 also contains a lottery table for reference in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14) when in the BB state or RB state. This is an internal lottery table that stores a bonus lottery table that is used to win a bonus prize, and is referred to in the prize lottery process (FIG. 14) when a bonus prize is won but the corresponding bonus prize is not established. is memorized.

At the bonus lottery table, you win the winning combination that allows you to win the first bell at a rate of approximately 1/1.5, and if you win the winning combination, you will be given the winning order of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the winning order of each reel 32L. , 32M, and 32R, the first bell prize is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of 32M and 32R. Furthermore, at the bonus lottery table, the winning combination that allows the first watermelon prize to be won is won at a rate of approximately 1/6.6, and the winning combination that allows the establishment of the cherry prize is won at a rate of approximately 1/7.8. These first watermelon winnings and cherry winnings are not established depending on the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. By setting the bonus lottery table as described above, in the BB state or RB state, the first bell is basically won in each game and "11" game media are awarded. However, the first watermelon prize or cherry prize may be achieved, and if the first watermelon prize is achieved, "5" game media will be awarded, and if the cherry prize is achieved, "2" game media will be awarded. Granted. On the other hand, the BB state ends when the total number of game media awarded since the start of the BB state becomes equal to or greater than the BB end reference number (for example, "350"), and the RB state ends when the RB state ends. The game ends when the total number of game media awarded since the start reaches or exceeds the RB end reference number (for example, "150"). Therefore, the number of games required to complete the BB state and the RB state will vary depending on the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14) and whether or not a winning combination occurs. It should be noted that the bonus lottery table is common between set values "1" to "6" that vary the advantage of the slot machine 10.

The internal lottery table has winning data corresponding to index values IV=1 to 6, 10, 17, 18, and 22 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 15) set with the winning probabilities of those index values IV. In addition to this, the index value in which only the normal replay winning data is set is set so that it becomes the winning probability of the sum of the index values IV=11 to 16 in the normal mode lottery table. Therefore, when a bonus role is internally won, the role that allows the award of game media and the winning probability of that role are the same as in the normal mode, and the replay probability is the same as in the normal mode. A bonus combination is not won, and furthermore, a combination that triggers a shift to the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode is not won.

Here, in all of the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, index values IV and " There are index values IV with different winning probabilities between set values of 1" to 6. 21(a) to 21(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining index values IV with different winning probabilities between setting values of "1" to "6", and FIG. 21(a) is a normal mode FIG. 21(b) shows the case of the lottery table for the first RT mode, and FIG. 21(c) shows the case of the lottery table for the second RT mode.

As shown in FIG. 21(a), in the normal mode lottery table, index values IV=17 to 22 are index values IV with different winning probabilities between the setting values of "1" to "6", and the index value IV =1 to 16 are index values IV that have the same probability of winning among the setting values of "1" to "6". As shown in FIG. 21(b), in the first RT mode lottery table, index values IV=23 to 28 are index values IV with different winning probabilities between the set values of "1" to "6", and the index values IV=1 to 22 are index values IV that have the same probability of winning among the set values of "1" to "6". As shown in FIG. 21(c), in the second RT mode lottery table, index values IV=18 to 23 are index values IV with different winning probabilities between the set values of "1" to "6", and the index values IV=1 to 17 are index values IV that have the same probability of winning among the setting values of "1" to "6".

In other words, no matter which lottery table it is, the index value IV with the same winning probability between the setting values "1" to "6" is the index value IV in the front range that is a consecutive number from index value IV = 1. The index values IV that have different winning probabilities between the setting values "1" to "6" are from the index value IV next to the last index value IV in the front range to the last index value IV. The index values are summarized in the rear range index value IV, which is a serial number. In this way, the index values IV with the same winning probability between the set values ``1'' and ``6'' are aggregated in the front range, and the index values with different winning probabilities between the set values ``1'' and ``6'' are aggregated into the front range. By consolidating the IVs into the rear range, it is possible to set index values IV that have the same winning probability and index values IV that have different winning probabilities between the set values "1" to "6" at the design stage of the slot machine 10. It becomes easier to make corrections.

In each lottery table, the index values IV included in the rear range have different winning probabilities between the set values of "1" to "6", but the index values IV included in the rear range are different, but are set for each index value IV included in the rear range. Winning data and winning probabilities are common to each lottery table. Specifically, in the normal mode lottery table, index values IV=17 to 22 are included in the rear range as shown in FIG. ), index values IV=23 to 28 are included in the rear range, and in the second RT mode lottery table, index values IV=18 to 23 are included in the rear range, as shown in FIG. 21(c). included in. In this case, the index value IV=17 in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV=23 in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV=18 in the second RT mode lottery table are the set winning data and The winning probabilities are the same, and the index value IV = 18 in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV = 24 in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV = 19 in the second RT mode lottery table. The set winning data and winning probability are the same, and the index value IV = 19 in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV = 25 in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV = 25 in the second RT mode lottery table. The index value IV = 20 means that the set winning data and winning probability are the same, and the index value IV = 20 in the normal mode lottery table and the index value IV = 26 in the first RT mode lottery table. The index value IV=21 in the second RT mode lottery table means that the set winning data and winning probability are the same, and the index value IV=21 in the normal mode lottery table and the first RT mode lottery table The index value IV=27 in the second RT mode lottery table and the index value IV=22 in the second RT mode lottery table have the same winning data and winning probability, and the index value IV=22 in the normal mode lottery table. The index value IV=28 in the first RT mode lottery table and the index value IV=23 in the second RT mode lottery table have the same winning data and winning probability. As a result, it is possible to make the types of winning combinations that have different winning probabilities between the setting values of "1" to "6" common in each lottery table, and also to It is possible to make the probability of winning for each setting value the same.

By the way, there is an index value where only the second bell winning data is set, an index value where only the second watermelon winning data is set, an index value where only the first BB winning data is set, an index where only the second BB winning data is set. For each winning probability of the index value with only the 2nd RB winning data set, and the index value IV with only the 2nd special replay winning data set, a larger setting value has a higher winning probability than a smaller setting value. It is set to have a tendency to increase. However, this is not limited to this, and if a larger setting value is more advantageous to the player than a smaller setting value, for some index values, a larger setting value may win more than a smaller setting value. The configuration may be such that the probability tends to be low.

As already explained, in each lottery table, the index values IV=1 to 10 included in the front range are set with the same winning data, and the winning probabilities are also the same. As a result, in each lottery table, the winning probabilities are made the same for roles that have the same winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6" and that have the same type of winning data set. becomes possible.

In the configuration in which the front range and the rear range are set as described above, the front range includes a role that allows the award of game media, a role that allows replay winnings, and a role that allows bonus winnings. In addition, in the rear range, a winning combination that allows the award of game media, a winning combination that allows replay winnings, and a winning combination that allows bonus winnings are also set. In other words, the winning combinations that allow the provision of game media are mixed in the front range and the rear range, and the index values IV of these winning combinations have lost continuity between the front range and the rear range. Similarly, the combinations that allow replay winnings are mixed in the front range and the rear range, and the index values IV of these combinations lose continuity between the front range and the rear range. Similarly, the winning combinations that make it possible to win a bonus are mixed in the front range and the rear range, and the index values IV of these combinations lose continuity between the front range and the rear range. In this case, there is a risk that the processing configuration for understanding the winning combination in various processes after the execution of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14) may become complicated.

In addition, the index values set in the latter half of the front range in the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table include winning data and Since the winning data for changing the replay probability is set, the first index value IV of the rear range is different in each lottery table. For example, the index value IV in which only the second bell winning data is set is "17" in the normal mode lottery table, "23" in the first RT mode lottery table, and "18" in the second RT mode lottery table. Become. Also, for example, the index value IV in which only the first BB winning data is set is "19" in the normal mode lottery table, "25" in the first RT mode lottery table, and "20" in the second RT mode lottery table. becomes. Also, for example, the index value IV in which only the second special replay winning data is set is "22" in the normal mode lottery table, "28" in the first RT mode lottery table, and "28" in the second RT mode lottery table. 23". In this case, if you try to handle the same winning combination with different index values IV in various processes after executing the winning winning lottery process (FIG. 14), the index value will be It becomes necessary to understand not only the IV but also the current lottery mode, which may complicate the processing configuration.

In order to eliminate the above-mentioned inconveniences. In this slot machine 10, an offset table 97 is stored in advance in the main side ROM 73 at the design stage of the slot machine 10. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the offset table 97.

As shown in FIG. 22, information on winning numbers is set in the offset table 97. Numerical information from "1" to "41" is set as successive numbers as winning number information. In the offset table 97, each index value IV of the normal mode lottery table, each index value IV of the first RT mode lottery table, and each index value IV of the second RT mode lottery table is set from "1" to "41". It is associated with information about one of the winning numbers. This correspondence consists of a group of minor roles that are roles that allow the award of game media, a group of bonus roles that are roles that enable the establishment of bonus winnings, and a group of roles that enable the establishment of replay winnings. This is done so that each group of replay winning combinations is formed by information on consecutive winning numbers. Furthermore, this association is made so that even if the winning data of the same type is set in different lottery modes, it can be handled as information on the same winning number.

Specifically, a group of information about winning numbers that are consecutive numbers from "1" to "8" is a small group, and a group of information about winning numbers that are consecutive numbers from "9" to "14" is a bonus. The offset table 97 is set so that the group of winning numbers that are successive numbers after "15" becomes a group of winning combinations. In addition, in the replay role group, replay roles for which normal replay winning data is not set are aggregated in the winning number information of "15" and "16", and normal replay winning data is not set in the information of winning numbers after "17". Replay roles with winning data set are aggregated.

In each lottery table, the index value IV of "1" is set with the first bell winning data and the first supplementary winning data, but the index value IV=1 is "1" in any lottery table. Winning number information is set. In each lottery table, the index value IV of "2" is set with the first bell winning data and the second supplementary winning data. Winning number information is set. In each lottery table, the index value IV of "3" is set with the first bell winning data and the third supplementary winning data. Winning number information is set. In each lottery table, only the first bell winning data is set in the index value IV of "4", but the index value IV = 4 is set with the information of the winning number "4" in any lottery table. has been done.

The index value IV of “17” in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of “23” in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of “18” in the second RT mode lottery table are the second bell winning data. These index values IV are set with information about the winning number "5". As a result, it becomes possible to treat the winning combinations that have the same set winning data but different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning combination processing (FIG. 14).

In each lottery table, only the first watermelon winning data is set in the index value IV of "5", but the index value IV = 5 is set with the information of the winning number "6" in any lottery table. has been done.

The index value IV of "18" in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of "24" in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of "19" in the second RT mode lottery table are the second watermelon winning data. These index values IV are set with information about the winning number "7". As a result, it becomes possible to treat the winning combinations that have the same set winning data but different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning combination processing (FIG. 14).

In each lottery table, only the cherry winning data is set in the index value IV of "6", but the information of the winning number "8" is set in the index value IV = 6 in any lottery table. There is. In each lottery table, only the 3rd BB winning data is set in the index value IV of "7", but the information of the winning number "9" is set in the index value IV = 7 in any lottery table. ing. In each lottery table, only the 4th BB winning data is set in the index value IV of "8", but the information of the winning number "10" is set in the index value IV = 8 in any lottery table. ing.

Only the 1st BB winning data is included in the index value IV of "19" in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of "25" in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of "20" in the second RT mode lottery table. are set, but information about the winning number "11" is set for these index values IV. As a result, it becomes possible to treat the winning combinations that have the same set winning data but different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning combination processing (FIG. 14).

Only the 2nd BB winning data is included in the index value IV of "20" in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of "26" in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of "21" in the second RT mode lottery table. are set, but information about the winning number "12" is set for these index values IV. As a result, it becomes possible to treat the winning combinations that have the same set winning data but different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning combination processing (FIG. 14).

In each lottery table, only the 1st RB winning data is set in the index value IV of "9", but the information of the winning number "13" is set in the index value IV=9 in any lottery table. ing.

Only the 2nd RB winning data is included in the index value IV of "21" in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of "27" in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of "22" in the second RT mode lottery table. are set, but information about the winning number "14" is set for these index values IV. As a result, it becomes possible to treat the winning combinations that have the same set winning data but different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning combination processing (FIG. 14).

In each lottery table, only the first special replay winning data is set in the index value IV of "10", but the index value IV = 10 is set with the information of the winning number "15" in any lottery table. It is set.

The index value IV of "22" in the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV of "28" in the first RT mode lottery table, and the index value IV of "23" in the second RT mode lottery table win the second special replay prize. Although only data is set, information about the winning number "16" is set in these index values IV. As a result, it becomes possible to treat the winning combinations that have the same set winning data but different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the winning combination processing (FIG. 14).

Winning numbers after "17" do not have a common index value IV in each lottery table, and individual winning number information is set for each index value IV of each lottery table. This is because the type of winning data set in the index value IV associated with the winning numbers after "17" is not common among the lottery tables. Specifically, in the normal mode lottery table, the index values IV = 11 to 16 in which the normal replay winning data and the first RT replay winning data are set are set with the information of the winning numbers "17" to "22", respectively. ing. In addition, in the first RT mode lottery table, the index values IV = 11 to 16, where the normal replay winning data and the second RT replay winning data are set, are set with winning number information of "23" to "28", respectively. In addition, the index values IV=17 to 22, in which the normal replay winning data and the first fall replay winning data are set, are set with winning number information of "29" to "34", respectively. In addition, in the second RT mode lottery table, the index values IV = 11 to 16, in which the normal replay winning data and the second fall replay winning data are set, are set with winning number information of "35" to "40", respectively. In addition, the index value IV=17, in which only the normal replay winning data is set, has information about the winning number "41" set therein.

By providing the offset table 97 as described above, a combination of winning combinations that allows the awarding of game media, winnings that allow replay winnings, and winnings that allow bonus winnings are mixed in the front range and the back range. In various processes after the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14), it is now possible to handle the winnings in the same group in a consolidated state. In addition, even though the same winning data is set, the winnings for which different index values IV are set between each lottery table are treated as the same information in various processes after the lottery processing (Figure 14) of the winning combination. becomes possible. Furthermore, when transmitting the result of the lottery process (FIG. 14) to the production side MPU 92, the information on the winning number described above can be set in the command for transmitting the result, so the amount of information in the command can be It is possible to suppress it.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the index values IV of the bonus lottery table and the internal lottery table are also included in the offset table 97 for the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table. Information on common winning numbers is associated with each index value IV. In the case of a bonus lottery table, there are an index value IV in which only the first bell winning data is set, an index value IV in which only the first watermelon winning data is set, and an index value IV in which only the cherry winning data is set. However, the index value IV in which only the first bell winning data is set is associated with the winning number information of "4", and the index value IV in which only the first watermelon winning data is set is " The index value IV in which only the cherry winning data is set is associated with the information on the winning number "8". In addition, in the case of an internal lottery table, as already explained, the winning data corresponding to index values IV=1 to 6, 10, 17, 18, and 22 in the normal mode lottery table are set with the winning probabilities of those index values IV. In addition to this, the index value in which only the normal replay winning data is set is set so that the winning probability is the sum of the index values IV=11 to 16 in the normal mode lottery table. Therefore, the index values IV corresponding to index values IV=1 to 6, 10, 17, 18, and 22 in the normal mode lottery table correspond to the winning number information corresponding to those index values IV in the normal mode lottery table. The index value IV for which only normal replay winning data is set is the same as the index value IV = 17 for which only normal replay winning data is set in the second RT mode lottery table. Information is associated.

Returning to the description of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14), after selecting the lottery table (step S402), the first round flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S403). In the winning combination lottery process, the index value IV in the front range has the same winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6", and the winning probability differs between the set values of "1" to "6". A lottery is performed from the index values IV in the front range among the index values IV in the rear range. In this case, the first round flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the current lottery target is in the front range.

Thereafter, a first reference value is set in the target index counter provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S404). The target index counter is a counter used by the main MPU 72 to specify the type of winning combination that is a lottery target. Further, the first reference value is set as the number of index values IV included in the front range in each lottery table. Specifically, for the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV=1 to 16 corresponds to the front range, so the first reference value is "16", and for the first RT mode lottery table, the index value IV= Since 1 to 22 correspond to the front range, the first reference value is "22", and in the second RT mode lottery table, the index value IV = 1 to 17 corresponds to the front range, so the first reference value is "17". ”.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, if it is a bonus lottery table, only three index values IV are set, and all of these index values IV have a winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6". Since they are the same, the first reference value is "3". Furthermore, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the case of an internal lottery table, the number of index values IV corresponding to the front range is set as the first reference value.

Thereafter, a determination value DV used for determining the validity of the winning combination is set (step S405). In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the point value PV set to the index value IV currently being selected for lottery to the current determination value DV. In the first judgment value setting process, the random number obtained in step S401 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV set in the index value IV corresponding to the first reference value is added to this random number to create a new judgment value. Let the judgment value DV be. For example, in the normal mode lottery table, the first reference value is "16", so the point value PV set to index value IV = 16 in the normal mode lottery table is added to the random number obtained in step S401. The obtained value is set as the judgment value DV.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the winning combination currently selected for lottery is valid (step S406). In determining the validity of the combination, it is determined whether the determination value DV exceeds "65535". If it does not exceed "65535", after subtracting 1 from the value of the target index counter (step S407), it is determined whether the value of the target index counter after the 1 subtraction is "0" ( Step S408). If the value of the target index counter is not "0" (step S408: NO), the process returns to step S405, and it is determined whether or not the winning combination corresponding to the value of the target index counter after the update is correct.

If the value of the target index counter is "0" (step S408: YES), it is determined whether the current state is a bonus state (step S409). Since the index value IV of the rear range is not set in the bonus lottery table, if the current state is the bonus state (step S409: YES), it is assumed that no winning role was won in this game. The process directly advances to step S414.

If the current state is not a bonus state (step S409: NO), it is determined whether the first round flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S410). That is, it is determined whether the index value group IV for which the determination of the validity of the winning combination has been completed is in the front range. If the first round flag is set to "1" (step S410: YES), after clearing the first round flag to "0" (step S411), the second reference value is set in the target index counter ( Step S412). The second reference value is set as the number of index values IV included in the rear range in each lottery table. Specifically, for the normal mode lottery table, the index value IV = 17 to 22 corresponds to the rear range, and for the first RT mode lottery table, the index value IV = 23 to 28 corresponds to the rear range. However, in the case of the second RT mode lottery table, the index value IV=18 to 23 corresponds to the rear range, so the second reference value is "6" in any lottery table. Note that in the case of a bonus lottery table, the second reference value will not be set because there is no index value IV included in the rear range. Further, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the case of an internal lottery table, the number of index values IV corresponding to the rear range is set as the second reference value. After setting the second reference value, the process returns to step S405, and a determination is made as to whether or not the winning combination corresponding to the second reference value is correct. If a negative determination is made in step S410, it is assumed that no winning combination was won in this game, and the process directly advances to step S414.

On the other hand, if the number exceeds "65535" in step S406, information on the winning number corresponding to the role currently targeted for lottery is acquired, as well as winning data corresponding to the role currently targeted for lottery. The winning data acquisition process is executed to set the winning data in the main RAM 74 (step S413). FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the winning data acquisition process.

First, by determining whether "1" is set in the first round flag of the main side RAM 74, it is determined whether the winning combination this time is the index value IV included in the previous range ( Step S501). If the first round flag is set to "1" (step S501: YES), the value of the target index counter in the main side RAM 74 corresponds to the winning index value IV, so the process continues from step S503 onward. Execute the process.

On the other hand, when the value of the first round flag is "0", it means that the winning combination this time is the index value IV included in the rear range. When determining the validity of the index value IV included in the rear range, a second reference value is set in the target index counter, and the second reference value is the number of index values IV included in the rear range. Therefore, the index value IV of the winning combination this time does not match the value of the target index counter. Then, the difference between the index value IV of the winning combination actually won this time and the value of the target index counter matches the first reference value of the lottery table that was the object of the lottery this time. Therefore, when a negative determination is made in step S501, the first reference value of the lottery table that is the target of the current lottery is added to the value of the target index counter (step S502). The first reference value added in this case is "16" if it is a lottery table for the normal mode, "22" if it is a lottery table for the first RT mode, and "17" if it is a lottery table for the second RT mode. becomes.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S501, or if the process in step S502 is executed, the offset table 97 is read from the main ROM 73 (step S503). Then, the winning number information corresponding to the type of lottery table targeted for the current lottery and the current value of the target index counter is read from the offset table 97, and the winning number information is used as the winning number information in the current game. It is stored in the main side RAM 74 as (step S504). It should be noted that, as a matter of course, if no winnings are won, the winning number information is not stored in the main side RAM 74.

Thereafter, information on the winning data included in the winning combination this time is developed in the main side RAM 74 (step S505). The main side RAM 74 has the same number of winning data areas as the number of winning data existing in the slot machine 10, and in step S505, the winning data included in the currently won winning combination is set in the main side RAM 74. Set "1" in the area corresponding to the winning data other than various bonus winning data such as 1st BB winning data, 2nd BB winning data, 3rd BB winning data, 4th BB winning data, 1st RB winning data, and 2nd RB winning data. The winning corresponding area corresponding to the winning data that is not included in the winning combination this time is cleared to "0". The value of the winning corresponding area corresponding to various bonus winning data is set to "1" when a winning combination including the corresponding winning data is won, and the clearing process of the main side RAM 74 is not executed until the corresponding winning is achieved. The state set to "1" is maintained as long as the flag is set to "1". Then, the winning corresponding area corresponding to the bonus winning data set to "1" is cleared to "0" when the corresponding winning is established or when the clearing process of the main side RAM 74 is executed. Note that the winning corresponding area corresponding to winning data other than various bonus winning data is cleared to "0" even if no winning combination is won in the winning combination processing (FIG. 14).

Returning to the explanation of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14), if an affirmative determination is made in step S409, if a negative determination is made in step S410, or if the process of step S413 is executed, the stop information for reel stop control is After executing the stop information first setting process for setting (step S414), the production content determining process (FIG. 51) is executed (step S415). In the performance content determination process, processing is executed to determine the general content of the performance to be performed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, the image display device 63, and the accessory 75 in the current game. Note that details of the performance content determination process (FIG. 51) will be described later.

Thereafter, a game start command transmission process is executed (step S416). In the transmission process, information corresponding to the outline content determined in the performance content determination process (step S415) and, if a winning result has been determined in the lottery process for the current role (FIG. 14), the winning information is transmitted. The winning number information corresponding to the winning combination and the information corresponding to the current lottery mode and the current game state are set in a game start command, and the game start command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. The game start command is a command for making the production-side MPU 92 recognize that a new game has started, and is a command that allows the production-side MPU 92 to transmit information on the outline of the production determined by the main-side MPU 72 and the winning number information to the production-side MPU 92. This is a command to make it recognized.

When receiving the game start command, the performance side MPU 92 grasps the general content of the performance in the current game from the game start command. Then, the performance side MPU 92 transmits the details of the performance in a manner corresponding to the grasped general content of the performance, the winning number information set in the game start command, the information corresponding to the current lottery mode, and the current situation. The decision is made based on information corresponding to the gaming state of the player. Then, the data table corresponding to the content of the determined performance is read out from the performance side ROM 93 to the corresponding layer in the readout area 94a (FIG. 10) of the performance side RAM 94, and the light emission of the upper lamp 61 is controlled according to the read data table. It executes sound output control of the speaker 62, display control of the image display device 63, and drive control of the accessory 75.

After that, in step S417, the first control process for the game section is executed, in step S418, the bonus process at the start of the game is executed, in step S419, the add-on process is executed, and in step S420, the notification control process is executed. Execute. In the notification control process, details of which will be described later, when notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the display control of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is performed so that a display corresponding to the stop order to be notified is performed. At the same time, a process for causing the image display device 63 to perform notification of the stop order to be notified is also executed. The processing contents of steps S418 to S420 will be explained in detail later.

Next, the reel control process executed in step S308 of the normal process (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 24.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation start process is performed to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R (step S601). In the rotation start process, a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14) in the previous game. If the wait time has not elapsed, wait until the wait time elapses. When the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and rotation start information is set in the motor control storage area provided in the main side RAM 74. By performing such processing, acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing of step S206 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 12), and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating. Thereafter, the process waits until each reel 32L, 32M, 32R rotates at a predetermined rotational speed, and the rotation start process ends. Moreover, the main side MPU 72 can generate a stop command by lighting up the lamps (not shown) of each stop button 42 to 44 when the rotational speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R reaches a constant speed. This will be notified to players, etc.

After executing the rotation start process in step S601, the constant speed rotation flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S602). The constant speed rotation flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to know that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed, and corresponds to each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R on a one-to-one basis. Let it be. Thereafter, a constant speed rotation start command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S603). The constant speed rotation start command is a command that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the rotational speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has become constant and a stop command can be generated.

After transmitting the constant speed rotation start command in step S603, it is determined whether any stop operation detection flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S604). The stop operation detection flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to recognize that the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are rotating at a constant speed have been turned on. They are provided in one-to-one correspondence with each of 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Here, the stop operation corresponding processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 25. Note that the stop operation handling process is executed in step S208 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

In the stop operation response process, it is first determined whether "1" is set in any of the left third stop flag, middle third stop flag, and right third stop flag provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S701). The left third stop flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to recognize that the left stop button 42 has been turned on to stop the rotation of the left reel 32L as the third (last) stop operation. , the middle third stop flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to recognize that the middle stop button 43 has been turned on to stop the rotation of the middle reel 32M as the third stop operation. The third stop flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to recognize that the right stop button 44 has been turned on to stop the rotation of the right reel 32R as a third stop operation.

If "1" is not set in any of the left third stop flag, middle third stop flag, and right third stop flag (step S701: NO), the left reel 32L is set as the target reel, and the corresponding The processing of steps S703 to S712 is executed for the target reel. Specifically, if the constant speed rotation flag corresponding to the current target reel is set to "1" (step S703: YES), the detection signals of the stop detection sensors 42a, 42b, 42c corresponding to the target reel are is stored in the main side RAM 74 (step S704). The main side RAM 74 is provided with a signal storage area capable of storing two past detection signals of each stop detection sensor 42a, 42b, and 42c. In step S703, the detection signals of the stop detection sensors 42a, 42b, 42c corresponding to the target reel are stored in the signal storage area.

Thereafter, it is determined whether an ON operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the target reel has been detected (step S705). In step S705, the signal storage area in the main side RAM 74 is referred to, and if a rising of the detection signal from the LOW signal to the HI signal in the stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a corresponding to the target reel is detected, the target reel is handled. It is determined that the ON operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been detected.

If an ON operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the target reel is detected (step S705: YES), it is determined whether the current stop operation is a stop operation corresponding to the third stop (step S706). ). Specifically, if the constant speed rotation flags corresponding to two reels other than the target reel in the main side RAM 74 are "0", it is determined that the stop operation corresponds to the third stop. If the current stop operation is a stop operation corresponding to the third stop (step S706: YES), it corresponds to the current target reel among the left third stop flag, middle third stop flag, and right third stop flag. The third stop flag is set to "1" (step S707).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the second expected performance flag or the re-variation performance flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S708). As already explained, the second expected performance flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to know that the game is the target of the second expected performance, which will be described later. This is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to recognize that the game is to be executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S708, a timer counter for the main side performance provided in the main side RAM 74 indicates the execution period (specifically, 1 second) of the mid-stop performance, which will be described later, and the first expectation, which will be described later. Numerical information corresponding to the execution period of the performance (specifically 1.5 seconds) and the total period (specifically 2.5 seconds) is set (step S709). The main side performance timer counter is a timer counter that enables the main side MPU 72 to grasp the remaining execution period of the intermediate stop performance and the first expected performance, which will be described later, in the game where the second expected performance or re-variation performance is executed. be. The numerical value set in the main side performance timer counter in step S709 is subtracted by 1 each time the timer subtraction process (step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12)) is performed. The details of the intermediate stop performance, the first expected performance, the second expected performance, and the re-fluctuation performance will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S706, if a negative determination is made in step S708, or if the process in step S709 is performed, "1" is set in the stop operation detection flag corresponding to the current target reel. Set (step S710). As already explained, the stop operation detection flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to detect that the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are rotating at a constant speed have been turned on. The buttons are provided in the main RAM 74 in one-to-one correspondence with each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When an ON operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are rotating at a constant speed is detected, the corresponding stop operation detection flag is set to "1".

When the stop operation detection flag is set to "1" in step S710, the constant speed rotation flag corresponding to the target reel is cleared to "0" in the main side RAM 74 (step S711). After that, it is determined whether the current target reel is the right reel 32R (step S712), and if the target reel is not the right reel 32R (step S712: NO), the target reel is updated (step S713). , the process returns to step S703. In step S713, if the current target reel is the left reel 32L, the target reel is updated to the middle reel 32M, and if the current target reel is the middle reel 32M, the target reel is updated to the right reel 32R. . Further, if it is determined in step S712 that the target reel is the right reel 32R, the main stop operation corresponding process is directly ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that any third stop flag is set to "1", the stop detection sensor 42a, which corresponds to the third stop flag to which "1" is set, The detection signals of 43a and 44a are stored in the signal storage area of the main side RAM 74 (step S714). Then, it is determined whether an OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop has been detected (step S715). Specifically, when a falling of the detection signal from the HI state to the LOW state of the detection signal in the stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a corresponding to the third stop is detected in the signal storage area of the main side RAM 74, the third stop is detected. It is determined that the OFF operation of the corresponding stop button 42 to 44 has been performed.

If the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop is detected (step S715: YES), the third stop flag corresponding to the third stop is cleared to "0" (step S716), An OFF operation command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S717). The OFF operation command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop has been performed. The OFF operation command is set with data that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the type of the third stop (the reel for which the stop command was issued last). After that, the process advances to step S718. Note that the processing from step S718 to step S723 will be described later.

Returning to the explanation of the reel control process (FIG. 24), if it is determined in step S604 that none of the stop operation detection flags is set to "1", any stop operation detection flag is set to "1". The process of step S604 is repeatedly executed until the value is set. If it is determined that any of the stop operation detection flags is set to "1" (step S604: YES), this means that a stop command has been generated, so the process of transmitting the stop command command is executed. (Step S605). The stop command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been turned on to generate a stop command. In the stop command command transmission process in step S605, the stop command command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92, and the stop operation detection flag determined to be set to "1" in step S604 is cleared to "0". If the stop command is transmitted in step S605, stop control processing shown in steps S606 to S612 is performed to stop the rotating reels.

In the stop control process, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position (specifically, the lower stage) at the timing when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is confirmed (step S606). Specifically, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. Thereafter, based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped this time is calculated (step S607).

In this slot machine 10, as a stopping mode in which each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped, there is a stopping mode in which the reached symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. A stopping mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped after sliding for 1 symbol, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding for 2 symbols, a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding for 3 symbols, and a stopping mode in which they are stopped after sliding for 4 symbols. Five patterns of stopping are available, including a stopping mode in which the slide is stopped after sliding. Therefore, in step S607, a value between "0" and "4" is calculated as the slip count based on the stop information stored in the main side RAM 74.

Thereafter, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stopped symbol to be actually stopped at the base position is determined (step S608). Then, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stopped symbol (step S609), and if they are equal (step S609: YES), A reel stop process is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R (step S610). After that, it is determined whether all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped (step S611). If all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed (step S612), and the process returns to step S604.

Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R correspond to the result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14), and by using the stop information, , when each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated to stop, it is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") for the reached symbol that has reached the base position. As the stop information, slip number data indicating the correspondence between each symbol and the slip number is stored in advance in the main side ROM 73 in correspondence with each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the slip number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is derived while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating. .

As a process for setting the above-mentioned stop information, a stop information first setting process is executed in step S414 of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14), and a process is executed in step S612 of the reel control process (FIG. 24). There is a second stop information setting process. In the stop information first setting process, stop information is set according to the result of the winning combination lottery process. The second stop information setting process is a process for changing the stop information stored in the main side RAM 74 in the first stop information setting process or the previous second stop information setting process after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the stop numbers of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. do.

If it is determined in step S611 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a winning determination process is executed in step S613. In the winning determination process, the type of symbol stopped on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is grasped. Then, based on the contents of the winning data developed in the main side RAM 74, the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes a winning hand in the winning hand lottery process. It is determined whether or not it is a combination of corresponding symbols, and if it is a combination of symbols that corresponds to a winning combination, winning corresponding processing is executed as a winning of the winning combination has been established.

In the winning handling process, information on the number of game media to be awarded is set in the main side RAM 74 so that if the winning is a small prize winning, game media can be awarded in the media granting process. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed in the main side RAM 74 so that a replay setting process is executed in the next start waiting process (step S302 in the normal process (FIG. 13)). do.

When the winning determination process is executed in step S613, a bonus notification process (FIG. 50) to be described later is executed (step S614), and a winning result command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S615). The winning result command includes data indicating whether or not a winning has been achieved this time, and if a winning has been achieved, data indicating the type of winning.

<About gaming status and gaming section>
Next, the game state and game period will be explained. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the gaming states and gaming sections that exist in the slot machine 10.

This slot machine 10 has a normal gaming state ST1, a bonus internal state ST2, a BB state ST3, an RB state ST4, a preparation state ST5, and an ART state ST6 as gaming states. These gaming states ST1 to ST6 do not occur overlappingly with each other.

The normal gaming state ST1 is a gaming state that remains when the main side RAM 74 clearing process (step S105) is executed. In addition, when the transition to the preparation state ST5 does not occur when the BB state ST3 ends, when the transition to the preparation state ST5 does not occur when the RB state ST4 ends, and when the transition to the preparation state ST5 occurs when the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 If the ART state ST6 ends without any transition being triggered, the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state ST1. The normal gaming state ST1 is a gaming state that is less advantageous than the BB state ST3, RB state ST4, preparation state ST5, and ART state ST6 in terms of the expected value of game media awarded in one game, and is more advantageous than the bonus internal state ST2. The degree is almost the same. Further, as already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as the lottery modes, and it is possible to stay in any of these lottery modes in the normal game state ST1. It should be noted that when the main side RAM 74 clearing process (step S105) is executed, the normal gaming state ST1 is entered, which is the normal mode.

The bonus internal state ST2 is a gaming state that remains when a bonus winning corresponding to the bonus winning data is not achieved in a game in which any bonus winning data is set, and the bonus winning corresponding to the bonus winning data is not achieved. This is a gaming state that ends when . In the bonus internal state ST2, as already explained, the internal lottery table is referred to in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14). In this case, since the internal lottery table does not have a winning combination (that is, index value IV) that causes the lottery mode to shift, the lottery mode does not shift in the bonus internal state ST2. Since the replay probability in the bonus internal state ST2 is the same as when the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 15) is referred to, it can be said that the bonus internal state ST2 is a gaming state in which the replay probability is maintained at the normal mode. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the replay probability in the bonus internal state ST2 may be higher than that in the normal mode, for example, it may be the same as the replay probability in the first RT mode, or the replay probability in the second RT mode may be the same. The replay probability may be the same as the replay probability, the replay probability between the normal mode and the first RT mode, or the replay probability between the first RT mode and the second RT mode. The replay probability may be higher than that in the second RT mode. Furthermore, the replay probability in the bonus internal state ST2 may be lower than that in the normal mode.

The contents of BB state ST3 and RB state ST4 are as already explained. In the BB state ST3 and the RB state ST4, no transition to the lottery mode occurs.

The preparation state ST5 is a gaming state that remains as a pre-stage before moving to the ART state ST6, and can be moved from the BB state ST3 and the RB state ST4. As already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as lottery modes, and it is possible to stay in any of these lottery modes in the preparation state ST5. In the preparation state ST5, if a winning number of "1" to "3" is set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to win the first bell is announced. Then, when the first bell is won, "11" game media are awarded. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media to be awarded in one game in the preparation state ST5. In addition, in the preparation state ST5, if the winning numbers "17" to "22" are set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first RT replay prize is announced, and the winning numbers "23" to "22" are announced. When the winning number "28" is set, the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the second RT replay prize is announced, and the winning numbers "29" to "34" are set. If so, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to avoid the establishment of the first falling replay prize is notified. When the second RT replay prize is established in the preparation state ST5 and the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode, the gaming state shifts to the ART state ST6. In addition, a transition to the preparation state ST5 may occur in a situation where the lottery mode is the second RT mode, but in this case, the lottery mode transitions to the first RT mode, and then a transition to the second RT mode occurs. In this case, the state shifts to ART state ST6.

As described above, the ART state ST6 is a gaming state that is entered when the second RT replay winning is established in the preparation state ST5. The ART state ST6 ends when the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST6 becomes "0". In this case, the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state ST1. Further, if the bonus is won during the ART state ST6, the state shifts to the bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, or RB state ST4. In this case, after the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 ends, the state shifts to the preparation state ST5, and finally returns to the ART state ST6.

As already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as lottery modes, and it is possible to stay in any of these lottery modes in the ART state ST6. In the ART state ST6, when a winning number of "1" to "3" is set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to win the first bell is announced. Then, when the first bell is won, "11" game media are awarded. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media to be awarded in one game in the ART state ST6. In addition, in the ART state ST6, if the winning numbers "17" to "22" are set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first RT replay prize is announced, and the winning numbers "23" to "22" are announced. When the winning number "28" is set, the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the second RT replay prize is announced, and the winning numbers "29" to "34" are set. If so, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can avoid the establishment of the first falling replay prize will be announced, and if the winning numbers from "35" to "40" are set, the second falling replay prize will be won. The stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of is notified. As a result, the lottery mode is basically maintained at the second RT mode in the ART state ST6. The second RT mode is a mode in which the replay probability is higher than the normal mode and the first RT mode. In other words, the ART state ST6 is a gaming state in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell prize is notified, and is basically a gaming state in which the replay probability is maintained high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expected net increase in gaming media in the ART state ST6. Note that even if the lottery mode shifts from the second RT mode to the first RT mode or from the first RT mode to the normal mode in the ART state ST6, the ART state ST6 is maintained and the ART state is maintained even if the situation is not the second RT mode. The remaining number of consecutive games in ST6 is subtracted.

In the configuration in which various gaming states ST1 to ST6 exist as described above, a gaming section is set separately from these gaming states ST1 to ST6. A normal section SC1 and an advantageous section SC2 are set as game sections. In other words, in this slot machine 10, the elements that determine the gaming situation are the setting values "1" to "6", the lottery modes of normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode, and various gaming states ST1 to ST6. There are two game sections: a normal section SC1 and an advantageous section SC2.

The normal section SC1 refers to the normal section SC1 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the player to achieve a win that is advantageous to the player when winning a winning combination that is different depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This is a section in which the stop order is not notified, and is a section in which the probability that the transition condition to the ART state ST6, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, will be satisfied is lower than in the advantageous section SC2. More specifically, the conditions for transition to the ART state ST6 are not satisfied in the normal section SC1. When the main side RAM 74 clearing process (step S105) is executed, the normal gaming state ST1 and the normal mode become the normal section SC1. Furthermore, when the initialization process for advantageous section SC2 is executed in advantageous section SC2, it also becomes normal section SC1.

The advantageous section SC2 refers to a section of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables a player to achieve an advantageous win when winning a winning combination that is different depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. This section corresponds to at least one of the section where the stop order is announced and the section where the probability of transition to the ART state ST6, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is higher than the normal section SC1. The advantageous section SC2 is a reel 32L that enables the establishment of a prize with the largest number of game media awarded among the types of prizes included in the winning combinations, which vary depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. , 32M, and 32R are reliably continued until the notification of the stop order is executed at least once. Specifically, the advantageous section SC2 is the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on which the winning numbers "1" to "3" are set in the lottery process (FIG. 14) to make it possible to win the first bell. The notification of the stop order continues reliably until the notification of the stop order is executed at least once. In addition, the minimum termination condition will be satisfied if the notification of the stop order is executed at least once, and the minimum termination condition will be satisfied regardless of whether or not the first bell prize is actually achieved. do. Then, when the notification is executed at least once, the advantageous section SC2 is set according to the ending condition determined according to the situation in which the advantageous section SC2 is set, and the number of consecutive games of the advantageous section SC2 is the maximum number of games ( Specifically, the game continues until one of the conditions (1500 games) is met.

As shown in FIG. 26, the player can stay in the normal gaming state ST1, bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, and RB state ST4 in both the normal section SC1 and the advantageous section SC2. On the other hand, the vehicle does not stay in the preparation state ST5 and the ART state ST6 in the normal section SC1, but only in the advantageous section SC2.

Next, a specific processing configuration that makes it possible to set the gaming states ST1 to ST6 and gaming sections SC1 and SC2 as described above will be explained. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the first control process for the game section is executed in step S417 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14). The process of step S417 is executed after the determination of the validity of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game.

First, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the bonus internal state ST2, the bonus state (BB state ST3, RB state ST4), the preparation state ST5, or the ART state ST6 (step S801). If a negative determination is made in step S801, the processes from step S802 onwards are executed.

In step S802, it is determined whether the advantageous section flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". The advantageous section flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the game section is an advantageous section SC2, and when the advantageous section flag is set to "1", it is an advantageous section SC2. A case where the value of the section flag is "0" is the normal section SC1.

If the game section is the normal section SC1 (step S802: NO), the winning number "4", "6", "8", or "15" is selected in the lottery process for the current role (Fig. 14). It is determined whether it has been set (step S803). When an affirmative determination is made in step S803, an advantageous transition lottery process is executed to determine whether or not a transition to the advantageous section SC2 occurs (step S804).

In the advantageous transition lottery process (step S804), first, the advantageous transition table corresponding to the winning number set in the current combination lottery process (FIG. 14) is read from the main side ROM 73. In this case, the advantageous transition table is set so that a winning number with a low probability of winning has a higher probability of winning the transition to the advantageous section SC2. Incidentally, the advantageous transition table is the same regardless of the setting values of "1" to "6". The fact that the table is common regardless of the set value applies to all lottery processes other than the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14). Thereafter, the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the main side RAM 74 is read out, and the read numerical information is checked against the read advantageous transition table. Thereby, it is determined whether or not the transition to the advantageous section SC2 has been won.

If the transition to the advantageous section SC2 is successful (step S805: YES), the advantageous section flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and the value of the advantageous continuation counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Then, the non-notification flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S806). The advantageous continuation counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous section SC2. The unannounced flag is the reel 32L that, after moving to the advantageous section SC2, is set with the winning numbers "1" to "3" in the lottery process (FIG. 14) and makes it possible to win the first bell. This flag is used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether notification of the stop order of 32M and 32R has already occurred.

As already explained, the first control process of the game section is executed at the start of the game. In this case, if the transition to the advantageous section SC2 is won in the advantageous transfer lottery process (step S804), the advantageous section flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" in the first control process of the relevant game section. Ru. As a result, a shift to the advantageous section SC2 occurs at the start of the game in which the player wins the shift to the advantageous section SC2. However, this is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the transition to the advantageous section SC2 occurs in the next game of the game in which the transfer to the advantageous section SC2 was won, and the game in which the transfer to the advantageous section SC2 was won. A configuration may also be adopted in which the shift to the advantageous section SC2 occurs in a game two or more games later than the previous one.

After setting the transition to the advantageous section SC2, an advantageous section start command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S807). The advantageous section start command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that it is the start timing of the advantageous section SC2. Thereafter, the advantageous section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state (step S808). As a result, the advantageous section display section 67 starts notifying that the vehicle is in the advantageous section SC2.

By entering the advantageous section SC2, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be notified. Here, the notification control process executed in step S420 of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14) will be described. This notification control process is executed after the determination of the validity of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game.

In the notification control process, in a situation where the advantageous section flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to ``1'', one of the winning numbers ``1'' to ``3'' is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14). In this case, the first A process is executed to notify the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which makes it possible to achieve a bell win.

Specifically, first, information on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell prize corresponding to the current winning number is grasped. Then, display control is performed on the dual-purpose display section 66 so that a display corresponding to the grasped stop order information is started on the dual-purpose display section 66. This display on the dual-purpose display section 66 continues until all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in the current game. Thereafter, a command for winning a bell is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. The bell winning command is set with information that allows the production side MPU 92 to specify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will enable the establishment of the first bell winning in the current game.

Thereafter, the unreported flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In this case, if the value of the unreported flag is already "0", that state is maintained, and if the value of the unreported flag is "1", it is changed to "0". This makes it possible for the main MPU 72 to specify that the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell prize has already been executed in the current advantageous section SC2.

In the notification control process, if any winning number from "17" to "28" is set in the lottery process (FIG. 14), the game state is set to the preparation state ST5 or the ART state ST6. , executes a process for notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the first RT replay winning or the second RT replay winning to occur.

Specifically, first, information on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to achieve a first RT replay win or a second RT replay win corresponding to the current winning number is grasped. Then, display control is performed on the dual-purpose display section 66 so that a display corresponding to the grasped stop order information is started on the dual-purpose display section 66. This display on the dual-purpose display section 66 continues until all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in the current game. Thereafter, a promotion replay command is sent to the production side MPU 92. The promotion replay command is set with information that allows the production side MPU 92 to specify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will enable the establishment of the first RT replay prize or the second RT replay prize in the current game. be done.

In the notification control process, if any winning number from "29" to "40" is set in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14), the first fall is set on condition that the gaming state is in the ART state ST6. Processing is executed to notify the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which makes it possible to avoid the formation of a replay win or a second fall replay win.

Specifically, first, information on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to avoid the first falling replay winning or the second falling replay winning corresponding to the current winning number is grasped. Then, display control is performed on the dual-purpose display section 66 so that a display corresponding to the grasped stop order information is started on the dual-purpose display section 66. This display on the dual-purpose display section 66 continues until all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in the current game. Thereafter, a fall replay avoidance command is sent to the production side MPU 92. The falling replay avoidance command includes a command to enable the production side MPU 92 to specify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will make it possible to avoid the establishment of the first falling replay winning or the second falling replay winning in the current game. information is set.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, if any winning number from "29" to "34" is set in the winning combination processing (FIG. 14) when the gaming state is in the preparation state ST5, the first Processing is executed to notify the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which makes it possible to avoid the formation of a falling replay winning. On the other hand, even if any winning number from "35" to "40" is set in the winning combination processing (FIG. 14) when the gaming state is in the preparation state ST5, the second falling replay prize is established. The stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows avoidance of this is not notified. Since the condition for transitioning from the preparation state ST5 to the ART state ST6 is that the second RT replay winning is established, if the transition to the preparation state ST5 occurs in the second RT mode, the establishment of the second fall replay winning is not avoided. This makes it possible to provide an opportunity to once fall to the first RT mode and win the second RT replay prize.

Next, the notification process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained. Note that the notification process is executed by the production side MPU 92 as an interrupt process that is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

In the notification process, when a bell winning command, promotion replay command, or fall replay avoidance command is received from the main MPU 72, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the currently received command among these commands is determined. A notification table for displaying the images (unit display images G1 to G3 already described with reference to FIG. 8(a)) on the image display device 63 is read into the readout area 94a in the performance side RAM 94. By controlling execution of notification by the production side MPU 92 according to the notification table, unit display images G1 to G3 can be displayed on the image display device 63. As a result, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current stop order command is displayed on the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 8(a), for example. This display on the image display device 63 continues until all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in the current game.

Returning to the explanation of the first control process (FIG. 27) of the game section SC2, if the advantageous section flag is set to "1" in the game before the current game (step S802: YES), the current role In the lottery process (FIG. 14), it is determined whether any winning number "4", "6", "8", or "15" is set (step S809). When an affirmative determination is made in step S809, an ART transition lottery process is executed to determine whether or not transition to ART state ST6 occurs (step S810).

In the ART transition lottery process (step S810), first, the ART transition table corresponding to the winning number set in the current winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14) is read from the main side ROM 73. In this case, the ART transition table is set so that a winning number with a low probability of winning has a higher probability of winning the transition to ART state ST6. Further, the ART transition table is common regardless of the setting values of "1" to "6". Thereafter, the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the main side RAM 74 is read out, and the read numerical information is checked against the read out ART transition table. This specifies whether or not the transition to the ART state ST6 has been successful.

If the transition to the ART state ST6 is won (step S811: YES), the ART winning flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S812). The ART winning flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that it is necessary to shift to the preparation state ST5.

As described above, the advantageous transition lottery process (step S804) and the ART transition lottery process (step S810) are performed in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14). Executed when a winning number is set. All of the winning numbers corresponding to these winning numbers have the same probability of winning within the set values of "1" to "6". In other words, the advantageous shift lottery process and the ART shift lottery process are executed in response to winning a winning combination in which there is no set difference in winning probability. This makes it possible to prevent any advantage or disadvantage from occurring between the set values of "1" to "6" regarding the transition probability to the advantageous section SC2 and the transition probability to the ART state ST6.

Next, the process executed by the main MPU 72 at the end of the game will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 28. Note that the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed in step S310 in the normal processing (FIG. 13). Since the process of step S310 is executed after the reel control process (step S308), it is executed after all of the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in one game.

First, bonus processing for controlling the transition and progress of the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 is executed (step S901). The bonus processing will be explained in detail later. Thereafter, on the condition that the bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, and RB state ST4 are none (step S902: NO), the lottery mode control process is executed (step S903). In the lottery mode control process, if the first RT replay winning is achieved in the current game, the normal mode is shifted to the first RT mode, and if the second RT replay winning is achieved in the current game, the transition is made to the first RT mode. The mode is transferred from the 1st RT mode to the 2nd RT mode, and if the 1st fall replay winning is achieved in this game, the mode is transferred from the 1st RT mode to the normal mode, and the 2nd falling replay winning is achieved in this game. If so, the second RT mode is shifted to the first RT mode.

Thereafter, the process jumps to the process corresponding to the current gaming state (step S904). Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1, normal processing is executed (step S905), and when the gaming state is the preparation state ST5, the preparation state processing is executed (step S906), When the gaming state is ART state ST6, ART state processing is executed (step S907). Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S902, or when any of the processes from steps S905 to S907 is executed, a second control process for the game section is executed (step S908). In the second control process for the gaming section, when the conditions for transitioning from the advantageous section SC2 to the normal section SC1 are satisfied, a process for transferring the gaming section to the normal section SC1 is executed.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the second control process of the game section. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game have stopped, so the second control processing in the game section is also performed on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game. is executed after all rotations have stopped.

In steps S1001 to S1011, when the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, processing for ending the advantageous section SC2 is executed. The contents of these processes will be explained in detail later.

If it is the advantageous section SC2 (step S1003: YES) and a negative determination is made in step S1006, the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 and the value of the advantageous maintenance counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is "0". It is determined whether there is one (step S1012). The advantage maintenance counter is used to maintain the advantage section SC2 for the number of advantage maintenance games even after the transition to the normal gaming state ST1 when the ART state ST6 ends and the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state ST1. This counter is used by the main MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of games in which the advantage is maintained.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1012, it is determined whether the value of the unreported flag in the main side RAM 74 is "0" (step S1013). As already explained, the unannounced flag is set after moving to the advantageous section SC2, and the winning numbers "1" to "3" are set in the winning combination processing (Figure 14), making it possible to win the first bell. This flag is used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has already occurred. If the notification of the stop order has already occurred, the value of the unreported flag is "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1013, initialization processing for advantageous section SC2 is executed (step S1014). In the initialization process for the advantageous section SC2, the advantageous section flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In addition, in the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2, even if the user stays in either the preparation state ST5 or the ART state ST6, the number of consecutive games in these gaming states (preparation state ST5 or ART state ST6) is stored. The gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state ST1 by clearing various data indicating the gaming state (preparation state ST5 or ART state ST6) including the counter. In addition, since the process of step S1014 is executed on the condition that the normal gaming state ST1 is established, the process of clearing the advantageous section flag to "0" is executed without executing the process of clearing the various data.

Thereafter, the advantageous section display section 67 is switched from the lit state to the off state (step S1015). As a result, the notification of the advantageous section SC2 on the advantageous section display section 67 is ended.

As described above, even in the normal gaming state ST1, if the unreported flag is set to "1", the advantageous section SC2 is not ended. As a result, the advantageous section SC2 will continue from the start of the advantageous section SC2 until the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell prize is executed once. . If BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 is started while this advantageous section SC2 continues, the expectation level for transition to ART state ST6 increases. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to win the first bell is notified, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 30. Note that the normal process is executed in step S905 of the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 28). Since the corresponding processing at the end of a game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in one game, the normal processing is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in one game. executed.

In the normal processing, first, it is determined whether the ART winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1101). If the ART winning flag is set to "1" (step S1101: YES), the winning of transition to ART state ST6 is determined in the ART transition lottery process (step S811 of the first control process of the game section (FIG. 27)). means that it has occurred. In this case, the ART winning flag is cleared to "0" (step S1102), and an initial number of consecutive games setting process is executed to set the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST6 to "50" (step S1103).

Thereafter, the preparation state flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and the gaming state is shifted to the preparation state ST5 (step S1104). As a result, the preparation state process of step S906 will be executed in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 28). Thereafter, a preparation start command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1105). The preparation start command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the preparation state ST5 is started. When the production side MPU 92 receives the preparation start command, the production side MPU 92 starts the production corresponding to the preparation state ST5.

If a negative determination is made in step S1101, or if the process in step S1105 is performed, it is determined whether the value of the advantageous maintenance counter in the main side RAM 74 is greater than or equal to "1" (step S1106). As already explained, when the ART state ST6 ends and the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state ST1, the advantageous maintenance counter keeps the advantageous section SC2 for the number of advantageous maintenance games even after the transition to the normal gaming state ST1. This counter is used by the main MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of games to maintain the advantage when maintaining the advantage. When the value of the advantage maintenance counter is 1 or more, the main side MPU 72 specifies that it is an advantage maintenance section, and when the value of the advantage maintenance counter after subtracting 1 becomes "0", the advantage maintenance section has ended. identify things. If the value of the advantage maintenance counter is equal to or greater than "1" (step S1106: YES), the value of the advantage maintenance counter is subtracted by 1 (step S1107), and this normal processing ends.

Next, the additional processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31. Note that the add-on process is executed in step S419 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14). The process of step S419 is executed after the determination of the validity of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game.

In the add-on processing, if the gaming state is in the preparation state ST5 or the ART state ST6 (step S1201: YES), in the lottery processing for the current winning combination (FIG. 14), "4" to "8", "15", " 16" is set (step S1202). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, an additional lottery process is executed (step S1203).

In the add-on lottery process (step S1203), first, the add-on table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process for the current winning combination (FIG. 14) is read from the main side ROM 73. In this embodiment, as an additional win in which the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST6 is added, there is a first additional win in which the number of consecutive games is added by "50", and a second additional win in which the number of consecutive games is added by "100". There are two types: The top-up table is set so that the winning number with a low probability of winning has a higher probability of generating a top-up win (either a first top-up win or a second top-up win). Note that the top-up table is common between the set values "1" to "6", but the probability of winning a top-up (either the first top-up win or the second top-up win) and A configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the expected number of additional games is different. Thereafter, the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the main side RAM 74 is read out, and the read numerical information is checked against the read out addition table. This specifies whether or not there is an additional win (either a first additional win or a second additional win) and the type of additional win in the case of an additional win.

If it is an additional win (step S1204: YES), it is determined whether the gaming state is the ART state ST6 (step S1205). When the gaming state is the ART state ST6 (step S1205: YES), a top-up setting process during ART is executed (step S1206). In the add-on setting process during ART, the value of the add-on game number ("50" or "100") corresponding to the currently selected lottery result is added to the ART game number counter provided in the main side RAM 74. The ART game number counter is a counter used by the main MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST6.

Thereafter, the ART mid-addition flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1207), and the main addition processing ends. The ART mid-game add-on flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to specify that an add-on win has occurred in the ART state ST6.

If it is determined in step S1205 that the gaming state is not the ART state ST6, this means that the gaming state is the preparation state ST5, and therefore the add-on setting process during the preparation state is executed (step S1208). In the add-on setting process during the preparation state, the value of the add-on game number ("50" or "100") corresponding to the currently selected lottery result is added to the ART game number counter provided in the main side RAM 74.

Thereafter, the preparatory add-on flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1209), and the main add-on process ends. The preparation add-on flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to specify that an add-on win has occurred in the preparation state ST5.

Next, the preparation state process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32. Note that the preparation state process is executed in step S906 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 28). Since the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are all stopped in one game, the preparation state processing is also executed after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are all stopped in one game. executed.

In the preparation state process, if the preparation add-on flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1301: YES), an add-on lottery process (step S1203 of the add-on process (FIG. 31)) results in an add-on win ( This means that the player has won the first add-on win or the second add-on win), so a preparation add-on command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1202), and the preparation add-on flag is cleared to "0" (step S1203). ). The preparation additional command is a command indicating that the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST6 has been added to the preparation state ST5. When the performance-side MPU 92 receives the preparation add-on command, it executes an add-on effect indicating that the current number of add-on games set in the preparation add-on command has been given.

When a negative determination is made in step S1301, or when the process in step S1303 is performed, it is determined whether or not a second RT replay winning has been achieved in the current game (step S1304). If the second RT replay winning is established (step S1304: YES), this means that an opportunity to shift from the preparation state ST5 to the ART state ST6 has occurred, and therefore, ART start processing is executed (step S1305). In the ART start process, information in the main side RAM 74 is set so that the ART state process in step S907 is executed in the game end response process (FIG. 28). As a result, the gaming state becomes the ART state ST6.

In addition, in the ART start process (step S1305), if the gaming state before the preparation state ST5 is started is a bonus state and the gaming state immediately before the bonus state is an ART state ST6, the state returns to the ART state ST6. Therefore, settings are made to return to the gaming situation in the ART state ST6 immediately before the transition to the bonus state. However, if an addition to the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST6 occurs in the bonus state, the state returns to the ART state ST6 from the state where the number of additional games has been added. In addition, in the ART start process (step S1305), if the current preparation state ST5 is triggered by the transition to the ART state ST6 being won in the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4, the ART state ST6 is Information on 50 games, which is the number of starting games, is added to the ART game number counter in the main side RAM 74. In this case, the gaming state before the preparation state ST5 is a bonus state, and in the bonus state, not only the transition to the ART state ST6 is won, but also the additional winning of the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST6 occurs. , the ART state ST6 starts with the number of consecutive games awarded due to the additional winning being added. In addition, if an additional win for the number of remaining continuation games in ART state ST6 occurs in preparation state ST5, the number of continuation games awarded as a result of the additional win is added to ART state ST6. will be started.

After executing the ART start process in step S1305, an ART start command indicating that transition to the ART state ST6 has occurred is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1306), and the preparation state process ends. The ART start command is set with information indicating whether or not the current transition to ART state ST6 corresponds to a return to ART state ST6, and if it does not correspond to a return to ART state ST6, the ART state is changed. Information indicating that 50 games have been assigned as the starting number of games for ST6 is set.

Next, the ART state processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 33. Note that the ART state process is executed in step S907 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 28). Since the corresponding process at the end of the game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in one game, the ART state process is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in one game. executed.

In the ART state processing, if the ART mid-addition flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1401: YES), an additional lottery win (step S1203 of the addition processing (FIG. 31)) is performed. This means that the player has won the 1st add-on win or the 2nd add-on win), so an ART add-on command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1402), and the ART add-on flag is cleared to "0" (step S1403). ). The ART mid-addition command is a command indicating that the number of consecutive games in ART state ST6 has been added in ART state ST6. When the performance side MPU 92 receives the ART add-on command, it executes an add-on performance indicating that the current number of add-on games set in the ART add-on command has been given. Note that details of the additional performance will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1401 or if the process in step S1403 is performed, the value of the ART game number counter in the main side RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S1404). Then, on the condition that the value of the ART game number counter after the subtraction by 1 is "0" (step S1405: YES), the processes of step S1406 and step S1407 are executed.

Specifically, first, the end processing of the ART state ST6 is executed (step S1406). In the termination process, data setting is performed to shift the gaming state from the ART state ST6 to the normal gaming state ST1. As a result, for example, in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 28), the normal process of step S905 is executed. Furthermore, in the termination process of the ART state ST6, an advantage maintenance process is executed. In the advantage maintenance process, it is first determined whether the value of the advantage continuation counter in the main side RAM 74 is less than or equal to the number of continuable games (specifically, "1200"). The number of games that can be continued is set to be smaller than the upper limit of the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 (specifically, "1500"), and the continuation game in which the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 starts. The number of games is set to be less than the number of games. When the value of the advantage continuation counter is less than or equal to the number of games that can be continued, the advantage preservation lottery table is read from the main side ROM 73. The winning value corresponding to the advantageous maintenance winning is set in the advantageous maintenance lottery table. After that, the numerical information of the random number counter that is regularly updated in the main side RAM 74 is read out, and the read numerical information is checked against the read advantageous maintenance lottery table to determine whether or not the advantageous maintenance winning has been achieved. judge. When the advantage maintenance win is achieved, a value (specifically, "10") corresponding to the number of advantage maintenance games is set in the advantage maintenance counter of the main side RAM 74. Thereby, even after the ART state ST6 ends, the game section is maintained in the advantageous section SC2 until the number of advantageous maintenance games is played.

Thereafter, an ART end command indicating that the ART state ST6 has ended is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1407), and this ART state processing is ended. Upon receiving the ART end command, the production side MPU 92 executes a production corresponding to the end of the ART state ST6, and after the completion of the production, a production corresponding to the normal game state ST1 which is not in the advantageous maintenance section. to be executed. Note that if the win is determined to maintain the advantage in step S1406, information indicating that the win to maintain the advantage has been achieved is set in the ART end command.

Next, the bonus processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34. Note that the bonus process is executed in step S901 of the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 28). The corresponding process at the end of the game is executed after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are all stopped in one game, so the bonus process is also executed after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are all stopped in one game. executed.

In the bonus processing, if a BB winning corresponding to the BB winning data stored in the main side RAM 74 is established (step S1501: YES), the BB flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1501: YES). S1502). The BB flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the state is in the BB state ST3.

If the BB winning achieved this time is the 3rd BB winning or the 4th BB winning (step S1503: YES), the specific bonus flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1504). The 3rd BB winning data that enables the establishment of the 3rd BB winning is any of the normal mode lottery table (Figure 15), the 1st RT mode lottery table (Figure 17), and the 2nd RT mode lottery table (Figure 19). The index value IV is set to 7, and the 4th BB winning data that enables the establishment of the 4th BB winning is set to the index value IV=8 in any of these lottery tables. These index values IV=7 and 8 are set as combinations with the same probability of winning between the set values of "1" to "6". In other words, the specific bonus flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not a bonus winning with no difference in winning probability has been achieved. If a bonus win is established where there is a difference in the winning probability, the setting to shift the gaming section from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 at the start of the bonus state will not be made, but the winning probability will be different. If a bonus win is established in which no setting difference exists, a setting is made to shift the gaming section from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 at the start of the bonus state.

On the other hand, if an RB winning corresponding to the RB winning data stored in the main side RAM 74 is established (step S1501: NO, step S1505: YES), the RB flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". (Step S1506). The RB flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the RB state is ST4.

Further, if the RB winning achieved this time is the first RB winning (step S1507: YES), the specific bonus flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1508). The 1st RB winning data that enables the establishment of the 1st RB winning is any of the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 15), the 1st RT mode lottery table (FIG. 17), and the 2nd RT mode lottery table (FIG. 19). The index value IV is also set to 9. The index value IV=9 is set as a winning combination with the same probability of winning among the set values of "1" to "6". Therefore, in order to specify on the main side MPU 72 that the current RB winning corresponds to the establishment of a bonus winning with no difference in the winning probability setting, "1" is set in the specific bonus flag in step S1508. set.

If a negative determination is made in step S1503, if the process of step S1504 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S1507, or if the process of step S1508 is executed, the total payout counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is Clear to "0" (step S1509). The total payout counter is a counter used by the main MPU 72 to specify the total number of game media given to the player in the bonus state. The main MPU 72 determines whether the bonus state termination condition is satisfied based on the value of the total payout counter.

Thereafter, a bonus start command indicating that a bonus state is started is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1510). The bonus start command is set with information indicating the type of bonus state to be started (1st BB win, 2nd BB win, 3rd BB win, 4th BB win, 1st RB win, or 2nd RB win). When receiving the bonus start command, the performance side MPU 92 causes the performance corresponding to the type of bonus state to be started to be executed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the main ending effect flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1511). The main side ending effect flag is a flag used by the main side MPU 72 to specify that an ending effect is being executed, which is started when the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 approaches the upper limit number of games, although the details will be described later. be. If a negative determination is made in step S1511, a freeze counter setting process is executed (step S1512).

In the freeze counter setting process, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 10 seconds) at the start of the bonus is set in the freeze counter provided in the main side RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). If a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in the bonus process, the process waits in step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13). This puts the player in a state where the start of a new game is on standby. In this state where the start of a new game is on standby, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform a production corresponding to the start of the bonus state, thereby transitioning to the bonus state. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that this has occurred, and it also becomes possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction by emphasizing the transition to the bonus state. The standby state in step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13) is canceled when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

If the BB flag or RB flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1501: NO, step S1505: NO, step S1513: YES), a bonus state that controls the progress of BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 The processing is executed (step S1514).

Here, the bonus state processing (step S1514) will be explained. In the bonus state processing, if game media are awarded in the current game, a value corresponding to the number of game media awarded this time is added to the total payout counter of the main side RAM 74. Then, it is determined whether the value of the total payout counter after the addition is equal to or greater than the end reference number corresponding to the current bonus state. Specifically, when the current bonus state is BB state ST3, it is determined whether the number is equal to or greater than the BB end reference number (for example, "350"), and when the current bonus state is RB state ST4, It is determined whether or not the number is equal to or greater than the RB end reference number (for example, "150").

If it is determined that the value of the total payout counter after addition is equal to or greater than the end reference number corresponding to the current bonus state, the gaming state at the time when the bonus combination that triggered the current bonus state was won is the preparation state. The setting process for the preparation state ST5 is executed on the condition that the state is ST5 or the ART state ST6, or on the condition that the ART winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". In the setting process of the preparation state ST5, the ART winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In addition, information in the main side RAM 74 is set so that the preparation state process of step S906 is executed in the response process at the end of the game (FIG. 28). As a result, the gaming state after the end of the current bonus state becomes the preparation state ST5.

When it is determined that the ART winning flag is not set to "1", or when setting processing for the preparation state ST5 is performed, a bonus end command indicating that the bonus state is ended is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. Information indicating whether the gaming state after the end of the bonus state is the normal gaming state ST1 or the preparation state ST5 is set in the bonus end command. By receiving the bonus end command, the production side MPU 92 starts a production indicating that the bonus state ends, and after the production ends, a production corresponding to the gaming state after the end of the bonus state is started. Allow it to be started.

After transmitting the bonus end command, it is determined whether the main side ending effect flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". The main side ending effect flag is a flag used by the main side MPU 72 to specify that an ending effect is being executed, which is started when the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 approaches the upper limit number of games, although the details will be described later. be. If it is determined that the main ending performance flag is not set to "1", a freeze counter setting process is executed and the present bonus state process is ended.

In the freeze counter setting process, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 10 seconds) at the end of the bonus is set in the freeze counter provided in the main side RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). If a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in the bonus state process, the process waits in step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13). This puts the player in a state where the start of a new game is on standby. In this state where the start of a new game is on standby, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute a performance corresponding to the end of the bonus state, thereby indicating that the bonus state has ended. It becomes possible to make the player clearly aware of the The standby state in step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13) is canceled when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

Next, the bonus process executed by the main MPU 72 at the start of the game will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35. Note that the bonus process at the start of the game is executed in step S418 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14). The process of step S418 is executed after the determination of the validity of the winning combination is completed at the start of the game.

In the bonus processing at the start of the game, if the advantageous section flag in the main side RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S1601: NO), this is the first game to be executed after transitioning to the bonus state. It is determined whether it is the starting game of the state (step S1602). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, it means that the current bonus state has started in the normal section SC1, so the processes of steps S1603 to S1606 are executed.

Specifically, when the specific bonus flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1603: YES), the advantageous section flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and the specific bonus flag is set to "1". 0'' (step S1604). Then, an advantageous section start command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1605), and a lighting process of the advantageous section display section 67 is executed (step S1606). In the lighting process, the advantageous section display section 67 is switched from a light-off state to a light-on state. The case where the specific bonus flag is set to "1" is the case where, as already explained, the current bonus state is triggered by a bonus combination in which there is no setting difference in winning probability. In other words, if a bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination with no difference in winning probability exists, even if the game section before entering the bonus state was the normal section SC1, the game in which the bonus state started In this case, the advantageous section SC2 will be set. Then, by setting the bonus state to the advantageous section SC2 in the game in which the bonus state has been started, the processing for granting the player the profit related to the ART state ST6 from step S1607 onwards is executed. Therefore, a bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination for which there is no setting difference in the winning probability can be set as a more advantageous bonus state than a bonus state corresponding to a bonus combination for which there is a setting difference in the winning probability. It becomes possible.

If it is determined in step S1601 that the advantageous section flag is set to "1", it is determined whether the gaming state is a bonus state or not (step S1607). When the process of step S1606 is performed, or when an affirmative determination is made in step S1607, it is determined whether or not the lottery trigger role has been won in the current game (step S1608). Specifically, if the winning number "4", "6", "8", or "15" is set in the lottery process (Figure 14) for the current role, the lottery trigger role will be won. It is determined that the

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1608, an advantageous lottery process is executed (step S1609). In the advantageous lottery process, first, the top-up table in the bonus is read from the main side ROM 73. The top-up table in the bonus is the same regardless of the type of bonus state, but at least one of the probability of winning the top-up and the expected number of games for top-up winnings differs depending on the type of bonus state. You can also use it as In addition, the bonus table during the bonus is the same regardless of the type of lottery trigger that was won this time, but the probability of winning and the expected bonus game depending on the type of lottery trigger that was won this time. A configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the numbers is different. In addition, although the bonus table in the bonus is common between the setting values "1" to "6", at least one of the probability of winning the bonus and the expected number of games for bonus winnings differs depending on the setting value. A configuration may also be used. Thereafter, numerical information from a random number counter that is regularly updated in the main side RAM 74 is read out, and the read numerical information is checked against the read out bonus table. Through this, it is determined whether or not there has been an advantageous election.

If there is an advantageous win in the advantageous lottery process (step S1609) (step S1610: YES), whether an opportunity to shift to the current bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) has occurred in the preparation state ST5 or ART state ST6. It is determined whether or not (step S1611). If the opportunity to shift to the current bonus state has not occurred in the preparation state ST5 or the ART state ST6 (step S1611: NO), check whether the ART winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" or not. Determination is made (step S1612).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1611 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1612, an add-on setting process during the bonus is executed (step S1613). In the add-on setting process during the bonus, the value of the add-on game number corresponding to the currently selected lottery result is added to the ART game number counter provided in the main side RAM 74. The ART game number counter is a counter used by the main MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST6.

Thereafter, a bonus mid-addition command indicating that the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST6 has been added in the bonus state is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1614). Information on the number of additional games that have occurred this time is set in the bonus bonus command. By receiving the add-on bonus command, the presentation-side MPU 92 executes a presentation indicating that the currently selected number of add-on games has been awarded.

On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time when the bonus combination that triggered the current bonus state was won is neither the preparation state ST5 nor the ART state ST6, and the ART winning flag is not set to "1" (step S1611 and Step S1612: NO), sets the ART winning flag in the main side RAM 74 to "1" (step S1615), and transmits an ART winning command indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 has been won to the production side MPU 92 (step S1616). By receiving the ART winning command, the performance side MPU 92 causes a performance indicating that the ART state ST6 will be entered after the current bonus state ends to be executed in the current game.

Next, the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 will be explained. First, referring again to the flowchart of FIG. 29, the processing of steps S1001 to S1011 in the second control processing of the game section will be described.

First, it is determined whether the freeze standby flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1001). The freeze standby flag is used to display the ending performance until the end of the bonus state when the bonus state is entered in the middle of the ending performance and the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games during the bonus state. This flag is used by the main MPU 72 to specify that it is waiting for the freeze setting at the end of the process.

If the freeze standby flag is set to "1" (step S1001: YES), freeze setting processing is executed (step S1002). The freeze setting process will be explained in detail later. If the freeze standby flag is not set to "1" (step S1001: NO), by determining whether or not the advantageous section flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", the game section is set to the advantageous section SC2. It is determined whether or not (step S1003). If the advantageous section flag is set to "1" (step S1003: YES), the value of the advantageous continuation counter in the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S1004). Thereafter, ending handling processing is executed (step S1005).

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the ending handling process executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the ending handling process is executed in step S1005 in the second control process (FIG. 29) of the game section. As already explained, the second control process in the game section is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game have stopped. Executed after stopping.

In the ending handling process, first, it is determined whether or not the main ending effect flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1701). The main-side ending performance flag is a flag for the main-side MPU 72 to specify that it is the execution period of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2.

If the main side ending production flag is not set to "1" (step S1701: NO), the value of the advantageous continuation counter, which is a counter for measuring the number of continuous games in the advantageous section SC2 in the main side RAM 74, is the ending compatible game. It is determined whether the number is greater than or equal to the number (specifically, "1450") (step S1702). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, the sum of the value of the advantage continuation counter in the main side RAM 74 and the value of the ART game number counter in the main side RAM 74 is the upper limit number of games in the advantage section SC2 (specifically, "1500"). It is determined whether the above conditions are met (step S1703). That is, it is determined whether the sum of the number of games continuously played in the advantageous section SC2 and the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 is greater than or equal to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1703, it means that it is certain that the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 will reach the upper limit number of games in relation to the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST6. In this case, the main ending effect flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1704).

Thereafter, an ending effect command indicating that the ending effect should be started is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1705). By receiving the ending performance command, the performance side MPU 92 starts the ending performance even if another performance is being executed. Furthermore, information corresponding to the number of remaining games until the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games is set in the ending effect command. This makes it possible for the production side MPU 92 to grasp the remaining number of games until the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games.

Due to the above configuration, if the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or greater than the number of ending compatible games, and in relation to the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST6, the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 is the upper limit number of games. When it is certain that the ending effect will be reached, the ending effect will be executed. In this case, the execution period of the ending effect is conditional on the value of the ART game number counter being 1 or more, so the game states in which the execution period of the ending effect starts are ART state ST6, midway through ART state ST6 The state is either the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) that occurred during the ART state ST6, or the preparation state ST5 after the bonus state that occurred during the ART state ST6 ends.

Returning to the explanation of the second control process (FIG. 29) of the game section, after the ending corresponding process is executed in step S1005, the value of the advantageous continuation counter in the main side RAM 74 becomes the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section SC2 (specifically, is a value corresponding to "1500") (step S1006). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1006, initialization processing for advantageous section SC2 is executed (step S1007). In the initialization process for the advantageous section SC2, the advantageous section flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In addition, in the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2, even if the user stays in either the preparation state ST5 or the ART state ST6, the number of consecutive games in these gaming states (preparation state ST5 or ART state ST6) is stored. The gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state ST1 by clearing various data indicating the gaming state (preparation state ST5 or ART state ST6) including the counter. Thereafter, the advantageous section display section 67 is switched from the lit state to the off state (step S1008). As a result, the notification of the advantageous section SC2 on the advantageous section display section 67 is ended.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the main side ending effect flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1009). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1009, freeze setting processing is executed (step S1010).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1009, a forced termination command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1011). When the production side MPU 92 receives the forced termination command, it executes a normal production start setting process. In the start setting process, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute a normal return effect indicating a return to the normal gaming state ST1. Further, the performance side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute the performance corresponding to the normal gaming state ST1 after the normal return performance ends.

Next, the freeze setting process executed in step S1002 or step S1010 in the second control process (FIG. 29) of the game section will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 37. In addition, since the second control process of the game section is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game have stopped, the freeze setting process is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game have stopped. executed later.

In the freeze setting process, if the freeze standby flag in the main side RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S1801: NO), the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games in the situation where the ending effect is being executed. means that it has been reached. In this case, first, the main ending effect flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1802). Thereafter, if the gaming state at the timing when the current game is started is BB state ST3 (step S1803: YES), it is determined whether the current game is the final game of BB state ST3 (step S1804). If the current game is not the final game in BB state ST3 (step S1804: NO), it is determined whether the total number of game media given to the player in BB state ST3 is less than or equal to a specific reference number ( Step S1805). The specific reference number is set to be smaller than the BB end reference number, and specifically, the specific reference number is set to "100" which is less than half of the BB end reference number.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1804, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, a process for setting an ending effect is executed (step S1806). In the setting process of the ending end effect, an ending end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92. The ending end command is a command for making the performance side MPU 92 recognize that it is the end timing of the ending performance. When receiving the ending end command, the effect-side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute the ending effect for a predetermined period (specifically, 15 seconds). Further, the production side MPU 92 generates history configuration data upon receiving the ending end command. Note that details of the history configuration data will be described later. In the setting process of the ending effect, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 15 seconds) at the end of the ending is set in the freeze counter of the main side RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). If a value is set in the freeze counter in step S1806, the process waits in step S314 in normal processing (FIG. 13). This puts the player in a state where the start of a new game is on standby. In this way, by performing the ending effect while waiting for the start of a new game, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the ending effect. The standby state in step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13) is canceled when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

On the other hand, if negative determinations are made in both steps S1804 and S1805, the freeze standby flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" without executing the ending end effect setting process (step S1807). If it is not the final game in BB state ST3, but the total number of game media given to the player in BB state ST3 is not less than a specific reference number, the number of consecutive games in advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games and becomes advantageous. Even after the initialization process of the section SC2 is executed, the execution of the ending performance in the performance side MPU 92 is extended in the situation of the normal section SC1 and the BB state ST3. Therefore, in such a situation, the freeze setting at the end of the ending performance is waited until the timing when the extension of the ending performance ends, that is, the timing when the BB state ST3 ends. The freeze standby flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is in a standby state for such freeze setting.

If the gaming state at the timing when the current game is started is not the BB state ST3 (step S1803: NO), it is determined whether the current game is other than the final game in the RB state ST4 (step S1808). If the current game is not in the RB state ST4, or if the current game is the final game in the RB state ST4 (step S1808: NO), a process for setting an ending effect is executed (step S1809). In the process of setting the ending effect, an ending end command is sent to the effect side MPU 92 as in step S1806. The ending end command is a command for making the performance side MPU 92 recognize that it is the end timing of the ending performance. When receiving the ending end command, the effect-side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute the ending effect for a predetermined period (specifically, 15 seconds). Further, the production side MPU 92 generates history configuration data upon receiving the ending end command. Note that details of the history configuration data will be described later. In the setting process of the ending effect, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 15 seconds) at the end of the ending is set in the freeze counter of the main side RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). If a value is set in the freeze counter in step S1806, the process waits in step S314 in normal processing (FIG. 13). This puts the player in a state where the start of a new game is on standby. In this way, by performing the ending effect while waiting for the start of a new game, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the ending effect. The standby state in step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13) is canceled when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

As described above, by executing the setting process of the ending effect in each of steps S1806 and S1809, when the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games during the execution period of the ending effect, the game is not in the bonus state, is in the bonus state but is the final game in the bonus state, or if the total number of gaming media given to the player in BB state ST3 is less than the specified number, There is a freeze period at the end of the ending when the game ends. Then, the ending effect will be executed during the freeze period at the end of the ending.

If the current game is in the RB state ST4 and is not the final game in the RB state ST4 (step S1808: YES), the freeze standby flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" without executing the setting process for the ending effect. Set (step S1810). If the game is in the RB state ST4 and it is not the final game of the RB state ST4, the normal section is played even after the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games and the initialization process for the advantageous section SC2 is executed. In the situation of SC1 and RB state ST4, execution of the ending performance in the performance side MPU 92 is extended. Therefore, in such a situation, the freeze setting at the end of the ending performance is waited until the timing when the extension of the ending performance ends, that is, the timing when the RB state ST4 ends. The freeze standby flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that the main MPU 72 is in a standby state for the freeze setting.

If the freeze standby flag is set to "1" (step S1801: YES), it is determined whether this is the final game in the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 (step S1811). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1811, the state in which the ending effect is extended in the current game ends. Therefore, after clearing the freeze standby flag in the main RAM 74 to "0" (step S1812), the process for setting the ending effect is executed (step S1813).

In the ending end effect setting process (step S1813), an ending end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 similarly to S1806 and step S1809. The ending end command is a command for making the performance side MPU 92 recognize that it is the end timing of the ending performance. When receiving the ending end command, the effect-side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 to execute the ending effect for a predetermined period (specifically, 15 seconds). Further, the production side MPU 92 generates history configuration data upon receiving the ending end command. Note that details of the history configuration data will be described later. In the setting process of the ending effect, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 15 seconds) at the end of the ending is set in the freeze counter of the main side RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). If a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in step S1813, the process waits in step S314 in normal processing (FIG. 13). This puts the player in a state where the start of a new game is on standby. In this way, by performing the ending effect while waiting for the start of a new game, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the ending effect. The standby state in step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13) is canceled when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

Next, prior to explaining the execution control of the performance in the normal game state ST1, the configuration of the display layer for displaying one frame of pictures on the image display device 63 (FIG. 1) will be explained. A picture for one frame on the image display device 63 is displayed by superimposing and composing a plurality of display layers (specifically, eight types). FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of display layers 101 to 108. As shown in FIG. 38, as a display layer for displaying a picture for one frame, there is a background display layer 101 where a background image is mainly set, and a first effect display where images for various effects are set. There are layers 102 to 5th presentation display layer 106 and first notification display layer 107 to second notification display layer 108 in which images for various notifications are set. The background display layer 101 is arranged furthest to the back of the screen. From the background display layer 101 toward the front of the screen, the first effect display layer 102 → second effect display layer 103 → third effect display layer 104 → fourth effect display layer 105 → fifth effect display Five effect display layers 102 to 106 are arranged in the order of layers 106. Further, two notification display layers 107 to 108 are arranged in the order of first notification display layer 107→second notification display layer 108 from the fifth presentation display layer 106 toward the front side of the screen. Therefore, the background image is displayed furthest on the screen, the presentation image is displayed on the front side of the screen relative to the background image, and the notification image is displayed furthest on the screen.

As already explained, the rendering side MPU 92 outputs to the VDP 95 a rendering list that instructs the content of the image to be displayed on the image display device 63. According to the drawing list received from the production side MPU 92, the VDP 95 selects the image of the background display layer 101 → the image of the first production display layer 102 → the image of the second production display layer 103 → the image of the third production display layer 104. → Image of the fourth presentation display layer 105 → Image of the fifth presentation display layer 106 → Image of the first notification display layer 107 → Image of the second notification display layer 108 in the following order: Display layers 101 to 108 Display data is created in the frame area of the video RAM 96 for one composite image generated in such a manner that the images are sequentially superimposed from the back side of the screen toward the front side of the screen. As already explained, the VDP 95 displays an image corresponding to the display data on the image display device 63 by outputting an image signal for one frame corresponding to the display data created in the frame area to the image display device 63. let As a result, the image of the background display layer 101, the image of the first presentation display layer 102, the image of the second presentation display layer 103, the image of the third presentation display layer 104, and the image of the fourth presentation display layer 105. , the image of the fifth presentation display layer 106, the image of the first notification display layer 107, and the image of the second notification display layer 108 are generated in a manner that they are sequentially overlapped from the back of the screen to the front of the screen. The two composite images are displayed on the image display device 63 as a picture for one frame.

<About execution control of performance in normal gaming state ST1>
Next, execution control of the performance in the normal game state ST1 will be explained. In the normal game state ST1, based on the occurrence of the first to sixth opportunities, an effect corresponding to the generated opportunity is performed. First, the first to sixth opportunities will be explained. The first to sixth triggers are triggers that occur when the production side MPU 92 receives a command from the main side MPU 72. Specifically, the first trigger is reception of a game start command, and the second trigger is reception of a constant speed rotation start command. The third trigger is the reception of a stop command command in which information indicating that the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the first stop have been turned on, and the fourth trigger is the reception of the stop button corresponding to the second stop. This is the reception of a stop command command in which information indicating that the ON operation of buttons 42 to 44 has been performed, and the fifth trigger is the reception of the stop command command in which information indicating that the ON operation of stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop has been performed. This is the reception of a stop command command in which the information shown is set. The sixth trigger is reception of an OFF operation command indicating that the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop has been performed.

As already explained, the game start command is a command sent in step S416 of the lottery process (FIG. 14), and the constant speed rotation start command is a command sent in step S603 of the reel control process (FIG. 24). Yes, the stop command is a command sent in step S605 of the reel control process (FIG. 24), and the OFF operation command is a command sent in step S717 of the stop operation corresponding process (FIG. 25). As already explained, the constant speed rotation start command is sent after the game start command is sent, and the stop command command is sent after the constant speed rotation start command is sent. Further, an OFF operation command is sent after sending the stop commands corresponding to the first to third stops. Therefore, the first to sixth triggers occur in the order of first trigger → second trigger → third trigger → fourth trigger → fifth trigger → sixth trigger.

In the normal game state ST1, a normal base effect is performed in which a background image corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is displayed and base music is output, and a variable display of left symbols, right symbols, and middle symbols is performed on the image display device 63. A symbol fluctuation effect, an effective notification effect indicating that the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has become valid, a left stop effect in which the left symbol that is fluctuating on the image display device 63 stops, and a symbol that is fluctuating on the image display device 63 A right stop effect in which the right symbol stops, a reach notification effect in which a reach notification is made in time with the timing when the right symbol in motion stops, and a long press in which a long-press notification occurs in time with the timing in which the right symbol in change stops. A push notification effect, a medium stop effect in which the changing medium symbol stops on the image display device 63, a bonus notification effect to notify that a bonus win has occurred, and a first expectation effect to notify the expectation level of a bonus win. , a second expected performance that notifies the expectation degree of BB winning when a bonus winning occurs, and a re-fluctuation performance that re-fluctuates the stopped middle symbol. The display of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol performed on the image display device 63 in the normal gaming state ST1 is based on the symbols attached to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. Apart from the fluctuations, this is performed as an effect to show whether or not there is a bonus win and the type of bonus win.

Among the various effects mentioned above, for the normal base effect, symbol variation effect, effective notification effect, left stop effect, right stop effect, and middle stop effect, the lottery result in the role lottery process (Figure 14) is the result of which lottery result. It is a performance that is performed even if it is. In this embodiment, there are cases where neither the reach notification performance nor the long press notification performance is performed in response to the right stop performance, and the case where either the reach notification performance or the long press notification performance is performed in response to the right stop performance. There are cases where it is done. If neither the reach notification performance nor the long press notification performance is performed in response to the right stop performance, the performance of one game ends when the middle stop performance ends. On the other hand, when either the reach notification performance or the long press notification performance is performed in response to the right stop performance, the first expected performance may be performed after the middle stop performance ends. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the presence or absence of a performance that is performed in response to the right stop performance and the type of the performance.

When the reach notification performance is performed in response to the right stop performance, there are cases where the first expected performance is performed after the end of the middle stop performance, and cases where one game's performance ends with the end of the middle stop performance. be. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the first expected performance will be performed after the end of the mid-stop performance. When the reach notification performance and the first expected performance are performed, there are cases where the bonus announcement performance is performed after the end of the first expected performance, and cases where the performance of one game ends when the first expected performance ends. . Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the bonus announcement performance will be performed after the end of the first expected performance.

When the long press notification performance is performed in response to the right stop performance, the first expected performance is performed after the middle stop performance ends. Thereafter, there are cases where a second expected performance is performed after the first expected performance ends, and cases where the performance of one game ends when the first expected performance ends. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the second expected performance will be performed after the first expected performance ends. When the long press notification effect, the first expected effect, and the second expected effect are performed, there are cases where a re-fluctuation effect is performed after the end of the second expected effect and the occurrence of a bonus win is announced, and a second expected effect. The end of the performance may end the performance of one game. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the re-variation effect will be performed after the second expected effect ends.

FIGS. 39(a) to 39(h) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the performance contents of various performances performed in the normal game state ST1. In the normal game state ST1, when the first opportunity occurs, that is, when the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command, the normal base performance and the symbol variation performance are started. As already explained, the normal base effect and symbol variation effect are applied regardless of whether or not bonus wins (1st to 4th BB wins and 1st to 2nd RB wins) occur in the lottery process for the role (Figure 14). executed.

As shown in FIG. 39(a), in the normal bass performance, the background image G4 is displayed on the image display device 63, and the normal bass music is output from the speaker 62. Further, in the symbol variation performance, a left symbol, a right symbol, and a middle symbol are displayed in a variable manner in the left region, right region, and center region of the image display device 63. In the symbol variation performance, left symbols, right symbols, and middle symbols are displayed as scrolling from the top of the screen of the image display device 63 toward the bottom of the screen. In the image display device 63, the normal base effect and the symbol variation effect proceed simultaneously.

The background image G4 is set in the background display layer 101 (FIG. 38). Furthermore, an image showing how the left symbol changes is set in the first presentation display layer 102 (FIG. 38), and an image showing how the right symbol changes is set in the second presentation display layer 103 (FIG. 38). An image showing how the medium symbol changes is set in the third effect display layer 104 (FIG. 38). As already explained, in the display data that the VDP 95 creates in the frame area of the video RAM 96, the images of the first effect display layer 102, the second effect display layer 103, and the third effect display layer 104 are the background display layer. It is set closer to the screen than the image 101. Therefore, in the image display device 63, the changing left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol are displayed closer to the screen than the background image G4. While the normal base effect and the symbol variation effect are being executed, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that the normal base music is outputted, and the speaker 62 is controlled to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the normal base effect. Light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is performed.

Thereafter, when a second trigger occurs, that is, when the performance side MPU 92 receives a constant speed rotation start command, the effective notification performance is started. In the validity notification performance, the sound output of the speaker 62 is controlled so that a validity notification sound is output to notify that the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has become valid. The effective notification performance is simultaneously executed in parallel with the normal base performance and the symbol variation performance. The speaker 62 is capable of outputting two sounds at the same time, and the normal bass music and the effective notification sound are output at the same time. By performing the effective notification effect, constant speed rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has started, and it has become possible to stop the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R by operating the stop buttons 42 to 44. The player can be made aware of this.

After that, when a third trigger occurs, that is, when the production side MPU 92 receives a stop command command in which information indicating that the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the first stop have been turned on, the left A stop performance will be performed. As shown in FIG. 39(b), in the left stop effect, the variable display of the left symbols performed in the left side area of the image display device 63 ends, and the stop display of one left symbol image G5 is started. The left symbol image G5 is set in the first performance display layer 102 (FIG. 38) where an image showing how the left symbol changes is set, and is displayed closer to the screen than the background image G4. The left symbol image G5 that is stopped and displayed on the left side area of the image display device 63 is an image that shows any number from "1" to "9". The type of left symbol image G5 that is stopped and displayed is determined in a left stop effect lottery described later. In the right area and center area of the image display device 63, the variable display of the right symbol and the middle symbol continues even after the stop display of the left symbol image G5 is started. In the left stop effect, the sound output of the speaker 62 is controlled so that a stop sound effect is output in the left area of the image display device 63 in accordance with the timing at which the left symbol image G5 stops. As described above, the speaker 62 can output two sounds at the same time, and the normal bass music and the stop sound effect are output at the same time.

After that, when a fourth trigger occurs, that is, when the production side MPU 92 receives a stop command command in which information indicating that the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the second stop have been turned on, the right A stop effect is executed. In the right stop performance, the variable display of the right symbols performed in the right area of the image display device 63 ends, and the stop display of one right symbol image G6 is started. In the right stop effect, there is a case where the right symbol image G6 indicating the same number as the number indicated by the left symbol image G5 stops in the right area of the image display device 63 and a ready-to-win state occurs, and a case where the right symbol image G6 indicating the same number as the number indicated by the left symbol image G5 occurs, and a case where the number indicated by the left symbol image G5 There are cases where the right symbol image G6 indicating a different number stops and a ready-to-reach state does not occur.

First, a case will be described in which the right stop effect is performed in a manner in which a ready-to-reach state does not occur. When the ready-to-reach state does not occur, in the right stop performance, as shown in FIG. 39(c), the fluctuating display of the right symbol that has been performed in the right area of the image display device 63 ends and the display differs from the left symbol image G5. Stop display of the right pattern image G6 indicating numbers is started. As the right pattern image G6, there are nine types of images showing any number from "1" to "9". The right symbol image G6 is set in the second effect display layer 103 (FIG. 38) where an image showing how the right symbol changes is set, and is displayed closer to the screen than the background image G4. In the central area of the image display device 63, the fluctuating display of the middle symbol continues even after the stop display of the right symbol image G6 is started. In the right stop performance, the sound output of the speaker 62 is controlled so that a stop sound effect is output in the right area of the image display device 63 in accordance with the timing at which the right symbol image G6 stops. As described above, the speaker 62 can output two sounds at the same time, and the normal bass music and the stop sound effect are output at the same time. When the reach state does not occur, the reach notification performance and the long press notification performance are not performed.

After that, if the fifth trigger occurs, that is, if the production side MPU 92 receives a stop command command in which information indicating that the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop have been turned on, A stop performance will be performed. As shown in FIG. 39(d), in the middle stop effect, the fluctuating display of the middle symbol performed in the central area of the image display device 63 ends and the stop display of the middle symbol image G7 starts. The middle symbol image G7 is set in the third effect display layer 104 (FIG. 38) where an image showing how the middle symbol changes is set, and is displayed closer to the screen than the background image G4. As the medium pattern image G7, there are nine types of images showing any number from "1" to "9". The type of the middle symbol image G7 that is stopped and displayed is determined in the middle stop effect lottery described later. By starting the stop display of the middle symbol image G7, the left symbol image G5, the right symbol image G6, and the middle symbol image G7 are in a stopped state on the image display device 63. In the middle stop effect, the sound output of the speaker 62 is controlled so that a stop sound effect is outputted in the central area of the image display device 63 in accordance with the timing at which the middle symbol image G7 stops. As described above, the speaker 62 can output two sounds at the same time, and the normal bass music and the stop sound effect are output at the same time. If a ready-to-win state does not occur, the mid-stop performance ends and the performance of one game ends.

On the other hand, when the right stop performance is performed in a manner in which a ready-to-reach state occurs, either the reach notification performance or the long-press notification performance is performed in response to the right stop performance. When a ready-to-reach state occurs, in the right stop performance, as shown in FIG. 39(e), the number of the left symbol image G5 stopped and displayed in the left area of the image display device 63 (in FIG. 39(e), "1" A ready-to-win state occurs when a right stop effect is performed in which the right symbol image G6 indicating the same number ("1" in FIG. 39(e)) stops in the right area. As in the case where the ready-to-reach state does not occur, the right symbol image G6 is set in the second effect display layer 103 (FIG. 38) where an image showing how the right symbol fluctuates is set, and it is set higher than the background image G4. Displayed at the front of the screen.

In the reach notification performance that is performed in response to the right stop performance, the sound of the speaker 62 is adjusted so that the reach notification sound "Reach" is output in the right area of the image display device 63 in synchronization with the timing when the right symbol image G6 stops. Output control is performed. The reach notification sound is output from the speaker 62 with priority over the stop sound effect in the right stop performance. As described above, the speaker 62 can output two sounds at the same time, and the normal bass music and the reach notification sound are output at the same time. In this case, no stop sound effect is output. By outputting the reach notification sound, it is possible to make the player aware that a reach state in which the numbers indicated by the left symbol image G5 and the right symbol image G6 match has occurred, and to increase the degree of attention to the production content. can. Note that when a bonus announcement performance is performed, a reach notification performance is always performed, but just because a reach notification performance is performed, it does not necessarily mean that a bonus notification performance is performed.

In the long press notification effect performed in response to the right stop effect, a long press notification sound "Long press" is output in the right area of the image display device 63 at the same time as the right symbol image G6 stops. Sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed. The long press notification sound is output from the speaker 62 with priority over the stop sound effect in the right stop performance. As described above, the speaker 62 can output two sounds at the same time, and the normal bass music and the long press notification sound are output at the same time. In this case, no stop sound effect is output. By outputting the long-press notification sound, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation that the second expected performance may be started by long-pressing the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop. Note that when the second expected performance is performed, the long press notification performance is always performed, but just because the long press notification performance is performed, the second expected performance is not necessarily performed.

Thereafter, a mid-stop effect is performed based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity. As already explained, in the middle stop effect, the fluctuating display of the middle symbol that has been performed in the central area of the image display device 63 is finished, and the stop display of the middle symbol image G7 is started. In the fluctuating display of the middle symbol, the number displayed in the center area of the image display device 63 increases by 1 from "1" to "9" in ascending order, and returns to "1" after reaching "9" (1 →2→...8→9→1), and in the middle stop effect when a reach state occurs, the number one before the number shown in the left symbol image G5 and right symbol image G6 is performed. The stop display of the medium symbol image G7 shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 39(f), when the numbers in the left symbol image G5 and the right symbol image G6 are equal to "1", in the middle stop performance, "9", which is the one before "1", is the same number as "1". Stop display of the medium pattern image G7 indicating numbers is started.

Here, the first expected performance and the second expected performance will be explained. In the first expected performance, an expected performance image indicating the degree of expectation of bonus winnings (first to fourth BB winnings and first to second RB winnings) is displayed on the image display device 63. In addition, in the second expected performance, an expected performance image indicating the degree of expectation of BB winning when a bonus winning occurs is displayed on the image display device 63. 40(a) to 40(e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the content of the first expected performance and the second expected performance, and FIG. 40(f) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the type of first expected performance and bonus winning. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence with the expectation level, and the correspondence relationship between the type of second expected performance and the expectation level of BB winning when a bonus winning occurs.

The expected performance images displayed on the image display device 63 in the first expected performance and the second expected performance include a bubble image G8 (FIG. 40(a)), a water flow image G9 (FIG. 40(b)), and a swirl image G10 (FIG. 40(b)). 40(c)), a school of fish image G11 (FIG. 40(d)), and a giant character image G12 (FIG. 40(e)). In the first expected performance and the second expected performance, these expected performance images are displayed on the image display device 63 for 1.5 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 40(f), in the first expected performance, the bubble image G8 or water stream image G9 is displayed as the expected performance image, thereby indicating that the expectation level of winning the bonus is low, and as the expected performance image. Displaying the spiral image G10 or the school of fish image G11 indicates that the expectation level of winning the bonus is high. Furthermore, by displaying the giant character image G12 as the expected performance image, it is shown that the expectation level of winning the bonus is very high. The player can grasp the degree of expectation of winning the bonus based on the type of expected performance image displayed on the image display device 63 in the first expected performance.

In the second expected effect, the bubble image G8 or the swirl image G10 is displayed as the expected effect image, thereby indicating that the degree of expectation of BB winning when a bonus win occurs is low, and the water flow image G9 is displayed as the expected effect image. Alternatively, by displaying the fish school image G11, it is shown that the expectation level of BB winning is high when a bonus winning occurs. In addition, by displaying the giant character image G12 as the expected effect image, it is shown that the degree of expectation of the BB win when a bonus win occurs is very high. The player can grasp the degree of expectation of BB winning when a bonus winning occurs based on the type of expected performance image displayed on the image display device 63 in the second expected performance.

The type of expected performance image displayed in the first expected performance does not affect the type of expected performance image displayed in the second expected performance, and the type of expected performance image displayed in the second expected performance does not affect the type of expected performance image displayed in the second expected performance. To not affect the type of expected performance image displayed in expected performance. Therefore, it is possible to generate a large number of variations (specifically, 25 types) as combinations of the performance contents of the first expected performance and the second expected performance, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Since there are many combinations of performance contents of the first expected performance and the second expected performance, it is possible to complicate the contents that can be notified to the player. For example, if the bubble image G8 is displayed in the first expected effect and then the giant character image G12 is displayed in the second expected effect, the expectation level of winning the bonus is low, but if the bonus winning occurs, It can be shown that there is a very high expectation that the bonus win is a BB win, which is more advantageous to the player than an RB win. In this case, the player can be made to expect a BB win even though the expectation level of a bonus win is low.

Returning to the explanation of the flow of effects in the normal gaming state ST1, as shown in FIG. After entering the stopped state, in the first expected performance, one of five types of expected performance images is displayed on the image display device 63. In the first expected performance, a bubble image G8 (FIG. 40(a)), a water flow image G9 (FIG. 40(b)), a swirl image G10 (FIG. 40(c)), a school of fish image G11 (FIG. 40(d)), and The giant character image G12 (FIG. 40(e)) is set in the fourth presentation display layer 105. As already explained, in the display data created by the VDP 95 in the frame area of the video RAM 96, the image of the fourth effect display layer 105 is the background display layer 101, the first effect display layer 102, and the second effect display layer. 103 and the third effect display layer 104 on the nearer side of the screen. Therefore, no matter which image the expected performance image displayed on the image display device 63 in the first expected performance is, the expected performance image is the background image G4, the left symbol image G5, the right symbol image G6, and the middle symbol. It is displayed closer to the screen than image G7. In the first expected performance, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that the first expected sound effect that makes the user expect a bonus win is output in response to the display of the expected performance image. As described above, the speaker 62 can output two sounds at the same time, and the normal bass music and the first expected sound effect are output at the same time.

As already explained, the degree of expectation of winning a bonus is indicated by the type of expected performance image displayed in the first expected performance. If the spiral image G10 (FIG. 40(c)) or the school of fish image G11 (FIG. 40(d)) is displayed in the first expected performance, indicating that the expectation level of winning the bonus is high, the first expected performance ends. A player can be made aware in advance that there is a high possibility that a bonus announcement performance or a second expected performance will be performed later. In addition, if the giant character image G12 (FIG. 40(e)) indicating that the expectation level of winning the bonus is very high is displayed in the first expected performance, the bonus announcement performance or the 2. It is possible to make the player aware in advance that there is a very high possibility that the expected performance will be performed.

The bonus announcement performance is started after the first expected performance ends. In the bonus announcement performance, a bonus announcement image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 39(g). The bonus announcement image G13 is set in the fifth performance display layer 106 (FIG. 38) after the image display device 63 finishes displaying the expected performance image in the first expected performance. As already explained, in the display data created by the VDP 95 in the frame area of the video RAM 96, the image of the fifth effect display layer 106 is the background display layer 101, the first effect display layer 102, and the second effect display layer. 103 and the third effect display layer 104 on the nearer side of the screen. Therefore, the bonus notification image G13 is displayed closer to the screen than the background image G4, the left symbol image G5, the right symbol image G6, and the middle symbol image G7. In addition, in the bonus announcement performance, the speaker 62 is set so that a confirmation notification sound "bonus confirmed" indicating that a bonus win has occurred is output in accordance with the timing when the bonus notification image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63. Sound output control is performed, and light emission control is performed to cause the upper lamp 61 to emit light in a manner to notify that a bonus win has occurred. As described above, the speaker 62 is capable of outputting two sounds at the same time, and the normal bass music and the confirmation sound are output at the same time. In addition, in the bonus announcement performance, the drive control of the accessory 75 is performed so that an accessory motion representation in which the spherical performance portion 77b (FIG. 1) of the accessory 75 operates is performed. By performing the bonus announcement performance, it is possible to make the player aware that a bonus win has occurred. Note that details of drive control of the accessory 75 will be described later.

The second expected performance is started when both the condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs are met. Ru. As already explained, in the second expected performance, the image display device 63 displays a bubble image G8 (FIG. 40(a)), a water flow image G9 (FIG. 40(b)), a swirl image G10 (FIG. 40(c)), and a school of fish. The expected performance image of either the image G11 (FIG. 40(d)) or the giant character image G12 (FIG. 40(e)) is displayed. The expected performance image in the second expected performance is set in the fourth performance display layer 105 in the same way as the expected performance image in the first expected performance, and includes a background image G4, a left pattern image G5, a right pattern image G6, and a middle pattern image. It is displayed closer to the screen than the G7. In the second expected performance, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that a second expected sound effect that makes the player expect BB winning is output in response to the display of the expected performance image. As described above, the speaker 62 can output two sounds at the same time, and the normal bass music and the second expected sound effect are output at the same time.

As already explained, the fifth trigger occurs when the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop are turned on, and the sixth trigger occurs when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are turned off. An opportunity arises. Further, the first expected performance is started at the timing when the execution period (specifically, 1 second) of the mid-stop performance that is started based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity ends. When the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop are pressed for a long time according to the long press notification sound output from the speaker 62, and the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is performed after the first expected performance ends. Then, the second expected performance is started based on the occurrence of the sixth opportunity. In addition, if the sixth trigger occurs after the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) but before the first expected performance ends, the occurrence of the sixth trigger Based on this, the first expected performance is ended midway and the second expected performance is started.

On the other hand, if the period from the fifth trigger to the sixth trigger is short, if the sixth trigger occurs in the middle of the middle stop performance, or if the execution period of the first expected performance is It is conceivable that the sixth trigger occurs at a timing less than a period (specifically, one second). In these cases, after the sixth opportunity occurs, the second expected performance is started on condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second). By having a configuration in which the second expected performance is not started until the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second), the execution period of the first expected performance is set to a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second). (1 second) can be secured.

If the configuration is such that the second expected effect is started only on the occurrence of the sixth opportunity, if the sixth opportunity occurs while the middle stop effect is being executed, the second expected effect will be started before the first expected effect. It ends up. In a configuration in which the first expected performance shows the degree of expectation of winning a bonus, and the second expected performance shows the degree of expectation of BB winning when a bonus win occurs, the order of the first expected performance and the second expected performance is If the numbers are reversed, there is a risk of confusion for the players. In addition, if the configuration is such that the second expected effect is started only when the sixth opportunity occurs, the sixth opportunity is triggered in a situation where the execution period of the first expected effect is less than a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second). If this occurs, there is a risk that the execution period of the first expected performance will become so short that the content of the performance cannot be understood. To solve these problems, in this embodiment, both the condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs are satisfied. The configuration is such that the second expected performance is started based on the fact that the second expected performance is performed. This makes it possible to prevent the second expected performance from being started before the first expected performance. In addition, a predetermined period (specifically, one second) is secured as the execution period of the first expected performance, and it is possible to perform the first expected performance in a manner that allows the user to understand the content of the performance.

Returning to the explanation of the flow of effects in the normal game state ST1, if the second expected effect is executed in a game that is not the target of the re-variable effect, the effect of one game ends when the second expected effect ends. do. On the other hand, in the game where the re-variation performance is to be executed, the re-variation performance is performed after the second expected performance ends. In this slot machine 10, a game in which a bonus announcement performance is not performed in a game in which a bonus winning occurs, and a game that is started in a state where five games have been played without a bonus winning being established becomes a game to be executed for a revariation performance. Note that if the bonus winning is achieved before the re-variation performance is performed, the re-variation performance will be canceled. By making the user expect that the re-variation performance will be performed after the second expected performance ends, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the performance.

The re-fluctuation performance is started at the timing when the second expected performance ends. In the re-fluctuation effect, as shown in FIG. 39(h), after the fluctuation of the middle symbol that was stopped and displayed in the central area of the image display device 63 is resumed, the numbers ( In FIG. 39(h), the stop display of the medium symbol image G7 indicating the same number as "1" is started. By setting all the numbers shown by the left symbol image G5, right symbol image G6, and middle symbol image G7 on the image display device 63, it is possible to make the player recognize that the bonus winning is confirmed. The variation of the middle symbol in the re-fluctuation production and the stop display of the middle symbol image G7 after the variation are performed in the third performance display layer 104 (FIG. 38) where the stop display of the middle symbol image G7 was being performed. Therefore, the medium symbol image G7 after the re-variation is displayed closer to the screen than the background image G4. In the re-variation performance, the sound output of the speaker 62 is controlled so that the sound effect during the re-variation is output in addition to the normal bass music. As described above, the speaker 62 is capable of outputting two sounds at the same time, and the normal bass music and the sound effect during re-variation are output at the same time. In addition, in the re-variation effect, the upper lamp 61 emits light at the timing when the numbers of the left symbol image G5, right symbol image G6, and middle symbol image G7 are aligned on the image display device 63 and the occurrence of bonus winning is announced. At the same time as the control is executed, the drive control of the accessory object 75 is performed so that the accessory object movement effect in which the spherical effect portion 77b (FIG. 1) of the accessory object 75 operates is started. Note that details of drive control of the accessory 75 will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the performance side ROM 93 and performance side RAM 94 for executing various performances in the normal game state ST1 will be explained. First, the configuration of the performance side ROM 93 will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 41(a). FIG. 41(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the performance side ROM 93 for executing various performances in the normal game state ST1. The performance side MPU 92 uses various performance tables stored in advance in the performance side ROM 93 when executing various performances in the normal game state ST1.

The performance side ROM 93 is provided with a normal base performance table storage area 93a. In this slot machine 10, there are six types of normal base effects with different background images G4 and normal bass music as normal base effects corresponding to the normal gaming state ST1, and the normal base effect table storage area 93a stores six types of normal base performance tables for executing these normal base effects. The normal bass production table includes address information for display data for displaying the background image G4 on the image display device 63, setting destination information for specifying a setting destination for the display data, and a speaker for normal bass music. Sound data for outputting from 62 and light emission data for causing upper lamp 61 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the normal base effect are set. Here, the display data is a data table in which information (display time, scaling, display order, etc.) regarding the display mode of individual images such as the background image G4 is set. A plurality of frames of information regarding the display mode of the individual images are set in the display data, and a series of effects are displayed on the image display device 63 according to the display data. Note that the details of the configuration for displaying the picture of each frame on the image display device 63 according to the display data will be described later.

The production side ROM 93 is provided with a symbol variation production table storage area 93b, and the symbol variation production table storage area 93b contains symbols for performing variable display of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol on the image display device 63. A variable effect table is stored. The symbol variation effect table includes display data for displaying a left symbol in a variable manner in the left side area of the image display device 63, display data for displaying a right symbol in a right area in a variable manner, and a medium symbol in the center area. Address information of display data for performing a variable display of , and setting destination information of these display data are set.

The performance side ROM 93 is provided with an effective notification performance table storage area 93c, and the effective notification performance table for performing effective notification performance is stored in the effective notification performance table storage area 93c. Sound data for causing the above-mentioned effective notification sound to be output from the speaker 62 is set in the effective notification effect table.

The performance side ROM 93 is provided with a left stop performance table storage area 93d, and the left stop performance table storage area 93d stores a left stop performance table for performing a left stop performance. As already explained, there are nine types of left symbol images G5 indicating any number from "1" to "9" as images that are stopped and displayed on the left side area of the image display device 63 in the left stop effect. The left stop effect table storage area 93d stores nine types of left stop effect tables for performing the stop display of these nine types of left symbol images G5. The left stop effect table includes address information of display data for stop displaying the left symbol image G5 in the left side area of the image display device 63, setting destination information of the display data, and the above-mentioned stop sound effect. Sound data to be output from the speaker 62 is set.

The performance side ROM 93 is provided with a right stop performance table storage area 93e, and a right stop performance table for performing a right stop performance is stored in the right stop performance table storage area 93e. As already explained, there are nine types of right symbol images G6 indicating any number from "1" to "9" as images that are stopped and displayed in the right area of the image display device 63 in the right stop performance. The right stop effect table storage area 93e stores nine types of right stop effect tables for performing the stop display of these nine types of right symbol images G6. The right stop effect table includes address information of display data for stop displaying the right symbol image G6 in the right area of the image display device 63, setting destination information of the display data, and the above-mentioned stop sound effect. Sound data to be output from the speaker 62 is set.

The performance side ROM 93 is provided with a reach notification performance table storage area 93f, and a reach notification performance table for performing a reach notification performance is stored in the reach notification performance table storage area 93f. Sound data is set in the reach notification effect table in order to output the above-mentioned reach notification sound from the speaker 62.

The performance side ROM 93 is provided with a long-press notification performance table storage area 93g, and the long-press notification performance table storage area 93g stores a long-press notification performance table for performing a long-press notification performance. Sound data is set in the long press notification effect table in order to output the long press notification sound described above from the speaker 62.

The performance side ROM 93 is provided with a medium stop performance table storage area 93h, and a medium stop performance table for performing a medium stop performance is stored in the medium stop performance table storage area 93h. As already explained, there are nine types of medium pattern images G7 indicating any number from "1" to "9" as images that are stopped and displayed in the center area of the image display device 63 in the medium stop effect. The middle stop effect table storage area 93h stores nine types of middle stop effect tables for performing the stop display of these nine types of medium symbol images G7. The middle stop effect table includes address information of display data for stop displaying the middle symbol image G7, setting destination information of the display data, and sound for outputting the above-mentioned stop sound effect from the speaker 62. data is set.

The performance side ROM 93 is provided with a first expected performance table storage area 93i, and the first expected performance table storage area 93i stores a first expected performance table for performing the first expected performance. As already explained with reference to FIGS. 40(a) to 40(e), the expected effect images displayed on the image display device 63 in the first expected effect are the bubble image G8, the water flow image G9, the swirl image G10, and the school of fish. There are five types of images G11 and giant character images G12, and the first expected effect table storage area 93i stores five types of first expected effect tables for displaying the five types of expected effect images. ing. A blank area in which no performance data is set is provided at the beginning of the first expected performance table, and a performance execution in which performance data for performing the first expected performance is set after the blank area. An area is provided. The blank area is provided over the range of pointer information corresponding to the period from the occurrence of the fifth opportunity until the end of the mid-stop performance. The effect execution area includes, as effect data, address information of display data for displaying any of the expected effect images on the image display device 63, setting destination information of the display data, and the above-mentioned first expectation. Sound data for outputting sound effects from the speaker 62 is set. The sound data set in the first expected effect table differs depending on the type of expected effect image.

In a game where the second expected performance is not performed, the middle stop performance is started based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity, and the first expected performance is started at the end timing of the middle stop performance. The first expected performance table is read out based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity. If the configuration is such that the first expected performance table is read out upon completion of the mid-stop performance and the first expected performance is executed immediately after reading, it becomes necessary to have a configuration for grasping that the mid-stop performance has ended, The configuration for performing the first expected performance becomes complicated. On the other hand, in this embodiment, by providing a blank area at the beginning of the first expected performance table, the first expected performance table is read out based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity, while the middle stop performance is read out based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity. This prevents the first expected performance from being performed during the execution of the first expected performance. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration for performing the first expected performance by eliminating the need for a configuration for grasping the end timing of the mid-stop performance.

The performance side ROM 93 is provided with a bonus announcement performance table storage area 93j, and a bonus announcement performance table for performing a bonus announcement performance after the first expected performance is stored in the bonus announcement performance table storage area 93j. There is only one type of bonus announcement performance. At the beginning of the bonus announcement performance table, there is a blank area where no performance data is set, and after the blank area there is a performance execution area where performance data for performing the bonus announcement performance is set. It is provided. The blank area is provided over the range of pointer information corresponding to the period from the occurrence of the fifth opportunity until the end of the first expected performance. In the performance execution area, display data for displaying the bonus announcement image G13 on the image display device 63, setting destination information for the display data, and outputting a final notification sound from the speaker 62 are provided as performance data. Sound data of , light emission data for causing the upper lamp 61 to emit light in a manner indicating that a bonus win has occurred, and address information of a drive table for executing an accessory action effect are set.

In the game where the bonus announcement performance is to be executed, the middle stop performance is started based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity, and the first expected performance is started at the end timing of the middle stop performance. Thereafter, the bonus announcement performance is executed at the end timing of the first expected performance. The bonus announcement performance table is read out based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity. If the bonus announcement performance table is read out upon completion of the first expected performance, and the bonus announcement performance is executed immediately after reading, it becomes necessary to have a configuration for understanding that the first expected performance has ended, The configuration for performing the bonus announcement performance becomes complicated. On the other hand, in this embodiment, by providing a blank area at the beginning of the bonus announcement performance table, the bonus announcement performance table is read out based on the occurrence of the fifth trigger, while the middle stop performance and 1. Bonus announcement performance is prevented from being performed during execution of expected performance. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration for performing the bonus announcement performance by eliminating the need for a configuration for grasping the end timing of the first expected performance.

The performance side ROM 93 is provided with a second expected performance table storage area 93k, and the second expected performance table storage area 93k stores a second expected performance table for performing the second expected performance. As already explained with reference to FIGS. 40(a) to 40(e), the expected effect images displayed on the image display device 63 in the second expected effect are the bubble image G8, the water flow image G9, the swirl image G10, and the school of fish. There are five types of images G11 and giant character images G12, and the performance side ROM 93 stores five types of second expected performance tables for displaying these five types of expected performance images. The second expected effect table includes address information of display data for displaying one of the expected effect images on the image display device 63, setting destination information of the display data, and the above-mentioned second expected sound effect. Sound data to be output from the speaker 62 is set. The sound data set in the second expected effect table differs depending on the type of expected effect image.

The performance side ROM 93 is provided with a re-variation performance table storage area 93m, and a re-variation performance table for performing a re-variation performance is stored in the re-variation performance table storage area 93m. As already explained, in the re-fluctuation effect, nine types of medium-symbol images G7 indicating any number from "1" to "9" are displayed as images that are stopped and displayed in the center area of the image display device 63 after the medium-symbol is re-fluctuated. exists, and the performance side ROM 93 stores nine types of re-variation performance tables for performing the stop display of these nine types of medium symbol images G7 after re-variation. The re-fluctuation effect table contains address information of display data for re-fluctuation of the middle symbol that is stopped in the center area of the image display device 63, setting destination information of the display data, and information on the display data for re-fluctuation of the middle symbol that has stopped in the center area of the image display device 63, and Address information of the display data for stopping and displaying the middle symbol image G7 showing the same number as the symbol image G5 and the right symbol image G6, the setting destination information of the display data, and the effect during re-fluctuation. Sound data for outputting sound, light emission data for controlling light emission of the upper lamp 61, and address information of a drive table for executing a role model action effect are set.

As described above, in the normal game state ST1, a plurality of effects are executed based on the occurrence of the first to sixth opportunities. The number of combinations of the plurality of effects is enormous, and if the effect tables for all the combinations are stored in advance in the effect side ROM 93, the storage capacity of the effect side ROM 93 for storing the effect tables will be reduced. It will increase. In contrast, in this embodiment, a plurality of individual effect tables for executing various effects are read out, and one game effect is performed based on a combination of effect data set in the plurality of effect tables. be. Thereby, it is possible to increase the variation of combinations of executable performances while suppressing an increase in the storage capacity of the performance side ROM 93 for storing the performance table.

Next, the configuration of the reading area 94a provided in the performance side RAM 94 will be explained with reference to FIG. 41(b). As already explained, the reading area 94a is an area where data tables for executing various effects and various notifications are read. FIG. 41(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the performance side RAM 94 for executing various performances.

As shown in FIG. 41(b), the performance side RAM 94 is provided with a readout area 94a, and the readout area 94a has a 0th layer from which data tables for executing various performances and various notifications are read. Layers LY0 to 11th layer LY11 are provided. The 0th layer LY0 is a layer from which a normal base effect table is read in the normal gaming state ST1, and the 1st to 8th layers LY1 to LY8 are layers from which data tables for executing various effects are read, The 9th to 10th layers LY9 to LY10 are layers from which notification tables for executing various notifications are read, and the 11th layer LY11 is a layer from which a drive table for driving and controlling the accessory 75 is read. .

FIG. 42(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of each layer LYn (n is an integer from 0 to 11). As shown in FIG. 42(a), each layer LYn includes an effect table that is a data table for executing effects, a notification table that is a data table for executing notifications, and drive control of the accessory 75. A development area REn from which any one of the driving tables, which is a data table for execution, is read out, and a pointer counter PCn that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp pointer information of the data table read to the development area REn. It is provided. In this embodiment, one development area REn is provided in one layer LYn, and only one data table can be read out from one development area REn at a time.

When it is time to read the data table for executing various notifications and various effects, the production side MPU 92 reads the data table to the development area REn of the corresponding layer LYn in the readout area 94a. Then, light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, display control of the image display device 63, and drive control of the accessory 75 are executed according to the data table read out to each layer LYn of the readout area 94a. do. As a result, various notifications and various effects are executed.

In each data table, a plurality of pieces of pointer information are arranged as serially numbered numerical information. Among the data tables, the production table and the notification table include light emission data for controlling the light emission of the upper lamp 61, sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62, and display control of the image display device 63. At least one of address information and setting destination information of the display data is set. Further, in the drive table of the data tables, drive data for controlling the drive of the accessory 75 is set. Note that details of drive control of the accessory 75 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 41(b), the lighting data set in the pointer information of the reference target in the data table read out for each layer LYn (n is an integer from 0 to 11) is set in the production side RAM 94. A setting area 111 for light emission, which is set in the pointer information of the reference object, a setting area 112 for sound output, in which the sound data set in the pointer information of the reference object is set, and a display specified by the address information set in the pointer information of the reference object. A display setting area 113 is provided in which data for the display is set. The production side MPU 92 controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61 according to the light emission data set in the light emission setting area 111, controls the sound output of the speaker 62 according to the sound data set in the sound output setting area 112, The display of the image display device 63 is controlled according to the display data set in the display setting area 113.

One light emission data is set in the light emission setting area 111. The production side MPU 92 updates the reference target layer LYn in the order of 0th layer LY0 → first layer LY1 →... → 10th layer LY10, while updating the reference target layer LYn in the data table read out to the reference target layer LYn. The light emission data that has been set is set in the light emission setting area 111. If light emission data has already been set in the light emission setting area 111, after clearing the light emission data, set the light emission data set in the data table read out to the current reference target layer LYn. . Therefore, the light emission data set later remains in the light emission setting area 111 preferentially. After updating the reference target layer LYn to the tenth layer LY10, the production side MPU 92 controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61 based on the light emission data remaining in the light emission setting area 111.

As already explained, the normal base effect table is read out to the 0th layer LY0, data tables for executing various effects are read out to the 1st to 8th layers LY1 to LY8, and the data tables for executing various effects are read out to the 1st to 8th layers LY1 to LY8. Data tables for executing various notifications are read out from the 10 layers LY9 to LY10. Therefore, in the light emission setting area 111, light emission data is set in the order of light emission data for normal base effects→light emission data for various effects→light emission data for notification. As a result, the light emission data for various effects is set in the light emission setting area 111 with priority over the light emission data for the normal base effects, and the information is set in the light emission setting area 111 rather than the light emission data for various effects. The configuration is such that the light emission data for the light emission is preferentially set in the light emission setting area 111.

The pointer information of the reference target in the data table read out to the 0th to 10th layers LY0 to LY10 indicates whether or not the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 has been performed based on the light emission data set in the data table. Regardless, it will be updated at the update timing. For example, even if the light emission data for notification is given priority over the light emission data for normal base effect and the light emission data for various effects, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is performed based on the light emission data for notification. The pointer information of the reference target in the normal base effect table and the effect tables for various effects is updated.

In the data table for executing effects in each game, the later the reading timing is, the larger the number ("n") of the layer LYn is read. Therefore, if multiple performance data tables are read out and multiple lighting data exist, the lighting data set in the performance data table read later will be used first. It takes priority over the light emission data set in the performance data table read out. For example, the light emission data set in the mid-stop effect table read out to the 5th layer LY5 has priority over the light emission data set in the normal base effect table read out to the 0th layer LY0. be done.

Next, the sound output from the speaker 62 will be explained. FIG. 42(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the sound output setting area 112. As shown in FIG. 42(b), the sound output setting area 112 includes a base area 112a in which sound data for normal bass production is set, and a production area 112a in which sound data for various productions is set. 112b, and a notification area 112c in which various notification sound data are set. One piece of sound data can be set in each of the base area 112a, presentation area 112b, and notification area 112c.

The production side MPU 92 updates the reference target layer LYn in the order of 0th layer LY0 → first layer LY1 →... → 10th layer LY10, while updating the reference target layer LYn in the data table read out to the reference target layer LYn. The sound data that has been set is set in the corresponding areas 112a to 112c of the sound output setting area 112.

Specifically, when sound data is set in the normal base performance table read out to the 0th layer LY0 of the readout area 94a, the production side MPU 92 sets the sound data in the base area 112a. Then, when sound data is set in the various effect tables read out in the first to eighth layers LY1 to LY8, the sound data is set in the effect area 112b, and the sound data is set in the effect table 112b in the ninth to tenth layers LY9 to When sound data is set in the various notification tables read out to LY10, the sound data is set in the notification area 112c.

If sound data has already been set in the setting destination areas 112a to 112c, after clearing the sound data, the data table read out to the current reference target layer LYn (n = 0 to 10) is The set sound data is set in the setting destination areas 112a to 112c. In the range n=1 to 8 where the data table for presentation is read, the larger the number (“n”) of the layer LYn is, the higher the priority is given to the sound data of the data table for presentation read to the layer LYn. It is set in the presentation area 112b. In each game, the performance data table is read out in such a manner that the later the data table is read out, the larger the number ("n") of the layer LYn is. Therefore, the sound data set in the presentation data table that will be read later is preferentially set in the presentation area 112b. In addition, in the range of n=9 to 10 where the notification data table is read, the larger the number (“n”) of the layer LYn is, the higher the priority is given to the sound data of the notification data table read to the layer LYn. is set in the notification area 112c. The data table for notification is read out in such a manner that the later the reading timing of the data table is, the larger the number (“n”) of the layer LYn is. Therefore, the sound data set in the notification data table to be read later is preferentially set in the notification area 112c.

After updating the reference target layer LYn to the tenth layer LY10, the production side MPU 92 finally controls the sound output of the speaker 62 based on the sound data remaining in each area 112a to 112c of the sound output setting area 112. I do. Specifically, when sound data is set in the notification area 112c, the speaker 62 outputs sound based only on the sound data in the notification area 112c. The pointer information of the normal base effect table and various effect tables is updated even when the notification table is read to the 9th to 10th layers LY9 to LY10, but when the notification sound is output In this case, the sound output for the normal bass performance and the sound output for various performances will not be performed. This prevents the notification sound from becoming difficult to hear due to the normal bass performance sound and the various performance sounds.

On the other hand, when no sound data is set in the notification area 112c, the speaker 62 outputs sound based on the sound data set in the base area 112a and the production area 112b. When sound data is set in both the base area 112a and the performance area 112b, the normal base performance sound and the performance sound are output at the same time. In addition, when sound data is set only in the bass area 112a, only the sound for normal bass production is output, and when sound data is set only in the production area 112b, the sound for production is output. Only the sound is output.

Next, display control in the image display device 63 will be explained. In the image display device 63, display control is performed based on a plurality of display data set in the display setting area 113. FIG. 42(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the display setting area 113. As shown in FIG. 42(c), the display setting area 113 includes a background area 113a where background display data is set, and a first effect area where display data for various effects is set. There are provided an area 113b to a fifth presentation area 113f, and a first notification area 113g to a second notification area 113h in which display data for notification is set.

As already explained, there are eight display layers 101 to 108 (FIG. 38) as display layers for displaying one frame of pictures on the image display device 63, and one frame of pictures is displayed on these layers. It is displayed by combining images set in layers 101 to 108. Each of the areas 113a to 113h in the display setting area 113 is provided in one-to-one correspondence with the display layers 101 to 108, respectively. The background area 113a is an area where display data for an image set in the background display layer 101 is set, and the first effect area 113b is an area for display data for an image set in the first effect display layer 102. The second effect area 113c is an area where the display data of the image set in the second effect display layer 103 is set, and the third effect area 113d is an area for the third effect. This is an area where display data for images set in the display layer 104 is set, and the fourth effect area 113e is an area where display data for images set in the fourth effect display layer 105 is set. , the fifth effect area 113f is an area where the display data of the image set in the fifth effect display layer 106 is set, and the first notification area 113g is set in the first notification display layer 107. This is an area where image display data is set, and the second notification area 113h is an area where image display data set in the second notification display layer 108 is set.

In the normal game state ST1, display data for displaying the background image G4 is set in the background area 113a. In addition, display data for displaying an image showing how the left symbol changes and the left symbol image G5 are set in the first presentation area 113b, and display data for displaying an image showing how the right symbol changes and the right symbol image G6. Display data for displaying is set in the second performance area 113c, and is used for displaying an image showing how the middle symbol changes, a middle symbol image G7, and an image showing how the middle symbol changes again. The data is set in the third effect area 113d. Furthermore, the water flow image G9, the swirl image G10, the fish school image G11, and the giant character image G12 in the first expected effect and second expected effect already explained with reference to FIGS. 40(a) to 40(e) are displayed. Display data for this is set in the fourth effect area 113e. Furthermore, display data for displaying the bonus announcement image G13 already described with reference to FIG. 39(g) is set in the fifth effect area 113f.

As already explained, the rendering side MPU 92 outputs to the VDP 95 a rendering list that instructs the content of the image to be displayed on the image display device 63. According to the drawing list received from the production side MPU 92, the VDP 95 selects the image of the background display layer 101 → the image of the first production display layer 102 → the image of the second production display layer 103 → the image of the third production display layer 104. → Image of the fourth presentation display layer 105 → Image of the fifth presentation display layer 106 → Image of the first notification display layer 107 → Image of the second notification display layer 108 in the following order: Display layers 101 to 108 Display data is created in the frame area of the video RAM 96 for one composite image generated in such a manner that the images are sequentially superimposed from the back side of the screen toward the front side of the screen. Then, the VDP 95 outputs an image signal for one frame corresponding to the display data created in the frame area to the image display device 63, thereby causing the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data.

In the data table read to the 0th to 10th layers LY0 to LY10, the pointer information in which the address information of the display data is set is such that the display data can be moved to any of the areas 113a to 113h of the display setting area 113. Setting destination information that specifies whether to read is set. When the address information and setting destination information of the display data are set in the reference target pointer information, the production side MPU 92 specifies the display data based on the address information and sets the specified display data in the setting destination information. The display setting area 113 is set in one of the areas 113a to 113h specified by the display setting area 113.

When areas 113a to 113h in which display data has already been set in the display setting area 113 are specified as the setting destination, the production side MPU 92 clears the display data that has already been set and displays the current reference target. The display data set in the pointer information is set in the corresponding areas 113a to 113h. Therefore, display data whose setting trigger occurs later is preferentially set in each area 113a to 113h than display data whose setting trigger occurs first.

Specifically, when both the condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs, the fourth performance is executed. After the display area 113e is cleared, display data for the second expected effect is set in the fourth effect area 113e. In this case, if display data for the first expected performance is set in the fourth performance area 113e, display data for the second expected performance is set in place of the display data. Become. Thereby, the first expected performance can be ended and the second expected performance can be started. In addition, if the execution period (specifically 1.5 seconds) of the first expected performance has ended and the display data for the first expected performance has not been set in the fourth performance area 113e, , the display data for the second expected performance is set, and the second expected performance is started.

In this way, in the display setting area 113, the area where the display data for the second expected performance is set is the same area as the area where the display data for the first expected performance is set (for the fourth performance). By setting the area 113e), it is possible to start the second expected performance without requiring the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the progress status of the first expected performance. Furthermore, if the second expected performance is started during the first expected performance, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for aligning the end timing of the first expected performance and the start timing of the second expected performance. It becomes. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent an overlapping period between the execution period of the first expected performance that is performed earlier and the execution period of the second expected performance that is started later. This can prevent the display content of the image display device 63 from becoming too complicated.

Since the setting destination information of the display data is set in the effect table, even if the layer LYn from which the effect table is read out in the readout area 94a changes, the setting destination information of the display data is set in the display setting area 113. It is possible to prevent fluctuations in the areas 113a to 113h in which display data is set. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a change in the setting destination of display data in the display setting area 113 due to a change in the layer LYn from which the rendering table is read, and also to prevent changes in the setting destination of the display data in the display setting area 113. It is possible to prevent the context from changing.

Next, the reading mode of the effect table in the normal game state ST1 will be explained. First, the manner in which the performance table is read in a case where neither the bonus announcement performance nor the re-variation performance is executed will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 43(a) to 43(d).

This is not a target game for any of the bonus announcement performance, second expectation performance, or re-variation performance, and the number of the left symbol image G5 does not match the number of the right symbol image G6 in the right stop performance lottery described later. In this case, a reach condition does not occur. In this case, as shown in FIG. 43(a), one of the six types of normal base effect tables is read out to the 0th layer LY0 based on the occurrence of the first opportunity, and the symbol variation effect table is read out to the 0th layer LY0. 1 layer LY1. Thereafter, the effective notification effect table is read out to the second layer LY2 based on the occurrence of the second trigger. Thereafter, one of the nine types of left stop effect tables is read out to the third layer LY3 based on the occurrence of the third trigger, and one of the nine types of right stop effect tables is read out to the third layer LY3 based on the occurrence of the fourth trigger. Based on the occurrence of the fifth trigger, one of the nine types of medium stop effect tables is read out to the fifth layer LY5.

Pointer information of a reference target in each layer LYn (n is an integer from 0 to 11) is updated without being influenced by other layers LYn. For this reason, each effect executed according to the effect table read out to each layer LYn is executed in parallel. Specifically, the normal base effect executed according to the normal base effect table read out to the 0th layer LY0 is the symbol executed according to the effect table read out to the 1st to 5th layers LY1 to LY5. To proceed in parallel with the variable performance, effective notification performance, left stop performance, right stop performance, and middle stop performance without being affected by the progress status of these performances.

On the other hand, if a lottery result in which the numbers on the left symbol image G5 and the numbers on the right symbol image G6 match in the right stop effect lottery to be described later, a ready-to-win state occurs. In this case, if the first expected performance lottery at the time of a loss, which will be described later, results in a lottery result in which the first expected performance is not performed, the reading mode of the performance table based on the occurrence of the fourth opportunity and the fifth opportunity will be changed. This is different from the case in FIG. 43(a). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 43(b), based on the occurrence of the fourth trigger, one of the nine types of right stop effect tables is read out to the fourth layer LY4, and the reach notification effect table is read out to the fourth layer LY4. 5 layer LY5. Then, based on the occurrence of the fifth trigger, one of the nine types of medium stop effect tables is read out to the sixth layer LY6. As already explained, sound data for outputting a stop sound effect is set in the right stop effect table, and sound data for outputting a reach notification sound is set in the reach notification effect table. Since the number of the fifth layer LY5 ("5") from which the reach notification effect table is read is larger than the number ("4") of the fourth layer LY4 from which the right stop effect table is read, the sound output setting area 112 is Sound data for outputting the reach notification sound is preferentially set in the production area 112b. Therefore, in this case, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that the reach notification sound is output in accordance with the right stop effect, and the stop sound effect is not output.

If any of the first expected performances is won in the first expected performance lottery at the time of losing, which will be described later, the reading mode of the performance table based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity is different from the case of FIG. 43(b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 43(c), based on the occurrence of the fifth trigger, one of the nine types of mid-stop effect tables is read out to the sixth layer LY6, and the five types of first expected Any one of the effect tables is read out to the seventh layer LY7.

If the game is the target game for the second expected performance and is not the target game for the re-variation performance, the symbol variation performance table, effective notification performance table, left stop performance table, right stop performance table, long press notification performance table, medium A first composite effect table including the contents of the stop effect table, the first expected effect table, and the second expected effect table is generated. In this case, as shown in FIG. 43(d), one of the six types of normal base effect tables is read out to the 0th layer LY0 based on the occurrence of the first trigger, and the first composite effect table is read out to the 0th layer LY0. It is read out to the first layer LY1. Then, these effects are sequentially executed according to the first composite effect table. Note that the first composite effect table will be described later.

Next, the manner in which the performance table is read when the game is a target game for bonus announcement performance or re-variation performance will be described with reference to FIGS. 44(a) and 44(b). If any of the bonus wins (either the 1st to 4th BB wins or the 1st to 2nd RB wins) occur in the winning combination lottery process (Figure 14), the notification lottery process (bonus notification process) described later will be performed. (Step 2203 in FIG. 50) is performed. If the bonus announcement effect is won in the announcement lottery process, the manner in which the effect table is read out based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity is different from that shown in FIG. 43(c). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44(a), based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity, one of nine types of mid-stop effect tables is read out to the sixth layer LY6, and five types of first expected effects are read out. One of the tables is read out to the seventh layer LY7, and the bonus announcement effect table is read out to the eighth layer LY8.

On the other hand, in the notification lottery process (step S2311 of the performance content determination process (FIG. 51)) to be described later, the re-variation effect is won, and after that, 5 games are played without a bonus winning, and the re-variation effect is executed. In the case of a game, in addition to the first expected performance, a second expected performance and a re-variation performance are performed. In this case, the symbol variation production table, the effective notification production table, the left stop production table, the right stop production table, the long press notification production table, the middle stop production table, the first expected production table, and the first expected production table. A second composite effect table including the contents of the second expected effect table and the re-variation effect table is generated. In this case, as shown in FIG. 44(b), one of the six types of normal base effect tables is read out to the 0th layer LY0 based on the occurrence of the first trigger, and the second composite effect table is read out to the 0th layer LY0. It is read out to the first layer LY1. Then, these effects are sequentially executed according to the second composite effect table. Note that the second composite effect table will be described later.

As mentioned above, when the first composite effect table and the second composite effect table are not generated, various effect tables for executing various effects are individually stored in different layers LYn (n is 0 to 8) of the readout area 94a. The performance of one game progresses by reading out various performances (any integer) and executing various performances in parallel according to various performance tables. In addition, when the first composite effect table or the second composite effect table is generated, the normal base effect executed according to the normal base effect table read out to the 0th layer LY0, and the The performance of one game progresses by executing various performances in parallel according to the read first composite performance table or second composite performance table.

When the first composite effect table is generated, the symbol variation effect table, the effective notification effect table, the left stop effect table, the right stop effect table, the reach notification effect table, the middle stop effect table, and the first combination effect table are generated. When the contents of the first expected performance table and the second expected performance table are read out to one layer LYn (specifically, the first layer LY1) and the second composite performance table is generated, the symbol variation performance table, effective notification effect table, left stop effect table, right stop effect table, long press notification effect table, middle stop effect table, first expected effect table, second expected effect table, and re-variation. The contents of the effect table are read into one layer LYn (specifically, the first layer LY1). This reduces the maximum number of effect tables that can be read out in one game in the reading area 94a. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of layers LYn in the read area 94a.

As shown in FIG. 41(a), the presentation side ROM 93 is provided with a synthesis table storage area 93n, and the synthesis table storage area 93n includes a first synthesis table storage area 93n for generating a first synthesis effect table. A table and a second synthesis table for generating a second synthesis effect table are stored. The first synthesis effect table includes a symbol variation effect table, an effective notification effect table, a left stop effect table, a right stop effect table, a reach notification effect table, and a middle stop effect table in relation to the first synthesis table. It is generated by setting the performance data set in the first expected performance table and the second expected performance table. In addition, the second synthesis effect table has a symbol variation effect table, an effective notification effect table, a left stop effect table, a right stop effect table, a long press notification effect table, and a middle press effect effect table for the second synthesis table. It is generated by setting performance data set in the stop performance table, the first expected performance table, the second expected performance table, and the re-variation performance table.

Here, the contents of the composite effect table will be explained with reference to FIG. 45, taking the second composite effect table as an example. FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the second composite effect table. In addition, the first composite effect table has the following points: the effect data of the reach notification effect table is set instead of the effect data of the long press effect effect table, and the effect data of the re-fluctuation effect table is not set. It is different from the second composite effect table.

In the second synthesis table, pointer information from "0" to "w" is set as a serial number, and it is possible to set performance data for the pointer information, and also to set the pointer information to the pointer information. Update information is set for the information. Specifically, the update information includes a jump condition for jumping the value of the pointer counter PCn (FIG. 42(a)) to the jump destination pointer information in one process of the pointer update process (FIG. 48) described later. , a jump destination to be set in the pointer counter PCn when the jump condition is satisfied, and an update condition for updating the value of the pointer counter PCn by adding 1 to it.

When the second synthesis effect table (FIG. 45) is generated, the area "0" to "p" of pointer information in the second synthesis table contains address information and setting destination information of display data in the symbol variation effect table. is set, sound data in the effective notification effect table is set in areas "p+1" to "q" of pointer information, and sound data for display in the left stop effect table is set in areas "q+1" to "r" of pointer information. Data address information, setting destination information, and sound data are set.

Address information and setting destination information of display data in the right stop effect table and sound data in the long press notification effect table are set in the areas "r+1" to "s" of the pointer information. The sound data in the right stop effect table is not set in the areas "r+1" to "s" of the pointer information. Therefore, when the second composite effect table is generated, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that a long press notification sound is output in place of the stop sound effect in accordance with the right stop effect.

Address information, setting destination information, and sound data of display data in the mid-stop effect table are set in areas "s+1" to "t" of the pointer information. Address information, setting destination information, and sound data of display data in the performance execution area of the first expected performance table are set in the areas "t+1" to "u" of the pointer information. The blank area provided at the beginning of the first expected performance table is not set in the second composite performance table. The address information, setting destination information, and sound data of the display data in the second expected performance table are set in the areas "u+1" to "v" of the pointer information, and the areas "v+1" to "w" of the pointer information are set. Address information of display data in the re-fluctuation effect table, setting destination information, sound data, light emission data, and address information of the drive table are set in . Note that the first composite effect table does not include areas "v+1" to "w" of pointer information.

There is one type of second synthesis table stored in the production side ROM 93, and the second synthesis effect table combines the production data set in each production table to be executed in each game into the one type. It is created by setting it in the second synthesis table. In addition, there is one type of first synthesis table stored in the production side ROM 93, and the first synthesis production table stores the production data set in each production table to be executed in each game. It is created by setting the type in the first synthesis table. Since the number of types of the first composition table and the second composition table that are stored in advance in the production side ROM 93 in order to generate the first composition production table and the second composition production table is one type, the composition table The storage capacity of the performance side ROM 93 for storing the information is reduced.

The pointer information of the first composite effect table or the second composite effect table read into the first layer LY1 is updated in a pointer update process (FIG. 48) to be described later. In the second composite effect table, as shown in FIG. 45, the pointer information is set to "1" to "p" as a jump condition in the area of pointer information "0" to "p" where the data for the effect of the symbol variation effect is set. A condition that either "p" exists and a condition that a second trigger occurs are set, and "p+1" is set as the pointer information of the jump destination. Furthermore, an update condition of "second trigger occurs at p" is set in the area. In this case, the pointer information is updated by 1 every 40 milliseconds until both the condition that the pointer information is one of "1" to "p" and the condition that the second trigger occurs are met. Then, the pattern variation effect progresses. When the symbol variation effect is started, the display data for displaying the left symbol in a variable manner is set in the first effect area 113b of the display setting area 113, and the display data for performing the variable display in the right symbol. is set in the second effect area 113c, and display data for performing a variable display of the medium symbol is set in the third effect area 113d of the display setting area 113. In the image display device 63, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are displayed in a variable manner according to these display data. In the image display device 63, the background image G4 is also displayed according to the display data set in the background area 113a of the display setting area 113. The display of the background image G4 is continuously executed regardless of the update mode of the pointer information of the reference target in the second composite effect table (FIG. 45).

If the pointer information of the reference target is updated to "p" without the occurrence of the second trigger, the pointer information of the reference target is updated to "p" until the update condition that the second trigger occurs while the pointer information is "p" Pointer information is no longer updated. In this case, the image display device 63 continues to display the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol in a variable manner according to the display data set in the first to third effect areas 113b to 113d of the display setting area 113. .

If both the condition that the pointer information is one of "1" to "p" and the condition that the second trigger occurs are satisfied, one of the pointer update processes (FIG. 48) described later is performed. At the time, the pointer information of the reference object is updated to the jump destination "p+1", and the effective notification effect is started. Specifically, if the second trigger occurs in a situation where the pointer information is one of "1" to "p", or after the second trigger occurs, the pointer information is one of "1" to "p". When this happens, the pointer information of the reference object is updated to the jump destination "p+1" and the effective notification effect is started.

Areas "p+1" to "q" of pointer information where the production data for effective notification production is set include the condition that the pointer information is one of "p+2" to "q" as a jump condition, and The condition that three triggers occur is set, and "q+1" is set as the pointer information of the jump destination. In addition, an update condition "occurrence of third trigger at q" is set in this area. In this case, the pointer information is updated by 1 every 40 milliseconds until both the condition that the pointer information is one of "p+2" to "q" and the condition that the third trigger occurs are met. The effective notification performance will proceed. In the effective notification effect, the sound data of the effective notification sound set in the areas “p+1” to “q” is set in the effect area 112b of the sound output setting area 112, and the sound data is output from the speaker 62. Ru.

If the pointer information of the reference target is updated to "q" without the third trigger occurring, the output of the valid notification sound ends, and the third trigger occurs with the pointer information in the state of "q". The pointer information of the reference target will not be updated until the following update condition is satisfied. In this case, in the image display device 63, the variable display of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol continues according to the display data set in the display setting area 113.

If both the condition that the pointer information is one of "p+2" to "q" and the condition that the third trigger occurs are satisfied, one of the pointer update processes (FIG. 48) described later is performed. At the time, the pointer information of the reference object is updated to the jump destination "q+1", and the left stop effect is started. Specifically, if the third trigger occurs in a situation where the pointer information is one of "p+2" to "q", or if the pointer information is one of "p+2" to "q" after the third trigger occurs, When this happens, the pointer information of the reference object is updated to the jump destination "q+1" and the left stop effect is started. If a third trigger occurs and the pointer information is updated to "q+1" in a situation where the effective notification effect is being executed (a situation where the pointer information is one of "p+2" to "q-1"), it is effective. The sound data for the notification effect is no longer set in the effect area 112b (FIG. 42(b)) of the sound output setting area 112, and the effective notification effect ends. When the left stop effect is started, the display data for performing the variable display of the left symbol is deleted, and the display data for performing the stop display of the left symbol image G5 is deleted from the first part of the display setting area 113. It is set in the presentation area 113b.

Areas "q+1" to "r" of the pointer information where the production data for the left stop production are set include the condition that the pointer information is one of "q+2" to "r" as a jump condition, and The condition that four triggers occur is set, and "r+1" is set as the pointer information of the jump destination. In addition, an update condition "occurrence of fourth trigger in r" is set in this area. In this case, the pointer information is updated by 1 every 40 milliseconds until both the condition that the pointer information is one of "q+2" to "r" and the condition that the fourth trigger occurs are met. and the left stop effect progresses. In the left stop effect, the sound data of the stop sound effect set in the areas "q+1" to "r" of the pointer information is set in the effect area 112b of the sound output setting area 112, and the sound data is output from the speaker 62. is output from.

If the pointer information of the reference target is updated to "r" without the fourth trigger occurring, the output of the stop sound effect ends, and the fourth trigger occurs with the pointer information in the state of "r". The pointer information of the reference target will not be updated until the update condition is met. In this case, in the image display device 63, the stop display of the left symbol image G5 and the variable display of the right symbol and the middle symbol are continued according to the display data set in the display setting area 113.

If both the condition that the pointer information is one of "q+2" to "r" and the condition that the fourth trigger occurs are satisfied, one of the pointer update processes (FIG. 48) described later is performed. At this time, the pointer information of the reference target is updated to the jump destination "r+1", and the right stop effect and long press notification effect are started. Specifically, if the fourth trigger occurs in a situation where the pointer information is any of "q+2" to "r", or after the fourth trigger occurs, the pointer information is any of "q+2" to "r". In this case, the pointer information of the reference target is updated to the jump destination "r+1", and the right stop effect and the long press notification effect are started. If the fourth trigger occurs and the pointer information is updated to "r+1" in a situation where the left stop effect is being executed (a situation where the pointer information is one of "q+2" to "r-1"), the left stop effect is executed. The sound data for the stop performance is no longer set in the performance area 112b (FIG. 42(b)) of the sound output setting area 112, and the left stop performance ends. When the right stop effect is started, the display data for performing a variable display of the right symbol is deleted, and the display data for performing a stop display of the right symbol image G6 is deleted from the second display setting area 113. It is set in the production area 113c.

Pointer information is included as a jump condition in areas "r+1" to "s" of pointer information where the address information and setting destination information of the display data of the right stop effect and the sound data of the long press notification effect are set. A condition that it is one of "r+2" to "s" and a condition that the fifth trigger occurs are set, and "s+1" is set as the jump destination pointer information. In addition, an update condition "occurrence of fifth trigger in s" is set in this area. In this case, the pointer information is updated by 1 every 40 milliseconds until both the condition that the pointer information is one of "r+2" to "s" and the condition that the fifth trigger occurs are met. The right stop effect and long press notification effect will proceed. In the long press notification effect, the sound data of the long press notification sound set in the areas "r+1" to "s" of the pointer information is set in the effect area 112b of the sound output setting area 112, and the sound data is It is output from the speaker 62.

If the pointer information of the reference target is updated to "s" without the fifth trigger occurring, the output of the long press notification sound ends, and the fifth trigger occurs with the pointer information in the state of "s". The pointer information of the reference target will not be updated until the following update condition is satisfied. In this case, in the image display device 63, the stop display of the left symbol image G5 and the right symbol image G6 and the variable display of the middle symbol are continued according to the display data set in the display setting area 113.

If both the condition that the pointer information is one of "r+2" to "s" and the condition that the fifth trigger occurs are satisfied, one of the pointer update processes (FIG. 48) described later is performed. At the time, the pointer information of the reference object is updated to the jump destination "s+1", and the mid-stop effect is started. Specifically, if the fifth trigger occurs in a situation where the pointer information is one of "r+2" to "s", or after the fifth trigger occurs, the pointer information is one of "r+2" to "s". In this case, the pointer information of the reference object is updated to the jump destination "s+1" and the mid-stop effect is started. In a situation where the right stop effect and long press notification effect are being executed (a situation where the pointer information is one of "r+2" to "s-1"), the fifth trigger occurs and the pointer information is updated to "s+1" If so, the sound data for the long-press notification performance is no longer set in the performance area 112b (FIG. 42(b)) of the sound output setting area 112, and the long-press notification performance ends. When the middle stop effect is started, the display data for performing the fluctuating display of the middle symbol is deleted, and the display data for performing the stop display of the middle symbol image G7 is deleted from the third part of the display setting area 113. It is set in the production area 113d.

Jump conditions, jump destinations, and update conditions are not set in the areas "s+1" to "t" of the pointer information where the production data for the mid-stop production is set. Therefore, in this area, regardless of whether the fifth trigger occurs or not, the pointer information of the reference target is updated by 1 at a cycle of 40 milliseconds, and the mid-stop effect progresses. In the middle stop production, the sound data of the stop sound effect set in the areas "s+1" to "t" of the pointer information is set in the production area 112b of the sound output setting area 112, and the sound data is output from the speaker 62. is output from. Then, when the pointer information of the reference destination is updated to "t+1", the middle stop performance ends and the first expected performance starts. In this way, the first expected performance is started at the end timing of the middle stop performance. Even if the sixth trigger occurs at a timing before the pointer information is updated to "t+1", the pointer information to be referenced does not jump. Therefore, even if the sixth trigger occurs in a situation where the middle stop effect is being executed, the middle stop effect is executed to the end. Also in this case, the first expected performance is started at the end of the middle stop performance. When the first expected performance is started, display data for displaying the expected performance image (bubble image G8, water flow image G9, swirl image G10, school of fish image G11, or giant character image G12) in the first expected performance is set in the fourth effect area 113e of the display setting area 113. The display data is deleted from the fourth performance area 113e when the execution period (specifically, 1.5 seconds) of the first expected performance has elapsed.

In the area of pointer information "t+1" to "u" where the production data of the first expected production is set, there is a condition that the pointer information is one of "t+26" to "u" as a jump condition, A condition that the sixth trigger occurs is set, and "u+1" is set as the pointer information of the jump destination. In addition, an update condition "occurrence of the sixth trigger at u" is set in the area. In this case, until the pointer information of the reference target reaches "t+26", even if the sixth trigger occurs, the pointer information is updated by 1 every 40 milliseconds, and the first expected performance progresses. The period required from the start of the first expected performance until the pointer information of the reference target is updated to "t+26" is one second. After that, the pointer information is updated by 1 at a 40 millisecond cycle until both the condition that the pointer information is one of "t+26" to "u" and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs are satisfied. , the continuation of the first expected performance will proceed. In the first expected production, the sound data of the first expected sound effect set in the areas "t+1" to "u" of the pointer information is set in the production area 112b of the sound output setting area 112, and the sound data is output from the speaker 62.

If the pointer information of the reference target is updated to "u" without the sixth trigger occurring, the output of the first expected sound effect ends, and the sixth trigger occurs with the pointer information being "u". The pointer information of the reference target will not be updated until the update condition that the update condition is satisfied is met. When the reference target pointer information is updated to "u", that is, when the execution period (specifically, 1.5 seconds) of the first expected performance ends, the image display device 63 displays the expected performance image (bubbles). The display of image G8, water flow image G9, swirl image G10, fish school image G11, or giant character image G12) ends. In the image display device 63, the stop display of the left symbol image G5, right symbol image G6, and middle symbol image G7 is continued according to the display data set in the display setting area 113.

The second expected performance is started when the update condition that the sixth opportunity occurs in a state where the pointer information of the reference target is "u" is satisfied. Furthermore, if both the condition that the pointer information is one of "t+26" to "u" and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs are satisfied, the pointer update process (FIG. 48) described later is performed. In one processing time, the pointer information of the reference object is updated to the jump destination "u+1", and the second expected performance is started. Specifically, if the sixth trigger occurs in a situation where the pointer information is one of "t+26" to "u", or after the sixth trigger occurs, the pointer information is one of "t+26" to "u". When this happens, the pointer information of the reference target is updated to the jump destination "u+1" and the second expected performance is started. If display data for the first expected performance remains in the fourth performance area 113e of the display setting area 113 at the start of the second expected performance, the display data is deleted. Then, display data for displaying an expected performance image (bubble image G8, water flow image G9, swirl image G10, fish school image G11, or giant character image G12) in the second expected performance is stored in the fourth performance area 113e. Set.

In this way, the second expected performance satisfies both the condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs. If started. As a result, the period from the ON operation to the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop is short, and before the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second). Even if the sixth opportunity occurs at the timing of , a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) can be secured as the execution period of the first expected performance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution period of the first expected performance from becoming so short that the contents of the first expected performance cannot be understood. In addition, the period from the ON operation to the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop is long, and the timing is set after the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second). When the sixth trigger occurs, the second expected performance can be started without any delay based on the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's sense of participation by associating the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop with the start of the second expected presentation in a manner that is easy for the player to understand. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Jump conditions, jump destinations, and update conditions are not set in areas "u+1" to "v" of pointer information where the performance data of the second expected performance is set. Therefore, in this area, the pointer information of the reference target is updated by 1 at a cycle of 40 milliseconds, and the second expected performance progresses. In the second expected production, the sound data of the second expected sound effect set in the areas "u+1" to "v" of the pointer information is set in the production area 112b of the sound output setting area 112, and the sound data is output from the speaker 62. Then, when the pointer information of the reference destination is updated to "v+1", the second expected performance ends and the re-variation performance is started. In this way, the re-fluctuation performance is started at the end timing of the second expected performance. When the re-fluctuation effect is started, the display data for displaying the medium symbol in a stopped state is deleted, and the display data for performing the re-fluctuation display of the medium symbol is replaced by the third performance in the display setting area 113. area 113d.

Jump conditions, jump destinations, and update conditions are not set in areas "v+1" to "w" of the pointer information where data for re-fluctuation performance is set. Therefore, in this area, the pointer information of the reference target is updated by 1 at a cycle of 40 milliseconds, and the re-fluctuation effect progresses. In the re-fluctuation performance, the sound data set in the areas “v+1” to “w” of the pointer information is set in the performance area 112b of the sound output setting area 112, and the sound data is output from the speaker 62. . Furthermore, the light emission data set in the areas "v+1" to "w" of the pointer information is set in the light emission setting area 111 (FIG. 41(b)), and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 based on the light emission data is performed. It will be done. Furthermore, the driving table of the accessory 75 specified by the address information of the driving table set in the area "v+1" to "w" of the pointer information (specifically, the pointer information of "w") is for reading. The data is read out to the eleventh layer LY11 of the area 94a, and the accessory motion effect is executed according to the drive table. In addition, the details of the role object action production will be described later.

In the game where the re-fluctuation effect is executed, if the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop is performed and the sixth trigger occurs, the sixth trigger is generated for the freeze counter in the main side RAM 74. Numerical information corresponding to the period from when the re-variation performance ends is set. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (Figure 12) until the value of the freeze counter becomes "0" in the normal process (Figure 12). 13), the process waits in step S314. Therefore, during the execution period of the second expected performance where the pointer information of the reference target is "u+1" to "v", and during the execution period of the re-fluctuation performance where the pointer information of the reference target is "v+1" to "w" Even if the start lever 41 is operated to start the next game, the game will not be started based on the operation, and the re-variation performance can be executed to the end. Note that a processing configuration that allows the main MPU 72 to grasp the period from the occurrence of the sixth opportunity until the end of the re-variation effect will be described later.

In this embodiment, when the pointer information of a data table is updated to the final pointer information and repeat information is not set for the final pointer information, the layer LYn from which the data table is read is cleared. Ru. Specifically, the development area REn and pointer counter PCn (FIG. 42(a)) of the layer LYn from which the data table is read are cleared.

As shown in FIG. 45, no repeat information is set in "w" which is the final pointer information of the second composite effect table. Therefore, when the pointer information of the reference target is updated to "w" and the re-variation effect is completed, the first layer LY1 from which the second composite effect table is read is cleared. On the other hand, the 0th layer LY0 from which the normal base effect table is read is not cleared, and the normal base effect based on the normal base effect table is continued.

As already explained, the normal base effect table for executing the normal base effect corresponding to the normal gaming state ST1 is the first layer LY1 from which the first composite effect table or the second composite effect table is read. is read out to a different 0th layer LY0. Even if the pointer information of the reference object in the first layer LY1 jumps, the pointer information of the reference object in the 0th layer LY0 is not affected. Therefore, while displaying the background image G4 and outputting the normal bass music in the normal bass performance are executed continuously, it is possible to start these performances in response to the occurrence of the first to sixth triggers. It becomes.

In the first effect area 113b of the display setting area 113, display data for starting the variable display of the left symbol at the timing when the second composite effect table is read out to the first layer LY1 is set, and the display data is set for reference. When the target pointer information is updated to "q+1", the display data is cleared and display data for starting the stop display of the left symbol image G5 is set. As already explained, an image is set in the first effect display layer 102 based on the display data set in the first effect area 113b. Therefore, in the left area of the image display device 63, the variable display of the left symbol starts based on the occurrence of the first trigger, and the variable display of the left symbol ends based on the occurrence of the third trigger, and the left symbol image G5 The stop display starts.

In the second effect area 113c in the display setting area 113, display data for starting the variable display of the right symbol at the timing when the second composite effect table is read out to the first layer LY1 is set, and the display data is set for reference. When the target pointer information is updated to "r+1", the display data is cleared and display data for starting the stop display of the right symbol image G6 is set. As already explained, an image is set in the second effect display layer 103 based on the display data set in the second effect area 113c. Therefore, in the right area of the image display device 63, the variable display of the right symbol starts based on the occurrence of the first trigger, and the variable display of the right symbol ends based on the occurrence of the fourth trigger, and the right symbol image G6 The stop display starts.

In the third effect area 113d in the display setting area 113, display data for starting the variable display of the medium symbol at the timing when the second composite effect table is read out to the first layer LY1 is set, and the display data is set for reference. When the target pointer information is updated to "s+1", the display data is cleared and display data for starting the stop display of the middle symbol image G7 is set. After that, when the pointer information is updated to "v+1", the display data is cleared and the middle symbol is changed again, and then the middle symbol image G7 showing the same number as the left symbol image G5 and the right symbol image G6 is displayed. Display data for stopping display is set. Therefore, in the central area of the image display device 63, the fluctuating display of the middle symbol starts based on the occurrence of the first trigger, and the fluctuating display of the middle symbol ends based on the occurrence of the fifth trigger, and the middle symbol image G7 The stop display starts. Thereafter, after the second expected performance that is performed based on the occurrence of the sixth opportunity ends, the re-fluctuation display of the middle symbol is started. After that, stop display of the middle symbol image G7 showing the same numbers as the left symbol image G5 and the right symbol image G6 is started.

Display data for displaying the expected performance image of the first expected performance when the pointer information of the reference target is updated to "t+1" is set in the fourth performance area 113e of the display setting area 113. . Thereafter, display data for displaying the expected performance image of the second expected performance when the reference target pointer information is updated to "u+1" is set. If the display data for the first expected performance remains in the fourth performance area 113e at the timing when the reference target pointer information is updated to "u+1", the display data is cleared and the second Display data for the expected performance is set. Therefore, the sixth trigger occurred at a timing after the execution period of the first expected performance reached a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) and at a timing before the end of the first expected performance. In this case, the first expected performance is ended midway and the second expected performance is started. As a result, while securing the execution period of the first expected performance for a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second), the second expected performance can be started without any delay if the sixth trigger occurs. It is now possible to do so.

As already explained, address information of display data and setting destination information of the display data are set in a data table such as a presentation table. As a result, a synthetic effect table (first synthetic effect table or second synthetic effect table) is generated, and the combined effect table is read out to one layer LYn (specifically, the first layer LY1) in the reading area 94a. Even in the case where a composite effect table is not generated, each display data set in the composite effect table is displayed in the first effect area 113b to fourth effect area 113e in the display setting area 113. It is possible to set it to either. This prevents the setting destination of the display data from changing depending on whether or not a synthetic effect table (first synthetic effect table or second synthetic effect table) is generated, and also prevents the display data from being displayed on the image display device 63. This prevents changes in the context of images.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 46, a description will be given of how the second expected performance is started based on the second composite performance table. 46(a) shows the execution period of the second expected effect, FIG. 46(b) shows the execution period of the re-fluctuation effect, FIG. 46(c) shows the execution period of the medium stop effect, and FIG. ) shows the execution period of the first expected effect, FIG. 46(e) shows the timing when the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second), and FIG. 46(f) shows the timing of the execution period of the first expected effect. The timing of occurrence of the fifth trigger is shown, and FIG. 46(g) shows the timing of the occurrence of the sixth trigger.

First, a case will be described in which the sixth trigger occurs after the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second).

When the fifth trigger occurs at timing t1 as shown in FIG. 46(f), the area (pointer The jump condition set in the range of information "r+1" to "s") is satisfied, and the pointer information of the reference object jumps to "s+1". As a result, the middle stop effect is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 46(c). As already explained, the fifth trigger is when the production side MPU 92 receives a stop command command in which information indicating that the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop have been turned on. Occur. Thereafter, the pointer information of the reference target is updated to "t+1" at timing t2. As a result, at the timing t2, the middle stop performance ends as shown in FIG. 46(c), and the first expected performance begins as shown in FIG. 46(d).

Thereafter, at timing t3, the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) as shown in FIG. 46(e). At the timing of t3, the pointer information of the reference target is updated to "t+26". Thereafter, after the execution period of the first expected performance has been carried out for a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second), and at the timing t4 when the first expected performance is being executed, as shown in FIG. 46(g) The sixth trigger occurs as shown in . As already explained, the sixth trigger occurs when the production side MPU 92 receives the OFF operation command. Because the sixth trigger occurs at timing t4, both the condition that the reference target pointer information is one of "t+26" to "u" and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs are satisfied. , the reference target pointer information jumps to "u+1", which is the jump destination. As a result, at the timing t4, the first expected performance ends as shown in FIG. 46(d), and the second expected performance begins as shown in FIG. 46(a). Thereafter, the pointer information of the reference target is updated to "v+1" at timing t5. As a result, at the timing t5, the second expected performance ends as shown in FIG. 46(a), and the re-fluctuation performance starts as shown in FIG. 46(b).

In this way, if the sixth trigger occurs after the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second), the second expected performance is executed at the timing of occurrence of the sixth trigger. Begins. As mentioned above, if the sixth trigger occurs during the execution of the first expected performance in a situation where the execution period of the first expected performance has reached a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second), the corresponding Based on the occurrence of the sixth opportunity, the first expected performance ends and the second expected performance starts. Furthermore, as already explained, when the sixth opportunity occurs after the first expected performance ends, the second expected performance is started based on the occurrence of the sixth opportunity.

Therefore, if the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop is performed after the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second), the delay will be delayed. The second expected performance can be started at the timing when the OFF operation is performed without causing this. This makes it possible for the player to feel that the second expected performance has started with the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop. In this case, after long-pressing the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop, the player performs the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 while expecting the second expected effect to occur. Become. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, a case will be described in which the sixth trigger occurs before the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second).

At timing t6, the pointer information of the reference target in the second composite effect table (FIG. 45) is updated to "t+1". As a result, at the timing t6, the middle stop effect is ended as shown in FIG. 46(c), and the first expected effect is started as shown in FIG. 46(d). Thereafter, a sixth trigger occurs as shown in FIG. 46(g) at timing t7 when the reference target pointer information is in the range of "t+1" to "t+25". The timing t7 is a timing when the execution period of the first expected performance has not reached a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second). Since the condition that the pointer information of the reference target is one of "t+26" to "u" is not satisfied, even if the sixth trigger occurs, the jump condition is not satisfied, and the jump of the pointer information of the reference target occurs. do not. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46(a), the second expected performance is not started at timing t7.

Thereafter, the pointer information of the reference target is updated to "t+26" at the timing t8, and at the timing t8, the execution period of the first expected performance is changed to a predetermined period (specifically, 1 seconds). As a result, both the condition that the pointer information of the reference target is one of "t+26" to "u" and the condition that the sixth trigger occurs are satisfied, and the pointer information of the reference target is at the jump destination. Jump to a certain "u+1". As a result, at the timing t8, the first expected performance ends as shown in FIG. 46(d), and the second expected performance begins as shown in FIG. 46(a).

In this way, if the sixth trigger occurs at a timing before the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second), the execution period of the first expected performance reaches the predetermined period. The second expected performance is started at the timing when the period (specifically, 1 second) is reached. Thereby, it is possible to secure the execution period of the first expected performance at least over a predetermined period (specifically, one second). As already explained, the fifth trigger occurs when the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop are turned on, and the sixth trigger occurs when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are turned off. Occur. Further, the first expected performance is started at the timing when the mid-stop performance that is started based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity ends. If the configuration is such that the second expected performance is started only on the occurrence of the sixth opportunity, there is a risk that the second expected performance will be started before the first expected performance, and the execution period of the first expected performance will be There is a risk that the performance will be so short that it is impossible to understand the content. In addition, in a configuration in which the first expected performance shows the expectation level of winning a bonus, and the second expected performance shows the expectation level of BB winning when a bonus win occurs, the first expected performance and the second expected performance If the order is reversed, there is a risk of confusion for the players. On the other hand, in this embodiment, at least a predetermined period (specifically, one second) is secured as the execution period of the first expected performance. As a result, it is possible to execute two expected performances in the order of the first expected performance → second expected performance, and it is possible to perform two expected performances in the order of the first expected performance → the second expected performance, and to perform the performance over a period (specifically, 1 second) that makes it possible to understand the content of the performance. After executing the first expected performance, it is possible to start the second expected performance. By executing both the first expected performance and the second expected performance in a manner that allows the content of the performance to be understood, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the performance execution process executed by the performance side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47. The performance execution process is a process for executing various performances and various notifications based on the data table read out to each layer LYn (n is an integer from 0 to 11) of the readout area 94a. This is executed by interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed in a relatively short period (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the side MPU 92.

In the performance execution process, first, it is determined whether it is time to update the pointer information (step S1901). As already explained, the update timing of pointer information occurs at a cycle of 40 milliseconds. If it is time to update the pointer information (step S1901: YES), a pointer update process is executed to update the pointer information of the data table read into the read area 94a (step S1902). Note that details of the pointer update process will be described later.

Thereafter, the value of the target layer counter 114 (FIG. 41(b)) provided in the readout area 94a of the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1903). The target layer counter 114 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the current target layer to be set among the 0th to 11th layers LY0 to LY11 in the readout area 94a. By clearing the value of the target layer counter 114 to "0" in step S1903, the current target layer becomes the 0th layer LY0. Thereafter, the light emission setting area 111 in the production side RAM 94, the base area 112a, the production area 112b, and the notification area 112c in the sound output setting area 112 are cleared (step S1904).

Thereafter, the current target layer is determined based on the value of the target layer counter 114, and it is determined whether a data table has been read out for the determined current target layer (step S1905). If the data table has been read to the target layer (step S1905: YES), data setting processing is executed (step S1906).

In the data setting process in step S1906, if light emission data is set for the pointer information of the current reference target, the light emission setting area 111 (FIG. 41(b)) is cleared, and then the light emission data is set for light emission. Set in area 111. As already explained, only one light emission data can be set in the light emission setting area 111. The larger the number (“n”) is and the later the layer LYn becomes the target layer, the more the light emission data of the data table read to the layer LYn is finally set in the light emission setting area 111. It is easy to become luminescence data. As already explained, the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is performed based on the light emission data finally set in the light emission setting area 111. The priority of the light emission data increases as the number (“n”) of the layer LYn increases. Therefore, the priority of the light emission data for various effects is higher than the priority of the light emission data for the normal base effect, and the priority of the light emission data for notifications is higher than the priority of the light emission data for various effects. has a higher priority.

In the data setting process in step S1906, if sound data is set for the pointer information of the current reference target, the sound data corresponding to the value of the target layer counter 114 is set in the sound output setting area 112 (FIG. 42(b)). The relevant sound data is set in areas 112a to 112c. Specifically, when the value of the target layer counter 114 is "0", the sound data is set in the base area 112a after clearing the base area 112a, and the value of the target layer counter 114 is "1". - If the value is one of "8", the sound data is set in the production area 112b after clearing the production area 112b, and if the value of the target layer counter 114 is one of "9" to "10". In some cases, the sound data is set in the notification area 112c after the notification area 112c is cleared. In addition, as already explained, since the 11th layer LY11 is a layer from which the drive table of the accessory 75 is read, no sound data is set in the 11th layer LY11.

As already explained, two sounds can be output from the speaker 62 at the same time, and when sound data is set only in the bass area 112a (FIG. 42(b)), the sound of the normal bass music is output. If sound data is set in the bass area 112a and the production area 112b (FIG. 42(b)), the normal bass music sound and the production sound are output at the same time. . On the other hand, when sound data is set in the notification area 112c (FIG. 42(b)), no sound is output based on the sound data set in the base area 112a and the production area 112b. , only the notification sound set in the notification area 112c is output.

As already explained, only one sound data can be set in each area 112a to 112c of the sound output setting area 112. In the range of n=1 to 8, the larger the number (“n”) of the layer LYn is and the later the layer LYn becomes the target layer, the more the sound data of the effect table read out to the layer LYn becomes more effective. The sound data is more likely to become the sound data that is finally set in the area 112b, and the sound data is more likely to be output from the speaker 62. In addition, in the range of n=9 to 10, the larger the number (“n”) of the layer LYn is and the later the layer LYn becomes the target layer, the more the layer LYn is set in the broadcast table read out for the layer LYn. This makes it easier for the sound data set in the notification area 112c to become the sound data finally set in the notification area 112c, and also makes it easier for the sound data to be output from the speaker 62.

In the data setting process in step S1906, if the address information and setting destination information of the display data are set for the pointer information of the current reference target, the setting destination is set in the display setting area 113 (FIG. 42(c)). Areas 113a to 113h specified by the information are cleared. Then, the display data stored in the performance side ROM 93 is specified based on the address information, and the specified display data is set in the areas 113a to 113h specified by the setting destination information. Therefore, in each area 113a to 113h, display data is displayed after the display data set in the effect table read earlier (the effect table read in the layer LYn with the smaller number ("n")). The display data set in the read effect table (the effect table read in the layer LYn with a larger number (“n”)) is set preferentially. As already explained, the display setting area 113 includes a background area 113a, first to fifth effect areas 113b to 113f, and first to second notification areas 113g to 113h. An image is set in the background display layer 101 based on the display data set in the background area 113a, and an image is set in the background display layer 101 based on the display data set in the first to fifth effect areas 113b to 113f. - Images are set in the fifth presentation display layers 102 to 106, and the first to second notification display layers 107 to 108 are set based on the display data set in the first to second notification areas 113g to 113h. The image is set to . Then, by stacking and composing these display layers 101 to 108, display data for displaying one frame of a picture on the image display device 63 is created.

After performing the data setting process in step S1906, the accessory drive setting process (FIG. 76(a)) is executed (step S1907). In the accessory driving setting process, if the address information of the driving table of the accessory 75 is set for the pointer information of the reference target, the relevant object is set in the 11th layer LY11 on the condition that it is in a readable state, which will be described later. Read the driving table. Note that details of the accessory drive setting process (FIG. 76(a)) will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1905 or if the process in step S1907 is performed, it is determined whether the value of the target layer counter 114 is "10" (step S1908). If the value of the target layer counter 114 is not "10" (step S1908: NO), the target layer is updated by adding 1 to the value of the target layer counter 114 (step S1909), and the process returns to step S1905. Then, the processes of steps S1905 to S1909 are repeated until an affirmative determination is made in step S1908. As a result, data setting processing ( Step S1906) and accessory drive setting processing (step S1907) can be performed. As already explained, the 0th layer LY0 to the 10th layer LY10 contain at least one of light emission data, sound data, address information and setting destination information of display data, and address information of the drive table of the accessory 75. While the data table in which is set is read out, only the drive table of the accessory 75 is read out to the 11th layer LY11. Therefore, the processes from step S1905 to step S1909 are executed until the value of the target layer counter 114 becomes "10", and when the value of the target layer counter 114 becomes "10" (step S1908: YES), The process advances to step S1910. Note that processing for controlling the drive of the accessory 75 based on the drive table read to the eleventh layer LY11 (accessory object drive control process) is performed in step S1915.

If a negative determination is made in step S1901 or an affirmative determination is made in step S1908, it is determined whether the computation completion flag provided in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" ( Step S1910). The calculation completion flag is used for various calculation processes (background calculation process in step S2107, production calculation process in step S2110, and notification calculation process in step S2113) to create a drawing list in the display control process (FIG. 49) described later. ) are executed once each by the production side MPU 92. If the computation completion flag is set to "1" (step S1910: YES), the computation completion flag is cleared to "0" (step S1911). On the other hand, if the computation completion flag is not set to "1" (step S1910: NO), the delayed flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1912). The delayed flag is used in various calculation processes (background calculation processing in step S2107, production calculation processing in step S2110, and notification calculation processing in step S2113) for creating a drawing list in the display control processing (FIG. 49) described later. ) is a flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the current interrupt process has occurred before completion of the process.

After performing the process of step S1911 or step S1912, a light emission control process is executed (step S1913). In the light emission control process, light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed based on the light emission data set in the light emission setting area 111. The light emission control of the upper lamp 61 is executed based on one piece of light emission data set in the light emission setting area 111.

After that, sound output control processing is executed (step S1914). In the sound output control process, it is determined whether sound data is set in the notification area 112c in the sound output setting area 112, and if sound data is set in the notification area 112c, the notification area is The sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that only the sound based on the sound data set in the speaker 112c is output from the speaker 62. On the other hand, if sound data is not set in the notification area 112c, but sound data is set in both the base area 112a and the production area 112b, the sound data based on the two sound data The sound output control of the speakers 62 is performed so that the two are simultaneously output from the speakers 62. In addition, when sound data is not set in the notification area 112c and sound data is set only in either the base area 112a or the production area 112b, the sound data based on the sound data is Sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that only sound is output from the speaker 62.

Thereafter, the accessory drive control process (FIG. 76(b)), which will be described later, is executed (step S1915), and the present performance execution process is ended.

Next, the pointer update process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48. Note that the pointer update process is executed in step S1902 of the effect execution process (FIG. 47) when it is determined that it is the pointer information update timing (step S1901: YES). As already explained, the update timing of pointer information occurs every 40 milliseconds.

In the pointer update process, first, the value of the target layer counter 114 in the readout area 94a of the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2001). As a result, the target layer is set to the 0th layer LY0. After that, if the data table has been read to the current target layer (step S2002: YES), it is determined whether the pointer information of the current reference target is the final pointer information (step S2003).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, it is determined whether repeat information instructing to return the pointer information to be referenced to predetermined numerical information is set for the final pointer information ( Step S2004). The repeat information includes numerical information indicating pointer information of the repeat start position. If repeat information is set for the final pointer information (step S2004: YES), repeat handling processing is executed (step S2005). In the repeat handling process, numerical information indicating the pointer information of the repeat start position is set in the pointer counter PCn (FIG. 42(a)) of the target layer based on the repeat information. As a result, the pointer information of the reference target returns to the repeat start position.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2004 that repeat information is not set, flag clearing processing (FIG. 66(a)), which will be described later, is executed (step S2006), and the current target layer is cleared (step S2007). ). Specifically, in step S2007, the development area REn and pointer counter PCn (FIG. 42(a)) of the target layer are cleared.

If it is determined in step S2003 that the reference target pointer information has not been updated to the final pointer information, it is determined whether a jump condition is set for the reference target pointer information (step S2009). If a jump condition has been set (step S2009: YES), it is determined whether the jump condition is satisfied (step S2010). If the jump condition is satisfied (step S2010: YES), a pointer counter PCn setting process is executed (step S2011).

In the setting process of the pointer counter PCn in step S2011, the pointer information of the jump destination set corresponding to the jump condition in the data table is set in the pointer counter PCn. As a result, the pointer information of the reference target in the data table jumps to the jump destination value in one process of this pointer update process (FIG. 48).

For example, in the second composite effect table shown in FIG. 45, if the condition that the reference target pointer information is one of "t+26" to "u" and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs, In the current processing round of the pointer update process (FIG. 48), the reference target pointer information jumps to the jump destination "u+1". Thereby, when the execution period of the first expected performance has reached a predetermined period (specifically, one second), it becomes possible to start the second expected performance based on the occurrence of the sixth opportunity.

If it is determined in step S2009 that the jump condition is not set in the pointer information of the reference target, or if it is determined in step S2010 that the jump condition is not satisfied, the pointer information of the reference target is updated. It is determined whether the conditions are set (step S2012). If the update condition is set (step S2012: YES), it is determined whether the update condition is satisfied (step S2013).

If it is determined in step S2012 that the update condition is not set, or if it is determined in step S2013 that the update condition is satisfied, reference is made by adding 1 to the value of the pointer counter PCn in the target layer. The target pointer information is updated (step S2014). On the other hand, if an update condition is set for the pointer information to be referenced (step S2012: YES), but the update condition is not satisfied (step S2013: NO), the value of the pointer counter PCn is The process of step S2014 of adding 1 is not performed.

For example, in the second composite effect table shown in FIG. 45, in a situation where the reference target pointer information is "q", the third trigger has not occurred and the update condition set for the pointer information is not satisfied. In this case, the pointer information of the reference target is not updated to "q+1" until the update condition is satisfied. This prevents the left stop effect from starting before the ON operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the first stop is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2002, if step S2005 is performed, if step S2008 is performed, if step S2011 is performed, if a negative determination is made in step S2013, or When the process of step S2014 is performed, it is determined whether the value of the target layer counter 114 is "11" (step S2015). If the value of the target layer counter 114 is not "11" (step S2015: NO), the target layer is updated by adding 1 to the value of the target layer counter 114 (step S2016), and the process returns to step S2002. Then, the processes of steps S2002 to S2016 are repeatedly executed until an affirmative determination is made in step S2015. As a result, while updating the target layers in the reading area 94a in the order of 0th layer LY0 → 1st layer LY1 →... → 11th layer LY11, each of the 0th to 11th layers LY0 to LY11 is read out. It is possible to update the pointer information of the reference target of the data table. In addition, if the reference target pointer information has been updated to the final pointer information in the 0th to 11th layers LY0 to LY11, and repeat information is not set for the final pointer information, the data The layer LYn from which the table is being read can be cleared.

On the other hand, if the value of the target layer counter 114 is "11" (step S2015: YES), it means that the process for updating pointer information for all layers LY0 to LY11 has been completed, so this pointer Finish the update process.

Next, the display control process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49. Note that the display control process is executed at the end of the interrupt process that is repeatedly executed in the production side MPU 92 at a relatively short period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

In the display control process, first, it is determined whether or not the output standby flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2101). The output standby flag indicates that the creation of the drawing list is completed and the rendering list is not output from the production side MPU 92 to the VDP 95 before receiving the image update completion signal indicating that the output of one frame's worth of image signals has been completed from the VDP 95. This is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to know that it is in a standby state. When outputting an image signal for one frame to the image display device 63, the VDP 95 starts outputting the image signal from a dot at the upper left corner of the display surface of the image display device 63, and then outputs the image signal from a horizontal dot that includes the dot at one end. Image signals are sequentially output to the dots arranged on the line, and image signals are output to the dots from left to right in order from the top to each horizontal line. Finally, an image signal is output to the dot at the lower right corner of the display screen. In this case, the VDP 95 outputs an image update completion signal to the production side MPU 92 at the timing of outputting the image signal for the last dot, thereby making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the update of the image of one frame has been completed. .

If it is determined in step S2101 that the output standby flag is not set to "1", it is determined whether or not the delaying flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2102). In the display control process, various calculation processes such as a background calculation process (step S2107), a presentation calculation process (step S2110), and a notification calculation process (step S2113), which will be described later, are executed. In this case, the period required to execute various calculation processes varies depending on the number of individual images displayed on the image display device 63, the type of individual images, and the display mode of the individual images. Note that the individual image refers to one still image defined by still image data such as background data, or one sprite defined by sprite data such as pattern sprite data. As a result of variations in the period required to execute various types of arithmetic processing, it is possible that the timing for starting the next round of interrupt processing may occur before the execution of all the arithmetic processing is completed in the display control processing. In this slot machine 10, when it is time to start the next processing cycle of interrupt processing while the display control processing is being executed, instead of continuing the display control processing as it is, a new processing cycle of the interrupt processing is started. The configuration is such that a processing cycle is started. However, when starting a new processing round of interrupt processing, the calculation result of the display control processing at that point is memorized and retained, and the calculation process is started from the middle of the calculation in the display control processing of the interrupt processing of the new processing round. By restarting the process, it is possible to prevent arithmetic processing for one update timing from remaining unexecuted. If the delayed flag is set to "1", the execution of various calculation processes in the display control process (the processes of steps S2107, S2110, and S2113) is temporarily interrupted and delayed, as described above. It means a situation.

If the delayed flag is not set to "1" (step S2102: NO), a setting process for starting control is executed (step S2103). In the setting process for starting control, first, based on the display data set in the display setting area 113 in the production side RAM 94, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image to be started for control in this processing time. judge. If it exists, the production-side RAM 94 searches for an empty buffer area for performing various calculations when controlling the individual images, and performs one-to-one processing on the individual images that are recognized as control start targets. Allocate free buffer space accordingly. Further, initialization processing is executed for all the reserved free buffer areas, and parameter information for starting control according to the individual image is set for the initialized free buffer areas.

In the following step S2104, a control target update process is executed. In the control target update process, individual images for which the setting process for starting control in step S2103 has been completed and that are included in one frame of pictures from the current processing time onward are recognized as control targets. In addition, in the control target update process, based on the display data set in the display setting area 113, individual images to be deleted from among the individual images recognized as control targets are excluded from the control targets. Then, initialization processing is performed on the buffer area reserved for the excluded individual image.

Thereafter, a new activation of the interrupt process is permitted in step S2105, and a new activation of the interrupt process is prohibited in the immediately following step S2106, and then background arithmetic processing is executed (step S2107). In the background calculation process, parameter information necessary for setting information about the image of the background display layer 101 (FIG. 38) in the drawing list is calculated and derived. Specifically, based on the display data set in the background area 113a of the display setting area 113, a still image for the backmost side and a background sprite that constitute a background image in each game state are created. Understand the targets of this control update. Furthermore, for the grasped control update target, various parameter information necessary for creating a drawing list, such as coordinates on a virtual two-dimensional plane, rotation angle, scale, and transparency information, is calculated and derived. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameter information into an area secured in the production side RAM 94 in correspondence with each individual image.

Thereafter, a new activation of the interrupt process is permitted in step S2108, and a new activation of the interrupt process is prohibited in the immediately following step S2109, and then the performance calculation process is executed (step S2110). In the rendering calculation process, necessary parameter information is calculated and derived for setting information about the images of the first rendering display layer 102 to the fifth rendering display layer 106 (FIG. 38) in the drawing list. Specifically, based on the display data set in the first effect area 113b to fifth effect area 113f of the display setting area 113, the first effect display layer 102 to the fifth effect display layer are Among the performance sprites constituting the 106 images, the current control update target is grasped, and the various parameter information described above is derived for the control update target. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameter information into an area secured in the production side RAM 94 in correspondence with each individual image.

Thereafter, a new activation of the interrupt process is permitted in step S2111, a new activation of the interrupt process is prohibited in the immediately following step S2112, and then the notification arithmetic process is executed (step S2113). In the notification calculation process, necessary parameter information is calculated and derived for setting information about the images of the first notification display layer 107 to the second notification display layer 108 (FIG. 38) in the drawing list. Specifically, based on the display data set in the first notification area 113g to second notification area 113h of the display setting area 113, the first notification display layer 107 to the second notification display layer A notification sprite for displaying the notification image 108 and various parameter information to be applied to the notification sprite are derived.

Thereafter, the computation completion flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2114). As already explained, the calculation completion flag indicates that each type of calculation processing for creating a drawing list (background calculation processing in step S2107, production calculation processing in step S2110, and notification calculation processing in step S2113) is executed once each. This is a flag for specifying what has been executed by the production side MPU 92.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, or if step S2114 is performed, it is determined whether an image update completion signal has been received from the VDP 95 (step S2115). If the image update completion signal has been received (step S2115: YES), drawing list output processing is executed (step S2116). In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying one frame of pictures is created, and the created drawing list is sent to the VDP 95. As already explained, in the VDP 95, according to this drawing list, the image of the background display layer 101 → the image of the first effect display layer 102 → the image of the second effect display layer 103 → the image of the third effect display layer 104 → Image of the fourth presentation display layer 105 → Image of the fifth presentation display layer 106 → Image of the first notification display layer 107 → Image of the second notification display layer 108 in the following order: Display layers 101 to 108 Display data is created for one composite image that is generated in such a manner that the images are sequentially superimposed from the back side of the screen toward the front side of the screen. The display data is created in the frame area of the video RAM 96. As already explained, the video RAM 96 is provided with two frame areas, and display data is created alternately in the two frame areas. The VDP 95 outputs one frame worth of image signals corresponding to the display data created in the frame area to the image display device 63, thereby causing the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data. As a result, the image of the background display layer 101, the image of the first presentation display layer 102, the image of the second presentation display layer 103, the image of the third presentation display layer 104, and the image of the fourth presentation display layer 105. , the image of the fifth presentation display layer 106, the image of the first notification display layer 107, and the image of the second notification display layer 108 are generated in a manner that they are sequentially overlapped from the back of the screen to the front of the screen. The two composite images are displayed on the image display device 63 as a picture for one frame.

After executing the drawing list output process in step S2116, the output standby flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2117), and this display control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2115 that the image update completion signal has not been received, the output standby flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2118), and the present display control process is ended.

If it is determined in step S2102 that the delay flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1", the delay flag is cleared to "0" (step S2119), and then the interruption address in the performance side RAM 94 is set. By reading the address data from the area, the process jumps to the process that was being executed immediately before a new interrupt process was started in the previous display control process (step S2120). This makes it possible to resume execution of the process from the timing at which the previous display control process was interrupted.

Next, the bonus notification process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 50. Note that the bonus notification process is executed in step S614 of the reel control process (FIG. 24).

In the bonus notification processing, first, it is determined whether or not this is a bonus winning game in which any bonus winning (either the 1st to 4th BB winning or the 1st to 2nd RB winning) occurred in the winning combination processing (Figure 14). (Step S2201). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, it is determined in the winning determination process (step S613 of the reel control process (FIG. 24)) whether or not a bonus win has been established (step S2202). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, the present bonus announcement will be made without executing the process for executing the bonus announcement effect and the process for executing the re-variation effect (the processes of steps S2203 to S2206). end the process. In this way, if a bonus win corresponding to the bonus win is established in a game in which the bonus win has occurred, the bonus announcement performance and the re-fluctuation performance are not executed. In this case, as already explained, an affirmative determination is made in step S1501 of the bonus processing (FIG. 34), and a bonus start command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 in step S1510.

Returning to the explanation of the bonus notification processing (FIG. 50), if it is determined in step S2202 that the bonus winning has not been achieved, check whether the bonus notification winning flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". It is determined whether or not (step S2203). The bonus announcement winning flag is a flag that enables the main MPU 72 to recognize that the bonus announcement performance has been won in the announcement lottery process (step S2311 of the performance content determination process (FIG. 51)) to be described later. The bonus announcement winning flag is set to "1" in step S2313 of the performance content determination process (FIG. 51), which will be described later.

If the bonus announcement winning flag is set to "1" (step S2203: YES), a freeze setting process for announcement performance is executed (step S2204). In the freeze setting process for the announcement performance, numerical information corresponding to the total execution period (specifically 5.5 seconds) of the first expected performance and the bonus announcement performance is set in the freeze counter in the main side RAM 74. . As already explained, the execution period of the first expected performance is 1.5 seconds. Further, the execution period of the bonus announcement performance is 4 seconds. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). When a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in the freeze setting process (step S2204) for the announcement effect, the process waits in step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13). As a result, the start of a new game is in a standby state, so even if the start lever 41 is operated while the first expected performance and bonus announcement performance are being executed, the first expected performance and bonus announcement performance will be executed to the end. I can do that. In this way, by preventing the bonus announcement performance from being overlooked, it is possible to reliably show the player that a bonus win has occurred. Thereafter, the bonus announcement winning flag is cleared to "0" (step S2205), and the present bonus announcement process is ended.

On the other hand, if the bonus announcement winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S2203: NO), in the announcement lottery process (step S2311 of the effect content determination process (FIG. 51)), which will be described later. Since it means that the re-variation effect has been won, numerical information of "6" corresponding to 6 games is set in the number of played games counter provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S2206), and this bonus announcement effect is executed. end. The number of games played counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to determine whether or not the game is a target game for executing the re-variation effect. As already explained, if a bonus announcement is not performed in a game where a bonus win has occurred, and five games have been played without a corresponding bonus win, the next game will be restarted. This is the target game for variable production. The value of the played games counter is subtracted by 1 in step S2303 of the performance content setting process (FIG. 51), which will be described later. If 5 games are played without a bonus winning, the value of the played games counter is decremented by 1 and becomes "0" in step S2303 of the performance content setting process for the next game (FIG. 51). Therefore, this game becomes the target game for performing the re-variation effect. As already explained, if a bonus win is established before the re-variation performance is executed, the re-variation performance is canceled.

If a negative determination is made in step S2201, it is determined whether the re-variation effect flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2207). The re-variation performance flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to recognize that the game is a target game for re-variation performance. The re-fluctuation performance flag indicates that a bonus announcement performance is not performed in a game in which a bonus win has occurred, and after that, 5 games have been played without a corresponding bonus win being realized, and the game becomes a target game for executing a re-fluctuation performance. , is set to "1" in step S2305 of the performance content determination process (FIG. 51), which will be described later.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2207, it is determined in the winning determination process (step S613 of the reel control process (FIG. 24)) whether or not a bonus winning corresponding to the carried over bonus winning has been achieved. (Step S2208). If a negative determination is made in step S2208, the present bonus notification process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2208, that is, if a bonus winning is achieved in the game in which the re-variation effect is executed, the re-variation effect flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0", and the main side RAM 74 The value of the main side performance timer counter in is cleared to "0" (step S2209), and this bonus notification process is ended. As already explained, the main side performance timer counter allows the main side MPU 72 to grasp the remaining execution period of the intermediate stop performance and the first expected performance in the game where the second expected performance or re-variation performance is executed. It is a timer counter. In step S2209, the re-variation performance flag and the main side performance timer counter are cleared to "0", so that the re-variation performance is no longer performed. In this way, in the game where the re-variation effect is executed, if a bonus winning corresponding to the carried-over bonus win is achieved, the re-variation effect is canceled.

Next, the performance content determination process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 51. Note that the performance content determination process is executed in step S415 of the role lottery process (FIG. 14).

In the effect content determination process, if the bonus internal state is ST2 (step S2301: YES), it is determined whether the value of the number of played games counter in the main side RAM 74 is "1" or more (step S2302). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2302, the value of the number of played games counter is subtracted by 1 (step S2303), and it is determined whether the value of the number of played games counter after the 1 subtraction has become "0". (Step S2304). In a game in which a bonus winning has occurred, a bonus announcement performance is not performed, and in a game that has been started after five games have been played without a corresponding bonus winning being established (a game targeted for execution of the re-fluctuation performance), step S2303 By subtracting 1 from the value of the number of played games counter at , the value of the number of played games counter becomes "0". When an affirmative determination is made in step S2304, the re-variation effect flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2305). As a result, the current game becomes the target game for executing the re-variation effect.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the normal gaming state ST1 is established (step S2306), and if the normal gaming state ST1 is determined (step S2306: YES), the winning combination is determined. It is determined whether this is a game (bonus winning game) in which any bonus winning (any of the 1st to 4th BB and 1st to 2nd RB winnings) has occurred in the lottery process (FIG. 14) (step S2307 ). When a negative determination is made in step S2307, the main side second expected performance lottery process is executed (step S2308). In this way, the main side second expected performance lottery process is executed in a game in which no bonus win occurs in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14). In the main side second expected performance lottery process in step S2308, the main side second expected performance lottery table is read from the main side ROM 73. In the main side second expected performance lottery table, lottery results in which the second expected performance is won and lottery results in which the second expected performance is not won are set, and in order to determine the validity of these lottery results. Numerical information is set. In the main side second expected performance lottery table, the probability of winning the second expected performance in the main side second expected performance lottery is set to 1/20, and the probability of winning the second expected performance in the main side second expected performance lottery is set to 1/20. The probability of not winning is set to 19/20. Thereafter, the main side MPU 72 reads the numerical information of the random number counter that is updated regularly, and the read numerical information is checked against the read main side second expected performance lottery table. Then, a lottery result (either a lottery result that wins the second expected performance or a lottery result that does not win the second expected performance) in which a numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set is specified.

If the second expected performance is won in the main side second expected performance lottery process in step S2308 (step S2309: YES), the second expected performance flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" ( Step S2310). The second expected performance flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to recognize that the game is a target game for executing the second expected performance. As already explained, if a bonus announcement is not performed in a game in which a bonus win has occurred, and five games have been played without a bonus win, the next game to be started in that situation will be rescheduled. This will be the target game for the performance. In the game where the re-variation performance is to be executed, the re-variation performance is executed after the second expected performance ends. On the other hand, in the game where the second expected performance is executed by winning the second expected performance in the main side second expected performance lottery process in step S2308, while the second expected performance is executed, the re-variation performance is not executed.

On the other hand, if a bonus win occurs in the lottery process (FIG. 14) (step S2307: YES), an announcement lottery process is executed (step S2311). In the notification lottery process, the notification lottery table is read from the main side ROM 73. In the announcement lottery table, the lottery results for winning the bonus announcement performance and the lottery results for winning the re-variation performance are set, and numerical information for determining the success or failure of these lottery results is set. There is. In the announcement performance table, the probability of winning the bonus announcement performance and the probability of winning the re-variation performance in the announcement performance lottery are each set to 1/2. Thereafter, the main MPU 72 reads numerical information from a random number counter that is periodically updated, and compares the read numerical information against the read announcement lottery table. Then, it is determined that the performance (either the bonus announcement performance or the re-variation performance) in which a numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set has been won.

If the bonus announcement effect is won in the announcement lottery process in step S2311 (step S2312: YES), the bonus announcement winning flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2313). This makes it possible for the main MPU 72 to grasp that the player has won the bonus announcement performance.

If a negative determination is made in step S2302, if a negative determination is made in step S2304, if the process of step S2305 is performed, if a negative determination is made in step S2306, a negative determination is made in step S2309. In this case, if the process of step S2310 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S2312, or if the process of step S2313 is executed, other processes are executed (step S2314) and the content of the main effect is End the determination process. In other processing in step S2314, the general content of the production is determined by lottery using a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current gaming state, the current gaming section, and the result of the lottery process of the winning combination (FIG. 14). .

Next, the processing of steps S718 to S723 of the stop operation corresponding processing (FIG. 25) will be explained. In the stop operation corresponding process, after transmitting an OFF operation command to the production side MPU 92 in step S717, it is determined whether the second expected production flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S718 ).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S718, this means that the game is the target of the second expected performance, so a freeze setting process for the second expected performance is executed (step S719). In the freeze setting process, numerical information corresponding to the period from the occurrence of the sixth opportunity to the end of the second expected performance is set in the freeze counter in the main side RAM 74. As already explained, the main side RAM 74 is provided with a timer counter for the main side effect that allows the main side MPU 72 to grasp the remaining execution period of the intermediate stop effect and the first expected effect, and the stop operation corresponding processing ( In step S709 of FIG. 25), the timer counter for the main side effect indicates the execution period of the medium stop effect (specifically, 1 second) and the execution period of the first expected effect (specifically, 1.5 seconds). Numerical information corresponding to the total period (specifically, 2.5 seconds) is set. The value of the timer counter for the main side effect is decremented by 1 each time the timer subtraction process (step S209 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12)) is performed, so if the middle stop effect or the first expected effect is being executed. In this case, it is possible to grasp the remaining execution period of the intermediate stop performance and the first expected performance based on the value of the main side performance timer counter. In addition, if the middle stop performance and the first expected performance have ended, the execution period of the middle stop performance and the first expected performance will be changed based on the value of the main side performance timer counter being "0". It is now possible to know what is left. In the freeze setting process for the second expected performance (step S719), the remaining execution period of the intermediate stop performance and the first expected performance is grasped based on the value of the timer counter for the main side performance. If the remaining execution period is 0.5 seconds or more, the second expected performance is started when the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second). This means that numerical information corresponding to the total period of the remaining execution period minus 0.5 seconds and the execution period of the second expected performance (specifically, 1.5 seconds) is stored in the freeze counter. Set to . On the other hand, if the remaining execution period is less than 0.5 seconds, the execution period of the first expected effect has already reached the predetermined period (specifically, 1 second), and the second expected effect is immediately started. Since this means that the second expected performance is to be started, numerical information corresponding only to the execution period (specifically, 1.5 seconds) of the second expected performance is set in the freeze counter. In the freeze setting process for the second expected performance (step S719), after setting numerical information to the freeze counter, the value of the timer counter for the main side performance is cleared to "0".

The numerical information set in the freeze counter in step S719 is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). When a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in the freeze setting process for the second expected performance (step S719), the process waits in step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13). As already explained, when the sixth trigger occurs in a situation where the execution period of the first expected performance has reached a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) (when the performance side MPU 92 receives the OFF operation command) In this case, the second expected performance is started at the timing when the sixth opportunity occurs, while the sixth expected performance is started at a timing before the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second). When a trigger occurs, the second expected performance is started at the timing when the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second). In the freeze setting process for the second expected performance (step S719), numerical information corresponding to the period from the occurrence of the sixth trigger to the end of the second expected performance is set in the freeze counter, Even if the sixth opportunity occurs at a timing before the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period, it is possible to execute the second expected performance to the end. Furthermore, as already explained, in the normal performance (FIG. 13), if the second expected performance flag is set to "1", the wait is held in step S312 until the second expected performance flag is cleared to "0". The second expected performance flag is cleared to "0" in step S720, which will be described later. Therefore, even if the start lever 41 is operated to start the next game before the freeze setting process for the second expected performance (step S719) is executed, the The game never starts. Specifically, even if the start lever 41 is operated while the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop are held down, the game will not be started based on the operation. .

Thereafter, the second expected performance flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S720), and the main stop operation corresponding processing is ended. As described above, when the second expected performance flag is cleared to "0", a negative determination is made in step S312 of the normal process (FIG. 13), and the processes from step S313 onwards are executed. After a negative determination is made in step S312, normal processing is performed until the numerical information set in the freeze counter in the main side RAM 74 becomes "0" in the freeze setting process for the second expected performance (step S719). A negative determination is made in step S314 (FIG. 13). Therefore, even if the start lever 41 is operated at a timing before the end of the second expected performance, the game will not be started based on the operation. This makes it possible to execute the second expected performance to the end.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S718, it is determined whether the re-variation effect flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S721). If an affirmative determination is made in step S721, this means that the game is a target game for performing a re-fluctuation effect, so a freeze setting process for the re-fluctuation effect is executed (step S722). In the freeze setting process, numerical information corresponding to the period from the occurrence of the sixth trigger to the end of the re-fluctuation effect is set in the freeze counter in the main side RAM 74. As already explained in the freeze setting process for the second expected performance (step S719), the main side RAM 74 contains a main side RAM 74 that allows the main side MPU 72 to grasp the remaining execution period of the middle stop performance and the first expected performance. A production timer counter is provided, and when the middle stop production or the first expected production is being executed, the remaining execution period of the middle stop production and the first expected production is calculated based on the value of the main side production timer counter. It is now possible to understand. In addition, if the middle stop performance and the first expected performance have ended, the execution period of the middle stop performance and the first expected performance will be changed based on the value of the main side performance timer counter being "0". It is now possible to know what is left. In the freeze setting process for the re-fluctuation performance (step S722), the remaining execution period of the intermediate stop performance and the first expected performance is grasped based on the value of the timer counter for the main side performance. If the remaining execution period is 0.5 seconds or more, the second expected performance is started when the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second). This means that the remaining execution period minus 0.5 seconds, the execution period of the second expected effect (specifically 1.5 seconds), and the execution period of the re-fluctuation effect (specifically 4 seconds) is set in the freeze counter. On the other hand, if the remaining execution period is less than 0.5 seconds, the execution period of the first expected effect has already reached the predetermined period (specifically, 1 second), and the second expected effect is immediately started. Since it means that it has started, it is a numerical value corresponding to the total period of the execution period of the second expected effect (specifically 1.5 seconds) and the execution period of the re-fluctuation effect (specifically 4 seconds). Set information to the freeze counter. In the freeze setting process for the re-fluctuation effect (step S722), after setting numerical information to the freeze counter, the value of the timer counter for the main side effect is cleared to "0".

The numerical information set in the freeze counter in the freeze setting process (step S722) for re-fluctuation effect is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12). When a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in the freeze setting process (step S722) for the re-fluctuation effect, the process waits in step S314 in the normal process (FIG. 13). As already explained, when the sixth trigger occurs in a situation where the execution period of the first expected performance has reached a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) (when the performance side MPU 92 receives the OFF operation command) In this case, the second expected performance is started at the timing when the sixth opportunity occurs, while the sixth expected performance is started at a timing before the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second). When a trigger occurs, the second expected performance is started at the timing when the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second). In the freeze setting process for the re-fluctuation effect (step S722), the first Even when the sixth opportunity occurs at a timing before the execution period of the expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, one second), it is possible to execute the re-fluctuation performance to the end. Furthermore, as already explained, in the normal performance (FIG. 13), if the re-variation performance flag is set to "1", the configuration waits in step S313 until the re-variation performance flag is cleared to "0". The re-variation effect flag is cleared to "0" in step S723, which will be described later. Therefore, even if the start lever 41 is operated to start the next game before the freeze setting process for re-fluctuation effect (step S722) is executed, the game will be started based on the operation. is never started. Specifically, even if the start lever 41 is operated while the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop are held down, the game will not be started based on the operation. .

Thereafter, the re-variation effect flag in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S723), and the main stop operation corresponding process is ended. As described above, when the re-variation effect flag is cleared to "0", a negative determination is made in step S313 of the normal process (FIG. 13), and the processes after step S314 are executed. After a negative determination is made in step S313, normal processing ( A negative determination is made in step S314 in FIG. 13). Therefore, even if the start lever 41 is operated at a timing before the end of the re-variation performance, the game will not be started based on the operation. This makes it possible to execute the re-fluctuation effect to the end.

Next, the normal performance control process executed by the performance side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 52. Note that the normal production control process is executed by the production side MPU 92 as an interrupt process that is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

In the normal production control process, it is first determined whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 or the bonus internal state ST2 (step S2401). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, it is determined whether or not a bonus start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2402), and if a bonus start command has been received (step S2402: YES). Executes the effect setting process at the time of bonus start, which will be described later (step S2403), and ends the present normal effect control process.

If a negative determination is made in step S2402, it is determined whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2404). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2404, a winning result corresponding process, which will be described later, is executed (step S2405), and this normal performance control process is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S2404, it is determined whether any type notification performance flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2406). The type notification performance flag is a flag that enables the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the type notification performance should be executed and the type of type notification performance to be executed. In this slot machine 10, after the bonus announcement performance or the re-fluctuation performance is executed, until the bonus winning corresponding to the bonus winning (either the 1st to 4th BB winning or the 1st to 2nd RB winning) is achieved. In the game to be executed, a type announcement performance corresponding to the type of bonus winning is executed. In the type notification performance, a bonus type notification image is displayed on the image display device 63, showing a combination of symbols that will establish a bonus win corresponding to the bonus win that has occurred this time. For example, if the type of bonus winning that occurred this time is the 1st BB winning, the image display device 63 displays a bonus type notification image of "Red 7, Red 7, Red 7" corresponding to the symbol combination that makes the 1st BB winning. is displayed. By displaying the combination of symbols that establishes a bonus win on the image display device 63, the player can operate the stop buttons 42 to 44 after grasping the combination of symbols. In the performance side RAM 94, type notification performance flags are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the types of bonus winnings. The performance side MPU 92 grasps that the game is a game in which a type announcement performance should be executed based on the fact that one of the type notification performance flags is set to "1", and also determines whether the type notification performance flag is set to "1". To grasp the type of type announcement performance to be executed based on the type of announcement performance flag. The type announcement performance flag is set to "1" in step S2608 of the second performance information setting process (FIG. 54), which will be described later.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2406, the type notification performance process is executed (step S2407), and the normal performance control process is ended. In the type announcement performance process in step S2407, based on receiving the game start command, a type announcement performance table is created for executing the type announcement performance corresponding to the type announcement performance flag set to "1". The data is read from the side ROM 93 to the read area 94a. The type announcement effect table is read out to the 0th layer LY0. The type announcement performance is executed by controlling the execution of the performance in the performance side MPU 92 according to the read type notification performance table.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2406, it is determined whether a game start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2408). When the game start command is received (step S2408: YES), that is, when the first trigger occurs, clearing processing at the time of the game start is executed (step S2409). In the clearing process at the start of the game, the 0th to 8th layers LY0 to LY8 in the read area 94a are cleared. As a result, the data table read out to the 0th to 8th layers LY0 to LY8 in order to execute the effects of the previous game is cleared. Further, in the clearing process at the start of the game in step S2409, the first composition flag and the second composition flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 are cleared to "0". The first synthesis flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the first synthesis effect table should be created, and the second synthesis flag is a flag that allows the production side to understand that the second synthesis effect table should be generated. This is a flag that can be grasped by the MPU 92.

Thereafter, a first performance information setting process for setting information on various performances in the normal game state ST1 is executed (step S2410). FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the first effect information setting process.

In the first performance information setting process, first, the type setting process of the normal base performance is executed (step S2501). In the normal base effect type setting process, a normal base effect lottery is first performed to determine the normal base effect table to be executed. In the normal base performance lottery, the normal base performance lottery table is read from the performance side ROM 93. As already explained, the normal base performance table storage area 93a (FIG. 41(a)) of the performance side ROM 93 has six types of normal base performance tables for performing the normal base performance corresponding to the normal game state ST1. The base production table is memorized. The type information (any numerical information from 1 to 6) of the six types of normal base effect tables is set in the normal base effect lottery table, and the type information of each normal base effect table is entered to determine whether it is correct or not. A numerical range for judgment is set. Thereafter, the numerical information of the random number counter which is regularly updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read out, and the read numerical information is checked against the read out normal base performance lottery table. Then, a normal base effect table in which a numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set is specified as a read target. Thereafter, the type information of the specified normal base effect table is set in the base effect information counter 115 (FIG. 41(b)) provided in the effect side RAM 94. The base performance information counter 115 is a counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the normal base performance table specified as a read target in the normal base performance lottery. As already explained, there is only one type of symbol variation production table stored in the symbol variation production table storage area 93b of the production side ROM 93, and one type is stored in the effective notification production table storage area 93c of the production side ROM 93. Since there is only one type of effective notification effect table, processing for setting type information of the symbol variation effect and the effective notification effect is not executed.

Thereafter, a left stop effect type setting process is executed (step S2502). In the left stop effect type setting process, a left stop effect lottery is first performed to determine the left stop effect table to be executed. In the left stop performance lottery, the left stop performance lottery table is read from the performance side ROM 93. As already explained, nine types of left stop effect tables are stored in the left stop effect table storage area 93d (FIG. 41(a)) of the effect side ROM 93 as effect tables for performing the left stop effect. Type information (any numerical information from 1 to 9) of the nine types of left stop effect tables is set in the left stop effect lottery table, and the type information of each left stop effect table is used to determine validity. A numerical range is set. Thereafter, the numerical information of the random number counter which is regularly updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read out, and the read numerical information is checked against the read left stop performance lottery table. Then, the left stop effect table in which a numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set is specified as a read target. Thereafter, the type information of the specified left stop effect table is set in the left stop effect information counter 116 (FIG. 41(b)) provided in the effect side RAM 94. The left stop performance information counter 116 is a counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the left stop performance table specified as a read target in the left stop performance lottery.

After that, it is determined whether any bonus role (any of the 1st BB role to 4th BB role and the 1st RB role to 2nd RB role) has been won in the current role lottery process (FIG. 14) (step S2503). ). If a negative determination is made in step S2503, based on the information set in the game start command received from the main MPU 72, it is determined whether or not the game is the target of the second expected performance or re-variation performance. Determination is made (step S2504). In step S2504, if the second expected performance is won in the main side second expected performance lottery process (step S2308 of the performance content determination process (FIG. 51)) (step S2309: YES), and in a game where a bonus win has occurred, An affirmative determination is made when a re-variation performance is won and the game becomes a target game for the re-variation performance after five games are played without a bonus winning being established. If a negative determination is made in step S2504, a type setting process for the right stop effect is executed (step S2505).

In the right stop effect type setting process in step S2505, a right stop effect lottery is first performed to determine the right stop effect table to be executed. In the right stop performance lottery, the right stop performance lottery table is read from the performance side ROM 93. As already explained, the right stop performance table storage area 93e (FIG. 41(a)) of the performance side ROM 93 stores nine types of right stop performance tables as performance tables for performing the right stop performance corresponding to the normal gaming state ST1. is memorized. The type information (any numerical information from 1 to 9) of the nine types of right stop effect tables is set in the right stop effect lottery table, and the type information of each right stop effect table is used to determine validity. A numerical range is set. Thereafter, the numerical information of the random number counter that is regularly updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read out, and the read numerical information is checked against the read right stop performance lottery table. Then, the right stop effect table in which a numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set is specified as a read target. Thereafter, the type information of the specified right stop effect table is set in the right stop effect information counter 117 (FIG. 41(b)) provided in the effect side RAM 94. The right stop performance information counter 117 is a counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the right stop performance table specified as an execution target. The performance side MPU 92 specifies the right stop performance table to be read based on the value of the right stop performance information counter 117.

Thereafter, a process for setting the type of medium stop effect is executed (step S2506). In the middle stop effect type setting process, a middle stop effect lottery is first performed to determine the middle stop effect table to be executed. In the middle stop performance lottery, the middle stop performance lottery table is read from the performance side ROM 93. As already explained, nine types of mid-stop performance tables are stored in the mid-stop performance table storage area 93h (FIG. 41(a)) of the performance side ROM 93 as performance tables for performing mid-stop performance. The type information (any numerical information from 1 to 9) of the nine types of medium stop effect tables is set in the medium stop effect lottery table, and the type information of each medium stop effect table is used to determine the validity. A numerical range is set. Thereafter, the numerical information of the random number counter that is regularly updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read out, and the read numerical information is checked against the read out mid-stop performance lottery table. Then, a mid-stop effect table in which a numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set is specified as a reading target. Thereafter, the type information of the specified mid-stop performance table is set in the mid-stop performance information counter 118 (FIG. 41(b)) provided in the performance side RAM 94. The mid-stop performance information counter 118 is a counter that allows the performance-side MPU 92 to grasp the mid-stop performance table specified as an execution target.

Thereafter, it is determined whether a ready-to-reach state occurs (step S2507). Specifically, the type information (any numerical information from 1 to 9) set in the left stop performance information counter 116 in step S2502 and the type information set in the right stop performance information counter 117 in step S2505. (Numerical information of any one of 1 to 9) is the same value, it is determined that a ready-to-reach state occurs. If it is determined in step S2507 that a ready-to-win state does not occur, the main performance information setting process is directly ended. As already explained, if the ready-to-reach state does not occur, the mid-stop performance ends, and the performance of one game ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2507 that a ready-to-reach state occurs, a middle symbol adjustment process is executed (step S2508). In the middle symbol adjustment process, the type information (any numerical information from 1 to 9) set in the middle stop performance information counter 118 in step S2506 is the type information set in the left stop performance information counter 116 in step S2502. , and when the value is the same as the type information set in the right stop performance information counter 117 in step S2505, a process of shifting the numerical information set in the middle stop performance information counter 118 is executed. Specifically, 1 is subtracted from the value of the middle stop performance information counter 118, and if the numerical information after the 1 subtraction becomes "0", numerical information of "9" is set in the middle stop performance information counter 118. . As a result, the numbers shown by the left symbol image G5, right symbol image G6, and middle symbol image G7 all match on the image display device 63, even though the lottery result of the winning combination (FIG. 14) was a loss. This is prevented.

Thereafter, the first expected performance lottery process in case of a loss is executed (step S2509). As already explained, in this embodiment, the first expected performance may be executed even if a bonus win does not occur in the winning combination processing (FIG. 14). In the first expected performance lottery process at the time of a loss in step S2509, first, the first expected performance lottery table at the time of a loss is read from the performance side ROM 93. As already explained, the first expected effects include an effect in which the bubble image G8 is displayed on the image display device 63, an effect in which the water flow image G9 is displayed, an effect in which the swirl image G10 is displayed, and an effect in which the fish school image G11 is displayed. There are five types of effects: a display effect and a effect in which the giant character image G12 is displayed. A first expected performance table is stored. The type information (any numerical information from 1 to 5) of the five types of first expected performance tables is set in the first expected performance lottery table in case of a loss, and the type information of each first expected performance table is set. A numerical range is set for determining validity. In the first expected performance lottery table in the event of a loss, the probability of winning the bubble image G8 and the probability of winning the water flow image G9, which notify that the expectation level of winning the bonus is low, are set to 1/5, and the expectation level of winning the bonus is set to 1/5. The probability of winning the spiral image G10, which informs that the bonus is high, and the probability of winning the school of fish image G11 are set to 1/10, and the probability of winning the giant character image G12, which indicates that the expectation of winning the bonus is very high, is set to 1/10. The probability of not winning any of the first expected performances is set to 7/20. In this way, it is set such that the higher the expected performance image has the expectation of winning the bonus, the lower the winning probability in the first expected performance lottery in the event of a loss. Thereafter, numerical information of a random number counter that is regularly updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read out, and the read numerical information is compared against the read out first expected performance lottery table in the event of a loss. Thereby, the presence or absence of the first expected performance and the type of the first expected performance table when the first expected performance is executed are specified.

If you win any of the first expected performances in the first expected performance lottery process when you lose (step S2509) (step S2510: YES), the first expected performance specified in the first expected performance lottery process when you lose The type information is set in the first expected performance information counter 119 (FIG. 41(b)) provided in the performance side RAM 94 (step S2511). The first expected performance information counter 119 is a counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the first expected performance table specified as an execution target.

Thereafter, a notification effect lottery process is executed (step S2512). In the notification performance lottery process, first, the notification performance lottery table for determining the type of notification performance to be executed this time among the reach notification performance and the long press notification performance is read from the performance side ROM 93. In the notification effect lottery table, the probability of winning the reach notification effect lottery is set to 1/2, and the probability of winning the long press notification effect is set to 1/2. Thereafter, the numerical information of the random number counter that is regularly updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read out, and the read numerical information is checked against the read out notification performance lottery table. Thereby, either the reach notification performance or the long press notification performance is specified as the notification performance to be executed.

If you win the reach notification performance in the notification performance lottery process (step S2512) (step S2513: YES), set the reach notification performance flag provided in the performance side RAM94 to "1" (step S2514), This first performance information setting process ends. The reach notification performance flag is a flag that enables the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the reach notification performance should be executed. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2513, that is, if the long press notification performance is won in the notification performance lottery process (step S2512), the long press notification performance flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1". " is set (step S2515), and the first effect information setting process ends. The long-press notification performance flag is a flag that enables the performance-side MPU 92 to grasp that the long-press notification performance should be executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, that is, the game is a game in which one of the bonus wins (any of the 1st to 4th BB wins and the 1st to 2nd RB wins) occurred in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14). If it is determined, "1" is set to the corresponding winning flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 (step S2516). The production side RAM 94 includes a 1st BB winning flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to know that the 1st BB winning has occurred, and a 2nd BB winning flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to know that the 2nd BB winning has occurred. , a 3rd BB winning flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to know that the 3rd BB winning has occurred, a 4th BB winning flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to know that the 4th BB winning has occurred, and the 1st RB. A first RB winning flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to know that a winning has occurred, and a second RB winning flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to know that a second RB winning has occurred are provided. In step S2516, the winning flag corresponding to the bonus winning that has occurred this time is set to "1".

Thereafter, based on the information set in the game start command received from the main MPU 72, it is determined whether or not the bonus announcement performance has been won in the notification lottery process (step S2311 of the performance content determination process (FIG. 51)). (Step S2517). If the bonus announcement effect has not been won (step S2517: NO), the process advances to step S2505, and the processes of steps S2505 to S2515 described above are executed. In this way, in a game where a bonus win has occurred, if the player wins the re-variation effect without winning the bonus announcement effect in the announcement lottery process (step S2311 of the effect content determination process (FIG. 51)), the second expected Performance and re-variation performance are not executed. In this case, as already explained, a game that is started in a state where five games have been played without a bonus win being achieved becomes a game to which the re-variation effect is executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2504, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S2517, the second effect information setting process is executed (step S2518), and the first effect information setting process is ended. . FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the second effect information setting process.

In the second performance information setting process, first, the same type information (numerical information from 1 to 9) set in the left stop performance information counter 116 in the performance side RAM 94 is input to the right stop performance information counter 117. settings (step S2601). As a result, the number shown by the right symbol image G6 that stops on the right side area of the image display device 63 in the right stop performance and the number shown by the left symbol image G5 that stops on the left side area of the image display device 63 in the left stop performance become the same. As a result, a reach state will occur.

Thereafter, the type information corresponding to the type information (any numerical information from 1 to 9) set in the left stop effect information counter 116 is set in the middle stop effect information counter 118 in the effect side RAM 94 (step S2602). Specifically, the type information set in the left stop performance information counter 116 is read out, and 1 is added to the read type information. Then, if the numerical information after the 1 addition does not exceed the maximum value "9", the numerical information after the 1 addition is set in the medium stop performance information counter 118, and the numerical information after the 1 addition is set. is greater than the maximum value of "9", numerical information of "1" is set in the mid-stop performance information counter 118. As a result, in the central area of the image display device 63, the middle symbol image G7, which indicates the number immediately before the number indicated by the left symbol image G5 and the right symbol image G6, is stopped.

Thereafter, the first expected performance lottery process at the time of winning is executed (step S2603). In the first expected performance lottery process at the time of winning, first the first expected performance lottery table at the time of winning is read from the performance side ROM 93. As already explained with reference to FIGS. 40(a) to 40(e), the first expected effects include an effect in which the bubble image G8 is displayed on the image display device 63, and an effect in which the water flow image G9 is displayed. There are five types of effects: a presentation in which the spiral image G10 is displayed, a presentation in which the fish school image G11 is displayed, and a presentation in which the giant character image G12 is displayed. Five types of first expected performance tables are stored in the area 93i (FIG. 41(a)). The type information (any numerical information from 1 to 5) of the five types of first expected performance tables is set in the first expected performance lottery table at the time of winning, and the type information of each first expected performance table is set. A numerical range is set for determining validity. In the first expected performance lottery table at the time of winning, the winning probability of the bubble image G8 and the winning probability of the water stream image G9, which inform that the expectation level of winning the bonus is low, are set to 1/10, and the expectation level of winning the bonus is set to 1/10. The probability of winning the spiral image G10, which informs that the bonus is high, and the probability of winning the school of fish image G11 are set to 1/5, and the probability of winning the giant character image G12, which indicates that the expectation of winning the bonus is very high, is set to 1/5. It is set to 2/5. In this way, it is set such that the higher the expected performance image has a higher expectation of winning a bonus, the higher the probability of winning in the first expected performance lottery at the time of winning. In the first expected performance lottery at the time of winning, one of the first expected performances is always won. Thereafter, the numerical information of the random number counter that is regularly updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read out, and the read numerical information is checked against the read out first expected performance lottery table at the time of winning. Thereby, the type of the first expected effect table to be read is specified.

Thereafter, the type information (numerical information of any one of "1" to "5") of the first expected performance specified in the first expected performance lottery process at the time of winning (step S2603) is stored as the first expected performance information in the performance side RAM 94. The counter 119 (FIG. 41(b)) is set (step S2604).

Thereafter, based on the information set in the game start command received from the main MPU 72, it is determined whether the current game is a target game for executing the second expected performance or the re-variation performance (step S2605). As already explained, the second expected performance is a performance executed in either the target game of the second expected performance or the target game of the re-variation performance. In the game where the re-variation performance is to be executed, the first expected performance and the second expected performance are executed, and the re-variation performance is executed after the second expected performance ends. In addition, as already explained, in the game where the second expected performance is executed (game targeted for execution of the second expected performance or re-variation performance), the long press notification performance is executed based on the occurrence of the fourth trigger, and the bonus In the game where the notification performance is to be executed, the reach notification performance is executed based on the occurrence of the fourth opportunity. In step S2605, if the game is not a game in which a bonus win has occurred, an affirmative determination is made because the game is a target game for executing the second expected performance or re-variation performance. In addition, in step S2605, if the game is a game in which a bonus win has occurred and the bonus announcement performance is won in the notification lottery process (step S2311 of the performance content determination process (FIG. 51)), the second expected performance and the re-variation Since the performance is not executed, a negative judgment is made. If a negative determination is made in step S2605, it means that the second expected performance is not executed in the game, so the reach notification performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2606), and the performance is The bonus announcement performance flag 122 (FIG. 41(b)) provided in the side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2607). The bonus announcement performance flag 122 is a flag that enables the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the bonus announcement performance should be executed.

Thereafter, the type notification performance flag corresponding to the type of bonus winning this time is set to "1" (step S2608), and the second performance information setting process is ended. As already explained, the performance side RAM 94 is provided with type notification performance flags in one-to-one correspondence with the types of bonus winnings. Furthermore, as already explained, when a bonus win occurs, "1" is set to the winning flag corresponding to the type of bonus win in step S2516 of the first performance information setting process (FIG. 53). In step S2608, the type of bonus winning that has occurred is determined based on the type of winning flag set to "1", and the type notification performance flag corresponding to the type of bonus winning is set to "1". . As a result, in the next and subsequent games, a type announcement performance corresponding to the type of bonus winning carried over will be executed.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2605, a second expected performance lottery process on the performance side is executed (step S2609). In the performance-side second expected performance lottery process, first, the second expected performance lottery table corresponding to the occurrence situation of bonus winning is read from the performance-side ROM 93. Specifically, if the game is a target game for re-fluctuation performance and a BB win has occurred, the second expected performance lottery table at the time of BB win is read from the performance side ROM 93, and the game is the target game for re-fluctuation performance. If RB winning has occurred, the second expected performance lottery table at the time of RB winning is read from the performance side ROM 93. Further, if the game is a target game for executing the second expected performance, the second expected performance lottery table in case of a loss is read from the performance side ROM 93. As already explained with reference to FIGS. 40(a) to 40(e), the second expected effects include an effect in which the bubble image G8 is displayed on the image display device 63, and an effect in which the water flow image G9 is displayed. , there are five types of effects: an effect in which the spiral image G10 is displayed, an effect in which the fish school image G11 is displayed, and an effect in which the giant character image G12 is displayed. Five types of second expected performance tables are stored in the area 93k (FIG. 41(a)). The second expected performance lottery table when BB is won, the second expected performance lottery table when RB is won, and the second expected performance lottery table when lost are the type information (1 to 5) of the five types of second expected performance tables. (any numerical information) is set, and a numerical range for determining validity is set for each type of information in each second expected performance table.

In the performance-side second expected performance lottery process (step S2609), one of the second expected performances is always won. In the second expected performance lottery table when winning a BB, the winning probability of the bubble image G8 and the swirl image G10, which notify that the expectation level of winning the BB is low when a bonus winning occurs, is set to 1/10, The winning probability of the water flow image G9 and the fish school image G11, which inform that the expectation of winning the BB is high when a bonus winning occurs, is set to 1/5, and the expectation of winning the BB when a bonus winning occurs. The winning probability of the giant character image G12 that informs that the character is very high is set to 2/5. In this way, in the second expected performance lottery table for winning a BB, the winning probabilities of the bubble image G8 and the spiral image G10, which have a low expectation of winning a BB when a bonus winning occurs, are set to be the lowest, and the probability of winning is set to be the lowest. The winning probability of the giant character image G12, which has the highest expectation of BB winning when a winning occurs, is set to be the highest.

In the second expected performance lottery table for winning RB, the probability of winning the bubble image G8 and the swirl image G10, which notify that the expectation level of winning BB is low when a bonus winning has occurred, is set to 3/8. Therefore, when a bonus win occurs, the winning probability of the water flow image G9 and the winning probability of the fish school image G11, which inform that the expectation level of BB winning is high, is set to 1/10, and the bonus winning occurs. The winning probability of the giant character image G12, which informs that the expectation level of winning BB is very high, is set to 1/20. In this way, in the second expected performance lottery table for winning RB, the probability of winning is set high for the bubble image G8 and the spiral image G10, which notify that the expectation level of winning BB is low when a bonus winning occurs. In addition, the winning probabilities of the water flow image G9 and the fish school image G11, which notify that the expectation level of BB winning is high when a bonus winning has occurred, are set low. The winning probability of the giant character image G12, which indicates that the expectation level of BB winning is very high when a bonus winning has occurred, is set to be the lowest.

In the second expected performance lottery table in the event of a loss, the winning probability of the bubble image G8 and the spiral image G10, which notify that the expectation level of winning the BB is low when a bonus winning has occurred, is set to 17/40. , the winning probability of the water flow image G9 and the winning probability of the fish school image G11, which notify that the expectation level of BB winning is high when a bonus winning has occurred, are set to 1/20, and the winning probability of the fish school image G11 is set to 1/20. The winning probability of the giant character image G12, which informs that the expectation level of winning BB is very high, is set to 1/20. In this way, in the second expected performance lottery table when winning, the winning probability of the bubble image G8 and the swirl image G10, which notify that the expectation level of BB winning is low when a bonus winning has occurred, is set high. In addition, the winning probabilities of the water flow image G9 and the fish school image G11, which notify that the expectation level of the BB winning is high when a bonus winning has occurred, are set low. The winning probability of the giant character image G12, which indicates that the expectation level of BB winning is very high when a bonus winning has occurred, is set to be the lowest.

Because the winning probability of each expected effect image in the second expected effect lottery table when winning BB, the second expected effect lottery table when winning RB, and the second expected effect lottery table when losing is set as described above, , by displaying either the bubble image G8 or the swirl image G10 in the second expected performance, it is announced that the expectation level of BB winning when a bonus winning occurs is low, and the water flow images G9 and When any of the fish school images G11 is displayed, it is announced that there is a high expectation of winning the BB when a bonus win occurs, and when the giant character image G12 is displayed in the second expectation presentation, a bonus win occurs. It is reported that the expectation level of winning the BB in this case is very high.

In the performance-side second expected performance lottery process in step S2609, after reading the second expected performance lottery table corresponding to the bonus winning occurrence situation from the performance-side ROM 93, the numerical value of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the performance-side RAM 94. The information is read out and the read out numerical information is compared against the read out second expected performance lottery table. Thereby, the type of the second expected performance table is specified.

Thereafter, the type information of the second expected performance specified in the second expected performance lottery process on the performance side (step S2609) is set in the second expected performance information counter 121 (FIG. 41 (b)) provided in the performance side RAM 94. (Step S2610). The second expected performance information counter 121 is a counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the second expected performance table specified as the execution target. Thereafter, the game start information received from the main side MPU 72 Based on the information set in the command, it is determined whether or not the current game is a target game for re-fluctuation production (step S2611).If a negative determination is made in step S2611, the production side The first composition flag provided in the RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2612), and the second effect information setting process ends.As already explained, the first composition flag is set to "1" (step S2612). This is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp what should be created.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is a target game for performing a re-variation effect (step S2611: YES), a type setting process for a re-variation effect is executed (step S2613). In the re-fluctuation performance type setting process, type information corresponding to the numerical information stored in the mid-stop performance information counter 118 in the performance-side RAM 94 is set in the re-variation performance information counter 123 provided in the performance-side RAM 94. The re-fluctuation performance information counter 123 is a counter that allows the performance-side MPU 92 to grasp the re-fluctuation performance table to be read. Specifically, the numerical information set in the middle stop performance information counter 118 is read out, and the numerical information is subtracted by 1. Then, if the numerical information after subtracting 1 is the minimum value "1" or more, the numerical information after subtracting 1 is set in the re-fluctuation performance information counter 123, and the numerical information after subtracting 1 is the minimum value. If the value is less than "1", numerical information of "9", which is the maximum value, is set in the re-variation performance information counter 123.

Thereafter, the second combination flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2614). As already explained, the second composition flag is a flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the second composition production table should be generated. Thereafter, the type notification performance flag corresponding to the type of bonus winning carried over is set to "1" (step S2615), and the second performance information setting process is ended. As already explained, when a bonus win occurs, the win flag corresponding to the type of bonus win is set to "1" in step S2516 of the first performance information setting process (FIG. 53). In step S2615, similar to step S2608 already described, the type of bonus winning carried over is determined based on the type of winning flag set to "1", and a type announcement corresponding to the type of bonus winning is announced. Set the production flag to "1". As a result, in the next and subsequent games, a type announcement performance corresponding to the type of bonus winning carried over will be executed.

Returning to the description of the normal production control process (FIG. 52), after executing the first production information setting process in step S2410, the normal base production table reading process is executed (step S2411). In the normal base effect table reading process, the normal base effect table corresponding to the type information set in the base effect information counter 115 in the effect side RAM 94 is read from the normal base effect table storage area 93a of the effect side ROM 93. The normal base effect table is read out to the 0th layer LY0 of the readout area 94a. Thereafter, the base performance information counter 115 is cleared to "0".

After executing the normal base effect table reading process in step S2411, it is determined whether or not the first combination flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2412). When the first composition flag is set to "1" (step S2412: YES), the first composition table is read from the composition table storage area 93n of the production side ROM 93 (step S2413), and the first composition production is performed. First composition processing for generating a table is executed (step S2414).

In the first synthesis process in step S2414, the symbol variation production table is read from the symbol variation production table storage area 93b of the production side ROM 93, and the production data set in the symbol variation production table is read out in step S2413. Set for the pointer information of "0" to "p" in the composition table. After that, the effective notification effect table is read from the effective notification effect table storage area 93c of the effect side ROM 93, and the effect data set in the effective notification effect table is transferred to the pointers "p+1" to "q" of the first synthesis table. Set for information. Thereafter, the left stop effect table corresponding to the type information set in the left stop effect information counter 116 in the effect side RAM 94 is read from the left stop effect table storage area 93d of the effect side ROM93, and the left stop effect table is set in the left stop effect table. The effect data that is present is set for the pointer information of "q+1" to "r" in the first composition table. Thereafter, the right stop performance table corresponding to the type information set in the right stop performance information counter 117 in the performance side RAM 94 is read from the right stop performance table storage area 93e of the performance side ROM 93, and the right stop performance table is set in the right stop performance table. The address information and setting destination information of the display data among the existing performance data are set to the pointer information of "r+1" to "s" of the first synthesis table. In addition, the reach notification performance table is read from the reach notification performance table storage area 93f of the performance side ROM 93, and the sound data set in the reach notification performance table is converted into the pointer information of "r+1" to "s" of the first synthesis table. Set against. As a result, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that the reach notification sound is output in accordance with the right stop performance. Thereafter, the middle stop production table corresponding to the type information set in the middle stop production information counter 118 in the production side RAM 94 is read from the middle stop production table storage area 93h of the production side ROM 93, and the medium stop production table is set in the middle stop production table. The effect data that is present is set for the pointer information of "s+1" to "t" in the first synthesis table. Thereafter, the first expected performance table corresponding to the type information set in the first expected performance information counter 119 in the performance side RAM 94 is read from the first expected performance table storage area 93i of the performance side ROM93, and the first expected performance table is read out from the first expected performance table storage area 93i of the performance side ROM93. The effect data set in the effect execution area is set for the pointer information of "t+1" to "u" of the first synthesis table. Thereafter, the second expected performance table corresponding to the type information set in the second expected performance information counter 121 in the performance side RAM 94 is read from the second expected performance table storage area 93k of the performance side ROM 93, and the second expected performance table is read out from the second expected performance table storage area 93k of the performance side ROM93. The effect data set in is set for the pointer information of "u+1" to "v" in the first synthesis table. As a result, the first composite effect table is generated. Thereafter, the left stop performance information counter 116, right stop performance information counter 117, middle stop performance information counter 118, first expected performance information counter 119, and second expected performance information counter 121 in the performance side RAM 94 are cleared to "0".

Thereafter, the process of reading out the first composite effect table is executed (step S2415), and this normal effect control process is ended. In the first composite effect table reading process in step S2415, the first composite effect table generated in step S2414 is read to the first layer LY1 in the read area 94a.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2412 that the first composition flag is not set to "1", it is determined whether or not the second composition flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2416). If the second composition flag is set to "1" (step S2416: YES), the second composition table is read from the composition table storage area 93n of the production side ROM 93 (step S2417), and the second composition production is performed. A second composition process for generating a table is executed (step S2418).

In the second synthesis process in step S2418, the symbol variation production table is read from the symbol variation production table storage area 93b of the production side ROM 93, and the production data set in the symbol variation production table is read out in step S2417. Set for the pointer information of "0" to "p" in the composition table. Thereafter, the effective notification effect table is read from the effective notification effect table storage area 93c of the effect side ROM 93, and the effect data set in the effective notification effect table is transferred to the pointers "p+1" to "q" of the second synthesis table. Set for information. Thereafter, the left stop effect table corresponding to the type information set in the left stop effect information counter 116 in the effect side RAM 94 is read from the left stop effect table storage area 93d of the effect side ROM93, and the left stop effect table is set in the left stop effect table. The effect data that exists is set for the pointer information of "q+1" to "r" in the second synthesis table. Thereafter, the right stop performance table corresponding to the type information set in the right stop performance information counter 117 in the performance side RAM 94 is read from the right stop performance table storage area 93e of the performance side ROM 93, and the right stop performance table is set in the right stop performance table. The address information and setting destination information of the display data among the existing performance data are set to the pointer information of "r+1" to "s" in the second synthesis table. In addition, the long press notification effect table is read from the long press notification effect table storage area 93g of the performance side ROM 93, and the sound data set in the long press effect table is transferred to the pointers "r+1" to "s" of the second synthesis table. Set for information. As a result, the sound output control of the speaker 62 is performed so that the long press notification sound is output in accordance with the right stop effect. Thereafter, the middle stop production table corresponding to the type information set in the middle stop production information counter 118 in the production side RAM 94 is read from the middle stop production table storage area 93h of the production side ROM 93, and the medium stop production table is set in the middle stop production table. The effect data that is present is set for the pointer information of "s+1" to "t" in the second synthesis table. Thereafter, the first expected performance table corresponding to the type information set in the first expected performance information counter 119 in the performance side RAM 94 is read from the first expected performance table storage area 93i of the performance side ROM93, and the first expected performance table is read out from the first expected performance table storage area 93i of the performance side ROM93. The performance data set in the performance execution area is set for the pointer information of "t+1" to "u" of the second synthesis table. Thereafter, the second expected performance table corresponding to the type information set in the second expected performance information counter 121 in the performance side RAM 94 is read from the second expected performance table storage area 93k of the performance side ROM 93, and the second expected performance table is read out from the second expected performance table storage area 93k of the performance side ROM93. The effect data set in 2 is set for the pointer information of "u+1" to "v" in the second synthesis table. Thereafter, the re-variation effect table corresponding to the type information set in the re-variation effect information counter 123 in the effect-side RAM 94 is read from the re-variation effect table storage area 93m of the effect-side ROM 93, and the effect execution area of the re-variation effect table is read out. The effect data set in is set for the pointer information of "v+1" to "w" in the second synthesis table. As a result, a second composite effect table is generated. After that, the left stop performance information counter 116, the right stop performance information counter 117, the middle stop performance information counter 118, the first expected performance information counter 119, the second expected performance information counter 121, and the re-variation performance information counter 123 in the performance side RAM 94. Clear to "0".

Thereafter, the process of reading out the second composite effect table is executed (step S2419), and this normal effect control process is ended. In the second composite effect table reading process in step S2419, the second composite effect table generated in step S2418 is read to the first layer LY1 in the read area 94a.

On the other hand, if "1" is not set in either the first composition flag or the second composition flag (step S2412: NO, step S2416: NO), the reading process of the symbol variation effect table is executed ( Step S2420), this normal performance control process ends. In the reading process of the symbol variation effect table, the symbol variation effect table stored in the symbol variation effect table storage area 93b of the effect side ROM 93 is read out to the first layer LY1 of the read area 94a.

If it is determined in step S2408 that the game start command has not been received, a read process is executed (step S2421), and the normal effect control process is ended. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the read processing.

In the readout process, it is first determined whether "1" is set in either the first combination flag or the second combination flag in the performance side RAM 94 (step S2701). If either the first composition flag or the second composition flag is set to "1" (step S2701: YES), the first composition effect table or the second composition effect table is the first composition table in the readout area 94a. This means that the data is being read to layer LY1. In this case, since there is no need to read out the corresponding effect table based on the occurrence of the second to fifth triggers, the main readout process is ended without executing the processes after step S2702.

On the other hand, if "1" is not set in either the first composite flag or the second composite flag (step S2701: NO), it is determined whether a constant speed rotation start command has been received from the main MPU 72. (Step S2702). When the constant speed rotation start command is received (step S2702: YES), that is, when the second trigger occurs, the effective notification effect table readout process is executed (step S2703), and the main readout process is ended. . In the process of reading the effective notification effect table, the effective notification effect table stored in the effective notification effect table storage area 93c of the effect side ROM 93 is read to the second layer LY2 of the read area 94a.

If a negative determination is made in step S2702, whether a stop command command in which information indicating that the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the first stop have been turned on has been received from the main MPU 72? It is determined whether or not (step S2704). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2704, that is, when the third trigger occurs, the left stop effect table readout process is executed (step S2705), and the main readout process is ended. In the process of reading the left stop effect table, one of the nine types of left stop effect tables stored in the left stop effect table storage area 93d of the effect side ROM93 is set in the left stop effect information counter 116 of the effect side RAM94. Identify the left stop effect table corresponding to the type information. Thereafter, the identified left stop effect table is read out to the third layer LY3 in the readout area 94a. Then, the left stop performance information counter 116 is cleared to "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S2704, whether a stop command command in which information indicating that the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the second stop have been turned on has been received from the main MPU 72? It is determined whether or not (step S2706). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2706, that is, if the fourth opportunity occurs, a right stop effect table reading process is executed (step S2707). In the process of reading the right stop performance table, the right stop performance information counter 117 of the performance side RAM 94 is set from among the nine types of right stop performance tables stored in the right stop performance table storage area 93e of the performance side ROM 93. Identify the right stop effect table corresponding to the type information. Thereafter, the identified right stop effect table is read out to the fourth layer LY4 in the readout area 94a. Then, the right stop performance information counter 117 is cleared to "0".

Thereafter, it is determined whether the reach notification performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2708). When the reach notification performance flag is set to "1" (step S2708: YES), read processing of the reach notification performance table is executed (step S2709), and the main readout process is ended. In the process of reading out the reach notification performance table, the reach notification performance table stored in the reach notification performance table storage area 93f of the performance side ROM 93 is read out to the fifth layer LY5 in the readout area 94a. Then, the reach notification effect flag is cleared to "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S2708, it is determined whether the long press notification performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2710). If the long press notification effect flag is set to "1" (step S2710: YES), the long press notification effect table read process is executed (step S2711), and the main read process ends. In the process of reading the long press notification effect table, the reach notification effect table stored in the long press notification effect table storage area 93g of the effect side ROM 93 is read out to the fifth layer LY5 in the read area 94a. Then, the long press notification effect flag is cleared to "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S2706, whether a stop command command in which information indicating that the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop have been turned on has been received from the main MPU 72? It is determined whether or not (step S2712). If a negative determination is made in step S2712, the main readout process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2712, that is, when the fifth trigger occurs, a process for reading the mid-stop effect table is executed (step S2713). In the process of reading the middle stop effect table, one of the nine types of middle stop effect tables stored in the middle stop effect table storage area 93h of the effect side ROM 93 is set in the middle stop effect information counter 118 of the effect side RAM 94. A medium stop effect table corresponding to the type information is specified. Thereafter, the identified mid-stop effect table is read out to the readout area 94a. Specifically, if the data table (reach notification effect table) has already been read out in the fifth layer LY5, the middle stop effect table is read out in the sixth layer LY6, and the data table is read out in the fifth layer LY5. If not, the middle stop effect table is read out to the fifth layer LY5. Thereafter, the medium stop performance information counter 118 is cleared to "0".

Thereafter, the first expected performance table is read out (step S2714). In the process of reading out the first expected performance table, if the value of the first expected performance information counter 119 in the performance side RAM 94 is "1" or more, the value of 5 stored in the first expected performance table storage area 93i of the performance side ROM93 is The first expected performance table corresponding to the value of the first expected performance information counter 119 is specified from among the first expected performance tables of the type. Thereafter, the identified first expected performance table is read out to the seventh layer LY7 of the readout area 94a. Then, the value of the first expected performance information counter 119 is cleared to "0". On the other hand, when the value of the first expected performance information counter 119 is "0", the first expected performance table is not read out.

Thereafter, the process for reading out the bonus announcement effect table is executed (step S2715), and the main reading process is ended. In the process of reading the bonus announcement performance table, if the bonus announcement performance flag 122 in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1", the bonus announcement performance table stored in the bonus announcement performance table storage area 93j of the performance side ROM 93 is read. The data is read to the eighth layer LY8 of the read area 94a. Then, the value of the bonus announcement performance flag 122 is cleared to "0". On the other hand, if the bonus announcement performance flag 122 is not set to "1", the bonus announcement performance table is not read.

Next, the winning result handling process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56(a). Note that the winning result corresponding process is executed in step S2405 of the normal production control process (FIG. 52).

In the winning result handling process, first, based on the winning result command received from the main MPU 72, it is determined whether or not a bonus winning corresponding to the occurring bonus winning has been achieved (step S2801). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the current game is a target game for executing a bonus announcement effect (step S2802). Specifically, when the bonus announcement performance flag 122 (FIG. 41(b)) in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1", it is determined that the current game is the target game for executing the bonus announcement performance. If the game is a target game for executing a bonus announcement performance (step S2802: YES), processing for canceling the bonus announcement performance is executed (step S2803). In the process of canceling the bonus announcement performance, the eighth layer LY8 from which the bonus announcement performance table is read out is cleared in the reading area 94a. As a result, the bonus announcement performance is canceled. In addition, in the process of canceling the bonus announcement performance (step S2803), the bonus announcement performance flag 122 is cleared to "0". In this way, in the game where the bonus announcement performance is to be executed, if a bonus win corresponding to the currently occurring bonus win is established, the bonus announcement performance is canceled.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2802, it is determined whether or not the current game is a target game for performing the re-variation effect (step S2804). Specifically, if the second combination flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1", it is determined that the game is the target of the re-variation performance. If the game is a target game for performing a re-fluctuation effect (step S2804: YES), processing for canceling the re-fluctuation effect is executed (step S2805). In the process of canceling the re-fluctuation effect, the effect data set in the range of pointer information from "v+1" to "w" in the second composite effect table read out to the first layer LY1 of the read area 94a is delete. As already explained with reference to FIG. 45, the range of pointer information from "v+1" to "w" in the second composite effect table includes address information and setting destination information of display data for executing the re-fluctuation effect. , sound data, light emission data, and drive table address information are set. By deleting these performance data, the re-variation performance is canceled. In this way, in the game where the re-fluctuation performance is to be executed, if a bonus winning corresponding to the carried-over bonus winning is achieved, the re-fluctuation performance is canceled.

As already explained, in the reel control process (FIG. 24), after the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has stopped (step S611: YES), the winning result is sent from the main side MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92 in step S615. Command is sent. In the normal performance control process (FIG. 52), if the performance side MPU 92 receives the winning result command (step S2404: YES), the winning result corresponding process (FIG. 56(a)) is executed in step S2405. be done. The time required from the ON operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop until the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop and all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R become stopped. is maximum when a four-frame slip occurs, and is 190 milliseconds at maximum. On the other hand, in the game where the re-variation effect is executed, the middle stop effect is executed when the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop are turned on, and the first expected effect is executed after the middle stop effect ends. is executed. As already explained, the execution period of the medium stop effect is 1 second, which is longer than 190 milliseconds. In addition, as already explained, the condition is that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second), and that the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop is performed. When both conditions are satisfied, the second expected performance is executed, and the re-variation performance is executed after the second expected performance is completed. The time required from the ON operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop to the execution of the re-fluctuation effect cancellation process (step S2805) is the time required for the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop to be executed. Since it is shorter than the time required from when the ON operation is performed until the re-fluctuation effect is started, the re-fluctuation effect canceling process (step S2805) is executed at a timing before the re-fluctuation effect is started. You can cancel the execution of the re-fluctuation effect. This prevents the execution of the re-fluctuation performance from being stopped during the execution of the re-fluctuation performance.

If the process in step S2803 is performed, if a negative determination is made in step S2804, or if the process in step S2805 is performed, the accessory setting process (FIG. 78) at the time of bonus winning, which will be described later, is executed. (Step S2806), the main winning result handling process ends.

Next, the effect setting process at the time of starting the bonus executed by the effect side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 56(b). Note that the performance setting process at the time of starting the bonus is executed in step S2403 of the normal performance control process (FIG. 52) when the performance side MPU 92 receives a bonus start command from the main side MPU 72.

In the performance setting process at the time of starting the bonus, first, a performance end process is executed (step S2901). In the performance end process, the 0th layer LY0 from which the base performance table is read out and the 1st to 8th layers LY1 to LY8 from which various performance tables are read out are cleared in the readout area 94a. Further, the display data for the normal base effect and the display data for various effects set in the display setting area 113 are cleared. As a result, the normal base effect and various effects that were being performed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 are ended.

Thereafter, the type of bonus start effect corresponding to the bonus start command received from the main side MPU 72 is grasped (step S2902), and a bonus start effect table for executing the grasped bonus start effect is read out from the effect side ROM 93 in the area for reading. 94a (step S2903). The bonus start effect table is read out to the 0th layer LY0. The bonus start effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the effect by the effect side MPU 92 according to the read bonus start effect table. Thereafter, the type notification performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2904), and the performance setting process at the start of this bonus is ended. By clearing the type announcement effect flag to "0" in step S2904, the type announcement effect will not be executed in the next game and thereafter.

As described above, in the normal game state ST1, a plurality of effects are executed in parallel based on the occurrence of the first to sixth opportunities during one game. The number of combinations of the plurality of effects is enormous, and if the effect tables corresponding to all the combinations of the plurality of effects are stored in advance in the effect side ROM 93, the effects for storing the effect table can be stored in advance. The storage capacity of the side ROM 93 increases. On the other hand, when the first composite effect table and the second composite effect table are not generated, various effect tables for executing various effects are individually stored in different layers LYn (n is any number from 0 to 11) of the readout area 94a. (an integer), and various effects are executed in parallel according to the various effect tables. In addition, when the first composite effect table or the second composite effect table is generated, the normal base effect executed according to the normal base effect table read out to the 0th layer LY0, and the normal base effect table read out to the first layer LY1. Various effects executed according to the first composite effect table or the second combined effect table are executed in parallel. Thereby, it is possible to increase the variation of combinations of executable performances while suppressing an increase in the storage capacity of the performance side ROM 93 for storing the performance table.

When the second composite effect table is generated, the symbol variation effect table, the effective notification effect table, the left stop effect table, the right stop effect table, the long press notification effect table, the middle stop effect table, the first expected effect table, and the second The performance data of the expected performance table and the re-variation performance table are read out to one layer LYn (specifically, the first layer LY1). As already explained, the readout area 94a includes a layer (0th layer LY0) from which the normal base effect table is read, a layer (1st to 8th layers LY1 to LY8) from which various effect tables are read, and various notifications. A layer (9th to 10th layers LY9 to LY10) from which tables are read and a layer (11th layer LY11) from which a drive table for the accessory 75 is read are provided. If the normal base effect table and the above-mentioned nine types of effect tables are read out to different layers LYn in a game targeted for execution of re-variation effect, the layer that should be provided in the readout area 94a in order to make these effect tables readable. The number of LYn will increase. On the other hand, in the game where the re-variation effect is executed, the second composite effect table is generated and read out to the first layer LY1, so that the second composite effect table is read out to the readout area 94a in order to execute various effects in one game. The maximum number of presentation tables that can be created has been reduced. This reduces the number of layers LYn in the read area 94a.

There is only one type of first synthesis table stored in the production side ROM 93, and the first synthesis effect table converts the production data set in each production table to be executed in each game into the one type. It is created by setting it in the first synthesis table. Further, there is only one type of second synthesis table stored in the production side ROM 93, and the second synthesis production table stores the production data set in each production table that is an execution target in each game. It is created by setting the type in the second synthesis table. Since the number of types of the first composition table and the second composition table that are stored in advance in the production side ROM 93 in order to generate the first composition production table and the second composition production table is one type, the composition table It is possible to reduce the storage capacity in the performance side ROM 93 for storing.

The normal base effect table for executing the normal base effect is read out to the 0th layer LY0, which is different from the first layer LY1 from which the first combined effect table or the second combined effect table is read. Therefore, even if the pointer information of the reference object in the first layer LY1 jumps, the pointer information of the reference object in the 0th layer LY0 is not affected. This makes it possible to start various performances in response to the occurrence of the first to sixth triggers while continuously displaying the background image G4 and outputting the regular bass music in the regular bass performance. It has become.

By having a configuration that generates a second composite effect table by combining five types of first expected effect tables and five types of second expected effect tables stored in the effect side ROM 93, all combinations (specific Compared to a configuration in which performance tables corresponding to 25 types of performance tables are stored in advance, the first expected performance is It is possible to increase the variations of combinations of the second expected performance and the second expected performance.

The second expected performance starts based on the condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs. be done. If the configuration is such that the second expected performance is started only on the occurrence of the sixth opportunity, if the sixth opportunity occurs while the middle stop performance is being executed, the second expected performance will start before the first expected performance. It will be done. In a configuration in which the expectation degree of bonus winning is reported in the first expected performance and the expectation level of BB winning when the bonus win occurs in the second expected performance, the first expected performance and the second expected performance are If the order is reversed, there is a risk of confusion for the players. On the other hand, based on the condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs, the second By adopting a configuration in which the second expected performance is started, it is possible to execute the first expected performance and the second expected performance in the order of the first expected performance → the second expected performance, and the first expected performance and the second expected performance are This prevents the order of the second expected performance from being reversed.

In the case where the period from the ON operation to the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop is short, and the sixth trigger occurs at a timing before the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period. Even if there is, a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) can be secured as the execution period of the first expected performance. This can prevent the execution period of the first expected performance from becoming so short that the contents of the first expected performance cannot be understood.

The period from the ON operation to the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop is long, and at the timing after the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) 6 trigger occurs, the second expected performance can be started without any delay based on the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's sense of participation by associating the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop with the start of the second expected performance in a manner that is easy for the player to understand. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The configuration is such that the execution period of the first expected performance is ensured over a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second), and when the sixth opportunity occurs, the second expected performance is started without any delay. By doing so, the player can be made to feel that the second expected performance has started with the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop. Therefore, after long-pressing the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop, the player performs the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 while expecting the second expected effect to occur. Become. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In a game in which a second expected performance is performed, the first composite performance table or the second composite performance table includes performance data for executing the first expected performance and performance data for executing the second expected performance. is generated, and the first composite effect table or the second composite effect table is read out to one layer (specifically, the first layer LY1). If the configuration is such that the first expected performance table and the second expected performance table are read out to different layers LYn, when the second expected performance table is read out based on the occurrence of the sixth trigger, the execution period of the first expected performance is predetermined. It becomes necessary to provide a configuration for the production side MPU 92 to grasp whether or not the period (specifically, 1 second) has been reached. On the other hand, a first composite performance table or a second composite performance table including performance data for executing the first expected performance and performance data for executing the second expected performance is placed in the first layer LY1. By having a configuration in which the execution period of the first expected performance has reached a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second), the configuration for the performance side MPU 92 to grasp whether or not is not included. Starting the second expected performance when both the condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs are satisfied. I can do it. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration for securing a predetermined period (specifically, one second) as the execution period of the first expected performance.

When both the condition that the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs, the display for the second expected effect is The data is set in the fourth effect area 113e of the display setting area 113. In this case, if display data for the first expected performance remains in the fourth performance area 113e, the display data is deleted and display data for the second expected performance is set. In the display setting area 113, the area where the display data for the second expected performance is set is the same area as the area where the display data for the first expected performance is set (fourth performance area 113e). By being set, it is possible to start the second expected performance without requiring the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the progress status of the first expected performance.

The layer LYn from which the mid-stop effect table is read out in the reading area 94a changes depending on the presence or absence of the reach notification effect. In addition, the effect table including the effect data of the symbol variation effect table, the effect table including the effect data of the left stop effect table, the effect table including the effect data of the right stop effect table, the effect data of the reach notification effect table. A layer LYn (from which a production table containing production data of the long-press notification production table, a production table containing production data of the mid-stop production table, and a production table containing production data of the first expected production table) are read out. (n is an integer from 0 to 11) varies depending on whether the first composite effect table and the second composite effect table are generated. In these effect tables, setting destination information of the display data is set in correspondence with address information of the display data. As a result, even if the reading destination of these effect tables changes, it is possible to prevent the setting destination of the display data in the display setting area 113 from changing, and also to prevent the setting destination of the display data from changing. It is possible to prevent the context of the image from changing.

A blank area in which no performance data is set is provided at the beginning of the first expected performance table, and a performance execution in which performance data for performing the first expected performance is set after the blank area. An area is provided. As a result, in a game in which the second expected performance is not executed, the middle stop performance table and the first expected performance table are read out based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity, and the first expected performance is performed while the middle stop performance is being executed. It is possible to prevent this from happening. In a game in which the second expected performance is executed, the performance execution area excluding the blank area of the first expected performance table is set in the first composite performance table or the second composite performance table. This makes it possible to start the first expected performance without causing a delay at the end timing of the intermediate stop performance.

<About the configuration for executing the performance in ART state ST6>
Next, various effects performed in the ART state ST6 will be explained. In the ART state ST6, when the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command from the main side MPU 72, the ART base performance and the ART normal performance are started. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 in the ART base performance and the ART normal performance.

In the ART bass performance, the background image G16 is displayed on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 57, and the ART bass music is output from the speaker 62. In the normal performance for ART, as shown in FIG. 57, a video display in which the character image G17 for ART is displayed on the image display device 63 is performed, and sound effects for the performance are output from the speaker 62 in accordance with the progress of the video display. be done. The ART normal performance is executed simultaneously with the ART base performance. The background image G16 is set in the background display layer 101 (FIG. 38), and the ART character image G17 is set in the first effect display layer 102 (FIG. 38). As already explained, in the display data created by the VDP 95 in the frame area of the video RAM 96, the image of the first effect display layer 102 is set closer to the screen than the image of the background display layer 101. Therefore, the ART character image G17 is displayed closer to the screen than the background image G16.

In the ART state ST6, the number of consecutive games is displayed. In the continuous game number display, as shown in FIG. 57, a continuous game number image G18 indicating the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 is displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63. The number of games indicated by the number of consecutive games image G18 is subtracted by 1 each time one game is completed. The number of consecutive games image G18 is set in the third effect display layer 104 (FIG. 38), and is displayed closer to the screen than the background image G16 and the ART character image G17.

In the ART state ST6, based on the performance side MPU 92 receiving the ART mid-addition command from the main side MPU 72, the additional main performance and the additional sub performance are started simultaneously. The top-up main performance and the top-up sub-performance are executed only when a top-up win occurs. As already explained, in this embodiment, there are a first add-on win where the number of add-on games is "50" and a second add-on win where the number of add-on games is "100". The top-up main performance is a performance that suggests the number of top-up games for the top-up winning that occurred this time. 58(a) to 58(c) and FIGS. 59(a) to 59(c) are explanations for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 in the additional main effect and additional sub effect in the ART state ST6. It is a diagram.

In the additional main performance, as shown in FIG. A moving image display is performed in which the image G20 and the second added character image G21 are displayed. The animation has a presentation content that suggests the number of additional games, and the animation ends with either the first additional character image G20 or the second additional character image G21 being displayed. By ending the video with only the first additional character image G20 being displayed, it is suggested that the first additional winning with the number of additional games being "50" has occurred, and the second additional character image G21 By ending the video with only "100" being displayed, it is suggested that a second bonus win in which the number of bonus games is "100" has occurred. The player can grasp the number of additional games by checking the types of additional character images G20 and G21 displayed at the end of the video. The additional character images G20 and G21 are set in the second effect display layer 103 (FIG. 38) and are displayed closer to the screen than the background image G16 and the ART character image G17.

As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58(a), a sub-display area 131 is provided at the bottom of the image display device 63 for executing additional sub-effects, and the sub-display area 131 is provided at the bottom of the image display device 63. The gauge frame image G19 is displayed in the sub-display area 131 until the screen is displayed. The gauge frame image G19 is composed of a horizontally long rectangular gauge display section G19a in which a gauge is displayed, and an outer frame section G19b displayed around the gauge display section G19a. The gauge frame image G19 is set in the fourth performance display layer 105 (FIG. 38), and is displayed closer to the screen than the background image G16 and the ART character image G17.

In the additional sub-effect, a gauge blinking display is performed in which the unit gauge image G22 is displayed blinking on the gauge display section G19a as shown in FIG. 58(a), and also as shown in FIGS. As shown, after the gauge blinking display ends, a gauge increase display is performed in which the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 are updated in stages. The gauge blinking display is started at the same time as the additional main performance, and continues for a predetermined period (specifically, 3 seconds) during which the additional main performance is executed. The gauge increase display is performed in a manner to notify the number of additional games of additional winnings that have occurred this time. When the first additional character image G20 is displayed last in the video of the additional main effect, a gauge increase display is executed in a manner to notify that the number of additional games is "50", and the video of the additional main effect is displayed. When the second additional character image G21 is displayed last, the gauge increase display is executed in a manner to notify that the number of additional games is "100".

In the additional sub-performance, the number of additional games is indicated by the number and color of unit gauge images G22 displayed on the gauge display section G19a. As shown in FIG. 58(b), the unit gauge image G22 is a vertically long rectangular image, and it is possible to display 30 unit gauge images G22 side by side in the horizontal direction on the gauge display section G19a. The unit gauge image G22 is set in the fifth presentation display layer 106 and is displayed on the nearer side of the screen than the gauge display section G19a.

A state in which "n" yellow unit gauge images G22 are lined up horizontally in the gauge display section G19a (n is an integer from 1 to 30) corresponds to a state in which the number of additional games is "n×10". , the state in which "n" red unit gauge images G22 are lined up horizontally (n is an integer from 1 to 30) corresponds to the state in which the number of additional games is "n x 10 + 300", and the purple unit The state in which "n" gauge images G22 are lined up horizontally (n is an integer from 1 to 30) corresponds to the state in which the number of additional games is "n x 10 + 600", and the silver unit gauge image G22 is The state where "n" pieces (n is an integer from 1 to 30) are lined up horizontally corresponds to the state where the number of additional games is "n x 10 + 900", and the golden unit gauge image G22 is lined up horizontally as "n". The state in which "n" (n is an integer from 1 to 30) lines up corresponds to the state in which the number of additional games is "n×10+1200." The gauge display section G19a is set to gray, making it easy to identify the unit gauge images G22 of each color displayed on the front side of the gauge display section G19a.

If the number of additional games is indicated only by the number of unit gauge images G22, the maximum number of unit gauge images G22 that can be displayed on the gauge display section G19a increases, so it is necessary to set the horizontal dimension of the unit gauge image G22 small. arise. With this configuration, the gauge increase display becomes difficult to see when the number of additional games in the additional winning that has occurred is small. In contrast, in this embodiment, the number of additional games is indicated by the number and color of the unit gauge image G22, so that the gauge is displayed in an increased manner both when the number of additional games is small and when the number of additional games is large. can be made easier to see.

In the gauge flashing display when the performance side MPU 92 receives an additional command during ART in a situation where the additional sub-performance is not being executed, as shown in FIG. The unit gauge image G22 is displayed, and the unit gauge image G22 is displayed blinking. In this case, in the gauge increase display performed after the gauge flashing display ends, as shown in FIG. The number and color of unit gauge images G22 displayed on the gauge display section G19a are updated in stages until G22 is displayed on the gauge display section G19a. Then, as shown in FIG. 58(c), a unit gauge image G22 of a number and color corresponding to the current number of additional games ("50" in FIG. 58(c)) is displayed on the gauge display section G19a. After that, the unit gauge image G22 is continuously displayed for one second. This indicates to the player that the number of additional games for the additional winning that has occurred this time is "50."

Thereafter, the unit gauge image G22 displayed on the gauge display section G19a disappears, and the additional sub effect ends. Although not shown, when the additional sub-effect is completed, only the gauge frame image G19 is displayed in the sub-display area 131 of the image display device 63. Further, the number of consecutive games "50" displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 at the end of the additional sub-performance is updated to "100" by adding the number of additional games "50".

The gauge increase display includes a high-speed display in which the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 displayed on the gauge display section G19a are updated at 200 millisecond intervals, and a high-speed display in which the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 displayed on the gauge display section G19a are updated. There is a slow display where the numbers and colors are updated every 400 milliseconds. In high-speed display, a new yellow unit gauge image G22 is displayed on the right side of the currently displayed unit gauge image G22 at an interval of 1 every 200 milliseconds, as shown in FIGS. 58(b) and 58(c). More will be added. In addition, in the low-speed display, a new yellow unit gauge image is displayed on the right side of the currently displayed unit gauge image G22 at intervals of one every 400 milliseconds, as shown in FIGS. 58(b) and 58(c). G22 will be added. In this way, in the gauge increase display, the horizontal dimension of the entire gauge is displayed increasing in the right direction from the left end of the gauge display section G19a.

The execution period of the gauge increase display varies depending on the number of add-on games, and the longer the number of add-on games, the longer the execution period of the gauge increase display. If the number of additional games is "50", in high-speed display, a unit gauge image of the number and color corresponding to the current number of additional games or the total number of additional games up to this time is displayed 800 milliseconds after the gauge increase display starts. G22 is displayed, and after this state continues for one second, the gauge increase display ends. On the other hand, in the low-speed display, the time required from the start of the gauge increase display until the unit gauge image G22 of the number and color corresponding to the current number of additional games or the total number of additional games up to this time is displayed. is 1.6 seconds. In addition, when the number of additional games is "100", in high-speed display, the number and color corresponding to the current number of additional games or the total number of additional games up to this time will be displayed 1.8 seconds after the gauge increase display starts. The unit gauge image G22 is displayed, and after this state continues for one second, the gauge increase display ends. On the other hand, in the low-speed display, the time required from the start of the gauge increase display until the unit gauge image G22 of the number and color corresponding to the current number of additional games or the total number of additional games up to this time is displayed. is 1.6 seconds.

While the additional main performance is being executed, as shown in FIG. 58(a), the image display device 63 displays a blinking gauge display for the ART base performance, the ART normal performance, the additional main performance, and the additional sub performance. and are being executed at the same time. After that, when the gauge increase display in the additional sub-effect is started, the image display device 63 simultaneously displays the ART base effect, the ART normal effect, and the gauge increase display, as shown in FIG. It is in a running state.

The value of the number of consecutive games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is the value after the number of additional games in the additional winning that triggered the additional sub-effect is added at the end of the gauge increase display in the additional sub-effect. updated to the value. Until the gauge increase display ends, the current number of additional games is not known even by looking at the number of consecutive games image G18, so the player pays attention to the gauge increase display, and the player's attention to the gauge increase display is increased. There is.

The main side MPU 72 does not set numerical information to the freeze counter in the main side RAM 74 at the start of the additional main effect and the additional sub effect. A player who is in a hurry in a situation such as the end of business hours is approaching, can start the next game by operating a start lever 41 in the middle of an additional main performance and an additional sub performance. If the start lever 41 is operated to start the next game while the additional main performance is being executed, the performance side MPU 92 will receive the game start command during the execution of the additional main performance. In this case, in the image display device 63, the additional main effect that was being executed in the central display area 132 (FIG. 58(a)) ends midway, and a new ART base effect and ART that correspond to the operation of the start lever 41 are started. The normal performance begins. In this case, it is not possible to confirm the type of the additional character images G20, G21 displayed last in the video of the additional main effect, and therefore it is not possible to grasp the number of additional games based on the additional main effect. On the other hand, the additional sub effects being executed in the sub display area 131 (FIG. 58(a)) continue to be executed. Even if the start lever 41 is operated and the additional main production that is being executed ends, the additional sub production can be continuously displayed in parallel with the newly started ART base production and the ART normal production. , it is possible to confirm not only the result of the additional winning but also a part of the performance (specifically, the additional sub-performance) regarding the additional winning.

If the performance side MPU 92 does not receive the game start command during execution of the additional main performance, the video display of the additional main performance is continued to the end without being terminated midway. As already explained, when the video display of the main add-on effect is performed to the end, the number of add-on games can be grasped based on the types of the add-on character images G20 and G21 displayed at the end of the video. In this case, high-speed display is performed in which the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 are updated at 200 millisecond intervals. In this way, the gauge increase display performed after the number of additional games is suggested is a high-speed display. This shortens the execution period of the gauge increase display.

On the other hand, when the performance-side MPU 92 receives a game start command during execution of the additional main performance, the video display of the additional main performance is not performed to the end and ends midway. If the video display of the additional main effect ends midway, the gauge increase display is performed without indicating the number of additional games. In this case, low-speed display is performed in which the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 are updated at intervals of 400 milliseconds. In this way, the gauge increase display performed in a state where the number of additional games is not suggested is a slow display. As a result, it is possible to extend the display period of the gauge increase display, which is viewed while expecting a large number of additional games, and to increase the degree of attention to the gauge increase display.

If the performance side MPU 92 receives the add-on command during ART in a situation where the add-on sub-performance is being executed, that is, if the add-on winning occurs two or more times in a row without interruption of the add-on sub-performance, the execution is in progress. The additional sub-performance that was previously ended, and a new additional main performance and additional sub-performance corresponding to the additional winning that occurred this time are started. In the gauge flashing display of the newly started additional sub performance, a unit gauge image G22 of a color and number corresponding to the final state of the additional sub performance that ended midway through execution is displayed blinking. Specifically, in the gauge flashing display of the top-up sub performance corresponding to the second consecutive top-up win, the unit gauge image G22 of the number and color corresponding to the number of top-up games in the first top-up win is displayed blinking, The flashing gauge display of the additional sub effect corresponding to the third consecutive additional win corresponds to the total number of additional games, which is the sum of the number of additional games in the first additional win and the number of additional games in the second additional win. The number and color unit gauge image G22 is displayed blinking. Thereby, the final display state of the unit gauge image G22 in the additional sub-performance can be shown to the player who was watching the additional sub-performance that ended midway through execution.

If the performance side MPU 92 receives an additional command during ART in a situation where an additional sub-performance is being executed, the additional main performance based on the reception of the additional command during ART until the additional sub-performance that was being executed is completed. If the configuration is such that the start of the additional sub effects is waited, a delay will occur between receiving the additional command during ART and starting the additional main effects and the additional sub effects. With this configuration, if additional wins occur consecutively and delays are accumulated, a situation will arise in which the additional main performance and additional sub performance corresponding to the additional wins cannot be started during the game in which the additional wins occur. There is a risk. In contrast, in this embodiment, the additional main effect and the additional sub effect are started without delay based on the reception of the additional command during ART. As a result, even if additional wins occur consecutively, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the additional main performance and additional sub performance corresponding to the additional wins cannot be started during the game in which the additional wins occur. I can do it.

If additional wins occur consecutively in a manner where the additional sub effects are not interrupted, the gauge increase display that is performed after the gauge flashing display ends will display the total number of consecutive additional wins that occurred before the current additional win. From the state in which the unit gauge image G22 of the number and color corresponding to the number of additional games is displayed, the unit gauge of the number and color corresponding to the total number of games in all consecutive additional winnings including the current additional winning. The number and color of the unit gauge images G22 displayed on the gauge display section G19a are updated in stages until the image G22 is displayed. Then, after the unit gauge image G22 of the number and color corresponding to the total number of additional games in all consecutive additional winnings including the current additional winning is displayed on the gauge display section G19a, the corresponding The unit gauge image G22 is continuously displayed for one second. Thereby, the total number of additional games in the additional winnings that have occurred consecutively in an uninterrupted manner with the additional sub effects is shown to the player. The unit gauge image G22 that was continuously displayed for one second is no longer displayed. After the gauge increase display ends, only the gauge frame image G19 is displayed in the sub display area 131.

Specifically, the total number of additional games in the additional winnings that occurred consecutively before this additional winning is "250", and the total number of additional games in the additional winnings that occurred this time is "100". In the additional sub effect in this case, as shown in FIG. 59(a), first, 25 yellow unit gauge images G22 corresponding to the number of additional games of "250" are displayed on the gauge display section G19a, These 25 yellow unit gauge images G22 are displayed blinking for a predetermined period of time (specifically, 3 seconds). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59(b), a predetermined time interval is maintained until 30 yellow unit gauge images G22 corresponding to the number of additional games of "300" are displayed on the gauge display section G19a. Then, a new yellow unit gauge image G22 is added to the right side of the currently displayed unit gauge image G22. Then, at the next update timing when 30 yellow unit gauge images G22 are displayed on the gauge display section G19a, one red unit gauge image G22 corresponding to the number of additional games of "310" is displayed. It is now displayed at the left end of the gauge display section G19a. Thereafter, a new red unit gauge image G22 is added to the right side of the currently displayed unit gauge image G22. Then, as shown in FIG. 59(c), five red unit gauge images G22 corresponding to the number of additional games of "350" are displayed on the gauge display section G19a, and these five red unit gauge images G22 are displayed on the gauge display section G19a. The unit gauge image G22 is continuously displayed for one second. As a result, the player is shown that the total number of additional winning games in which the additional sub effects have occurred continuously without interruption has reached "350."

Thereafter, the unit gauge image G22 displayed on the gauge display section G19a disappears, and the additional sub effect ends. Although not shown, when the additional sub-effect is completed, only the gauge frame image G19 is displayed in the sub-display area 131 of the image display device 63. In addition, the total number of additional games in all additional winnings that occurred consecutively is "350" compared to the number of consecutive games "50" displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 at the end of the additional sub-effect. It is added and updated to "400".

In this way, when additional winnings occur consecutively in a manner in which the additional sub effects are not interrupted, the value of the number of consecutive games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is the value of the last additional winning that occurred continuously. It will be updated all together at the end of the additional sub effects. By configuring a configuration in which the value of the number of consecutive games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is not updated until the last supplementary win supplementary sub-performance is completed, the supplementary win can be awarded with the supplementary main performance or supplementary sub-performance. With a configuration in which the number of games can be grasped from the beginning, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the additional main performance and the additional sub-performance.

Even in a situation where additional winnings occur continuously, the value of the number of consecutive games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is subtracted by 1 each time a game is started. The value of the number of consecutive games to be displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 becomes a value of "0" or less before the total number of additional games in consecutive additional winnings is added together at the end. In this case, “?” is displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 instead of the value “0” or less. Therefore, the ART state ST6 will not continue in a state where a value of "0" or less is displayed as the number of consecutive games in the upper left corner of the image display device 63. In a situation where additional wins occur continuously, after the value of the number of consecutive games to be displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 becomes "0" or less, the additional sub effect for the last additional win ends. In this case, the total number of additional games of consecutive additional winnings is added to the value of "0" or less, and the value of the number of consecutive games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is the value after the addition. updated to the value.

Next, the configurations of the performance side ROM 93 and performance side RAM 94 for executing various performances in the ART state ST6 will be explained. FIG. 60(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the performance side ROM93, and FIG. 60(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the performance side RAM94.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), the production side ROM 93 includes an ART base production table storage area 133a, an ART normal production table storage area 133b, an additional main production table storage area 133c, and a high-speed first additional sub production table storage. Area 133d, high speed second additional sub effect table storage area 133e, low speed first additional sub effect table storage area 133f, and low speed second additional sub effect table storage area 133g are provided.

This slot machine 10 has 16 types of ART base effects that are executed in the ART state ST6, and the 16 types of ART base effects are stored in the ART base effect table storage area 133a of the effect side ROM 93. 16 types of ART base effect tables are stored. In addition, there are 16 types of normal effects for ART that are executed in the ART state ST6, and the normal effects for ART table storage area 133b of the effect side ROM 93 contain 16 types of normal effects for executing the 16 types of normal effects for ART. A normal effect table for different types of ART is stored.

As already explained, there are "50" and "100" as the number of additional games in the additional winning that occurs in the ART state ST6. There are 8 types of additional main effects to be executed in the ART state ST6, and the additional main effect table storage area 133c of the effect side ROM 93 contains a memory for executing an additional main effect corresponding to the number of additional games of "50". Four types of additional main effect tables and four types of additional main effect tables for executing an additional main effect corresponding to the number of additional games of "100" are stored.

As already explained, there are low-speed display and high-speed display as gauge increase displays in the additional sub effects. The high speed first additional sub effect table storage area 133d of the effect side ROM 93 stores a high speed first additional sub effect table in which the number of additional games is "50" and for executing a high speed gauge increase display. The high speed second additional sub effect table storage area 133e of the effect side ROM 93 stores a high speed second additional sub effect table in which the number of additional games is "100" and for executing a high speed gauge increase display. . In addition, the low speed first additional sub effect table storage area 133f of the effect side ROM 93 stores a low speed first additional sub effect table for executing the gauge increase display of the low speed display in which the number of additional games is "50". At the same time, the low speed second additional sub effect table storage area 133g of the effect side ROM 93 stores a low speed second additional sub effect table in which the number of additional games is "100" and for executing the gauge increase display of the low speed display. ing.

The ART bass production table includes address information and setting destination information of display data for displaying the background image G16 on the image display device 63, and sound information of the speaker 62 so that the above-mentioned ART bass music is output. Sound data for output control is set. The ART base effect table is read out to the 0th layer LY0 in the readout area 94a.

Address information and setting destination information of display data for displaying a moving image in which the ART character image G17 is displayed on the image display device 63, and the above-mentioned sound effects for production are output to the ART normal production table. Sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 is set as follows. The ART normal effect table is read out to the first layer LY1 in the readout area 94a.

The additional main effect table includes address information and setting destination information of display data for performing a video display in which the additional character images G20 and G21 are displayed in the central display area 132 of the image display device 63, and information corresponding to the video display. sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 so that a sound is output; and light emission data for controlling the light emission of the upper lamp 61 so that the upper lamp 61 emits light in a manner corresponding to the video display. and address information of a drive table for executing an accessory motion performance in which the spherical performance portion 77b of the accessory object 75 moves up and down. The address information of the drive table is set for the pointer information at the final stage in the additional main performance table, and the accessory action performance is started when the remaining execution period of the additional main performance becomes 1 second. The additional main effect table is read out to the second layer LY2 in the readout area 94a. In addition, the details of the role object action production will be described later.

The additional sub effect tables (first high speed additional sub effect table, second high speed additional sub effect table, first low speed additional sub effect table, and second low speed additional sub effect table) are provided in the sub display area 131 of the image display device 63. Address information and setting destination information of display data for executing a gauge blinking display in which one yellow unit gauge image G22 is displayed blinking, and address information and settings of display data for executing a gauge increase display. Destination information is set. The additional sub effect table is read out to the third layer LY3.

The additional main effect is executed according to the additional main effect table read out to the second layer LY2, and the additional sub effect tables (first high speed additional sub effect table, second high speed additional sub effect table) read out to the third layer LY3. The additional sub-effect is executed according to the effect table, the first low-speed additional sub-presentation table, or the second low-speed additional sub-presentation table. In this way, the additional main performance and the additional sub performance proceed in parallel according to the additional main performance table and the additional sub performance table read out to different layers LYn of the readout area 94a.

The data structure of the additional sub effect table will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 61, taking the high speed first additional sub effect table as an example. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high-speed first additional sub effect table.

In the range of "0" to "74" of the pointer information in the high-speed first additional sub-effect table, performance data for performing a gauge blinking display is set. Specifically, the pointer information of "0", "25", and "50" in the high-speed first additional sub effect table includes information for displaying one yellow unit gauge image G22 on the gauge display section G19a. The address information (AD10(1)) of the display data and the setting destination information specifying the fifth effect area 113f (FIG. 42(c)) of the display setting area 113 as the setting destination of the display data are set. has been done. In addition, the pointer information of "15", "40", and "65" in the additional sub-effect table includes deletion data for clearing the fifth performance area 113f of the display setting area 113, and Setting destination information indicating the fifth effect area 113f is set as setting destination information of the data. When the deletion data is set for the pointer information to be referenced, the fifth effect area 113f is cleared and the unit gauge image G22 is no longer displayed. The gauge blinking display is performed by alternately repeating the setting of display data for displaying the unit gauge image G22 and the erasure of the display data.

When the pointer information of the reference target is "0", display data is set in the fifth effect area 113f of the display setting area 113. As a result, one yellow unit gauge image G22 is displayed on the gauge display section G19a. In the one yellow unit gauge image G22, the pointer information of the reference object changes from "25" to "40" for 0.6 seconds until the pointer information of the reference object is updated from "0" to "15". It is displayed for 0.6 seconds until the pointer information of the reference object is updated from "50" to "65", and for 0.6 seconds until the pointer information of the reference object is updated from "50" to "65". ” to “25”, 0.4 seconds until the reference target pointer information is updated from “40” to “50”, and the reference target pointer information changes from “65” to “50”. It is not displayed for 0.4 seconds until it is updated to "75". Therefore, in the gauge blinking display, one yellow unit gauge image G22 is displayed blinking.

In the range of pointer information "75" to "120" in the high-speed first additional sub effect table (FIG. 61), the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 displayed in the gauge display section G19a correspond to the number of additional games. Address information and setting destination information of display data for performing a gauge increase display that is updated step by step to the number and color of the display are set. Specifically, the address information (AD10(1)) of the display data for displaying one yellow unit gauge image G22 is set for the pointer information of "75" in the high-speed first additional sub-effect table. The display data address information (AD10(2)) for displaying two yellow unit gauge images G22 is set for the pointer information of "80", and the pointer information of "85" is set. The display data address information (AD10(3)) for displaying three yellow unit gauge images G22 is set for the information, and four yellow unit gauge images G22 are set for the pointer information of "90". The address information (AD10(4)) of the display data for displaying the unit gauge image G22 is set, and the address information (AD10(4)) for displaying the five yellow unit gauge images G22 for the pointer information of "95" is set. Address information (AD10(5)) for display data is set. Moreover, setting destination information indicating the fifth effect area 113f of the display setting area 113 is set for the address information of these display data. Display data for displaying the unit gauge image G22 is set in the fifth effect area 113f, and the unit gauge image G22 is set in the fifth effect display layer 106. As shown in FIG. 61, deletion data for clearing the fifth effect area 113f is set in the pointer information "120" in the first additional sub effect table.

When the high-speed first additional sub-effect table is read out, in the gauge increase display, one yellow button is displayed for 0.2 seconds until the reference target pointer information is updated from "75" to "80". Two yellow unit gauge images G22 are displayed for 0.2 seconds until the pointer information of the reference object is updated from "80" to "85". Three yellow unit gauge images G22 are displayed for 0.2 seconds until the pointer information is updated from "85" to "90", and the pointer information to be referenced changes from "90" to "95". Four yellow unit gauge images G22 are displayed for 0.2 seconds until they are updated, and five yellow unit gauge images G22 are displayed for 1 second until the pointer information of the reference object is updated from "95" to "120". Yellow unit gauge images G22 are displayed.

If additional winnings occur consecutively, the additional winnings will be set in the additional sub effect table (high speed 1st additional sub effect table, high speed 2nd additional sub effect table, low speed 1st additional sub effect table, and low speed 2nd additional sub effect table). The address information of the display data is used for displaying the gauge blinking and increasing the gauge in a manner corresponding to the total number of additional games in consecutive additional winnings that occurred before the current additional winning. It is rewritten to data address information. In this embodiment, the case where additional winnings occur consecutively means that the performance side MPU 92 receives a new ART mid-additional command while the additional sub-performance is being executed, and multiple additional winnings occur in a manner that the additional sub-performance is not interrupted. This refers to cases where this occurs.

Specifically, in a situation where the total number of additional games in consecutive additional winnings is "n" (n is an integer of "50" or more), the number of additional games is increased in a manner in which the additional sub effects are not interrupted. If an additional win of “50” occurs, the address information (AD10(1) )) is rewritten to the address information of the display data for displaying the unit gauge image G22 of the number and color corresponding to the number of additional games "n". In addition, the address information of the display data set in the pointer information of "75", "80", "85", "90", and "95" in the high-speed first additional sub-effect table (FIG. 61) is as follows. It is rewritten to address information of display data for displaying unit gauge images G22 of numbers and colors corresponding to the number of additional games "n+10", "n+20", "n+30", "n+40", and "n+50". For example, when "n" is "200", the gauge display section G19a changes from a state where 20 yellow unit gauge images G22 are lined up to a state where 25 yellow unit gauge images G22 are lined up. Until then, the gauge increase display is updated in such a manner that a new yellow unit gauge image G22 is added to the right side of the rightmost unit gauge image G22 at an interval of one every 200 milliseconds.

In this way, if the top-up winnings occur consecutively in a manner where the top-up sub-performances are not interrupted, the top-up sub-performance table (high-speed first top-up sub-performance table, high-speed second top-up sub-performance table, low-speed first top-up sub-performance table) The address information of the display data set in the effect table and the low-speed second additional sub effect table is rewritten. As a result, a unit gauge image G22 with a number and color corresponding to the total number of additional games in additional winnings that occurred consecutively before the additional winning that triggered the reading of the additional sub effect table is displayed. from the state where the unit gauge image G22 of the number and color corresponding to the total number of additional games obtained by adding the number of additional games in the current additional winning to the total number of additional games is displayed. Gauge enlargement display is performed in which the number and color of unit gauge images G22 are updated at time intervals (specifically, at 200 millisecond intervals).

If the start lever 41 is operated before the additional main effect ends and the additional main effect ends midway, the additional sub effect table for high-speed display that has been read out to the third layer LY3 (high-speed The additional sub-effect table for low-speed display (low-speed first additional sub-presentation table or low-speed second additional sub-presentation table) corresponding to the first additional sub-presentation table or the second high-speed additional sub-presentation table is read out. Specifically, if the high-speed first additional sub-effect table is read out to the third layer LY3, the low-speed first additional sub-effect table is read out to the third layer LY3, and the high-speed first additional effect table is read out to the third layer LY3. If the second additional sub effect table has been read out, the low speed second additional sub effect table is read out to the third layer LY3.

When the additional sub-effect table for low-speed display is read out instead of the additional sub-effect table for high-speed display, the value of the pointer counter PC3 in the third layer LY3 is inherited without being cleared. In this case, the display data for the additional sub-effect set in the fifth effect area 113f (FIG. 42(f)) of the display setting area 113 is not cleared. Therefore, the gauge blinking display is executed from the continuation of the gauge blinking display that has been executed halfway. In addition, if the data of the additional sub-effect table for high-speed display that has been read out to the third layer LY3 has been rewritten, the data set for each pointer information of the additional sub-effect table for high-speed display will be changed. The rewritten data is set in the corresponding pointer information in the additional sub-effect table for low-speed display read out to the third layer LY3. As a result, in a situation where additional winnings have occurred consecutively, the gauge in the additional sub performance will be adjusted in a manner that corresponds to the total additional winning game that has occurred consecutively before the current additional winning. A flashing display and an increasing gauge display can be performed.

As shown in FIG. 60(b), the production side RAM 94 is provided with a display counter 134, an add-on game counter 135, and a blinking display counter 136. The display counter 134 is a counter that is decremented by 1 by the production side MPU 92 every time one game is executed in the ART state ST6. In the ART state ST6, the value set in the display counter 134 is displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 as the remaining number of consecutive games in the ART state ST6.

The add-on game number counter 135 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of add-on games generated due to the add-on winning. The flashing display counter 136 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the total number of additional games of consecutive additional winnings that occurred before the current additional winning when additional winnings occur consecutively. be. As already explained, in this embodiment, the case where additional winnings occur continuously is a case where the performance side MPU 92 receives a new additional command during ART while the additional sub-performance is being executed, and the additional sub-performance is not interrupted. This is a case where multiple additional wins occur.

Next, a processing configuration in the performance side MPU 92 to enable execution of various performances in the ART state ST6 will be explained. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the non-normal performance control process executed by the performance side MPU 92. Note that the non-normal performance control process is performed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the performance side MPU 92 when the gaming state is the bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4, preparation state ST5, and ART state ST6. ) is executed in the interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed.

In the non-normal production control process, if an ending end command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3001: YES), the production-side ending production flag provided in the production-side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3002). ). The performance-side ending performance flag is a flag for the performance-side MPU 92 to specify that it is the execution period of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2. Thereafter, an ending termination process is executed (step S3003). In the ending completion process, processing for executing an ending completion performance is performed as a performance corresponding to the end of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2. The ending effect is executed on the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. In addition, in the ending completion process (step S3003), numerical information that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp the end timing of the ending performance is set in the production side production timer counter provided in the production side RAM 94. The value of the production-side production timer counter is updated in step S5705 of the history image management process (FIG. 95), which will be described later.

Thereafter, the ART flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3004). The ART flag indicates that the gaming state is one of the ART state ST6, the bonus internal state ST2 to which the game has transitioned from the ART state ST6, the bonus state to which it has transitioned from the ART state ST6, and the preparation state ST5 to which it has transitioned after the end of the bonus state. This is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the information. The ART flag is set to "1" when the production side MPU 92 receives an ART start command from the main side MPU 72. Further, the ART flag is cleared to "0" when the production side MPU 92 receives an ART end command or an ending end command from the main side MPU 72.

If a negative determination is made in step S3001, it is determined whether or not an ending effect command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3005), and if an ending effect command has been received (step S3005: YES), sets "1" to the production-side ending production flag in the production-side RAM 94 (step S3006).

If a negative determination is made in step S3005, or if the processing in step S3006 is performed, it is determined whether or not the production-side ending production flag is set to "1" (step S3007), and the production-side ending production flag is set to "1". If the production flag is set to "1" (step S3007: YES), ending production processing is executed (step S3008). In the ending effect processing, processing for executing an ending effect is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3007, it is determined whether an ART start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3009). As already explained, the ART start command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the ART state ST6 is started. If the ART start command has been received (step S3009: YES), effect setting processing at the time of ART start is executed (step S3010). FIG. 63(a) is a flowchart showing the effect setting process at the start of ART.

In the effect setting process at the start of ART, it is determined whether the current transition to ART state ST6 corresponds to a return to ART state ST6, based on the information set in the ART start command received from the main MPU 72. (Step S3101). If the return to ART state ST6 is not applicable (step S3101: NO), the number of games to start (specifically, 50 games) corresponding to the new start of ART state ST6 set in the ART start command is stored in the production side RAM 94. is added to the display counter 134 (step S3102). In this case, if the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST6 has not been increased in the bonus state and preparation state ST5 before the ART state ST6 starts, the value of the display counter 134 corresponds to the number of starting games. 50". On the other hand, if an addition to the number of remaining continuation games of ART state ST6 occurs in the bonus state and preparation state ST5 before the start of ART state ST6, the number of games generated by the addition and the above-mentioned starting game The total value including the number (“50”) is set in the display counter 134.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3101 or if the process in step S3102 is performed, a process for starting the display of the number of consecutive games is executed (step S3103). In the processing for starting the display of the number of consecutive games, display data for displaying the number of consecutive games image G18 corresponding to the current value of the display counter 134 is read from the production side ROM 93, and the read display data is used for display. It is set in the third effect area 113d (FIG. 42(c)) of the setting area 113. By controlling the display of the image display device 63 based on the display data, the number of consecutive games image G18 (FIG. 57) corresponding to the value of the display counter 134 is displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63. . In this way, at the upper left side of the image display device 63, the number-of-continued-games image G18 is displayed, which indicates the value of the display counter 134 as the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST6. Further, if the previous display data is set in the third effect area 113d of the display setting area 113, the current display data is set after the third effect area 113d is cleared. As a result, the number of consecutive games image G18 displayed on the image display device 63 is updated to a value corresponding to the updated value of the display counter 134.

Thereafter, a process for starting gauge frame display is executed (step S3104). In the process for starting the gauge frame display, display data for displaying the gauge frame image G19 (FIG. 57) in the sub-display area 131 (FIG. 57) of the image display device 63 is read from the production side ROM 93, and the read display data is read out from the production side ROM 93. data is set in the fourth effect area 113e (FIG. 42(b)) of the display setting area 113. By controlling the display of the image display device 63 based on the display data, display of the gauge frame image G19 is started in the sub-display area 131 of the image display device 63.

Thereafter, an ART start effect lottery process is executed (step S3105). In the ART start performance lottery process, the ART start performance lottery table is first read from the performance side ROM 93. This slot machine 10 has 16 types of ART start performances, and the performance side ROM 93 stores 16 types of ART start performance tables for executing the 16 types of ART start performances. Information on the 16 types of ART start effect tables is set in the ART start effect lottery table, and a numerical range for determining validity is set in the information of each ART start effect table. Thereafter, the numerical information of the random number counter that is regularly updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read out, and the read numerical information is checked against the read out ART start performance lottery table. This specifies the ART start effect table to be read this time. Specifically, an ART start effect table in which a numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set is specified as a read target.

Thereafter, ART start performance type information setting processing is executed (step S3106). In the ART start performance type information setting process, in the case of the history storage mode described later, the ART start performance type information (any of 1 to 16) corresponding to the ART start performance table specified in the ART start performance lottery process (step S3105) is selected. The numerical information) is set in the eighth history storage area RA8 in the history storage area 94b (step S3106). Note that the history storage mode and the eighth history storage area RA8 will be described later.

After that, the ART start effect table specified in the ART start effect lottery process in step S3105 is read out to the readout area 94a (step S3107), and the effect setting process at the time of starting this ART is ended. The ART start effect table is read out to the 0th layer LY0. The performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the ART start performance table read in step S3107, so that the ART start performance is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

Returning to the explanation of the non-normal production control process (FIG. 62), after a negative determination is made in step S3009, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the ART state ST6 (step S3012). If the current gaming state is not the ART state ST6 (step S3012: NO), other production processing is executed (step S3013), and this non-normal production control processing is ended. In other performance processing (step S3013), processing is executed to control the performance when the gaming state is the bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4, or preparation state ST5. In addition, in other production processing (step S3013), if the production side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus winning has been established in the bonus internal state ST2 or the preparation state ST5 is set, the production side MPU 92 receives a bonus as described below. Execute the accessory setting process (FIG. 78) when winning a prize.

If the current gaming state is the ART state ST6 (step S3012: YES), it is determined whether a game start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3014). If a game start command has been received (step S3014: YES), a game start process during ART is executed (step S3015), and this non-normal performance control process is ended. FIG. 63(b) is a flowchart showing the game start process during ART.

In the game start process during ART, it is determined whether the main performance flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3201). The main performance flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the additional main performance is being executed. The main performance flag is set to "1" in step S3404 of the additional performance processing (FIG. 65), which will be described later. In addition, the flag during main performance is cleared to "0" in step S3503 of the additional main performance end process (step S3202) described later and the flag clear process (FIG. 66(a)) described later.

If it is determined in step S3201 that the main performance flag is set to "1", this means that the game start command was received while the additional main performance was being executed, so the end processing of the additional main performance is performed. Execute (step S3202). In the end processing of the additional main performance, the second layer LY2 in the readout area 94a is cleared. As already explained, the second layer LY2 is a layer from which the additional main effect table is read. By clearing the second layer LY2 from which the additional main effect table was read, the sound output control based on the sound data set in the additional main effect table and the light emission data set in the additional main effect table are performed. The light emission control of the upper lamp 61 based on this is no longer performed. As already explained, the address information of the drive table of the accessory 75 is set in the pointer information at the final stage of the additional main performance table (pointer information indicating that the execution period of the additional main performance is 1 second remaining). By clearing the second layer LY2 from which the additional main effect table has been read, the drive table is no longer read out, and the accessory motion effect based on the drive table is canceled. In addition, the details of the role object action production will be described later. Furthermore, in the additional main effect termination process (step S3202), the second effect area 113c (FIG. 42(c)) of the display setting area 113 is cleared. As already explained, the second effect area 113c is an area where display data for executing the additional main effect is set. If the additional main effect is being executed, the display data for executing the additional main effect is cleared. As a result, the display of the additional main effect being performed on the image display device 63 ends. In the readout area 94a, the layers LYn from which the additional main effect table and the additional sub effect table are read are different, and the display data for executing the additional main effect and the display data for executing the additional sub effect are different. The settings are also different. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for ending the additional main performance while continuing the additional sub-performance. Furthermore, in the additional main performance termination process (step S3202), the main performance flag is cleared to "0". This makes it possible for the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the additional main performance has ended.

Thereafter, the process of updating the additional sub effect table is executed (step S3203). In this update process, instead of the additional sub-effect table for high-speed display that has been read out to the third layer LY3 of the readout area 94a, the corresponding additional sub-effect table for low-speed display is read out to the third layer LY3. . Specifically, when the high-speed first additional sub-effect table is read out in the third layer LY3, the low-speed first additional sub-effect table is read out, and the high-speed second additional sub-effect table is read out in the third layer LY3. If it has been read out, the low-speed second additional sub effect table is read out. As already explained, the value of the pointer counter PC3 in the third layer LY3 is inherited without being cleared. Furthermore, in the process of updating the additional sub-effect table (step S3203), the fifth effect area 113f of the display setting area 113 in which the display data for the additional sub-effect is set is not cleared. Therefore, a continuation of the gauge flashing display is displayed on the gauge display section G19a.

In the process of updating the additional sub-effect table in step S3203, if the data of the additional sub-effect table for high-speed display that has been read out to the third layer LY3 has been rewritten, the additional sub-effect table for high-speed display has been rewritten. The rewritten data that was set for each pointer information is set as the corresponding pointer information in the additional sub-effect table for low-speed display that is read out to the third layer LY3. As a result, in a situation where additional winnings have occurred consecutively, additional sub-effects will be applied in a manner corresponding to the total number of additional games of additional winnings that have occurred consecutively before the current additional winning. Gauge blinking display and gauge increasing display can be performed.

Thereafter, a base performance lottery process for ART is executed (step S3204). In the ART base performance lottery process, an ART base performance lottery table for selecting an ART base performance is first read from the performance side ROM 93. As already explained, 16 types of ART base performance tables are stored in the ART base performance table storage area 133a of the performance side ROM 93. The type information (numerical information from 1 to 16) of the 16 types of ART base effect tables is set in the ART base effect lottery table, and each type of information has a numerical range set for making a judgment. has been done. Thereafter, the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read out, and the read numerical information is checked against the read out base performance lottery table for ART. This specifies the ART base effect table to be read this time. Specifically, the ART base performance table, in which a numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set, is specified as the read target.

Thereafter, the process of reading out the ART base effect table is executed (step S3205). In the readout process, the 0th layer LY0 in the readout area 94a is cleared, and the ART base effect table identified in step S3204 is transferred from the ART base effect table storage area 133a of the effect side ROM 93 to the 0th layer LY0 in the readout area 94a. Read to layer LY0. By controlling the execution of the performance according to the ART base performance table, the ART base performance is executed on the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. Specifically, the pointer information of "0" in the ART base performance table is set with address information and setting destination information of display data for executing the ART base performance on the image display device 63. . The display data is set in the background area 113a (FIG. 42(c)) of the display setting area 113. If the previous display data is set in the background area 113a, the current display data is set after the background area 113a is cleared. As a result, the previous ART base performance ends and the current ART base performance starts.

Thereafter, a normal performance lottery process for ART is executed (step S3206). In the ART normal performance lottery process, the ART normal performance lottery table for selecting the ART normal performance is first read from the performance side ROM 93. As already explained, 16 types of ART normal effect tables are stored in the ART normal effect table storage area 133b of the effect side ROM 93. Type information (numerical information from 1 to 16) of the 16 types of ART normal effect tables is set in the ART normal effect lottery table, and each type of information has a numerical range set for determining validity. ing. Thereafter, the numerical information of the random number counter that is regularly updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read out, and the read numerical information is checked against the read out normal performance lottery table for ART. Thereby, the ART normal effect table to be read this time is specified. Specifically, the ART normal performance table, in which a numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set, is specified as the read target.

Thereafter, the first layer LY1 in the reading area 94a is cleared, and the ART normal effect table specified as the readout target in the ART normal effect lottery process in step S3206 is stored in the ART normal effect table storage area 133b of the effect side ROM 93. (Step S3207). As described above, the ART normal effect table is read out to the first layer LY1 in the readout area 94a. By controlling the execution of the performance according to the ART normal performance table, the ART normal performance is executed on the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. The ART base performance and the ART normal performance are executed in parallel based on the ART base performance table and the ART normal performance table read out to different layers LYn of the readout area 94a.

Thereafter, the value of the display counter 134 in the production side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1 (step S3208), the process of updating the display of the number of consecutive games is executed (step S3209), and the process for starting the game in this ART is ended. In the process of updating the display of the number of continuous games in step S3209, if the value of the display counter 134 after being subtracted by 1 in step S3208 is a value of "1" or more, the continuous game corresponding to the value of the display counter 134 is The display data for displaying the several images G18 is read from the effect side ROM 93, and the read display data is set in the third effect area 113d of the display setting area 113. As already explained, if the display data has already been set in the third effect area 113d, the current display data is set after the third effect area 113d is cleared to "0". By controlling the display of the image display device 63 based on the display data, the value of the number of consecutive games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after the 1 subtraction. In addition, in the process of updating the display of the number of consecutive games in step S3209, if the value of the display counter 134 after being subtracted by 1 in step S3208 is a value of "0" or less, the value of the display counter 134 is replaced with the value of "0" or less. , the display data for displaying "?" on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is read from the performance side ROM 93, and the read display data is set in the third performance area 113d of the display setting area 113. As already explained, even in a situation where additional winnings occur continuously, the value of the number of consecutive games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is subtracted by 1 each time a game is started. The value of the number of consecutive games to be displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 becomes a value of "0" or less until the total number of additional games in consecutive additional winnings is added together at the end. There is. In this case, instead of the value of "0" or less, "?" is displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63, so the number of consecutive games is "0" or less on the upper left side of the image display device 63. The ART state ST6 does not continue while the value is displayed.

Returning to the explanation of the non-normal production control process (FIG. 62), if a negative determination is made in step S3014, it is determined whether or not an additional command during ART has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3016). . If the addition command during ART has been received (step S3016: YES), effect adjustment processing is executed (step S3017). FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the effect adjustment process.

In the performance adjustment process, it is determined whether the sub-performance flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3301). The sub performance flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the additional sub performance is being executed. The sub-performance flag is set to "1" in step S3411 of the additional production process (FIG. 65), which will be described later. Further, the sub-performance flag is cleared to "0" in step S3506 of flag clearing processing (FIG. 66(a)), which will be described later.

If it is determined in step S3301 that the sub-performance flag is set to "1", this means that the additional command during ART was received while the additional sub-performance was being executed, so the additional sub-performance termination process is performed. (Step S3302). In the additional sub-effect termination process, the third layer LY3 in the readout area 94a is cleared, and the fifth effect area 113f (FIG. 42(c)) in the display setting area 113 is cleared. As already explained, the third layer LY3 is read by the additional sub-effect table (high-speed first additional sub-effect table, high-speed second additional sub-effect table, low-speed first additional sub-effect table, or low-speed second additional sub-effect table). In addition, the fifth effect area 113f is an area where display data for an additional sub effect is set. By clearing the fifth performance area 113f, the additional sub-performance performed on the image display device 63 ends. Further, by clearing the third layer LY3, it is possible to prevent the display data for the additional sub-effect from being newly set in the fifth effect area 113f, and to terminate the additional sub-effect.

Thereafter, the continuous addition flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3303). The continuous top-up flag is a flag that enables the performance-side MPU 92 to recognize that a top-up win has occurred two or more times in a row without interruption of the top-up sub performance.

Thereafter, addition processing for the blinking display counter 136 is executed (step S3304). In the addition process of the blinking display counter 136, the number of additional games in the additional sub-performance completed in step S3302 is grasped by referring to the additional game number counter 135 in the production side RAM 94, and the grasped number of additional games is added to the production side. It is added to the value of the blinking display counter 136 in the RAM 94. As a result, the flashing display counter 136 is set to the total number of add-on games of the add-on wins that occurred consecutively before the current add-on win.

When the addition processing of the blinking display counter 136 is executed in step S3304, the value of the additional game number counter 135 is cleared to "0" (step S3305), and the present effect adjustment processing is ended. Note that the number of add-on games in the current add-on winning is set in the add-on game number counter 135 in step S3401 of the add-on effect processing (FIG. 65) described later.

Returning to the explanation of the non-normal performance control process (FIG. 62), after executing the performance adjustment process (FIG. 64) in step S3017, the additional performance process is executed (step S3018). FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing processing for additional effects.

In the processing for additional effect, the number of additional games is determined based on the information set in the ART additional command received this time, and the determined number of additional games is set in the additional game number counter 135 in the effect-side RAM 94 (step S3401). As a result, if additional winnings occur consecutively without interruption of the additional sub effects, the number of additional games for the current additional winning is set in the additional game number counter 135, and the number of additional winnings for the current additional winning is set. The total number of add-on games in the add-on wins that have occurred consecutively before is set in the blinking display counter 136. In addition, if additional winnings have not occurred consecutively, the number of additional games for the current additional winning is set in the additional game counter 135, and the value of the blinking display counter 136 is "0". state.

After that, an additional main performance lottery process is executed (step S3402). In the additional main effect lottery process, first, an additional main effect lottery table for selecting an additional main effect is read from the effect side ROM 93. As already explained, the additional main effect table storage area 133c (FIG. 60(a)) of the effect side ROM 93 stores four types of additional main effect tables for executing the additional main effect corresponding to the number of additional games of "50". and four types of additional main effects tables for executing additional main effects corresponding to the number of additional games of "100" are stored. Type information of four types of additional main effect tables is set in the first additional main effect lottery table, and numerical ranges for determining the validity of each type of information are set. Further, the type information of four types of additional main effect tables is set in the second additional main effect lottery table, and numerical ranges for determining the validity of each type of information are set. Thereafter, numerical information from a random number counter that is regularly updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read out, and the read numerical information is checked against the read out main performance lottery table. This specifies the additional main effect table to be read this time. Specifically, an additional main effect table in which a numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set is specified as a read target.

Thereafter, the second layer LY2 of the readout area 94a is cleared, and the additional main effect table specified in the additional main effect lottery process in step S3402 is read from the effect side ROM 93 to the readout area 94a (step S3403). As already explained, the additional main effect table is read out to the second layer LY2. By controlling the execution of the performance according to the additional main performance table, the additional main performance is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In addition, by reading out the drive table for the accessory 75 that is set for the pointer information at the final stage of the additional main effect table (pointer information when the execution period of the additional main effect is 1 second remaining), the drive table for the accessory 75 is read out. An accessory motion performance in which the spherical performance section 77b moves up and down is executed. In addition, the details of the role object action production will be described later. Thereafter, the main performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3404). This allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the additional main performance is being executed.

After that, the additional sub effect table corresponding to the current number of additional games is specified (step S3405). Specifically, when the number of add-on games set in the add-on game number counter 135 in step S3401 is "50", the high-speed first add-on sub effect table storage area 133d of the effect side ROM 93 1 additional sub effect table is specified, and if the number of additional games set in the additional game number counter 135 in step S3401 is "100", it is stored in the high speed second additional sub effect table storage area 133e of the effect side ROM 93. Specify the high-speed second additional sub effect table that is displayed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the continuous addition flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3406). As already explained, the continuous top-up flag is a flag that allows the performance-side MPU 92 to grasp the situation where the top-up winning has occurred two or more times in a row without interrupting the top-up sub-performance. If the continuous add-on flag is not set to "1" (step S3406: NO), the add-on sub effect table specified in step S3405 is read into the read area 94a (step S3407). As already explained, the additional sub effect table is read out to the third layer LY3. By controlling the execution of the performance according to the additional sub-performance table, the additional sub-performance including high-speed gauge increase display is executed on the image display device 63.

On the other hand, if the continuous addition flag is set to "1" (step S3406: YES), table rewriting processing is executed (step S3408). In the table rewriting process, first, the value of the blinking display counter 136 in the performance side RAM 94 is grasped. If the current top-up win is the second consecutive top-up win, the number of top-up games in the previous top-up win is set in the blinking display counter 136. In addition, if the current additional winning occurs in a situation where two or more consecutive additional winnings have occurred, in other words, if the current additional winning is the third or more consecutive additional winning, the blinking display counter In 136, the total number of additional games of additional winnings that occurred consecutively before the current additional winning is set. Thereafter, the address information of the display data for flashing the unit gauge image G22 of the number and color corresponding to the grasped total number of additional games is specified. Then, the pointer information is set to "0", "25", and "50" of the additional sub-effect table (high-speed first additional sub-effect table or high-speed second additional sub-effect table) specified in step S3405. Instead of the address information of the specified display data, the address information of the specified display data is set. Furthermore, if the table identified in step S3405 is the high-speed first additional sub effect table (FIG. 61), the values are set to "75", "80", "85", "90" and "95". In place of the address information of the display data for displaying the gauge increase, the gauge increase display is performed in a manner corresponding to the total number of additional games in consecutive additional wins that occurred before the current additional win. Set address information for display data. On the other hand, if the table identified in step S3405 is the high-speed second additional sub effect table, "75", "80", "85", "90", "95", "100", "105" , "110", "115" and "120", instead of the address information of the display data for displaying the gauge increase, the additional winnings that have occurred consecutively before the current additional winning. Address information of display data for displaying a gauge increase in a manner corresponding to the total number of additional games in winning is set.

After that, the third layer LY3 of the readout area 94a is cleared, and the additional sub effect table (high speed first additional sub effect table or high speed second additional sub effect table) after table rewriting processing is executed in step S3408 is read. 94a (step S3409). The rewritten additional sub effect table is read out to the third layer LY3 in the same way as when no rewriting is performed. By controlling the execution of the performance according to the rewritten additional sub-performance table, the additional sub-performance is executed on the image display device 63. Thereafter, the continuous addition flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3410).

When the process of step S3407 is performed or when the process of step S3410 is performed, "1" is set to the sub-performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 (step S3411). This makes it possible for the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the additional sub-performance is being executed. Thereafter, the additional display standby flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3412), and the main additional effect processing is ended. The add-on display standby flag allows the performance-side RAM 94 to grasp that the process of adding the number of add-on games in the current add-on win to the display counter 134 will be in a standby state until the execution period of the add-on sub-effect ends. This is the flag to

Returning to the explanation of the non-normal performance control process (FIG. 62), if a negative determination is made in step S3016, it is determined whether an ART end command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3019). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3019, ART termination processing is executed (step S3020). In the ART end processing, processing is performed to execute an ART end effect as a effect corresponding to the end of the ART state ST6. The ART end effect is executed on the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. In addition, in the ART termination process (step S3020), numerical information that enables the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the end timing of the ART end performance is set in the performance side performance timer counter provided in the performance side RAM 94. The value of the performance-side performance timer counter is updated in step S5705 of the history image management process (FIG. 95), which will be described later. Thereafter, the ART flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3021), and this non-normal performance control process is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S3019, the process for updating the number of games is executed (step S3022), and the present non-normal performance control process is ended. In the process for updating the number of games (step S3022), a process for updating the number of consecutive games image G18 displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is executed on the condition that the additional sub-effect has ended.

Here, prior to explaining the game number updating process (FIG. 66(b)), the flag clearing process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 66(a). Note that the flag clearing process is executed in step S2006 of the pointer update process (FIG. 48) when the reference target pointer information is updated to the final pointer information and repeat information is not set in the final pointer information. be done.

In the flag clearing process, if the value of the target layer counter 114 in the read area 94a is "2" (step S3501: YES) and the main production flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3502 : YES), the main performance flag is cleared to "0" (step S3503). This makes it possible for the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the additional main performance has ended.

In the flag clearing process, if the value of the target layer counter 114 in the readout area 94a is "3" (step S3504: YES) and the sub-performance flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3505 : YES), and clears the sub performance flag to "0" (step S3506). This makes it possible for the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the additional sub-performance has ended.

In the flag clearing process, if the value of the target layer counter 114 is "11" (step S3507: YES), a later-described accessory flag setting process is executed (step S3508), and this flag clearing process ends.

Next, the process for updating the number of games executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 66(b). Note that the process for updating the number of games is executed in step S3022 of the non-normal performance control process (FIG. 62).

In the process for updating the number of games, it is first determined whether the additional display standby flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3601). If the additional display standby flag is set to "1" (step S3601: YES), it is determined whether the sub-performance flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3602). .

If a negative determination is made in step S3602, it means that the additional sub-effect that was being executed has ended. In this case, addition processing for the display counter 134 is executed (step S3603). In the addition process of the display counter 134, the value of the add-on game number counter 135 and the value of the blinking display counter 136 in the performance side RAM 94 are added to the value of the display counter 134. If the additional effects are not occurring continuously, the number of additional games in the additional sub effects that have ended this time is set in the additional game number counter 135, and the value of the blinking display counter 136 becomes "0". There is. In the addition process of the display counter 134 performed in this case (step S3603), the number of add-on games in the add-on sub performance that has ended this time is added to the value of the display counter 134. In addition, if the additional sub-effects are occurring continuously without interruption, the number of additional games in the currently ended additional sub-effect is set in the additional game number counter 135, and the blinking display counter 136 is set to the total number of add-on games of the add-on wins that occurred consecutively before the last add-on win. In the addition processing of the display counter 134 performed in this case (step S3603), the total number of add-on games in all the consecutively occurring add-on wins is added to the value of the display counter 134.

Thereafter, a process of updating the display of the number of consecutive games is executed (step S3604). In the process of updating the display of the number of consecutive games, display data for displaying the number of consecutive games image G18 corresponding to the value of the display counter 134 after the addition process has been performed in step S3603 is read from the production side ROM 93, The read display data is set in the third effect area 113d (FIG. 42(c)) of the display setting area 113. By controlling the display of the image display device 63 based on the display data, the value of the number of consecutive games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is added by the display counter 134 in step S3603. Updated to the value after the update. Specifically, if the additional effects have not occurred continuously, the value is updated to the value after adding the number of additional games in the additional sub effects that have ended this time. Further, if the additional sub-performances are continuously occurring without interruption, the value is updated to the value after adding the total number of additional games in the continuously occurring additional winnings.

Thereafter, the value of the add-on game counter 135 and the value of the flashing display counter 136 in the performance-side RAM 94 are cleared to "0" (step S3605), and the add-on display standby flag in the performance-side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3606). ), this process for updating the number of games ends.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 67, a description will be given of how the additional main effect and the additional sub effect are executed in the ART state ST6. FIG. 67(a) shows the execution period of the additional main effect, FIG. 67(b) shows the execution period of the gauge blinking display in the additional sub effect, and FIG. 67(c) shows the execution period of the gauge increase display in the additional sub effect. , FIG. 67(d) shows the start timing of the base performance for ART and the normal performance for ART, FIG. 67(e) shows the update timing of the display of the number of consecutive games, and FIG. 67(f) shows the timing when the performance side MPU 92 67(g) shows the timing at which the production side MPU 92 receives the game start command.

First, a case will be described in which the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command after the additional main performance and additional sub performance are completed.

At timing t1 in ART state ST6, as shown in FIG. 67(f), when the production side MPU 92 receives the ART mid-addition command, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 67(a), the addition main At the same time as the performance is started, as shown in FIG. 67(b), the gauge flashing display in the additional sub-performance is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67(a), when the additional main effect ends at timing t2, the gauge blinking display ends at timing t2, and as shown in FIG. As shown in c), the gauge increase display in the additional sub effect is started. Since the video display of the additional main effect was executed to the end without ending midway, the gauge increase display is a high-speed display in which the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 in the gauge display section G19a are updated at 200 millisecond intervals. Become.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67(c), when the gauge increase display in the additional sub-performance ends at timing t3, the value of the display counter 134 is changed to the additional winning that triggered the completed additional sub-performance. The number of additional games will be added. Then, as shown in FIG. 67(e), at the timing t3, the value of the number of consecutive games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after addition of the number of additional games.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67(g), when the production side MPU 92 receives a game start command at timing t4, as shown in FIG. 67(d), a new ART base production and ART At the same time as the normal effect is started, a process of decrementing the value of the display counter 134 by 1 is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 67(e), at the timing t4, the value of the number of consecutive games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after the subtraction of 1.

As already explained, if the video display of the additional main performance is executed to the end without ending midway, the number of additional games is suggested at the end of the video display. In this case, the player will view the gauge increase display while knowing the number of additional games. Because the gauge increase display is displayed at high speed, the period during which the gauge increase display is executed in parallel with the base performance for ART and normal performance for ART that are started based on the reception of the game start command is shortened. As a result, the player's interest can be quickly returned to the normal performance for ART.

Next, a case will be described in which the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command during execution of an additional main performance, and also receives an additional command during ART during execution of a subsequent gauge increase display.

At the timing t5 in the ART state ST6, as shown in FIG. 67(f), when the production side MPU 92 receives the ART mid-addition command, at the timing t5, as shown in FIG. 67(a), the addition main At the same time as the performance is started, as shown in FIG. 67(b), the gauge flashing display in the additional sub-performance is started.

Thereafter, at timing t6, which is before the end of the execution period (specifically 3 seconds) of the additional main performance, the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command as shown in FIG. 67(g). , as shown in FIG. 67(a), the additional main effect that was being executed halfway ends at the timing t6. At the timing of t6, the low speed first additional effect table is read out to the third layer LY3 in place of the high speed first additional sub effect table which had been read out to the third layer LY3. As already explained, the value of the pointer counter PC3 in the third layer LY3 is inherited without being cleared. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 67(b), the gauge blinking display in the additional sub effect continues. Further, as shown in FIG. 67(d), at the timing t6, the ART base effect and the ART normal effect are started, and the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the display counter 134 is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 67(e), at the timing t6, the value of the number of consecutive games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after the subtraction of 1.

In this way, if the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command while the additional main performance and additional sub performance are being executed, the additional main performance that was being executed ends, and based on the reception of the game start command, The base performance for ART and the normal performance for ART are started. Furthermore, by reading the low-speed first additional sub-performance table instead of the high-speed first additional sub-performance table, the gauge increase display in the additional sub-performance is switched from the high-speed display to the low-speed display. As a result, it is possible to check not only the result of the additional winning but also the additional sub-performance corresponding to the additional winning, and based on the reception of the game start command, the ART base performance and the ART normal performance can be started. Since the video display of the additional main performance was not executed to the end and ended midway, the gauge increase display is started without any indication of the number of additional games. In this case, the player views the gauge increase display while hoping that the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 displayed on the gauge display section G19a will be updated in a manner corresponding to the number of additional games of "100". It happens. By switching the gauge increase display from a high-speed display to a low-speed display, it is possible to extend the display period of the gauge increase display, which is of high interest, and to improve the interest of the game.

After that, at timing t7, as shown in FIG. 67(b), the gauge blinking display in the additional sub-performance ends, and as shown in FIG. 67(c), the gauge increase display in the additional sub-performance starts. . As a result, the image display device 63 enters a state in which the ART base effect, the ART normal effect, and the gauge increase display in the additional sub effect are being executed simultaneously. As already explained, if the video display of the additional main performance ends midway without being executed to the end, the gauge increase display in the additional sub performance will change the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 displayed on the gauge display section G19a. is a slow display that is updated every 400 milliseconds.

Thereafter, at timing t8, which is before the end of the execution period of the gauge increase display, as shown in FIG. 67(f), when the production side MPU 92 receives an additional command during ART, as shown in FIG. 67(c). As such, the gauge increase display that was being executed halfway ends at the timing t8. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 67(a) and 67(b), at the timing of t8, the additional main performance corresponding to the ART mid-addition command received this time and the gauge blinking display in the additional sub performance are started. . As a result, the image display device 63 enters a state in which the ART base performance, the ART normal performance, the additional main performance, and the gauge blinking display in the additional sub performance are executed simultaneously. In the gauge flashing display, the gauge flashing display is performed in a manner corresponding to the total number of add-on games in the add-on wins that have occurred consecutively before the current add-on win occurs. For this reason, the ART After receiving the medium add-on command, it is possible to start the top-up main performance and top-up sub performance based on the received ART medium top-up command without causing any delay.

Thereafter, at timing t9, the additional main performance ends as shown in FIG. 67(a), and the gauge blinking display in the additional sub performance ends as shown in FIG. 67(b). Then, at the timing t9, the gauge increase display in the additional sub effect is started as shown in FIG. 67(c). Since the video display of the additional main effect was executed to the end without ending midway, the gauge increase display is a high-speed display in which the number and color of the unit gauge images G22 in the gauge display section G19a are updated at 200 millisecond intervals. Become.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67(c), at timing t10, the gauge increase display in the add-on sub performance ends, and the total number of add-on games in the two consecutive add-on wins is displayed on the display counter 134. A process of adding is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 67(e), at the timing t10, the value of the number of consecutive games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after addition of the total number of additional games.

As described above, the main side MPU 72 does not set numerical information to the freeze counter in the main side RAM 74 at the start of the additional main effect and the additional sub effect. A player who is in a hurry in a situation such as the end of business hours is approaching, can start the next game by operating a start lever 41 in the middle of an additional main performance and an additional sub performance. If the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command while the additional main performance and additional sub performance are being executed, the additional main performance that was being executed ends and the base performance for ART is started based on the reception of the game start command. And the normal performance for ART is started. Further, the gauge increase display in the additional sub performance is switched from high speed display to low speed display, and the display of the additional sub performance is continued. As a result, it is possible to check not only the result of the additional winning but also the additional sub-performance corresponding to the additional winning, and based on the reception of the game start command, the ART base performance and the ART normal performance can be started. After the base performance for ART and the normal performance for ART are started based on the operation of the start lever 41, the additional sub-performance is continuously executed in parallel with these performances, thereby omitting the additional main performance. Even for players who are in a hurry, the entire additional sub performance can be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The number of additional games is suggested by the video display of the additional main effect being executed to the end without ending midway. When the gauge increase display is performed with the top-up main effect being executed to the end and the number of top-up games being suggested, the gauge increase display is displayed at high speed. As a result, the execution period of the gauge increase display that is performed after the number of additional games is suggested can be shortened, and the player's attention can be quickly shifted to the next game. On the other hand, the gauge increase display that is performed when the video display of the additional main performance ends midway without being executed to the end becomes a low-speed display. If the gauge increase display is started without any indication of the number of additional games, the player may change the number and color update mode of the unit gauge images G22 displayed in the gauge display section G19a to "100" for the number of additional games. You will look at the gauge increase display, hoping for a corresponding mode. By switching the gauge increase display from a high-speed display to a low-speed display, it is possible to extend the display period of the gauge increase display, which is of high interest, and to improve the interest of the game.

If the performance side MPU 92 receives an additional command during ART in a situation where an additional sub-performance is being executed, the additional sub-performance that was being executed ends and a new additional main performance based on the reception of the additional command during ART is started. And additional sub effects are started. If the configuration is such that the start of the additional main performance and additional sub-performance based on the reception of the additional command during ART is waited until the additional sub-performance that is being executed ends, the additional main performance will be executed after receiving the additional command during ART. Also, there is a delay before starting the additional sub effects. With this configuration, if additional wins occur consecutively and delays are accumulated, a situation will arise in which the additional main performance and additional sub performance corresponding to the additional wins cannot be started during the game in which the additional wins occur. There is a risk. In contrast, in this embodiment, the additional main effect and the additional sub effect are started without delay based on the reception of the additional command during ART. As a result, even if additional wins occur consecutively, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the additional main performance and additional sub performance corresponding to the additional wins cannot be started during the game in which the additional wins occur. I can do it.

In the case where the performance side MPU 92 receives the top-up command during ART in a situation where the top-up sub-performance is being executed, the top-up sub-performance is the sum of the top-up wins that have occurred consecutively before the current top-up win. The game is played in a manner corresponding to the number of additional games. Therefore, when an add-on command is received during ART, the gauge display section G19a is in a state where the unit gauge image G22 of the final number and color of the added sub-effect that has been executed is blinking. As a result, it is possible to provide continuity to the additional sub effects, and to create a special feeling that the additional winnings have occurred consecutively. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, the final state of the additional sub-performance can be displayed to the player who was watching the additional sub-performance that was being executed. In this way, based on the reception of the additional command during ART, the additional sub-effects that are being executed are terminated and the additional main effects and additional sub-effects are started, without causing any delay. The final state of the additional sub-performance can be displayed to the player who was watching the additional sub-performance.

If additional winnings occur consecutively in a manner where the additional sub effects are not interrupted, instead of the address information of the display data set in the additional sub effect table, the consecutive winnings before the current additional winning will be displayed. The address information of the display data for displaying the gauge blinking and increasing the gauge in a manner corresponding to the total number of additional games of additional winnings that have occurred is set. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the number of additional sub-performance tables stored in advance in the performance-side ROM 93, and the storage capacity of the performance-side ROM 93 for storing the additional sub-performance tables can be reduced.

If additional winnings do not occur consecutively, the number of consecutive games image G18 displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is updated at the end of the additional sub-performance. By making it impossible to grasp the number of additional games based on the continuous game number image G18 until the additional sub-effect ends, the additional main effect indicating the number of additional games and the additional sub-effect indicating the number of additional games can be changed. It can increase interest.

When additional winnings occur consecutively in a manner in which the additional sub-performances are not interrupted, the display of the number of consecutive games is updated at the end of the additional sub-performance of the last additional winning in the continuously occurring additional winnings. By not updating the number of consecutive games image G18 until the last top-up winning sub-performance is finished, interest in the top-up main performance indicating the number of top-up games and the top-up sub-performance indicating the number of top-up games can be increased. In addition, by setting the number of additional games added at one time to the display counter 134 in the performance side RAM 94 to a large value, the impression is that the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST6 has increased greatly due to consecutive additional winnings. can be given.

In the ART state ST6, an ART base performance, an ART normal performance, an additional main performance, and an additional sub performance are executed. There are multiple types of each of these performances, and the number of combinations of these performances is enormous. These effects are such that the ART base effect table, ART normal effect table, additional main effect table, and additional sub effect table are read out to different layers LYn (0th layer LY0 to 3rd layer LY3) in the readout area 94a. , the performance execution control is executed by the performance side MPU 92 according to these performance tables. As a result, compared to a configuration in which production tables for all combinations of these productions are stored in advance in the production side ROM 93, the increase in the data capacity of the production table stored in the production side ROM 93 in advance can be suppressed. It is possible to increase the variation of combinations of these effects. In addition, in a situation where the base performance for ART and the normal performance for ART are being executed, the performance side MPU 92 continues the base performance for ART and the normal performance for ART that are being executed based on the reception of the ART mid-addition command. However, the process for starting the additional main performance and additional sub performance is simplified.

There are four types of top-up main effect tables that are read when a top-up winning with the number of top-up games being "50" occurs, as well as two types of top-up sub effect tables (high-speed first top-up sub-effect table and low-speed first There are two types (with an additional sub-production table). In addition, there are four types of additional main effect tables that are read when an additional winning with the number of additional games is "100" occurs, and two types of additional sub effect tables (high speed second additional sub effect table and low speed second additional effect table). There are two types (2nd additional sub effect table). An additional main effect table and an additional sub effect table are stored in the effect side ROM 93, and an additional main effect table and an additional sub effect table are stored in accordance with these effect tables read out to different layers LYn (n=2, 3) of the readout area 94a. Due to the configuration in which the performance is executed, one performance table including performance data for executing the additional main performance and performance data for executing the additional sub performance is stored in the performance side ROM 93. Compared to the configuration, the storage capacity of the performance side ROM 93 for storing the performance table for executing the additional main performance and the additional sub performance is reduced.

<Configuration for executing role object action production>
Next, the configuration for executing the accessory motion performance will be explained. In this slot machine 10, one condition is that the presentation side MPU 92 receives a game start command from the main side MPU 72, and determines whether or not the spherical presentation portion 77b (FIG. 1) of the accessory 75 is staying at the origin. Origin detection is performed. If it is determined in the origin detection that the spherical effect section 77b is not staying at the origin, a correction operation is performed to return the spherical effect section 77b to the origin. The origin of the spherical performance portion 77b in the normal gaming state ST1, the bonus internal state ST2, the bonus state transferred from the normal gaming state ST1, and the preparation state ST5 is the initial position detected by the initial position sensor 75a (FIG. 1). On the other hand, the origin of the spherical effect portion 77b in the ART state ST6 and the bonus state shifted from the ART state ST6 is the displacement position detected by the displacement position sensor 75b (FIG. 1).

As described above, role object movement effects are performed in the bonus announcement effect, the re-variation effect, and the additional main effect. Furthermore, accessory motion effects are also performed in each game in the BB state ST3 and the RB state ST4. In these accessory motion effects, the spherical performance portion 77b (FIG. 1) of the accessory 75 moves up and down.

In the bonus announcement performance, the accessory motion performance is started with the bonus announcement image G13 (FIG. 39(g)) being displayed on the image display device 63. Further, in the re-variation performance, the accessory motion performance is started after the re-variation of the medium symbol is started on the image display device 63. In the bonus announcement performance and the re-variation performance, the spherical performance part 77b of the accessory 75 that has stayed at the initial position moves downward for 1 second, and then moves for 1 second at an intermediate position close to the displacement position. Cross over and stop. Thereafter, the spherical effect part 77b moves upward for one second and returns to the initial position. The accessory motion performance in the bonus announcement performance ends at the timing when the execution period of the bonus announcement performance ends, and the accessory motion performance in the re-variation performance ends at the timing when the execution period of the re-variation performance ends.

In the additional main performance, the accessory motion performance is started at the timing when there is one second left in the execution period of the additional main performance. Further, in the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4), the accessory motion performance is started based on the performance side MPU 92 receiving a game start command from the main side MPU 72. In the additional main performance and the accessory movement performance in the bonus state transitioned from the ART state ST6, the spherical performance part 77b of the accessory 75 that had been staying at the displacement position moves upward for 0.5 seconds and moves from the initial position. It also stops for 0.5 seconds at a halfway position below. Thereafter, the spherical effect portion 77b moves downward for 0.5 seconds and returns to the displaced position. In addition, in the bonus state transitioned from the normal game state ST1, the spherical performance part 77b of the accessory 75, which had been staying at the initial position, moves downward for 0.5 seconds and moves further than the displaced position. It stops for 0.5 seconds at an upper halfway position. Thereafter, the spherical effect part 77b moves upward for 0.5 seconds and returns to the initial position.

In the bonus announcement performance and the re-variation performance, a freeze counter in the main side RAM 74 is set, and the performance side MPU 92 does not receive a game start command until the value of the freeze counter becomes "0". For this reason, when the accessory motion performance is executed in the bonus announcement performance and the re-variation performance, the performance side MPU 92 does not receive the game start command while the accessory motion performance is being executed. Furthermore, in the bonus state, the accessory motion performance is started at the start timing of the game. The execution period of the accessory motion production in the bonus state is from the time when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R started rotating in the previous game until the next time when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can start rotating. This is 1.5 seconds, which is shorter than the wait time (specifically, 4.1 seconds) for waiting for the rotation of 32M and 32R to start. For this reason, even when the accessory motion performance is executed in the bonus state, the performance side MPU 92 will not receive the game start command while the accessory motion performance is being executed.

On the other hand, in the additional main effect and additional sub effect in the ART state ST6, the freeze counter in the main side RAM 74 is not set. For this reason, it is possible that the performance side MPU 92 receives the game start command during the execution of the accessory action performance that was started at the end of the additional main performance (timing when there was 1 second left in the execution period of the additional main performance). . In this case, based on the performance side MPU 92 receiving the game start command, the accessory motion performance that was being executed is ended midway. Then, the spherical effect part 77b of the accessory 75 returns to the origin (specifically, the displaced position). As already explained, if the performance side MPU 92 receives the game start command before the accessory motion performance is started in the additional main performance, the additional main performance ends. In this case, the accessory motion performance is canceled.

As shown in FIG. 41(b), the production-side RAM 94 is provided with an area 94d for accessory management in which management information for the accessory 75 is set. The accessory management area 94d is provided with a correction execution counter 141 that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of times the correction operation is executed. Each time it is determined that the spherical effect part 77b of the accessory 75 is not staying at the origin in the origin detection, the correction operation of the accessory 75 is executed, and "1" is added to the value of the correction execution counter 141. . However, even if it is determined that the spherical performance section 77b is not staying at the origin in the origin detection performed when the production side MPU 92 receives a game start command during execution of the role object action production, the value of the correction execution counter 141 ``1'' is not added to . If it is determined that the spherical effect part 77b of the accessory 75 is not staying at the origin in the origin detection performed in a situation where the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3", the origin detection and correction operation are not executed. Set to correction operation standby state. In the correction operation standby state, if a predetermined period (specifically 5 minutes) has elapsed since the start of the correction operation standby state, the number of games played since the start of the correction action standby state has reached the predetermined number. When the number of times (specifically, 30 times) has been reached, when the production side MPU 92 receives an accessory initialization command from the main side MPU 72, or when the production side MPU 92 receives information indicating that a bonus winning has been established from the main side MPU 72. will be canceled if a winning result command with which is set is received. As already explained, the accessory initialization command is transmitted in step S102 of the main process (FIG. 11) when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started. When the correction operation standby state is released, a correction operation is performed to return the accessory 75 to its origin. The correction operation that is executed when the correction operation standby state is released is not counted by the correction execution counter 141.

As shown in FIG. 41(b), the accessory management area 94d includes a standby execution counter 142 that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of times the correction operation standby state is set, and a standby execution counter 142 that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of times the correction operation standby state is started. A standby time counter 143 that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the time that has passed since then, and a standby game number counter 144 that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of games that have been executed after the start of the correction operation standby state are provided. It is being The value of the standby execution counter 142 is incremented by 1 each time the correction operation standby state is set.

If it is determined that the spherical effect part 77b of the accessory 75 is not staying at the origin in the origin detection performed in a situation where the values of the standby execution counter 142 and the correction execution counter 141 are "3", the origin is An accessory error state is set on condition that the detection is not performed during the performance of an accessory action. Even in the accessory error state, the origin detection and correction operation are not executed, as in the correction operation standby state. The accessory error state occurs when the production-side MPU 92 receives a winning result command from the main MPU 72 in which information indicating that a bonus win has been established, or when the production-side MPU 92 receives an accessory initialization command from the main MPU 72. It will be canceled if it is received. When the accessory error state is canceled, a correction operation is performed to return the spherical effect section 77b to the origin. The correction execution counter 141 does not count the correction operation that is executed when the accessory error state is canceled.

Next, the accessory management process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 68. Note that the accessory management process is executed in the production side MPU 92 in an interrupt process that is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds).

In the accessory management process, first, accessory initialization processing is executed (step S3701). FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing accessory initialization processing.

In the accessory initialization process, first, it is determined whether or not an accessory initialization command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3801). As already explained, the accessory initialization command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 in step S102 of the main process (FIG. 11) when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started.

When the accessory initialization command is received (step S3801: YES), accessory initialization processing is executed (step S3802). In the accessory initialization process, various counters 141 to 144 and various flags (accessories initializing flag, initialization End flag, accessory error flag, error release flag, correction operation standby flag, standby release flag, correction operation in progress flag, correction operation completion flag, accessory operation in progress flag, origin displacement flag, first origin standby flag, second Clear the values of the origin standby flag and return operation flag to "0". As a result, if there is an accessory error state before the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is cut off, the accessory error state is canceled and the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is cut off. If the correction operation standby state is in effect before the correction operation is performed, the correction operation standby state is canceled. In addition, in the accessory initial setting process (step S3802), the eleventh layer LY11 in the readout area 94a is cleared. As a result, the drive table for controlling the drive of the accessory 75 is not read out in the readout area 94a.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the initial position sensor 75a is ON (step S3803). If the initial position sensor 75a is ON (step S3803: YES), since the spherical effect part 77b is already staying at the initial position, the processing for starting the return of the accessory 75 to the initial position ( The main accessory initialization process is ended without performing the processes in steps S3804 and S3805.

On the other hand, if the initial position sensor 75a is not ON (step S3803: NO), a process for starting the initial position return for returning the spherical effect part 77b of the accessory 75 to the initial position (steps S3804 to S3805) is performed. process). Specifically, the accessory initialization table is read out from the performance side ROM 93 to the 11th layer LY11 in the readout area 94a (step S3804). In the accessory initialization table, numerical information from "0" to "60" is arranged in consecutive numbers as pointer information. First drive data is set for moving the camera upward. The pointer information of the accessory initialization table read into the eleventh layer LY11 is updated in step S2014 of the pointer update process (FIG. 48). As already explained, the pointer information update cycle is 40 milliseconds. Every time the pointer information in the accessory initialization table is updated, first drive data is output to the accessory drive section 78 (FIG. 1), and the spherical effect section 77b moves toward the initial position. The number of times the first drive data is outputted is 30 times in order to move the spherical effect section 77b, which is staying at the displacement position farthest from the initial position, to the initial position. On the other hand, the first drive data for 60 times is set in the accessory initialization table, which exceeds the number of outputs required to return the spherical effect part 77b staying at the displaced position to the initial position. . Therefore, even if the movement of the spherical effect section 77b is temporarily inhibited while the spherical effect section 77b is returning to its initial position, the spherical effect section 77b will not be able to return to its initial position, resulting in an accessory error state. The possibility of this happening is reduced. The maximum time required to return to the initial position is 2.4 seconds. As described above, when the spherical effect section 77b stays at the initial position, the subsequent output of the first drive data is canceled.

After reading the accessory initialization table in step S3804, the accessory initializing flag provided in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3805), and the main accessory initialization process is started. finish. The accessory initializing flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the accessory 75 is being initialized.

If it is determined in step S3801 that the accessory initialization command has not been received, it is determined whether the accessory initializing flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3806). If the accessory initializing flag is set to "1" (step S3806: YES), it is determined whether the initial position sensor 75a is ON (step S3807). If the initial position sensor 75a is ON (step S3807: YES), the return to the initial position of the accessory 75 has been completed, so the 11th accessory initialization table is read out in the reading area 94a. Clear layer LY11 (step S3808). As a result, the first drive data set in the accessory initialization table is no longer output. Thereafter, the accessory object initialization flag is cleared to "0" (step S3809), and this accessory object initialization process is ended.

If it is determined in step S3807 that the initial position sensor 75a is not ON, it is determined whether the initialization end flag provided in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3810 ). The initialization end flag is a flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the pointer information of the accessory initialization table read to the eleventh layer LY11 has been updated to the final pointer information. The initialization end flag is set to "1" in step S4602 of accessory flag setting processing (FIG. 77), which will be described later.

If the initialization end flag is set to "1" (step S3810: YES), the spherical effect portion 77b of the accessory 75 remains at the initial position even though the first drive data has been output 60 times. Since this means that the state has not returned to normal, processing for setting the accessory error state (processing from step S3811 to step S3814) is executed. Specifically, the accessory initializing flag in the accessory management area 94d is cleared to "0" (step S3811), and the initialization end flag in the accessory management area 94d is cleared to "0" (step S3812). ).

Thereafter, the accessory error flag provided in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3813). The accessory error flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the accessory is in an error state. By setting "1" to the accessory error flag, the process of newly reading out the drive table of the accessory 75 to the reading area 94a is prohibited.

Thereafter, the accessory object error state notification setting process is executed (step S3814), and the main accessory initialization process is ended. In the notification setting process, the accessory error notification table for executing the accessory error notification is read from the production side ROM 93 to the readout area 94a. The accessory error notification table is read out to the ninth layer LY9 of the readout area 94a. The accessory error notification table includes address information and setting destination information of display data for executing an accessory error display on the image display device 63 indicating that the accessory is in an error state, and information on the setting destination. sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 so that an accessory error notification sound is output to notify the user that the accessory error has occurred; Light emission data is set. The display data setting destination information for executing the accessory error display is information that specifies the first notification area 113g of the display setting area 113. The performance-side MPU 92 controls execution of notification according to the accessory error notification table read out to the ninth layer LY9, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the accessory error notification. .

As mentioned above, if the spherical effect part 77b does not return to the initial position even though the first drive data has been output to the accessory drive unit 78 60 times according to the accessory initialization table, a correction operation is performed. The accessory error state is set without going through the standby state. As a result, when the spherical effect section 77b does not return to the initial position even though the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 has started, the game hall This reduces the possibility that an administrator will miss something.

Returning to the description of the accessory management process (FIG. 68), after executing the accessory initialization process in step S3701, it is determined whether a game start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3702), and the game is started. If the command has been received (step S3702: YES), it is determined whether the correction operation completion flag provided in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3703). The correction operation completion flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the correction operation of the accessory 75 has been completed. The correction operation completion flag is set to "1" when the correction operation of the accessory 75 is completed.

If the correction operation completion flag is set to "1" (step S3703: YES), the correction operation completion flag is cleared to "0" (step S3704). In this way, the correction operation completion flag is cleared to "0" when the game start command is received. The production side MPU 92 does not execute the accessory motion production in which the spherical production section 77b operates in a situation where the correction operation completion flag is set to "1". Therefore, if the correction operation of the accessory 75 is completed during the game and the correction operation completion flag is set to "1", the correction operation completion flag will be cleared to "0" at the start of the next game. Actual action effects are not performed.

When a negative determination is made in step S3703, or when the process in step S3704 is performed, it is determined whether the accessory error flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3705). If the accessory error flag is set to "1" (step S3705: YES), it is not the timing to perform the correction operation of the accessory 75 and the accessory action effect, so the processes of steps S3706 to S3714 are executed. The process advances to step S3715 without doing so.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3705 that the accessory error flag is not set to "1", it is determined whether the return operation flag provided in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1". (Step S3706). The return operation in progress flag indicates that based on the fact that the origin of the spherical effect part 77b of the accessory object 75 has been changed, the return operation of the accessory object 75 is being performed to move the spherical effect part 77b to the changed origin. This is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the current state. If the return operation flag is set to "1" (step S3706: YES), the spherical effect part 77b can be returned to the changed origin without performing a correction operation of the accessory 75. , the process proceeds to step S3715 without performing any correction operation.

If a negative determination is made in step S3706, it is determined whether the correction operation standby flag provided in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3707). The correction operation standby flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the correction operation is in a standby state. When the correction operation standby flag is set to "1" (step S3707: YES), the value of the standby game number counter 144 provided in the accessory management area 94d is subtracted by 1 (step S3708), and the It is determined whether the value of the standby game number counter 144 after the subtraction has become "0" (step S3709). As already explained, the standby game number counter 144 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of games executed after the start of the correction operation standby state.

When the value of the standby game number counter 144 becomes "0" (step S3709: YES), processing for canceling the correction operation standby state (processing of steps S3710 to S3712) is executed. Specifically, the correction operation standby flag and the standby time counter 143 are cleared to "0" (step S3710), and the notification cancellation process of the correction operation standby state is executed (step S3711). In the notification cancellation process, a process for canceling the notification of the correction operation standby state is executed. The notification of the correction operation standby state is started by reading out the notification table for the correction operation standby state to the ninth layer LY9 of the read area 94a. The notification table is read by executing the correction operation standby state notification setting process in step S4207 of the standby setting process (FIG. 73(a)), which will be described later. The notification table for the correction operation standby state includes address information and setting destination information of display data for displaying a correction operation standby display on the image display device 63 indicating that the correction operation standby state is in effect. Sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 is set so that a standby state notification sound is output to notify that the standby state is active. The display data setting destination information for performing the correction operation standby display is information that specifies the first notification area 113g (FIG. 42(c)) of the display setting area 113. The output of the standby state notification sound ends after being executed for a predetermined period of time (specifically, one second). Further, at the timing when the output of the standby state notification sound ends, the pointer information of the reference target in the notification table for the correction operation standby state is updated to the final pointer, and the ninth layer LY9 is cleared. Therefore, at the timing when the notification cancellation process for the correction operation standby state in step S3711 is executed, no notification table for the correction operation standby state remains in the ninth layer LY9. In the correction operation standby state notification canceling process in step S3711, the first notification area 113g in which the display data for performing the correction operation standby display is set in the display setting area 113 is cleared. As a result, the correction operation standby display being executed on the image display device 63 ends.

Thereafter, the standby release flag provided in the accessory management area 94d of the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3712). The standby release flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that an opportunity to cancel the correction operation standby state has occurred. By setting the standby release flag to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S4102 of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72), which will be described later, and the process for terminating the correction operation standby state (step S4104). - the process of step S4108) will be executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3707, origin detection is performed to determine whether or not the spherical effect section 77b is staying at the origin (step S3713). The accessory management area 94d is provided with an origin displacement flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to know that the origin is set at the displacement position. When the value of the origin displacement flag is "0", it means that the origin is set at the initial position, and when the value of the origin displacement flag is "1", the origin is set at the displacement position. means that In step S3713, when the value of the origin displacement flag is "0", it is determined that the spherical effect section 77b is staying at the origin when the initial position sensor 75a is ON, and the initial position sensor 75a is OFF. In this case, it is determined that the spherical effect section 77b is not staying at the origin. Further, in step S3713, if the value of the origin displacement flag is "1", it is determined that the spherical effect section 77b is staying at the origin when the displacement position sensor 75b is ON, and the displacement position sensor 75b is OFF. In this case, it is determined that the spherical effect section 77b is not staying at the origin.

When the process of step S3712 is executed, or when it is determined in step S3713 that the spherical effect section 77b is not staying at the origin, a correction operation start setting process is executed (step S3714). In the correction operation start setting process, processing is performed to execute a correction operation to return the spherical effect section 77b to the origin. Note that details of the correction operation start setting process (step S3714) will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S3702, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3705, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3706, if a negative determination is made in step S3709, an affirmative determination is made in step S3713. or when the process of step S3714 is executed, an origin setting process is executed to change the origin of the accessory 75 based on the command received from the main MPU 72 (step S3715). Thereafter, a standby management process for managing the correction operation standby state is executed (step S3716), and the present accessory management process is ended. Note that details of the origin setting process in step S3715 (FIG. 70) and the standby management process in step S3716 (FIG. 73(b)) will be described later.

As mentioned above, when the production-side MPU 92 receives the game start command from the main-side MPU 72, it is in the accessory error state, in the correction operation standby state, and in the process of returning to the origin due to the origin of the spherical production section 77b being changed. On the condition that the spherical effect section 77b is not in any of the states, origin detection is executed to determine whether or not the spherical effect section 77b is staying at the origin, and if the spherical effect section 77b is not staying at the origin, the spherical effect section 77b Execute a correction operation to return to the origin. In a configuration in which the spherical effect section 77b can be moved by touching it, the position of the spherical effect section 77b is changed by having a configuration in which an opportunity to execute a correction operation occurs each time a game start command is received. If a deviation occurs, it is possible to quickly return the spherical effect portion 77b to the origin. As described above, the correction operation is also executed when the origin is detected during the execution of the accessory motion effect and it is determined that the spherical effect section 77b is not staying at the origin. It is not counted by the correction execution counter 141.

Next, the origin setting process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 70. Note that the origin setting process is executed in step S3715 of the accessory management process (FIG. 68).

In the origin setting process, when an ART start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3901: YES), the origin displacement flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3902). As a result, when the gaming state shifts to the ART state ST6, the origin of the accessory 75 is set to the displacement position.

After that, if neither the accessory error flag nor the correction operation standby flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3903: NO), the correction operation in the accessory management area 94d is in progress. It is determined whether the flag is set to "1" (step S3904). The correction operation in progress flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the accessory 75 is in the correction operation. The correction operation in progress flag is set to "1" in step S4105 of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72), which will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S3904, the displacement position drive table is read out from the performance side ROM 93 to the readout area 94a (step S3905). The displacement position drive table is read to the eleventh layer LY11. In the displacement position drive table, numerical information from "0" to "35" is arranged in consecutive numbers as pointer information, and for all the pointer information, the spherical direction part 77b is moved toward the displacement position. Second drive data is set for moving the object downward. The number of outputs of the second drive data required to move the spherical effect part 77b staying at the initial position farthest from the displacement position to the displacement position is "30", and the displacement position drive table contains the "30" ”, 35 pieces of second drive data are set. Therefore, by controlling the drive of the accessory 75 according to the displacement position drive table read out to the readout area 94a, even if the spherical effect part 77b stays at the initial position farthest from the origin, the corresponding It becomes possible to move the spherical effect part 77b to the displacement position. As already explained, the second drive data is output on the condition that the displacement position sensor 75b is in the OFF state. Therefore, when the drive control of the accessory 75 is performed according to the displacement position drive table, the spherical effect part 77b moves to the displacement position and stops. If the second drive data is set for the remaining pointer information in the displacement position drive table, the output of the second drive data is canceled based on the fact that the displacement position sensor 75b is in the ON state. In this case, the pointer information of the reference object is updated every 40 milliseconds without outputting the second drive data. Then, after the pointer information of the reference target is updated to the final pointer, the eleventh layer LY11 from which the displacement position drive table was read is cleared.

After reading the displacement position drive table in step S3905, the return operation flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3906), and the origin setting process ends. Thereby, it becomes possible for the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the return operation of the accessory 75 is being executed based on the change of the origin.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3904, that is, if it is determined that the correction operation of the accessory 75 is being executed, the second origin provided in the accessory management area 94d of the performance-side RAM 94 The standby flag is set to "1" (step S3907), and the present origin setting process is ended. The standby flag for the second origin allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the origin has been changed to the displacement position and movement of the spherical production section 77b to the changed origin (displacement position) is on hold. It's a flag. If the return of the spherical effect section 77b to the origin is suspended due to the correction operation of the accessory 75 being executed, the second origin standby flag is set to "1". Based on this, after the correction operation is completed, the movement of the spherical effect section 77b to the origin is started.

If a negative determination is made in step S3901, it is determined whether an ART end command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3908). If the ART end command has been received (step S3908: YES), the origin displacement flag in the accessory management area 94d is cleared to "0" (step S3909). As a result, when the ART state ST6 ends, the origin of the accessory 75 is set to the initial position.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the accessory error flag or the correction operation standby flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3910). If a negative determination is made in step S3910, it means that the accessory object is neither in an error state nor in a correction operation standby state, so "1" is set in the correction operation flag in the accessory management area 94d. It is determined whether or not (step S3911).

If a negative determination is made in step S3911, the initial position drive table is read out from the performance side ROM 93 to the readout area 94a (step S3912). The initial position drive table is read to the eleventh layer LY11. In the initial position drive table, numerical information from "0" to "35" is arranged in consecutive numbers as pointer information, and for all the pointer information, the spherical effect part 77b is moved toward the initial position. First drive data is set for moving the object upward. As already explained, the number of outputs of the first drive data required to move the spherical effect part 77b staying at the displacement position farthest from the initial position to the initial position is "30", and the initial position drive table 35 pieces of first drive data, which is more than "30", are set. Therefore, by controlling the drive of the accessory 75 according to the initial position drive table read out to the readout area 94a, even if the spherical effect part 77b stays at the farthest displacement position from the origin, the corresponding It becomes possible to move the spherical effect part 77b to the initial position. As already explained, the first drive data is output on the condition that the initial position sensor 75a is in the OFF state. Therefore, when the drive control of the accessory 75 is performed according to the initial position drive table, the spherical effect part 77b moves to the initial position and stops. If the first drive data is set for the remaining pointer information in the initial position drive table, the output of the first drive data is canceled based on the fact that the initial position sensor 75a is in the ON state. In this case, the pointer information of the reference object is updated every 40 milliseconds without outputting the first drive data. Then, after the reference target pointer information is updated to the final pointer, the eleventh layer LY11 from which the initial position drive table was read is cleared.

After reading the initial position drive table in step S3912, the return operation flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3913), and the origin setting process ends. Thereby, it becomes possible for the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the return operation of the accessory 75 is being executed based on the change of the origin.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3911, that is, if it is determined that the correction operation of the accessory 75 is being executed, the first origin standby flag provided in the accessory management area 94d is set to " 1" (step S3914), and the present origin setting process ends. The standby flag for the first origin allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the origin has been changed to the initial position and movement of the spherical production unit 77b to the changed origin (initial position) is pending. It's a flag. If the return of the spherical effect section 77b to the origin is suspended due to the correction operation of the accessory 75 being executed, the first origin standby flag is set to "1". Based on this, after the correction operation is completed, the movement of the spherical effect section 77b to the origin is started.

As described above, the origin of the accessory 75 is set to the displacement position when the ART state ST6 is started, and is set to the initial position when the ART state ST6 ends. If the origin of the accessory 75 is changed in a situation other than the accessory error state, the correction operation standby state, or the state in which the correction operation of the accessory 75 is being executed, the spherical production unit 77b changes the origin to the changed origin. Moving. Thereby, the spherical performance section 77b can be moved to the changed origin at an early timing before the performance side MPU 92 receives the game start command. On the other hand, if the origin of the accessory 75 is changed in the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state, the movement of the spherical effect part 77b to the changed origin will be caused by the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state. Executed when it is released. In addition, if the origin of the accessory 75 is changed while the correction operation of the accessory 75 is being executed, the movement of the spherical presentation section 77b to the changed origin is put on hold, and the spherical presentation section 77b When the correction operation of the accessory object 75 that is being executed is completed, it moves to the changed origin.

Next, the origin return process for accessories executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 71. Note that the accessory origin return process is executed in step S2008 of the pointer update process (FIG. 48) when the pointer information of the reference target in the target layer is updated to the final pointer and the target layer is cleared. . As already explained, in the pointer update process (FIG. 48), the accessory origin return process (step S2008) is performed when the reference pointer information of the data table read into the target layer is the final pointer information (step S2003). : YES), repeat information is not set for the final pointer information (step S2004: NO), that is, the reference target pointer information is updated to the final pointer information and the data table is cleared. Executed when

In the accessory origin return process, it is first determined whether the value of the target layer counter 114 in the readout area 94a is "11" (step S4001). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4001, this is the timing when the pointer information of the reference target in the drive table that was read to the 11th layer LY11 has been updated to the final pointer information and the 11th layer LY11 has been cleared. If so, it is determined whether the first origin standby flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4002). When an affirmative determination is made in step S4002, it is determined whether or not the state is ready for reading (step S4003). In step S4003, the accessory error flag, the correction operation standby flag, the accessory initializing flag, the correction operation flag, the correction operation completion flag, the return operation flag, and the accessory operation flag are set in the accessory management area 94d. If "1" is not set in any of them, it is determined that the drive table is in a readable state in which the drive table can be read to the eleventh layer LY11. The accessory-acting-in-progress flag is a flag that allows the performance-side MPU 92 to grasp that the accessory-acting performance is being executed. The accessory operating flag is set to "1" in step S4405 of accessory drive setting processing (FIG. 76(a)), which will be described later.

If it is determined in step S4003 that reading is possible, the first origin standby flag is cleared to "0" (step S4004), and it is determined whether or not the spherical rendering section 77b is staying at the origin ( Step S4005). As already explained, the standby flag for the first origin is used by the production side MPU 92 to indicate that the origin has been changed to the initial position and movement of the spherical production section 77b to the changed origin (initial position) is pending. This is a flag that makes it possible to understand. In step S4005, it is determined that the spherical effect section 77b is staying at the origin when the initial position sensor 75a is ON, and it is determined that the spherical effect section 77b is staying at the origin when the initial position sensor 75a is OFF. It is determined that there is no.

If the spherical effect section 77b is not staying at the origin (step S4005: NO), the already described initial position drive table is read out from the effect side ROM 93 to the reading area 94a (step S4006). The initial position drive table is read to the eleventh layer LY11. The performance-side MPU 92 controls the drive of the accessory 75 according to the initial position drive table read out to the readout area 94a, so that the spherical performance part 77b moves to the initial position which is the changed origin.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4002, it is determined whether the second origin standby flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4007). When the standby flag for the second origin is set to "1" (step S4007: YES), it is determined whether or not the state is ready for reading (step S4008). In step S4008, as in step S4003, the accessory error flag, correction operation standby flag, accessory initializing flag, correction operation in progress flag, correction operation completion flag, and return operation flag in the accessory management area 94d. When neither of the flags and the accessory operating flags are set to "1", it is determined that the drive table is in a readable state.

If it is determined in step S4008 that the state is ready for reading, the second origin standby flag is cleared to "0" (step S4009), and it is determined whether the spherical rendering section 77b is staying at the origin ( Step S4010). As already explained, the standby flag for the second origin is used by the production side MPU 92 to indicate that the origin has been changed to the displacement position and movement of the spherical production section 77b to the changed origin (displacement position) is on hold. This is a flag that makes it possible to understand. In step S4010, it is determined that the spherical effect section 77b is staying at the origin when the displacement position sensor 75b is ON, and it is determined that the spherical effect section 77b is staying at the origin when the displacement position sensor 75b is OFF. It is determined that there is no. If the spherical effect section 77b is not staying at the origin (step S4010: NO), the displacement position drive table described above is read out from the effect side ROM 93 to the reading area 94a (step S4011). The displacement position drive table is read to the eleventh layer LY11. The performance side MPU 92 controls the drive of the accessory 75 according to the read displacement position drive table, so that the spherical performance part 77b moves to the displacement position which is the changed origin.

When the process of step S4006 is executed, or when the process of step S4011 is executed, "1" is set to the return operation flag in the accessory management area 94d (step S4012), and the original accessory is returned to the origin. Finish the process.

As described above, the origin of the accessory 75 is changed while the accessory 75 is being initialized, the correction operation is being performed, or the accessory action presentation is being performed, and the spherical effect part 77b If the movement to the origin after the change is put on hold, the spherical production section 77b moves to the changed origin at the timing when the initialization, correction operation, or performance of the accessory movement of the accessory 75 that is being executed is completed. The movement to is started. Thereby, the movement of the spherical effect part 77b to the changed origin can be started early without waiting for the effect-side MPU 92 to receive the game start command.

Next, the correction operation start setting process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 72. Note that the correction operation start setting process is executed in step S3714 of the accessory management process (FIG. 68) and step S4706 of the accessory setting process at the time of bonus winning (FIG. 78), which will be described later.

In the correction operation start setting process, first, it is determined whether the value of the correction execution counter 141 in the accessory management area 94d is "3" (step S4101). If the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3" (step S4101: YES), check whether the error release flag or standby release flag provided in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1". is determined (step S4102). The error release flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that an opportunity to release the accessory error state has occurred. Moreover, as already explained, the standby release flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that an opportunity for canceling the correction operation standby state has occurred. When a negative determination is made in step S4102, it is determined whether or not the accessory object in operation flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4103).

If a negative determination is made in step S4101, an affirmative determination is made in step S4102, or an affirmative determination is made in step S4103, read processing for correction operation is executed (step S4104). In this readout process, after clearing the 11th layer LY11 in the readout area 94a, a drive table corresponding to the current origin among the initial position drive table and displacement position drive table described above is read out from the production side ROM 93. Read out to area 94a. Specifically, if the origin displacement flag in the accessory management area 94d is not set to "1" and the current origin is the initial position, the initial position drive table is read out to the eleventh layer LY11, and If the origin displacement flag is set to "1" and the current origin is the displacement position, the displacement position drive table is read out to the eleventh layer LY11. The performance side MPU 92 controls the drive of the accessory 75 according to the initial position drive table or the displacement position drive table read out to the 11th layer LY11, so that the spherical performance part 77b is moved to the origin (initial position or displacement position). ). The configuration is such that the eleventh layer LY11 is cleared before reading the initial position drive table or the displacement position drive table. Therefore, if it is determined that the spherical performance section 77b is not staying at the origin in the origin detection performed during the execution of the accessory motion performance, the accessory motion performance that is being executed will be terminated midway. Then, the correction operation of the accessory 75 is started.

Thereafter, the correction operation flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4105). Thereby, it becomes possible for the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the correction operation of the accessory 75 is in progress. After that, when the standby release flag is set to "1" (step S4106: YES), that is, when the correction operation of the accessory 75 is started based on the occurrence of an opportunity to cancel the correction operation standby state, , executes the first clearing process of accessory management information (step S4107). In the first clearing process of accessory management information, the values of the standby release flag, the correction operation standby flag, and the correction execution counter 141 in the accessory management area 94d are cleared to "0". The correction operation standby state is canceled by clearing the correction operation standby flag to "0". Further, by clearing the value of the correction execution counter 141 to "0", the number of times the correction operation of the accessory 75 is executed, which has been counted by the production side MPU 92, is reset. On the other hand, in the first clearing process (step S4107) of accessory management information, the value of the standby execution counter 142 in the accessory management area 94d is not cleared to "0".

Thereafter, a correction operation standby state notification cancellation process is executed (step S4108), and the correction operation start setting process is ended. In step S4108, the same process as the correction operation standby state notification cancellation process in step S3711 of the accessory management process (FIG. 68) already described is executed. Specifically, in the correction operation standby state notification canceling process in step S4108, the first notification area 113g in which display data for performing a correction operation standby display is set in the display setting area 113 is cleared. As a result, the correction operation standby display being executed on the image display device 63 ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S4106, it is determined whether the error release flag is set to "1" (step S4109). If the error release flag is set to "1" (step S4109: YES), a second clearing process of accessory management information is executed (step S4110). In the second clearing process of accessory management information, various counters 141 to 144 and various flags (specifically, accessory initializing flag, initial completion flag, accessory error flag, error release flag, correction operation standby flag, standby release flag, correction operation completion flag, accessory operation flag, first origin standby flag, second origin standby flag, and return operation in progress Clear the value of flag) to "0". As a result, the management information of the accessory 75 except for the information on the correction operation in progress flag and the origin displacement flag is cleared. By executing the second clearing process (step S4110) of accessory management information, the value of the accessory error flag is cleared to "0" and the accessory error state is released. In addition, the number of times that the correction operation standby state was set, which was counted by the standby execution counter 142, was cleared to "0", and the correction operation of the accessory 75, which was counted by the correction execution counter 141, was executed. The number of times is cleared to "0".

Thereafter, a process for canceling the notification of the accessory error state is executed (step S4111), and the process for setting the start of the correction operation is ended. In the process of canceling the notification of the accessory error state, the ninth layer LY9 from which the notification table for the accessory error state is read out is cleared in the reading area 94a, and the accessory error is displayed in the display setting area 113. The first notification area 113g in which display data for the purpose is set is cleared. By clearing the ninth layer LY9, the accessory error notification performed by the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62 ends. Furthermore, the first notification area 113g is cleared, thereby ending the accessory error display that was being performed on the image display device 63.

If a negative determination is made in step S4109, it is determined whether or not the accessory object in operation flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4112). When an affirmative determination is made in step S4112, the accessory operating flag in the accessory management area 94d is cleared to "0" (step S4113). The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S4112 means that the production side MPU 92 receives a game start command and detects the origin during execution of the accessory action production, and the spherical production part 77b of the accessory 75 stays at the origin. This is the case when it is determined that the As already explained, the freeze counter in the main side RAM 74 is not set in the additional main performance and additional sub performance in the ART state ST6. Therefore, it may happen that the performance side MPU 92 receives the game start command during the execution of the accessory action performance that is started at the end of the additional main performance (timing when the execution period of the additional main performance is 1 second remaining). Furthermore, as already explained, in the accessory management process (FIG. 68), if the production side MPU 92 receives the game start command during execution of the accessory action production (step S3702: YES), step S3705, step S3706, and step A negative determination is made in S3707, and origin detection (determination processing in step S3713) is performed. If it is determined that the position is not at the origin (step S3713: NO), a correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72) is executed in step S3714.

Returning to the explanation of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72), when the accessory object operation flag is cleared to "0" in step S4113, the process of adding 1 to the value of the correction execution counter 141 (step S4114) is performed. The start setting process for the main correction operation is ended without being executed. In this way, if it is determined that the spherical performance unit 77b is not staying at the origin in the origin detection performed during the execution of the accessory action performance, the accessory action performance that is being executed is terminated midway. At the same time, the correction operation of the accessory 75 is started. This correction operation is not counted by the correction execution counter 141.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4112, the value of the correction execution counter 141 in the accessory management area 94d is incremented by 1 (step S4114), and the start setting process of this correction operation is ended.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S4102 and step S4103, the standby setting process (FIG. 73(a)) is executed (step S4115), and the start setting process of the correction operation is ended. Note that details of the standby setting process (FIG. 73(a)) will be described later.

As described above, when the accessory error state and the correction operation standby state are canceled, a correction operation is performed to return the spherical effect part 77b to the origin. This reduces the possibility that the spherical effect part 77b will be determined not to be staying at the origin in the first origin detection of the accessory 75 after the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state is released. . Further, the correction execution counter 141 does not count the correction operation performed when the correction operation standby state and accessory error state are canceled. As a result, the frequency of occurrence of the correction operation standby state is suppressed.

As already explained, "35" pieces of first drive data are set in the initial position drive table, and "35" pieces of second drive data are set in the displacement position drive table. Pointer information of reference targets in these driving tables is updated at a cycle of 40 milliseconds. The time required for the correction operation of the accessory 75 is 1.4 seconds at maximum, and the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R starts from the time when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R starts in the previous game. This is shorter than the wait time (specifically, 4.1 seconds) during which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are waited for to start rotating. Therefore, when it is determined that the spherical performance section 77b is not staying at the origin in the origin detection performed based on the presentation side MPU 92 receiving the game start command, and the correction operation of the accessory 75 is started, The correction operation ends at a timing before the presentation side MPU 92 receives the next game start command. This eliminates the possibility that the next origin detection will be performed during the execution of the correction operation of the accessory 75 in this case.

Next, the standby setting process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73(a). Note that the standby setting process is executed in step S4115 of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72).

In the standby setting process, first, it is determined whether the value of the standby execution counter 142 in the accessory management area 94d is "3" (step S4201). As already explained, the standby execution counter 142 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of times the correction operation standby state is set. If the value of the standby execution counter 142 is not "3" (step S4201: NO), processing for setting the correction operation standby state (processing of steps S4202 to S4207) is executed. Specifically, the value of the standby execution counter 142 is incremented by 1 (step S4202), and the value of the correction execution counter 141 in the accessory management area 94d is cleared to "0" (step S4203). As a result, the number of times the performance-side MPU 92 has performed the correction operation for the accessory 75 is reset.

Thereafter, the correction operation standby flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4204). As already explained, the correction operation standby flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the correction operation is in a standby state. By setting the correction operation standby flag to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S3707 of the accessory management process (FIG. 68), and the origin detection of the accessory 75 (accessory management process) is performed at the start of the game. (determination process of step S3713 in FIG. 68) is no longer performed. Therefore, in the correction operation standby state, the correction operation of the accessory 75 is not performed even if the spherical effect section 77b is not staying at the origin at the start of the game.

Thereafter, "30" is set in the waiting game counter 144 in the accessory management area 94d (step S4205), and numerical information corresponding to "5 minutes" is set in the waiting time counter 143 in the accessory management area 94d. (Step S4206). The value of the standby game number counter 144 is decremented by 1 each time a game start command is received from the main MPU 72. Further, the value of the standby time counter 143 is updated every time an interrupt process is executed at a cycle of 4 milliseconds. As already explained, in the correction operation standby state, when the value of the standby time counter 143 becomes "0" or when the value of the standby game number counter 144 becomes "0", the production side MPU 92 receives the command from the main side MPU 72. It is canceled when an accessory initialization command is received, or when the production side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus winning has been established is set from the main side MPU 72.

Thereafter, a correction operation standby state notification setting process is executed (step S4207), and the main standby setting process is ended. In the notification setting process for the correction operation standby state, the notification table for the correction operation standby state is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the readout area 94a. The notification table for the correction operation standby state is read out to the ninth layer LY9. As already explained, the notification table for the correction operation standby state includes address information and setting destination information of display data for displaying a correction operation standby display on the image display device 63 indicating that the correction operation standby state is in progress. , and sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 so that a standby state notification sound for notifying that the correction operation is in the standby state is output. The display data setting destination information for performing the correction operation standby display is information that specifies the first notification area 113g of the display setting area 113. The production side MPU 92 controls the execution of notification according to the notification table for the correction operation standby state read out to the ninth layer LY9, so that the notification is output from the speaker 62 for a predetermined period of time (specifically, 1 second). A standby state notification sound is output, and a correction operation standby display is performed on the image display device 63. In the correction operation standby display, a correction operation standby image called "Correction operation standby state" is displayed on the upper right side of the image display device 63. The correction operation standby image is set in the first notification display layer 107, and is displayed closer to the screen than the background image and various effect images. The correction operation standby display continues until the correction operation standby state notification cancellation process (step S3711 of the accessory management process (FIG. 68)) is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4201 that the value of the standby execution counter 142 is "3", the accessory error flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4208), and the accessory error flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1". The error state notification setting process is executed (step S4209), and the main standby setting process is ended. In the notification setting process for the accessory error state, the notification table for the accessory error state is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the readout area 94a. The notification table for accessory error states is read out to the ninth layer LY9. As already explained, the accessory error notification table includes the address information and setting destination information of the display data for executing the accessory error display indicating the accessory error state on the image display device 63, and the accessory error notification table. Sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 so that an accessory error notification sound is output to notify that the object is in an error state, and the upper lamp 61 is activated in a manner that notifies that the object is in an error state. Light emission data for controlling light emission is set. The display data setting destination information for executing the accessory error display is information that specifies the first notification area 113g of the display setting area 113. The performance-side MPU 92 controls execution of notification according to the accessory error notification table read out to the ninth layer LY9, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the accessory error notification. .

As described above, the situation where the value of the standby execution counter 142 is "2" or less (step S4201: NO) and the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3" (step of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72) In the origin detection performed in S4101: YES), it is determined that the spherical production unit 77b is not staying at the origin, and both the error release flag and standby release flag in the accessory management area 94d are set to "1". If not (step S4102: NO) and the accessory object operation flag in the accessory object management area 94d is not set to "1" (step S4103: NO), a correction operation standby state is entered. Also, a situation where the value of the standby execution counter 142 is "3" (step S4201: YES) and the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3" (step S4101: YES of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72) ), it is determined that the spherical production unit 77b is not staying at the origin, and both the error release flag and standby release flag in the accessory management area 94d are set to "1". (Step S4102: NO), and when the accessory operating flag in the accessory management area 94d is not set to "1" (Step S4103: NO), an accessory error state occurs. As already explained, in the accessory management process (FIG. 68), if the return operation flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S3706: YES), the origin detection (determination in step S3713) is performed. processing) is not performed. Therefore, the correction operation standby state and the accessory error state are set in a situation where no drive table has been read out to the eleventh layer LY11 and the drive control of the accessory 75 is not being performed.

Next, the standby management process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 73(b). Note that the standby management process is executed in step S3716 of the accessory management process (FIG. 68).

In the standby management process, first, it is determined whether the correction operation standby flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4301). As already explained, the correction operation standby flag is set to "1" in step S4204 of the standby setting process (FIG. 73(a)). When an affirmative determination is made in step S4301, the standby time counter 143 in the accessory management area 94d is updated (step S4302). Specifically, the value of the standby time counter 143 is subtracted by 1. If the value of the standby time counter 143 after the update is not "0" (step S4303: NO), the main accessory management process is directly ended.

On the other hand, if the value of the standby time counter 143 after updating in step S4302 becomes "0" (step S4303: YES), it means that 5 minutes have passed since the correction operation standby state was set. Therefore, processing for canceling the correction operation standby state (processing of steps S4304 and S4305) is executed. Specifically, the waiting game counter 144 in the accessory management area 94d is cleared to "0" (step S4304), and the standby release flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4305). , this accessory management process ends. By setting the standby release flag to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S4102 of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72), and the process for terminating the correction operation standby state (steps S4104 to S4104) The process of S4108) is executed.

Next, how the correction operation standby state and accessory error state are set will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 74. FIG. 74(a) shows the state of the accessory error flag in the accessory management area 94d, FIG. 74(b) shows the state of the correction operation standby flag in the accessory management area 94d, and FIG. 74(c) shows the state of the correction operation standby flag in the accessory management area 94d. 74(d) shows the timing when "1" is added to the correction execution counter 141 in the accessory management area 94d, and FIG. 74(e) shows the execution period of the correction operation of the accessory 75. FIG. 74(f) shows the timing at which "1" is added to the standby execution counter 142 in the storage area 94d, and FIG. Indicates the timing when

First, the manner in which the correction operation standby state is set will be explained.

At timings t1, t3, t5, and t7, the production side MPU 92 receives a game start command from the main side MPU 72, and the origin of the accessory 75 is detected as shown in FIG. 74(f). As already explained, in the accessory management process (FIG. 68), the origin detection of the accessory 75 (determination process in step S3713) is performed using the accessory error flag, correction operation standby flag, and return operation flag in the accessory management area 94d. This is performed when none of the above is set to "1" (step S3705: NO, step S3706: NO, step S3707: NO). If it is determined that the spherical effect part 77b of the accessory 75 is not staying at the origin in the origin detection of the accessory 75 performed at timing t1 when the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "0", the correction operation is performed. In the start setting process (FIG. 72), none of the error release flag, standby release flag, and accessory operation flag in the accessory management area 94d are set to "1" (step S4106: NO, step S4109: If the result is NO (step S4112: NO), "1" is added to the value of the correction execution counter 141 as shown in FIG. 74(d). As a result, the value of the correction execution counter 141 becomes "1". Then, as shown in FIG. 74(c), the correction operation of the accessory 75 is performed from the timing t1 to the timing t2. As already explained, the time required for the correction operation of the accessory 75 is 1.4 seconds at maximum, and from the time when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R started rotating in the previous game, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating next time. This is shorter than the wait time (specifically, 4.1 seconds) during which the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is waited until the rotation of the reel 32R can be started.

If it is determined that the accessory 75 is not staying at the origin in the origin detection of the accessory 75 performed at timing t3 when the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "1", an error occurs in the accessory management area 94d. On the condition that "1" is not set in any of the release flag, standby release flag, and accessory operation flag, the value of the correction execution counter 141 is changed at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 74(d). The process of adding 1 is performed, and the value of the correction execution counter 141 becomes "2". Then, as shown in FIG. 74(c), the correction operation of the accessory 75 is performed from the timing t3 to the timing t4. In addition, if it is determined that the accessory 75 is not staying at the origin in the origin detection of the accessory 75 performed at timing t5 when the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "2", the accessory management area 94d As shown in FIG. 74(d), the correction execution counter 141 is set at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. A process of adding 1 to the value is performed, and the value of the correction execution counter 141 becomes "3". Then, as shown in FIG. 74(c), the correction operation of the accessory 75 is performed from the timing t5 to the timing t6.

After that, at timing t7 when the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3", the origin of the accessory 75 is detected as shown in FIG. 74(f), and it is determined that the accessory 75 is not staying at the origin. 74(e), provided that none of the error release flag, standby release flag, and accessory operating flag in the accessory management area 94d are set to "1". At the timing of t7, the value of the standby execution counter 142 is incremented by 1, and the value of the standby execution counter 142 becomes "1". Then, as shown in FIG. 74(b), the correction operation standby flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1", and the correction operation standby state is established from timing t7 to timing t8. As already explained, the correction operation standby state is performed after the correction operation standby state is started if a predetermined period (specifically, 5 minutes) has elapsed since the correction operation standby state was started. When the number of games reaches a predetermined number (specifically 30 times), when the production side MPU 92 receives a role initialization command from the main side MPU 72, or when the production side MPU 92 receives a bonus prize from the main side MPU 72. It is canceled when a prize winning result command containing information indicating that the prize has been won is received.

As described above, if the origin of the accessory 75 is detected when the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3" and it is determined that the accessory 75 is not staying at the origin during the origin detection, On the condition that none of the error release flag, standby release flag, and accessory object operation flag in the accessory management area 94d are set to "1", a correction operation standby state is entered. When it is determined that the spherical presentation part 77b of the accessory 75 is not staying at the origin in the origin detection of the accessory 75, the number of times it is determined that the spherical presentation part 77b is not staying at the origin is not counted. Compared to a configuration in which the correction operation standby state is immediately set, the frequency at which the correction operation standby state is set can be reduced.

Next, a description will be given of how the accessory error state is set.

At the timing t9 when the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3" and the value of the standby execution counter 142 is "1", the origin of the accessory 75 is detected as shown in FIG. If it is determined that the object 75 is not staying at the origin, the condition is that none of the error release flag, standby release flag, and accessory operation flag in the accessory management area 94d are set to "1". Then, as shown in FIG. 74(e), a process of adding "1" to the value of the standby execution counter 142 is performed, and the value of the standby execution counter 142 becomes "2". Then, as shown in FIG. 74(b), the correction operation standby flag is set to "1" at the timing t9, and the correction operation standby state is entered from the timing t9 to the timing t10. The conditions for canceling the correction operation standby state are as described above; for example, when the number of games executed in the correction operation standby state becomes "30", the correction operation standby state is canceled at timing t10. .

Thereafter, at timing t11 when the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3" and the value of the standby execution counter 142 is "2", the origin of the accessory 75 is detected as shown in FIG. 74(f). If it is determined that the accessory 75 is not staying at the origin, none of the error release flag, standby release flag, and accessory operating flag in the accessory management area 94d are set to "1". Under this condition, as shown in FIG. 74(e), the process of adding "1" to the value of the standby execution counter 142 is performed, and the value of the standby execution counter 142 becomes "3". Then, as shown in FIG. 74(b), the correction operation standby flag is set to "1" at the timing t11, and the correction operation standby state is entered from the timing t11 to the timing t12. The conditions for canceling the correction operation standby state are as described above; for example, when the number of games executed in the correction operation standby state becomes "30", the correction operation standby state is canceled at timing t12. .

Thereafter, at timing t13 when the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3" and the value of the standby execution counter 142 is "3", the origin of the ornament 75 is detected as shown in FIG. 74(f). If it is determined that the accessory 75 is not staying at the origin, none of the standby release flag, error release flag, and accessory operating flag in the accessory management area 94d are set to "1". Under this condition, the accessory error flag is set to "1" and the accessory error state is entered, as shown in FIG. 74(a).

As described above, the origin of the accessory 75 is detected when the values of the correction execution counter 141 and the standby execution counter 142 are "3", and in the origin detection, it is determined that the accessory 75 is not staying at the origin. In this case, on condition that none of the standby release flag, error release flag, and accessory operating flag in the accessory management area 94d are set to "1", an accessory error state occurs. If it is determined that the spherical effect part 77b of the accessory 75 is not staying at the origin during the origin detection of the accessory 75, the accessory error state is immediately set without counting the number of times the correction operation standby state has been set. Compared to the configuration, it is possible to reduce the frequency at which accessory error states are set.

Next, prior to explaining the setting process for driving the accessory (FIG. 76(a)) executed by the performance side MPU 92, regarding the data structure of the drive table of the accessory 75, the accessory motion performance in the bonus announcement performance is executed. The explanation will be given by taking as an example the driving table TB for bonus notification. FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the bonus notification drive table TB.

As shown in FIG. 75, in the bonus notification drive table TB, pointer information from "0" to "79" is set to be a serial number. Second drive data for moving the spherical effect section 77b downward toward the displacement position is set for the pointer information "0" to "24", and the second drive data is set for the pointer information "50" to "79". First drive data for moving the spherical effect section 77b upward toward the initial position is set in response to the pointer information. No drive data is set in the pointer information "25" to "49".

The bonus notification drive table TB is read out to the eleventh layer LY11 in the readout area 94a. As already explained, the pointer information of the reference target in the data table read into the read area 94a is updated at a cycle of 40 milliseconds. By outputting the second drive data set for the pointer information "0" to "24" of the bonus announcement drive table TB to the accessory drive unit 78, the spherical effect unit 77b is moved to the initial position. It moves downward for 1 second from then to an intermediate position above the displacement position. Thereafter, the spherical effect section 77b remains stopped at the intermediate position until the pointer information of the reference target in the bonus notification drive table TB is updated to "50". Thereafter, the first drive data set for the pointer information "50" to "79" of the bonus announcement drive table TB is output to the accessory drive unit 78, so that the spherical effect unit 77b It moves upward for one second from the stopped midway position and returns to the initial position.

The bonus announcement drive table TB has a set of data for moving the spherical effect part 77b upwards than the number of second drive data (specifically, 25 pieces) for moving the spherical effect part 77b downward and returning it to the initial position. The number of first drive data (specifically, 30 pieces) for this purpose is larger. This increases the possibility that the spherical effect part 77b will return to the initial position even if an external force is applied to the spherical effect part 77b, and the spherical effect part 77b returns to the original position when detecting the origin of the accessory 75. The possibility that it will be determined that the person is not staying is reduced. As already explained, the first drive data is output to the accessory drive section 78 on the condition that the initial position sensor 75a is in the OFF state. Therefore, when the spherical effect section 77b returns to the initial position, the output of the first drive data set for subsequent pointer information to the accessory drive section 78 is canceled.

Next, the accessory drive setting process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 76(a). Note that the accessory drive setting process is performed in the step of the effect execution process (FIG. 47) when it is determined that the data table has been read out to the current target layer in the readout area 94a (step S1905: YES). It is executed in S1907.

In the accessory drive setting process, it is first determined whether the address information of the drive table of the accessory 75 is set for the reference target pointer information in the data table read out to the current target layer ( Step S4401). When an affirmative determination is made in step S4401, it is determined whether or not the state is ready for reading (step S4402). In step S4402, the accessory error flag, correction operation standby flag, accessory initializing flag in the accessory management area 94d, as in step S4003 of the accessory origin return process (Fig. When "1" is not set in any of the correction operation flag, correction operation completion flag, return operation flag, and accessory operation flag, the drive table can be read to the 11th layer LY11. It is determined that the state is readable.

If it is determined in step S4402 that the state is ready for reading, it is determined whether the spherical rendering section 77b is staying at the origin (step S4403). Specifically, when the origin displacement flag in the accessory management area 94d is not set to "1", that is, when the origin is at the initial position, the spherical effect part 77b is determined to be staying at the origin. In addition, when the origin displacement flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1", that is, when the origin is at the displacement position, when the displacement position sensor 75b is in the ON state, the spherical effect part 77b is at the origin. It is determined that the person is staying in

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4403, a drive table read process is executed (step S4404). In the reading process, the driving table of the accessory 75 corresponding to the address information set for the pointer information of the reference object is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the eleventh layer LY11 of the reading area 94a. Thereafter, the accessory operating flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4405), and the accessory driving setting process is ended. By controlling the drive of the accessory 75 by the performance side MPU 92 according to the drive table read out to the eleventh layer LY11, an accessory motion performance in which the spherical performance section 77b moves up and down is executed.

As described above, the drive table of the accessory 75 is read out to the eleventh layer LY11 on the condition that the spherical effect section 77b stays at the origin in the readable state. If the reading is not possible and if the spherical rendering section 77b is not staying at the origin, reading of the drive table is canceled. Due to the configuration in which the readout of the drive table is canceled when the readout is not possible, it is possible to avoid the accessory error state, the correction operation standby state, the correction operation execution state, or the game in which the correction operation has been executed. In the state where the accessory object 75 is not present, in the state where the return action of the accessory object 75 is being executed, and in the state where the accessory object movement effect is being executed, the drive table of the accessory object 75 is read out to the eleventh layer LY11 and the accessory object movement effect is executed. It is prevented from being started.

If the spherical effect section 77b is not staying at the origin, reading of the drive table is canceled. For example, the origin when transitioning from the normal gaming state ST1 to the bonus state is the initial position where the spherical effect portion 77b is detected by the initial position sensor 75a. In this case, if the accessory action performance is executed while the spherical performance part 77b is staying at the displacement position detected by the displacement position sensor 75b, the movement of moving the spherical performance part 77b downward is canceled. Put it away. On the other hand, since the reading of the drive table is canceled when the spherical effect section 77b does not stay at the origin, the spherical effect section 77b can perform a movement different from the movement assumed at the design stage. is prevented from doing so.

Next, the accessory drive control process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 76(b). Note that the accessory drive control process is executed in step S1915 of the performance execution process (FIG. 47).

In the accessory drive control process, if any drive table is read out to the eleventh layer LY11 in the readout area 94a (step S4501: YES), the first It is determined whether drive data has been set (step S4502). If the first drive data is set (step S4502: YES), it is determined whether the initial position sensor 75a is in the OFF state (step S4503), and if the initial position sensor 75a is in the OFF state ( In step S4503: YES), the first drive data is output to the accessory drive unit 78 (step S4504), and the main accessory drive process is ended.

On the other hand, when the initial position sensor 75a is in the ON state (step S4503: NO), the main accessory drive control process is ended without outputting the first drive data. In this way, when the spherical effect section 77b is already staying at the initial position, the output of the first drive data is canceled.

If a negative determination is made in step S4502, it is determined whether or not the second drive data is set for the pointer information of the reference target in the drive table read out to the eleventh layer LY11 (step S4505). If the second drive data is set (step S4505: YES), it is determined whether the displacement position sensor 75b is in the OFF state (step S4506), and if the displacement position sensor 75b is in the OFF state ( In step S4506: YES), the second drive data is output to the accessory drive unit 78 (step S4507), and the main accessory drive process is ended.

On the other hand, if the displacement position sensor 75b is in the ON state (step S4506: NO), the main accessory drive control process is ended without outputting the second drive data. In this way, when the spherical effect section 77b is already staying at the displacement position, the output of the second drive data is canceled.

Next, the accessory flag setting process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 77. In addition, in the accessory flag setting process, the pointer information of the reference target in the drive table read out to the 11th layer LY11 is updated until it becomes the final pointer information, and the repeat information is updated for the final pointer information. If not set, the flag clearing process (FIG. 66(a)) is executed in step S3508.

In the accessory flag setting process, if the accessory initializing flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4601: YES), the accessory 75 is initialized based on the accessory initialization table. Since this means that the initialization operation has been completed, the initialization completion flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4602).

If a negative determination is made in step S4601, it is determined whether the correction operation in progress flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4603). If the correction operation in progress flag is set to "1" (step S4603: YES), it means that the correction operation of the accessory 75 based on the correction operation drive table has been completed, so the correction operation in progress flag is set to "1" (step S4603: YES). is cleared to "0" (step S4604), and the correction operation completion flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4605).

If a negative determination is made in step S4603, it is determined whether the return operation flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4606). If the return operation in progress flag is set to "1" (step S4606: YES), this means that the return operation of the accessory 75 that moves the spherical production section 77b to the changed origin has been completed. The return operation flag is cleared to "0" (step S4607), and this accessory flag clearing process is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S4606, this means that the pointer information of the reference target in the performance drive table has been updated to the final pointer information and the accessory motion performance has ended, so the accessory management area 94d The accessory object in operation flag is cleared to "0" (step S4608), and this accessory object flag setting process is ended.

Next, the accessory setting process executed by the production side MPU 92 at the time of bonus winning will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 78. As already explained, in the normal gaming state ST1 or the bonus internal state ST2 shifted from the normal gaming state ST1, the winning result corresponding process (FIG. 56(a)) is executed when the production side MPU 92 receives the winning result command. . The accessory setting process at the time of bonus winning (FIG. 78) is performed when it is determined that a bonus winning has been achieved based on the winning result command received from the main MPU 72 in the winning result corresponding process (step S2801: YES). This is executed in step S2806. In addition, in the accessory setting process (FIG. 78) at the time of bonus winning, information indicating that a bonus winning has been established is set in other performance processing (step S3013 of the non-normal performance control process (FIG. 62)). It is also executed when the production side MPU 92 receives the winning result command. Therefore, the accessory setting process (FIG. 78) at the time of bonus winning is also executed in the preparation state ST5, the ART state ST6, the bonus internal state ST2 transferred from the preparation state ST5, and the bonus internal state ST2 transferred from the ART state ST6. Ru.

In the accessory setting process when winning a bonus, it is first determined whether the accessory error flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4701). When the accessory error flag is set to "1" (step S4701: YES), the error release flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4702). As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S4102 of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72), and the process for canceling the accessory error state (steps S4104 to S4106 and steps S4109 to S4111) is performed. will be executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined whether the correction operation standby flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4703). When the correction operation standby flag is set to "1" (step S4703: YES), the standby release flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4704). As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S4102 of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72), and the process for canceling the correction operation standby state (steps S4104 to S4108) is executed. . Thereafter, the value of the standby execution counter 142 in the accessory management area 94d is cleared to "0" (step S4705). As a result, the number of times the standby execution counter 142 has been set to the correction operation standby state is cleared.

When the process of step S4702 is performed or when the process of step S4705 is performed, the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72) is executed (step S4706), and the accessory setting process at the time of winning this bonus is executed. finish. The processing contents of the correction operation start setting process are as already explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 72.

If a negative determination is made in step S4703, the eleventh layer LY11 in the read area 94a is cleared (step S4707). As already explained, the eleventh layer LY11 is a layer from which the drive table of the accessory 75 is read. By clearing the eleventh layer LY11 in step S4707, drive data is no longer output to the accessory drive unit 78 even if the drive table has been read to the eleventh layer LY11. Specifically, if a correction operation is in progress, the correction operation is terminated midway.

Thereafter, a third clearing process of accessory management information is executed (step S4708). In the third clearing process (step S4708) of accessory management information, various counters 141 to 144 other than the origin displacement flag in the accessory management area 94d and various flags (specifically, the accessory initializing flag, initialization End flag, accessory error flag, error release flag, correction operation standby flag, standby release flag, correction operation in progress flag, correction operation completion flag, accessory operation flag, first origin standby flag, second origin standby flag and the return operation flag) are cleared to "0". As a result, the management information of the accessory 75 except the information on the origin displacement flag is cleared. By executing the third clearing process (step S4708) of accessory management information, the number of times the standby execution counter 142 has been set to the correction operation standby state is cleared to "0", and the correction execution is started. The number of times the correction operation of the accessory 75 has been executed, which was counted by the counter 141, is cleared to "0".

Thereafter, it is determined whether the spherical effect part 77b of the accessory 75 is staying at the origin (step S4709). In step S4709, if the origin displacement flag in the accessory management area 94d is not set to "1" and the current origin is the initial position, the spherical effect part 77b is activated when the initial position sensor 75a is ON. It is determined that the origin is staying at the origin, and if the origin displacement flag is set to "1" and the current origin is the displacement position, the spherical effect part 77b is set to the origin when the displacement position sensor 75b is ON. It is determined that the person is staying in As already explained, when the current bonus winning opportunity occurs in the normal gaming state ST1 or the preparation state ST5, the origin of the accessory 75 is set to the initial position. On the other hand, when an opportunity for winning the current bonus occurs in the ART state ST6, the origin of the accessory 75 is set at the displacement position.

If the spherical effect section 77b is staying at the origin (step S4709: YES), the main function is continued without executing the process for correcting the accessory 75 (the process from step S4710 to step S4711). Ends the accessory setting process when winning a bonus. On the other hand, if the spherical effect section 77b is not staying at the origin (step S4709: NO), processing for correcting the accessory 75 (processing of steps S4710 to S4711) is executed. Specifically, first, read processing for correction operation is executed (step S4710). In step S4710, similarly to step S4104 of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72), the drive table corresponding to the current origin out of the already explained initial position drive table and displacement position drive table is extracted from the production side ROM 93. It is read out to the readout area 94a. Specifically, if the origin displacement flag in the accessory management area 94d is not set to "1" and the current origin is the initial position, the initial position drive table is read out to the eleventh layer LY11, and If the origin displacement flag is set to "1" and the current origin is the displacement position, the displacement position drive table is read out to the eleventh layer LY11. The performance side MPU 92 controls the drive of the accessory 75 according to the initial position drive table or the displacement position drive table read out to the 11th layer LY11, so that the spherical performance part 77b is moved to the origin (initial position or displacement position). ).

Thereafter, the correction operation flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4711), and the accessory setting process at the time of winning this bonus is ended. The correction operation of the accessory 75 that is started when the initial position drive table or the displacement position drive table is read to the 11th layer LY11 in step S4710 is counted by the correction execution counter 141 in the accessory management area 94d. Not done. In this way, the correction operation of the accessory 75 that is executed when the production side MPU 92 receives the winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus winning has been established is not counted by the correction execution counter 141. .

As mentioned above, when the accessory error state or correction operation standby state is established, the accessory error state or correction operation standby state is determined based on the receipt of a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus win has occurred is set. It is released and the correction operation of the accessory 75 is performed. The time required for the correction operation of the accessory 75 is 1.4 seconds at maximum, which is shorter than the execution period of the bonus start performance (specifically, 5 seconds). Further, the correction operation of the accessory 75 is started before the bonus start effect. Therefore, the correction operation of the accessory 75 can be completed before the bonus start performance ends, and the accessory action performance can be executed in the first game in the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4.

When the production side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus winning has occurred in a state that is neither an accessory error state nor a correction operation standby state, the 11th layer LY11 is cleared. At the same time, a third clearing process of accessory management information is executed. By clearing the eleventh layer LY11, if the correction operation of the accessory 75 is being executed, the drive data is no longer output to the accessory drive unit 78, and the correction operation ends. Further, by executing the third clearing process of accessory management information, the values of various counters 141 to 144 and various flags other than the origin displacement flag in accessory management area 94d are cleared to "0". As a result, the number of times the standby execution counter 142 was set to the correction operation standby state is cleared to "0", and the correction operation of the accessory 75 that was counted by the correction execution counter 141 is executed. The number of times the event occurred is cleared to "0". Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the correction action standby state or the accessory error state will be set during the bonus state, and increase the chance that the accessory action performance will be performed.

As already explained, in the normal gaming state ST1 or the bonus internal state ST2 shifted from the normal gaming state ST1, bonus winnings (either the 1st to 4th BB or the 1st to 2nd RB winnings) are determined in the winning combination processing (FIG. 14). The announcement lottery process (step S2311 of the performance content determination process (FIG. 51)) is performed based on the occurrence of the event. If the bonus announcement performance is won in the notification lottery process, the bonus announcement performance is executed in the game in which the bonus win occurs. If the accessory is not in an error state or in a correction action standby state, the accessory action performance is executed in the bonus notification performance. However, as already explained, if a bonus win is achieved in a game in which a bonus win has occurred, the bonus announcement performance is canceled. In addition, if you win a re-fluctuation effect in the notification lottery process, after the game in which the bonus win occurred, if 5 games are played without a corresponding bonus winning, the re-variation effect will be executed. A game is played. If the accessory object is not in the error state and is not in the correction operation standby state, the accessory action effect is executed in the re-variation effect. However, as already explained, if the corresponding bonus win is achieved before 5 games are played, or if a bonus win is achieved in the target game of the re-variation effect, the re-variation effect will be canceled. .

If the bonus announcement performance is configured to cancel the accessory error state or the correction action standby state when an opportunity to start the accessory action performance occurs, the accessory error state or the correction action standby state will be canceled when the bonus announcement performance is cancelled. The bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) is started without being released. In this case, it becomes impossible to perform the accessory motion performance in the first game in the bonus state. In addition, if the configuration is such that the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state is canceled when the trigger for starting the accessory movement performance occurs in the re-variation performance, the accessory error state or the correction action is canceled when the re-variation performance is cancelled. The bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) is started without the standby state being released. In this case as well, it becomes impossible to perform the accessory motion performance in the first game in the bonus state. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state is canceled when the production side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus winning has occurred is set. The event in which the production side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus winning has occurred is an event that always occurs before the start of the bonus state. Thereby, regardless of the presence or absence of the bonus announcement performance and the presence or absence of the re-variation performance, it is possible to perform the accessory motion performance from the first game in the bonus state.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 79, a description will be given of how the accessory object error state is canceled and the accessory object action effect is executed. FIG. 79(a) shows the execution period of the accessory motion performance, FIG. 79(b) shows the execution period of the corrective action of the accessory 75, and FIG. 79(c) shows the accessory error in the accessory management area 94d. 79(d) shows the execution period of the medium stop effect, FIG. 79(e) shows the execution period of the first expected effect, and FIG. 79(f) shows the execution period of the bonus start effect. 79(g) shows the timing at which the production side MPU 92 receives the winning result command, FIG. 79(h) shows the timing at which the production side MPU 92 receives the game start command, and FIG. 79(i) shows the timing at which the production side MPU 92 receives the winning result command. Indicates the timing at which the trigger occurs.

As already explained, in the normal game state ST1, the medium stop performance is started when the fifth opportunity occurs, that is, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop are turned on. In addition, as already explained, a bonus win (either the 1st to 4th BB win or the 1st to 2nd RB win) occurs in the role lottery process (Figure 14), and the notification lottery process (performance content determination process) If the bonus announcement performance is won in step S2311) in FIG. 51), the first expected performance is executed after the middle stop performance ends. When the fifth opportunity occurs at timing t1 as shown in FIG. 79(i), the middle stop effect is started as shown in FIG. 79(d). As already explained, the mid-stop effect is executed for one second. As shown in FIG. 79(c), the accessory error flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" at the timing t1.

Thereafter, at timing t2 when the middle stop performance is being executed, the performance side MPU 92 receives the winning result command as shown in FIG. 79(g). The time required for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop after the fifth opportunity occurs is 190 milliseconds at maximum, and the time required from the occurrence of the fifth opportunity until the middle stop effect ends. (specifically, 1 second). The main MPU 72 transmits a winning result command when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. If information indicating that a bonus winning corresponding to the bonus winning that has occurred this time has been set in the winning result command, the bonus announcement performance is canceled upon reception of the winning result command. At timing t2, the accessory error flag in the accessory management area 94d is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 79(c). This releases the accessory error state. Furthermore, at the timing t2, the correction operation of the accessory 75 is started as shown in FIG. 79(b). As already explained, the correction operation of the accessory 75 is executed for a maximum of 1.4 seconds.

Thereafter, at timing t3, the middle stop effect is ended as shown in FIG. 79(d), and the first expected effect is started as shown in FIG. 79(e). The first expected performance is executed for 1.5 seconds. Thereafter, the correction operation of the accessory 75 ends at timing t4 during execution of the first expected performance, as shown in FIG. 79(b). The execution period of the corrective action of the accessory 75 is 1.4 seconds at maximum, which is shorter than the execution period of the first expected performance (specifically, 1.5 seconds). Further, the correction operation of the accessory 75 is started at a timing (specifically, timing t2) before the timing (specifically, timing t3) at which the first expected performance is started. Therefore, the timing t4 at which the correction operation of the accessory 75 ends is earlier than the timing t5 at which the first expected performance ends.

Thereafter, at timing t5, which is later than timing t4, the first expected performance ends as shown in FIG. 79(e). As already explained, the bonus announcement performance has been canceled because the bonus win has been achieved in the game that is the target game for the execution of the bonus announcement performance. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 79(f), the bonus start effect is started at timing t5. The bonus start performance is executed for 5 seconds until timing t6.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79(h), the production side MPU 92 receives the first game start command from the main side MPU 72 after the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) is started at timing t7. At the timing of t7, the accessory error state has been canceled as shown in FIG. 79(c), and the correction operation of the accessory 75 has been completed as shown in FIG. 79(b). Therefore, at the timing of t7, the accessory motion performance is started as shown in FIG. 79(a). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79(a), the accessory motion performance ends at timing t8, which is 1.5 seconds after timing t7.

As described above, based on the production side MPU 92 receiving a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus winning has been established is set, the accessory error state is canceled and the correction operation of the accessory 75 is started. Ru. The execution period of the corrective action of the accessory 75 is 1.4 seconds at maximum, which is shorter than the execution period of the first expected performance (specifically, 1.5 seconds). Further, the correction operation of the accessory 75 is started at a timing earlier than the timing at which the first expected performance is started. Therefore, the correction operation of the accessory 75 ends at a timing before the end of the first expected performance. Thereby, the spherical performance section 77b can be brought into a state where it stays at the origin at the end of the bonus start performance, and the accessory motion performance can be executed in the first game after the bonus state is started.

This configuration is such that when the production side MPU 92 receives a winning result command indicating that a bonus winning has been achieved, the accessory error state is canceled and the correction operation of the accessory 75 is executed. Therefore, even if a bonus win is achieved in a game in which a bonus win has occurred and the bonus announcement performance is canceled, the accessory error state may occur at a timing before the start of the first game in the bonus state. It is possible to create a state in which the spherical effect portion 77b is released and the spherical effect portion 77b remains at the origin. Thereby, the accessory motion performance can be performed in the first game to be performed after the bonus state is started. In this way, by reducing the frequency with which the accessory action performance is canceled in the bonus state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A configuration in which the performance-side MPU 92 releases the accessory error state or the correction action standby state and executes the motion performance of the accessory 75 based on the presentation-side MPU 92 receiving a game start command in which information indicating that a bonus win has occurred is set. In this case, although it is possible to end the correction operation before entering the bonus state, even if the player does not win the bonus announcement performance in a game where a bonus win has occurred, the accessory error state or the correction action standby state will be canceled. Since the correction operation of the accessory 75 is performed, the player will know that a bonus win has occurred based on the fact that the correction operation has been performed. In response to this, based on the production side MPU 92 receiving a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus win has been established, the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state is canceled and the accessory 75 is corrected. By having a configuration that executes the action, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing that a bonus win has occurred based on the correction action of the accessory 75, and to prevent the player from knowing that a bonus win has occurred based on the correction action of the accessory 75. It is possible to start the object action performance.

<Configuration for displaying history images>
Next, a configuration for displaying history images on the image display device 63 will be described. As described above, in this slot machine 10, a history image display that allows the game history to be confirmed is performed. FIG. 80(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the history image G23 displayed on the image display device 63, and FIG. 80(b) shows the generation trigger of the history configuration data and the images included in the history image G23. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence with the type. As described above, the history configuration data is data that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the types of the plurality of images that constitute the history image G23, and the history configuration data specifies the plurality of images that constitute the history image G23. Contains multiple specified data. The production side MPU 92 generates display data for displaying the history image G23 on the image display device 63 based on the history configuration data.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), the history image G23 is composed of a plurality of images. As shown in FIG. 80(b), the images forming the history image G23 include a background plate image G24, a first wording image G25, a second wording image G26, a third wording image G27, a character image G28, an ending image G29, There are a history point image G30, a rank image G31, a base plate image, and a common background plate image.

The history configuration data indicates that when ART state ST6 ends, when the ending effect of advantageous section SC2 ends, and when the number of game media given after transitioning to ART state ST6 is a predetermined number of divisions (specifically, "1000"). , "2000", or "3000"), and when the player selects intermediate generation of the history image G23. The number of game media given after transitioning to ART state ST6 is the period from when the ART flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" until the value of the ART flag is cleared to "0". This is the number of game media given. As already explained, the ART flag indicates whether the gaming state is in the ART state ST6, the bonus internal state ST2 to which it has transitioned from the ART state ST6, the bonus state to which it has transitioned from the ART state ST6, or the preparation state ST5 to which it has transitioned after the end of the bonus state. This is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the current state is the same. The ART flag is set to "1" when the production side MPU 92 receives an ART start command from the main side MPU 72. Further, the ART flag is cleared to "0" when the production side MPU 92 receives an ART end command or an ending end command from the main side MPU 72. The types of images included in the history image G23 differ depending on the type of generation trigger of the history configuration data for displaying the history image G23.

As shown in FIG. 80(b), the first to third word images G25 to G27, character image G28, history point image G30, and rank image G31 are always used as history images This is a basic image included in G23. The first pattern of history image G23 for which history configuration data is generated upon completion of ART state ST6 includes a background plate image G24 and these basic images. The history image G23 of the second pattern, in which history configuration data is generated upon completion of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2, includes a background plate image G24, an ending image G29, and these basic images. A third pattern in which history configuration data is generated when the number of game media given after the transition to ART state ST6 reaches a predetermined number of divisions, or when intermediate generation is selected by the player's operation. The history image G23 includes a base plate image, a common background plate image, and these basic images.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), when the history image G23 of the second pattern is displayed on the image display device 63, the background plate image G24 is arranged at the backmost side, and the first ~Third word images G25 to G27, character image G28, ending image G29, history point image G30, and rank image G31 are arranged. Although not shown, when the history image G23 of the first pattern is displayed on the image display device 63, the background plate image G24 is arranged at the backmost position, and the text image is placed in front of the background plate image G24. G25 to G27, a character image G28, a history point image G30, and a rank image G31 are arranged. Although not shown, when the third pattern history image G23 is displayed on the image display device 63, the base plate image is arranged at the backmost position, and the common background plate image is placed in front of the base plate image. are arranged, and text images G25 to G27, character images G28, history point images G30, and rank images G31 are arranged in front of these base plate images and common background plate images.

The first to third wording images G25 to G27 are images that display the wordings corresponding to the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b, and the wordings of the first to third wording images G25 to G27 are The contents change depending on the contents of the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b.

In the history image display, the background plate image G24 (FIG. 80(a)) or the common background plate image is displayed on the entire surface of the image display device 63. There are a plurality of types of background plate images G24, and the type of background plate image G24 to be displayed is specified in a plate lottery process (step S5505 of the plate setting process (FIG. 92)) to be described later. The types of background plate images G24 that are likely to be displayed in the plate lottery process vary depending on the current setting values. Therefore, the player can predict the current setting value based on the type of background plate image G24 displayed on the image display device 63. On the other hand, there is only one type of common background plate image, and it is commonly displayed when the background plate image G24 is not displayed, regardless of the current setting value. When the common background plate image is displayed, the base plate image is displayed on the back side of the screen from the common background plate image. There are a plurality of colors of the base plate image, and the color of the base plate image changes depending on the net increase in the number of game media after the transition to the ART state ST6. The common background plate image includes a semi-transparent area, and the base plate image placed at the rearmost position becomes visible through the semi-transparent area.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), a first heading range 151 is set at the top left of the image display device 63, in which the first text image G25 having the highest priority is arranged. Further, a second heading range 152 is set on the right side of the image display device 63 in which the second wording image G26 having the second highest priority is arranged, and a second heading range 152 is set at the bottom left of the image display device 63 where the second wording image G26 having the second highest priority is placed. A third heading range 153 is set in which the third wording image G27 with a low degree of content is placed.

The first heading range 151 is set larger than the second heading range 152 and the third heading range 153, and the first text image G25 displayed in the first heading range 151 is larger than the second heading range 152 and the third heading range. It attracts more attention than the second wording image G26 and the third wording image G27 displayed in 153. Further, in the image display device 63, the second heading range 152 is set larger than the third heading range 153, and the second wording image G26 displayed in the second heading range 152 is displayed in the third heading range 153. It attracts more attention than the third text image G27.

The presentation side ROM 93 stores a selection condition table for selecting word images G25 to G27 to be displayed. In the selection condition table, a plurality of word designation data specifying the word images G25 to G27 are set, and each word designation data has display priority data and selection conditions set therein. The wording specification data becomes a candidate for display if the set selection conditions are satisfied. A determination as to whether the selection conditions are satisfied is made based on the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b. The display priority data is data indicating the display priority of word specification data, and the higher the display priority of the word specification data, the more difficult it is to satisfy the selection condition. For example, the display priority (specifically, "5") of wording data in which the selection condition "The number of game media given after transition to ART state ST6 is 400 or more" is set to "Go to ART state ST6." The selection condition "The number of game media given after the transition is 200 or more" is set higher than the display priority (specifically "1"). This makes it possible to confirm later that the difficult-to-achieve selection condition has been achieved based on the history image G23. Note that details of the selection condition table will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), a character image range 154 in which a character image G28 is displayed is set at the center of the image display device 63. A plurality of character images G28 corresponding to the wording data are stored in the production side ROM93, and among the plurality of character images G28, the character image G28 corresponding to the first wording image G25 displayed in the first heading range 151 is It is selected as the character image G28 displayed in the character image range 154.

At the upper right side of the image display device 63, an ending image range 155 is set in which an ending image G29 indicating that the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 has been executed is displayed. As already explained, the ending image G29 is displayed only in the history image G23 of the second pattern in which history configuration data is generated triggered by the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2. When the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 is performed, the ending image G29 is always set in the history configuration data.

Specifically, at the generation timing of the history configuration data, if "1" is set in the 15th history storage area RA15 of the history storage area 94b, that is, the execution data of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 is set. If so, the ending image data for displaying the ending image G29 is surely set in the history configuration data. Note that details of the fifteenth history storage area RA15 will be described later.

If the configuration is such that the execution history of the ending performance in advantageous section SC2 cannot be confirmed, a player who wants to record the execution of the ending performance must record the execution history of the ending performance himself with a camera, etc. I can't enjoy it thoroughly. Furthermore, even if the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 is executed, the ending image G29 may not be displayed depending on the lottery result or the relationship with other game history, so that a player who wants to keep a record of the execution of the ending performance In case the ending image G29 is not displayed, the user must record the execution history of the ending performance using a camera or the like, and cannot enjoy the ending performance thoroughly.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if execution data for the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 is set in the history storage area 94b at the generation timing of the history configuration data, the ending image data is reliably included in the history configuration data. This is the configuration to be set. Therefore, even if the player does not leave a record of these performances with a camera or the like while the ending performance is being executed, the player can check the record of the ending performance by displaying the history image later. This makes it possible to thoroughly show the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 to the player.

A rank display range 156 in which the rank image G31 is displayed is set in the upper center of the image display device 63. Further, below the rank display range 156 and above the character image range 154, a history point display range 157 in which a history point image G30 is displayed is set. When history configuration data is generated, the history is generated based on the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b and the display priority data of the first to third word images G25 to G27 selected as display targets. Points are calculated, and a history point image G30 indicating the calculated history points is displayed in the history point display range 157. Furthermore, the history image G23 is ranked based on the history points, and the rank image G31 corresponding to the history image G23 is displayed in the rank display range 156.

FIG. 81(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the performance side RAM 94 for displaying history images. As already explained, the production side RAM 94 is provided with a history storage area 94b where game history data is stored and an image playback storage area 94c where history configuration data is stored.

This slot machine 10 has a history storage mode in which game history data is stored for displaying history images. The game history data is stored in the history storage area 94b on the condition that the game is in the history storage mode. If the setting of the history storage mode is canceled, the game history data is not stored in the history storage area 94b.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), the performance side RAM 94 is provided with a history storage flag 158 that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the game is in the history storage mode. The history storage flag 158 is set to "1" when the player operates the production operation device 64 (FIG. 1) and selects the game history mode setting. The history storage flag 158 is set when the player operates the performance operation device 64 and selects to cancel the game history mode, and when the performance side MPU 92 receives the last game start command from the main side MPU 72 in the normal gaming state ST1. If the period during which no game start command is received continues for a predetermined period (specifically, 10 minutes), the flag is cleared to "0". When the history storage flag 158 is cleared to "0" and the gaming history mode ends, the gaming history data stored in the history storage area 94b, except for the gaming history data indicating the number of ART winnings, is "0". 0” is cleared.

By having a configuration in which the game history mode can be set and canceled based on the operation of the production operation device 64, if the player wishes to check the game history later, the history can be changed. It is possible to display images.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), the history storage area 94b is provided with a 0th history storage area RA0 to a 15th history storage area RA15. The 0th history storage area RA0 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of games before transition to the ART state ST6. The 0th history storage area RA0 consists of 2 bytes and is capable of measuring the number of games with an upper limit of "65535". The value of the 0th history storage area RA0 is incremented by 1 when the game is played with the value of the ART flag in the production side RAM 94 being "0", provided that it is in the game history mode. . As already explained, the ART flag indicates whether the gaming state is in the ART state ST6, the bonus internal state ST2 to which it has transitioned from the ART state ST6, the bonus state to which it has transitioned from the ART state ST6, or the preparation state ST5 to which it has transitioned after the end of the bonus state. This is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the current state is the same. The ART flag is set to "1" when the production side MPU 92 receives an ART start command from the main side MPU 72. Further, the ART flag is cleared to "0" when the production side MPU 92 receives an ART end command or an ending end command from the main side MPU 72. The value of the 0th history storage area RA0 is set when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2, and when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 Cleared to "0" when the history mode setting is canceled.

The first history storage area RA1 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of games until either the bonus state or the ART state ST6 is started. The first history storage area RA1 consists of 2 bytes and is capable of measuring the number of games with an upper limit of "65535". The value of the first history storage area RA1 is incremented by 1 when the game is played while the value of the ART flag in the production side RAM 94 is "0", provided that the game history mode is selected. . In addition, the value of the first history storage area RA1 is as follows: When the performance side MPU 92 receives the bonus end command, when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6 as a trigger, the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 ends. It is cleared to "0" when history configuration data is generated as a result of this or when the setting of the game history mode is canceled. As already explained, the bonus end command is sent from the main side MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92 when the bonus state end condition is satisfied in the bonus state process (step S1514 of the bonus process (FIG. 34)). Ru.

The second history storage area RA2 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of gaming media that has decreased before the transition to the ART state ST6. The second history storage area RA2 is made up of 2 bytes and can measure the number of gaming media from "-32767" to "32767". In the game history mode, the value of the second history storage area RA2 is the value of the ART flag in the production side RAM 94 is "0", and the game is started with an automatic bet made after a replay winning occurs. Except in certain cases, the number of game media bet (specifically, "3") is subtracted, and the number of game media awarded when a small prize win occurs is added. The value of the second history storage area RA2 is set when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2, and when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 Cleared to "0" when the history mode setting is canceled.

The third history storage area RA3 is a counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the maximum number of decreases in game media during the period until the transition to the ART state ST6. The third history storage area RA3 is made up of 2 bytes and can measure the number of gaming media from "-32767" to "0". In the game history mode, when the value of the second history storage area RA2 becomes smaller than the value of the third history storage area RA3, the third history storage area RA3 stores the second history storage area RA3. The value of RA2 is set. The value of the third history storage area RA3 is set when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2, and when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 Cleared to "0" when the history mode setting is canceled.

The fourth history storage area RA4 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of occurrences of the BB state ST3. The fourth history storage area RA4 consists of 1 byte and is capable of measuring the number of occurrences of the BB state ST3 with an upper limit of "255". In the game history mode, the value of the fourth history storage area RA4 is incremented by 1 when the BB state ST3 occurs. In addition, the value of the fourth history storage area RA4 is, when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2, It is cleared to "0" when the game history mode setting is canceled.

The fifth history storage area RA5 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of occurrences of the RB state ST4. The fifth history storage area RA5 consists of one byte and is capable of measuring the number of occurrences of the RB state ST4 with an upper limit of "255". In the game history mode, the value of the fifth history storage area RA5 is incremented by 1 when the RB state ST4 occurs. In addition, the value of the fifth history storage area RA5 is, when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2, It is cleared to "0" when the game history mode setting is canceled.

The sixth history storage area RA6 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of times ART winnings have occurred. The sixth history storage area RA6 is made up of 3 bytes, and is capable of measuring the number of ART wins with an upper limit of the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the cube of "256". In the game history mode, the value of the sixth history storage area RA6 is incremented by 1 every time an ART win occurs, and cleared to "0" when the value after the 1 increment exceeds the upper limit. The value of the sixth history storage area RA6 is set when the history configuration data is generated upon completion of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated upon completion of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2, and when the history configuration data is generated upon completion of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2. It is not cleared to "0" even when the history mode setting is canceled. Note that the number of times ART winnings have occurred that is counted in the sixth history storage area RA6 includes the number of times that the bonus winning has occurred in the ART state ST6 and then returned to the ART state ST6 via the bonus state and the preparation state ST5. Not possible.

The seventh history storage area RA7 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the type information of the trigger role for winning the ART. The seventh history storage area RA7 is made up of 4 bits and is capable of storing type information of the trigger role for ART winning with an upper limit of "15". In the game history mode, the winning number set in the winning combination processing (FIG. 14) in the game in which the ART win occurred is set in the seventh history storage area RA7. Specifically, numerical information of any one of "4", "6", "8", and "15" is set in the seventh history storage area RA7. The value of the seventh history storage area RA7 is set when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2, and when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 Cleared to "0" when the history mode setting is canceled.

The eighth history storage area RA8 is a counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the type information of the ART start performance. The eighth history storage area RA8 is made up of 5 bits and can store type information of ART start performance with an upper limit of "31". As already explained, there are 16 types of ART start performances in this slot machine 10, and in the game history mode, the step of the ART start performance lottery process (the performance setting process at the time of ART start (FIG. 63(a)) The winning numbers (“1” to “16”) in the ART start effect lottery table specified in S3105) are set in the eighth history storage area RA8 as type information. The eighth history storage area RA8 is used when history configuration data is generated upon completion of the ART state ST6, when history configuration data is generated upon completion of the ending effect of advantageous section SC2, and when the game history mode Cleared to "0" when the setting is canceled.

The ninth history storage area RA9 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of games executed after transition to the ART state ST6. The ninth history storage area RA9 consists of 2 bytes and is capable of measuring the number of games with an upper limit of "65535". In the game history mode, the value of the ninth history storage area RA9 is incremented by 1 when the game is played with the ART flag in the performance side RAM 94 set to "1". In addition, the value of the ninth history storage area RA9 is such that when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2, It is cleared to "0" when the game history mode setting is canceled.

The tenth history storage area RA10 is a counter that allows the production side MPU92 to grasp the number of game media given after the transition to the ART state ST6. The tenth history storage area RA10 is made up of 16 bits and can measure the number of game media from "0" to "65535". In the game history mode, the value of the 10th history storage area RA10 is added to the number of game media awarded when a small winning combination occurs while the ART flag is set to "1". The value of the 10th history storage area RA10 is set when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2, and when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 Cleared to "0" when the history mode setting is canceled.

The eleventh history storage area RA11 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the net increase in the number of game media after the transition to the ART state ST6. The eleventh history storage area RA11 is made up of 18 bits and can measure the number of game media from "-131072" to "131072". In the game history mode, the value of the 11th history storage area RA11 indicates that the game is started with an automatic bet made after a replay winning occurs while the ART flag is set to "1". The number of game media (specifically, "3") that has been bet on is subtracted, and the number of game media awarded when a small winning combination occurs is added. The value of the 11th history storage area RA11 is set when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2, and when the game Cleared to "0" when the history mode setting is canceled.

The twelfth history storage area RA12 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the total number of additional games in the ART state ST6. The twelfth history storage area RA12 consists of 2 bytes and is capable of measuring the number of additional games with an upper limit of "65535". In the game history mode, the value of the 12th history storage area RA12 is added by the number of add-on games set in the ART add-on command when the production side MPU 92 receives the ART add-on command. The value of the 12th history storage area RA12 is set when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2, and when the history configuration data Cleared to "0" when the history mode setting is canceled.

The thirteenth history storage area RA13 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the total number of additional games in the preparation state ST5. The thirteenth history storage area RA13 consists of 2 bytes and is capable of measuring the number of additional games with an upper limit of "65535". In the game history mode, when the production side MPU 92 receives the preparation add-on command, the number of add-on games set in the preparation add-on command is added to the value of the thirteenth history storage area RA13 in the game history mode. The value of the 13th history storage area RA13 is set when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2, and when the game Cleared to "0" when the history mode setting is canceled.

The fourteenth history storage area RA14 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the total number of additional games in the bonus state. The fourteenth history storage area RA14 consists of 2 bytes and is capable of measuring the number of additional games with an upper limit of "65535". In the game history mode, the value of the 14th history storage area RA14 is added by the number of add-on games set in the bonus add-on command when the production side MPU 92 receives the add-on bonus command. The value of the 14th history storage area RA14 is set when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2, and when the game Cleared to "0" when the history mode setting is canceled.

The fifteenth history storage area RA15 is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp whether or not the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 has been executed. The fifteenth history storage area RA15 consists of one bit. In the game history mode, "1" is set in the 15th history storage area RA15 when the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 is executed. The value of the 15th history storage area RA15 is set when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ART state ST6, when the history configuration data is generated with the end of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2, and when the game Cleared to "0" when the history mode setting is canceled.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), the history storage area 94b is provided with a configuration data storage area 161 in which history configuration data being generated is set. FIG. 81(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the configuration data storage area 161. The configuration data storage area 161 includes background plate image designation data that designates the background plate image G24 or the common background plate image, base plate image designation data that designates the base plate image, and first data that designates the first word image G25. Word designation data, second word designation data that designates the second word image G26, third word designation data that designates the third word image G27, and rank image designation data that designates the rank image G31 are stored. . As already explained, the type of character image G28 displayed in the history image G23 corresponds to the type of the first wording image G25. Therefore, the production side MPU 92 grasps the types of the first word image G25 and character image G28 that are to be displayed based on the first word designation data. In addition to the various designation data described above, the configuration data storage area 161 also includes data indicating the presence or absence of the ending image G29, data indicating history points, and date and time data indicating the date and time when the history configuration data was generated. Generation trigger data indicating the type of generation trigger of the history configuration data is stored.

As shown in FIG. 81(b), the configuration data storage area 161 includes a first wording counter 161a, a second wording counter 161b, a third wording counter 161c, an ending image flag 161d, a history point counter 161e, a rank counter 161f, A background plate counter 161g, a base plate counter 161h, a date and time data counter 161j, and a generation trigger counter 161k are provided.

The first word counter 161a is a counter that stores first word designation data that designates the first word image G25 and display priority data corresponding to the first word designation data, and the second word counter 161b is a counter that stores first word designation data that designates the first word image G25 and display priority data that corresponds to the first word designation data. This is a counter that stores second word designation data that specifies the second word image G26 and display priority data corresponding to the second word designation data, and the third word counter 161c specifies the third word image G27. This counter stores third word designation data and display priority data corresponding to the third word designation data. The first to third word designation data are numerical information that allows the word images G25 to G27 to be specified, and are not address data for the word images G25 to G27 in the character ROM. As already explained, the display priority data is data indicating the display priority of word specification data.

There are 324 types of words to be displayed in the history image G23, and the character ROM contains 324 types of word image data for displaying the 324 types of words in vertical writing, and the 324 types of words. 324 types of text image data for displaying in horizontal writing are stored. The word designation data is 9-bit numerical information indicating any one of "1" to "324", and the word designation data and the word image data have a one-to-one correspondence. The data amount of the first to third word designation data is smaller than the data amount of the address data of the word image data. The performance side ROM 93 stores a word correspondence table in which a correspondence relationship between word designation data and address data of word image data in the character ROM is set. By having a configuration that stores word designation data, compared to a configuration that stores address data of word image data, the effect-side RAM 94 makes it possible to grasp the types of word images G25 to G27 included in the history image G23. storage capacity has been reduced.

The first to third word counters 161a to 161c have a storage capacity of 13 bits, and word designation data is stored in the upper 7 bits, and display priority data ("0" to "8") is stored in the next 4 bits. ”) is stored.

In the first heading range 151, a text image for horizontal writing is set at an enlargement rate of 100%, in the second heading range 152, a text image for vertical writing is set at an enlargement ratio of 100%, and in the third heading range 153, a text image for horizontal writing is set at an enlargement rate of 100%. The text image for horizontal writing is set at an enlargement rate of 50%. The text images for horizontal writing set in the first heading range 151 and the third heading range 153 are common and have different enlargement rates.

As already explained, the production side MPU 92 generates display data for displaying the history image G23 on the image display device 63 based on the history configuration data. When generating display data, the production-side MPU 92 checks the first word specification data against the word correspondence table to grasp the address data of the word image for horizontal writing corresponding to the first word specification data, and generates the corresponding word image. By setting the grasped address data as display data and checking the second word specification data against the word correspondence table, the address data of the word image for vertical writing corresponding to the second word specification data is grasped and the corresponding By setting the grasped address data as display data and checking the third word specification data against the word correspondence table, the address data of the word image for horizontal writing corresponding to the third word specification data is grasped and the corresponding grasp is carried out. Set the address data that was created as display data.

The performance side ROM 93 stores a history image generation table in which parameters of various images included in the history image G23 are set. The production side MPU 92 sets the parameters (position coordinate information, enlargement ratio, transparency information, color information) of the first to third word images G25 to G27 to the display data of the history image G23 based on the history image generation table. do. The positional coordinate information is information for specifying the coordinates on the image display device 63 where the image should be displayed. The magnification rate is information for specifying the magnification rate for the standard display size set in advance for the image. If the magnification rate is greater than 100%, the image is displayed in an enlarged manner, and if the magnification rate is less than 100%, the image is displayed in a reduced size. The transparency information is for specifying the transparency of the entire image. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of an image to be displayed. As already explained, the enlargement ratio of the first wording image G25 and the second wording image G26 is set to 100%, and the enlargement ratio of the third wording image G27 is set to 50%.

As already explained, the type of character image G28 included in the history image G23 is grasped based on the first wording specification data. The character ROM stores 324 types of character image data, and the character image data has a one-to-one correspondence with word designation data. The performance side ROM 93 stores a character image correspondence table in which a correspondence relationship between word designation data and address data of character image data in the character ROM is set. By having a configuration in which the type of character image G28 is grasped based on the first wording specification data, compared to a configuration in which data for grasping the type of character image G28 is stored separately from the first wording specification data, The storage capacity in the performance side RAM 94 is reduced so that the type of character image G28 included in the history image G23 can be grasped.

When generating display data for the history image G23 based on the history configuration data, the production side MPU 92 generates a character image corresponding to the first word specification data by comparing the first word specification data with the character image correspondence table. The address data of the data is grasped, and the grasped address data is set as display data. Furthermore, the production side MPU 92 sets parameters (position coordinate information, magnification, transparency information, color information) of the character image G28 in the display data of the history image G23 based on the history image generation table.

The ending image flag 161d is a flag that allows the production side MPU92 to determine whether or not the ending image G29 is to be displayed on the history image G23. A state in which the ending image flag 161d is set to "1" corresponds to a state in which the ending image G29 is the display target, and a state in which the ending image flag 161d is not set to "1" corresponds to a state in which the ending image G29 is displayed. It corresponds to the state of not being displayed.

When generating display data for the history image G23 based on the history configuration data, the production side MPU 92 generates the address data of the ending image data in the character ROM based on the fact that the ending image flag 161d is set to "1". Set as display data. Furthermore, the performance-side MPU 92 sets the parameters (position coordinate information, magnification, transparency information, color information) of the ending image G29 in the display data of the history image G23 based on the history image generation table.

The history point counter 161e is a counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the history points of the history image G23. The history point is 16-bit numerical information corresponding to any one of "0" to "65535".

The character ROM stores numerical image data and alphabet image data for displaying each numerical image of the history point image G30 and the alphabet image of "P". The performance side ROM 93 stores a history point correspondence table in which a correspondence relationship between each digit of the history point and each number image in the character ROM is set. Address data of alphabet image data for displaying the alphabet image of "P" is also stored in the history point correspondence table.

When generating display data for the history image G23 based on the history configuration data, the production side MPU 92 compares each digit of the history point data with the history point correspondence table to display data included in the history point image G30. The address data of each numerical image is grasped, and the address data of the alphabet image data of "P" stored in the history correspondence table is grasped. Then, these address data thus grasped are set as display data. In addition, the production side MPU 92 sets parameters (position coordinate information, magnification, transparency information, color information) of these numerical images and alphabet images in the display data of the history image G23 based on the history image generation table. .

The rank counter 161f is a counter that stores rank image designation data that designates the rank image G31. The rank image designation data is numerical information that allows the rank image G31 to be specified, and is not address data of the rank image data in the character ROM. The character ROM stores five types of rank image data corresponding to "C rank", "B rank", "A rank", "S rank", and "SS rank". The rank image designation data is 3-bit numerical information indicating any one of "0" to "6". The state where the value of the rank image specification data is "1" corresponds to the state where the rank image data of "C rank" is the display target, and the state where the value of the rank image specification data is "2" corresponds to the state where the rank image data of "C rank" is the display target. The state where the rank image data of "Rank" is the display target, and the state where the value of the rank image specification data is "3" corresponds to the state where the rank image data of "A rank" is the display target. The state where the value of the rank image specification data is "4" corresponds to the state where the rank image data of "S rank" is the display target, and the state where the value of the rank image specification data is "5" corresponds to the state where the rank image data of "S rank" is the display target. This corresponds to a state where the rank image data of "SS rank" is the display target. The data amount of rank image designation data is smaller than the data amount of address data of rank image G31.

A plurality of (specifically, six types) of rank image data for the history image G23 are stored in the character ROM. The performance side ROM 93 stores a rank correspondence table in which a correspondence relationship between rank image designation data and address data of rank image data in the character ROM is set.

When generating display data for the history image G23 based on the history configuration data, the production side MPU 92 determines the address of the rank image data corresponding to the rank image designation data by comparing the rank image designation data against the rank correspondence table. Ascertain the data and set the identified address data as display data. Furthermore, the production side MPU 92 sets parameters (position coordinate information, magnification, transparency information, color information) of the rank image G31 in the display data of the history image G23 based on the history image generation table.

The background plate counter 161g is a counter that stores background plate image designation data that designates the background plate image G24 or the common background plate image. The background plate image designation data is numerical information that allows the background plate image G24 or the common background plate image to be specified, and is not address data of the background plate image data or the common background plate image data in the character ROM. The character ROM stores five types of background plate images G24: a white plate image, a copper plate image, a silver plate image, a gold plate image, and a rainbow plate image, and one type of common background plate image. The state where the background plate image specification data is "1" corresponds to the state where the white plate image is the display target, and the state where the background plate image specification data is "2" corresponds to the state where the copper plate image is the display target. The state in which the background plate image specification data is "3" corresponds to the state in which the silver plate image is the display target, and the state in which the background plate image specification data is "4" corresponds to the state in which the display target is the gold plate image. corresponds to the state where the background plate image designation data is "5", and the state where the background plate image designation data is "5" corresponds to the state where the rainbow plate image is the display target. Further, a state in which the background plate image designation data is "0" corresponds to a state in which the common background plate image is the display target. The data amount of the background plate image designation data is smaller than the data amount of the background plate image data or the common background plate image data.

The character ROM stores a plurality of types of background plate image data and one type of common background plate image data. The performance side ROM 93 stores a background plate correspondence table in which a correspondence relationship between background plate image designation data and address data of background plate image data and common background plate image data in the character ROM is set.

When generating the display data for the history image G23 based on the history configuration data, the production side MPU 92 collates the background plate image designation data against the background plate correspondence table to generate a background plate corresponding to the background plate image designation data. The address data of the image data or the common background plate image data is grasped, and the grasped address data is set as display data. Specifically, if the value of the background plate image designation data is "0", address data of the common background plate image data is set as display data, and if the value of the background plate image designation data is "1" or more, If so, the address data of the background plate image data corresponding to the value is set as display data. In addition, the production side MPU 92 adds parameters (position coordinate information, magnification, transparency information, color information) of the background plate image G24 or the common background plate image to the display data of the history image G23 based on the history image generation table. Set.

The base plate counter 161h is a counter that stores base plate image designation data that designates a base plate image. The base plate image designation data is numerical information that allows the base plate image to be specified, and is not address data of the base plate image data in the character ROM. The character ROM stores seven types of base plate images: normal color, black, blue, green, red, silver, and gold. The base plate image designation data is 3-bit numerical information corresponding to any one of "0" to "7". A state in which the base plate image specification data is "1" corresponds to a state in which a normal color base plate image is the display target, and a state in which the base plate image designation data is "2" corresponds to a state in which a black base plate image is displayed. The state where the base plate image specification data is "3" corresponds to the state where the blue base plate image is the display target, and the state where the base plate image specification data is "4". A state in which the green base plate image is the display target corresponds to a state in which the base plate image specification data is "5", and a state in which the base plate image specification data is "5" corresponds to a state in which the red base plate image is the display target. , the state where the base plate image specification data is "6" corresponds to the state where the silver base plate image is the display target, and the state where the base plate image designation data is "7" corresponds to the state where the gold base plate image is the display target. It corresponds to the state to be displayed. The data amount of the base plate image designation data is smaller than the data amount of the base plate image data.

The character ROM stores a plurality of types (specifically seven types) of base plate image data. The performance side ROM 93 stores a base plate correspondence table in which a correspondence relationship between base plate image designation data and address data of base plate image data in the character ROM is set.

When generating the display data for the history image G23 based on the history configuration data, the production side MPU 92 collates the base plate image designation data against the base plate correspondence table to select the base plate corresponding to the base plate image designation data. The address data of the image data is grasped, and the grasped address data is set as display data. Furthermore, the production side MPU 92 sets the parameters (position coordinate information, magnification, transparency information, color information) of the base plate image in the display data of the history image G23 based on the history image generation table.

The date and time data counter 161j is a counter that stores date and time data that makes it possible to know the date and time when history configuration data was generated. The performance control board 91 is provided with an RTC for updating date and time data. The RTC is a real-time clock that constantly measures date and time information and outputs the measured date and time information (hereinafter also referred to as date and time information) according to instructions from the performance MPU 92. This is a configuration that allows this. The production side MPU 92 acquires date and time data from the RTC in the production control board 91 when generating history configuration data. Note that the RTC is provided with a backup power source, so that it is possible to measure date information and time information even when the slot machine 10 is powered off.

The generation trigger counter 161k is a counter that stores generation trigger data indicating the type of generation trigger of history configuration data. The generation trigger counter 161k is set with numerical information from "1" to "6" corresponding to the type of generation trigger of the history configuration data. The generation trigger counter 161k is set to "1" when history configuration data is generated triggered by the number of game media given reaching 1000 pieces after transition to ART state ST6, "2" is set when the history configuration data is generated when the number reaches 2000 pieces, and when the history configuration data is generated when the number of game media given reaches 3000 pieces. is set to "3" and the history configuration data is generated upon completion of ART state ST6, and "4" is set, and the history configuration data is generated upon completion of the ending performance of advantageous section SC2. "5" is set when the data is generated, and "6" is set when the history configuration data is generated in response to an intermediate generation operation.

As already explained with reference to FIG. 80(b), the history image G23 of the first pattern for which history configuration data is generated upon completion of the ART state ST6 includes an ending image G29, a base plate image, and a common background plate. Images not included. In this case, the values of the ending image flag 161d, the background plate counter 161g, and the base plate counter 161h are "0". As already explained, the base plate image and the common background plate image are not included in the second pattern of history image G23 for which history configuration data is generated upon completion of the ending performance of advantageous section SC2. In this case, the values of the background plate counter 161g and the base plate counter 161h are "0". As already explained, the history image G23 of the third pattern in which history configuration data is generated is triggered when the number of game media given in the ART state ST6 reaches a predetermined number of divisions or when intermediate generation is selected. does not include the background plate image G24 and the ending image G29. In this case, the values of the ending image flag 161d and the background plate counter 161g are "0".

While the display data of the history image G23 is set in the display setting area 113 of the production side RAM 94, the production side MPU 92 creates a drawing list for one frame based on the display data, and displays the drawing list. Output to VDP95. The VDP 95 extracts various image data (background plate image data, first to third word image data, character image data, ending image data, history point image data, rank image data, base plate image data, and Common background plate image data) is read out, and display data is created in either one of the two frame areas in the video RAM 96 using the read out various image data. Then, the VDP 95 outputs an image signal corresponding to the created display data to the image display device 63, thereby causing the image display device 63 to display the history image G23 corresponding to the display data.

Next, the image reproduction storage area 94c will be explained. The image reproduction storage area 94c is a storage area to which backup power is supplied after the slot machine 10 is powered off. Even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the performance side MPU 92 is stopped due to the power of the slot machine 10 being in an OFF state, the image of the performance side RAM 94 is transferred from the power supply section provided in the power supply unit 54 during a power outage. Backup power is supplied to the playback storage area 94c as power for memory retention. As a result, even in a situation where the supply of operating power to the production side MPU 92 is stopped due to the power of the slot machine 10 being in an OFF state, information is stored and retained in the image reproduction storage area 94c. Therefore, the image reproduction storage area 94c also stores history configuration data generated on or before the previous day.

As described above, the image reproduction storage area 94c can store history configuration data corresponding to a maximum of 32 history images G23. As shown in FIG. 81(a), the image playback storage area 94c includes a 0th playback storage area RD0 to a 31st playback storage area RD31 as storage areas in which history configuration data corresponding to the history image G23 is stored. is provided. Each playback storage area RDn (n is an integer from 0 to 31) has a first wording counter, a second wording counter, A third wording counter, an ending image flag, a history point counter, a rank counter, a background plate counter, a base plate counter, a date and time data counter, and a generation trigger counter are provided. Each reproduction storage area RDn stores history configuration data corresponding to one history image G23. In addition, in each playback storage area RDn, the production side MPU 92 determines whether or not the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data stored in the playback storage area RDn can be displayed on the image display device 63. A displayable flag is provided to make it possible to grasp the information. Note that details of the displayable flag will be described later.

When the generation of the history configuration data is completed, the history configuration data set in the configuration data storage area 161 is moved to the image reproduction storage area 94c. As shown in FIG. 81(a), the production side RAM 94 is provided with a write pointer 162. The write pointer 162 is a pointer counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the reproduction storage area RDn in which the history configuration data is written in the image reproduction storage area 94c. The write pointer 162 is set with numerical information from “0” to “30”. When the newly generated history configuration data is stored in the image playback storage area 94c, the playback storage area RDn corresponding to the value of the write pointer 162 is cleared, and the playback storage area RDn corresponding to the cleared playback storage area RDn is stored. , the newly generated history configuration data is stored. Then, the value of write pointer 162 is updated. The 31st playback storage area RD31 is a storage area in which history configuration data generated when the player selects intermediate generation is stored. Therefore, the maximum value of the write pointer 162 is "30". Note that details of the 31st reproduction storage area RD31 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), the production-side RAM 94 is provided with a first protection target counter 163 and a second protection target counter 164, which make it possible to grasp the playback storage area RDn that is excluded from the deletion target. There is. The first protection target counter 163 can grasp the playback storage area RDn in which the history configuration data with the highest history point is stored in the image playback storage area 94c, and the history point data included in the history configuration data. This is a counter. In addition, the second protection target counter 164 is stored in the playback storage area RDn in which the history configuration data with the second highest history point is stored in the image playback storage area 94c, and the history points included in the history configuration data. It is a counter that allows you to grasp data.

The first protection target counter 163 and the second protection target counter 164 have a storage capacity of 13 bits, and the upper 5 bits store area data indicating the playback storage area RDn, and the lower 8 bits store history points. Data is stored. The area data is numerical information of any one of "0" to "30" corresponding to the 0th to 30th reproduction storage areas RD0 to RD30.

If the history point in the history configuration data newly stored in the image playback storage area 94c is greater than or equal to the history point in the first protection target counter 163, the data in the first protection target counter 163 is overwritten on the second protection target counter 164. be done. Then, the area data corresponding to the reproduction storage area RDn in which the new history configuration data is stored is stored in the upper 5 bits of the first protection target counter 163, and the lower 8 bits of the first protection target counter 163 are stored. History point data of the new history configuration data is stored.

As a result, the playback storage area RDn, where the history configuration data with the second highest history point was stored, is no longer protected, and the playback storage area RDn, where the history configuration data is newly stored, is now protected. is set to If the history point in the first protection target counter 163 and the history point in newly stored history configuration data are the same value, the newer history configuration data is preferentially protected.

Further, if the history point in the history configuration data newly stored in the image reproduction storage area 94c is greater than or equal to the history point in the second protection target counter 164 and less than the history point in the first protection target counter 163, 2 protection target counter 164 is cleared to "0". Then, the area data corresponding to the reproduction storage area RDn in which the new history configuration data is stored is stored in the upper 5 bits of the second protection target counter 164, and the lower 8 bits of the second protection target counter 164 are stored. History point data of the new history configuration data is stored.

As a result, the playback storage area RDn, where the history configuration data with the second highest history point was stored, is no longer protected, and the playback storage area RDn, where the history configuration data is newly stored, is now protected. is set to If the history point in the second protection target counter 164 and the history point in the newly stored history configuration data are the same value, the newer history configuration data is preferentially protected.

When the newly generated history configuration data is stored in the image reproduction storage area 94c, 1 is added to the value of the write pointer 162, and the reproduction storage area RDn to be written is updated. In this case, if the reproduction storage area RDn corresponding to the value of the write pointer 162 after the addition of 1 is set as a protection target, 1 is further added to the value of the write pointer 162 and the reproduction memory to be written is Area RDn is updated. If the value of the write pointer 162 after adding 1 exceeds "30" which is the maximum value of the write pointer 162, the value of the write pointer 162 is cleared to "0". In this way, the playback storage area RDn, which is set as a protection target, is excluded from the write target. As a result, history configuration data whose history point value is higher than a predetermined rank (specifically, second or higher) is protected without being deleted.

If the configuration is such that history configuration data is unconditionally deleted in order starting from the oldest, valuable history configuration data with high history points cannot be left behind. Furthermore, if the configuration is such that the data is deleted in descending order of history points, there is a possibility that the history configuration data generated on the same day will be overwritten by the history configuration data generated next, making it impossible to check. In contrast, in this embodiment, the history configuration data is deleted in order from the oldest, provided that the history points are not higher than a predetermined rank (specifically, the top two). . This makes it possible to prevent valuable history configuration data with high history points from being deleted, and to reduce the possibility that history configuration data generated on the same day will be deleted on the same day. I can do it.

The 31st playback storage area RD31 is a storage area in which history configuration data generated when the player selects intermediate generation is stored. Intermediate generation can be selected at any time. For this reason, there is a storage area where history configuration data generated as a result of selecting intermediate generation is stored, and a storage area where normal history configuration data generated as a result of an event other than intermediate generation is selected is stored. If the configuration is such that a common storage area is used, if interim generation is repeatedly selected in a short period of time, there is a risk that much of the normal history configuration data will be rewritten. In contrast, in the present embodiment, there is a playback storage area RD31 for storing history configuration data generated upon selection of intermediate generation, and a playback storage area RD0 to RD30 for storing normal history configuration data. This separation prevents normal history configuration data from being overwritten by history configuration data generated as a result of intermediate generation. This allows normal history configuration data to be left behind appropriately.

Next, a processing configuration for displaying history images will be explained. First, the history image processing executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 82. It should be noted that the history image processing is executed by the production side MPU 92 as an interrupt process that is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds).

In the history image processing, first, it is determined whether or not the history storage flag 158 in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4801). If the history storage flag 158 is set to "1" (step S4801: YES), this means that the history storage mode is set, so history information storage processing is executed (step S4802). FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing history information storage processing.

In the history information storage process, when a game start command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S4901: YES), the game number information update process is executed (step S4902), and this history information storage process ends. In the game number information update process, when the ART flag in the performance side RAM 94 is not set to "1", 1 is added to the value of the 0th history storage area RA0. In addition, in the game number information update process (step S4902), when the ART flag is not set to "1" and the bonus state is not present, 1 is added to the value of the first history storage area RA1. Furthermore, in the game number information update process (step S4902), when the ART flag is set to "1", 1 is added to the value of the ninth history storage area RA9.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4901, it is determined whether an ART winning command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S4903). If the ART winning command has been received (step S4903: YES), the process of updating the ART winning number information is executed (step S4904). In the process of updating the ART winning number information, 1 is added to the value of the sixth history storage area RA6 in the history storage area 94b.

Thereafter, storage processing of the trigger information is executed (step S4905). In the triggering role information storage process, information on the winning role in the winning role lottery process (FIG. 14) in the current game in which ART winning has occurred is stored in the seventh history storage area RA7 as triggering role information for ART winning.

If a negative determination is made in step S4903, it is determined whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S4906). If the prize winning result command has been received (step S4906: YES), storage processing of the number information is executed (step S4907). FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the process of updating the sheet count information.

In the process of updating the number of sheets information, it is first determined whether or not the replay flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5001). The replay flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that a replay prize has occurred in the previous game. The replay flag is set to "1" in step S5015, which will be described later. If the replay flag is set to "1" (step S5001: YES), the replay flag is cleared to "0" (step S5002).

On the other hand, if the replay flag is not set to "1" (step S5001: NO), it is determined whether the ART in progress flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5003), and the ART If the medium flag is set to "1" (step S5003: YES), the number of bets "3" is subtracted from the value of the eleventh history storage area RA11 (step S5004). As already explained, the eleventh history storage area RA11 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the net increase in the number of game media after the transition to the ART state ST6.

On the other hand, if the ART flag is not set to "1" (step S5003: NO), the number of bets "3" is subtracted from the value of the second history storage area RA2 (step S5005). As already explained, the second history storage area RA2 is a counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the number of game media that has decreased before the transition to the ART state ST6. Thereafter, it is determined whether the value in the second history storage area RA2 is smaller than the value in the third history storage area RA3 (step S5006). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5006, it means that the maximum number of decreases in gaming media during the period until transition to ART state ST6 has been updated, so the value in the second history storage area RA2 is 3 in the history storage area RA3 (step S5007). As already explained, the third history storage area RA3 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the maximum number of decreases in game media during the period until the transition to the ART state ST6.

If the process of step S5002 is executed, if the process of step S5004 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S5006, or if the process of step S5007 is executed, based on the winning result command received this time, It is determined whether or not a small winning combination has occurred (step S5008). If a small prize has been won (step S5008: YES), it is determined whether the ART flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5009). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5009, the number of awarded game media set for the small winning combination is added to the 10th history storage area RA10 and the 11th history storage area RA11 ( Step S5010). As already explained, the 10th history storage area RA10 is a counter that allows the production side MPU92 to grasp the number of game media given after the transition to the ART state ST6, and the 11th history storage area RA11 is , is a counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the net increase in the number of game media after the transition to the ART state ST6.

Thereafter, in step S5010, the value of the tenth history storage area RA10 after adding up the number of game media provided becomes a predetermined division number (specifically, "1000", "2000", or "3000"). It is determined whether it has been reached (step S5011). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5011, it means that the number of game media given after the transition to ART state ST6 has reached the predetermined number of divisions, so the division generation flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is The delimiter generation flags 176a to 176c corresponding to the current number of delimiters (specifically, "1000," "2000," or "3000") among 176a to 176c are set to "1" (step S5012), and the book is The process of updating the number of sheets information ends. The performance side RAM 94 is provided with a first break generation flag 176a, a second break generation flag 176b, and a third break generation flag 176c. The first break generation flag 176a indicates the number of game media given after the transition to the ART state ST6 (games during the period from when the ART flag is set to "1" until the ART flag is cleared to "0"). This is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the number of media given (the number of media given) has reached 1000 pieces, and the second break generation flag 176b indicates that the number of given game media after the transition to the ART state ST6 has reached 2000 pieces. The third break generation flag 176c is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the number of game media given after transitioning to the ART state ST6 has reached 3000 pieces. This is a flag that allows you to understand the information. In step S5012, when the number of game media given after the transition to the ART state ST6 reaches 1000, the first break generation flag 176a is set to "1", and the number of game media after the transition to the ART state ST6 is set to "1". When the number of game media given reaches 2000 pieces, the second break generation flag 176b is set to "1", and when the number of game media given after the transition to ART state ST6 reaches 3000 pieces, the third break generation flag is set. Set "1" to 176c. By setting "1" to any of the first to third delimiter generation flags 176a to 176c, an affirmative determination is made in step S5101 of the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85), which will be described later, and the history Configuration data will be generated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5009, the number of game media awarded that is set for the small prize won this time is added to the value of the second history storage area RA2 (step S5009). S5013), the process of updating the book number information ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S5008, it is determined whether a replay winning has occurred based on the winning result command received this time (step S5014). If a replay prize has occurred (step S5014: YES), the replay flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5015), and the process of updating the book number information is ended.

Returning to the explanation of the history information storage process (FIG. 83), after executing the update process of the number information in step S4907, it is determined whether any BB winning has occurred based on the winning result command received this time. (Step S4908) If any BB winning has occurred (Step S4908: YES), BB winning information update processing is executed (Step S4909). In the process of updating the BB winning information, 1 is added to the value of the fourth history storage area RA4.

If a negative determination is made in step S4908, it is determined whether any RB winning has occurred based on the winning result command received this time (step S4910), and if any RB winning has occurred. If there is one (step S4910: YES), RB winning information update processing is executed (step S4911). In the RB winning information update process, 1 is added to the value of the fifth history storage area RA5.

If a negative determination is made in step S4906, it is determined whether any of the bonus mid-bonus add-on command, preparation-during add-on command, and ART mid-add command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S4912), and any of the add-on commands is received from the main MPU 72. If the command is received (step S4912: YES), update processing of the number of additional games information is executed (step S4913). In the process of updating the number of add-on games information, when the add-on during bonus command is received, the number of add-on games set in the add-on during bonus command is added to the 14th history storage area RA14. In addition, when an add-on command during preparation is received, the number of add-on games set in the add-on command during preparation is added to the 13th history storage area RA13, and when an add-on command during ART is received, The number of add-on games set in the add-on command during the ART is added to the twelfth history storage area RA12.

After making a negative determination in step S4912, if an ending end command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S4914: YES), execution information of the ending effect is stored (step S4915). Specifically, "1" is set in the 15th history storage area RA15.

After making a negative determination in step S4914, if a bonus end command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S4916: YES), the first history storage area RA1 is cleared to "0" (step S4917), This history information storage process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the history image processing (FIG. 82), if a negative determination is made in step S4801 or if history information storage processing is executed in step S4802, a game start command is received from the main MPU 72. It is determined whether the game start command is received (step S4803), and if a game start command is received (step S4803: YES), a game start corresponding process, which will be described later, is executed (step S4804).

If a negative determination is made in step S4803, or if the process in step S4804 is performed, a history image management process described later is executed (step S4805), and a display operation corresponding process described later is executed (step S4806). ). Thereafter, history configuration data generation processing is executed (step S4807). Note that the processing from step S4808 to step S4813 will be described later. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the history configuration data generation process in step S4807.

In the history configuration data generation process, first, it is determined whether "1" is set in any of the plurality of generation flags provided in the performance side RAM 94 (step S5101). The production-side RAM 94 includes the ART end generation flag 174, the ending end generation flag 175, the intermediate generation flag 177, and the above-mentioned generation flag 174 as generation flags that make it possible to grasp the occurrence of an opportunity to generate history configuration data. First to third delimiter generation flags 176a to 176c are provided. The ART end generation flag 174 is a flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the ART state ST6 has ended and that history configuration data for displaying the first pattern history image G23 should be generated. . The ending generation flag 175 enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the ending production of the advantageous section SC2 has ended and that history configuration data for displaying the second pattern history image G23 should be generated. It's a flag. The midway generation flag 177 indicates to the production side MPU 92 that the midway generation of the history image G23 has been selected by the player's operation, and that history configuration data for displaying the third pattern of the history image G23 should be generated. This is a flag that makes it possible to understand. As already explained, the first break generation flag 176a indicates the number of game media given after transition to ART state ST6 (after the ART flag is set to "1", the ART flag is cleared to "0") This is a flag that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to know that the number of game media given during the period up to 1000 has reached 1000 pieces. This is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the number of provided game media has reached 2000 pieces, and the third break generation flag 176c indicates that the number of provided game media after the transition to ART state ST6 has reached 3000 pieces. This is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to understand this. In step S5101, an affirmative determination is made if any of these six types of generation flags is set to "1". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, word selection processing is executed to select word data to be set in the first to third heading ranges 151 to 153 (step S5102). The word selection process is executed using the first to third selection condition tables stored in the main ROM 73.

Here, prior to explaining the wording selection process (FIG. 88) executed by the production side MPU 92, we will explain the wording images G25 to G27 displayed in the heading ranges 151 to 153 in the first to third selection condition tables and the production side RAM 94. The configuration for determining will be explained.

As already explained, the first to third word images G25 to G27 are set in the history image G23 (FIG. 80(a)). The production side ROM 93 stores a selection condition table for selecting word designation data that designates word images G25 to G27 to be set in the history image G23. FIG. 86(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence between the types of selection condition tables and word designation data set in the selection condition tables.

As shown in FIG. 86(a), an opportunity to generate history configuration data occurs in the performance side ROM 93 in the gaming state before transitioning to the ART state ST6 (a state in which the ART flag is not set to "1"). The first to third selection condition tables before ART are stored as the selection condition tables read out when the ART is performed. The first to third selection condition tables before ART are read when an opportunity to generate history configuration data occurs during a period from the end of ART state ST6 until the start of the next ART state ST6. The performance side ROM 93 stores the first selection condition table of the first period as a selection condition table that is read out when an opportunity to generate history configuration data occurs in a state where the number of game media given after transition to ART state ST6 is 0 to 999. - A third selection condition table is stored as a selection condition table that is read out when a generation opportunity for history configuration data occurs in a state where the number of game media given after transition to ART state ST6 is 1000 to 1999. The first to third selection condition tables of the second period are stored, and when an opportunity to generate history configuration data occurs in a state where the number of game media given after transition to ART state ST6 is between 2000 and 2999. The first to third selection condition tables of the third period are stored as the selection condition tables to be read, and the history configuration data is generated in a state where the number of game media given after transition to ART state ST6 is 3000 or more. The first to third selection condition tables for the fourth period are stored as selection condition tables that are read out when . In addition, the performance-side RAM 94 stores first to third selection condition tables at the end of ART as selection condition tables read out at the end of the ART state ST6, and selection conditions tables read out at the end of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2. First to third selection condition tables at the end of the ending are stored as condition tables.

Each selection condition table has 18 word designation data set therein, and display priority data and selection conditions are set in correspondence with each word designation data. As shown in FIG. 86(a), word specification data of “1” to “18”, “19 to 36” and “37 to 54” are set in the first to third selection condition tables before ART. These wording designation data include a wording that specifies a wording image (for example, a wording image that says "BB won twice") that indicates the number of bonus wins (1st to 4th BB wins and 1st to 2nd RB wins). Contains specified data. Word specification data of “55” to “72”, “73 to 90” and “91 to 108” are set in the first to third selection condition tables of the first period, and these word specification data include Contains word designation data that specifies a word image (for example, a word image "500 pieces acquired") corresponding to the number of game media given in the ART state ST6 being "0" to "999". Word specification data of “109” to “126”, “127 to 144” and “145 to 162” are set in the first to third selection condition tables of the second period, and these word specification data include Contains text designation data that specifies a text image (for example, a text image that says "Over 1000 coins acquired!") that corresponds to the number of game media given in the ART state ST6 being "1000" to "1999". There is. Word specification data of “163” to “180”, “181 to 198” and “199 to 216” are set in the first to third selection condition tables of the third period, and these word specification data include Contains text designation data that specifies a text image (for example, a text image that says "Over 2000 coins acquired!") that corresponds to the number of game media given in the ART state ST6 being "2000" to "2999". There is. Word specification data of “217” to “234”, “235 to 252” and “253 to 270” are set in the first to third selection condition tables of the fourth period, and these word specification data include Contains word designation data that specifies a word image corresponding to the fact that the number of game media given in the ART state ST6 is "3000" or more (for example, a word image that says "Number of acquired coins exceeds 3000!"). Word specification data of "271" to "288", "289 to 306" and "307 to 324" are set in the first to third selection condition tables at the end of ART, and these word specification data Various ranges of the number of game media given in ART state ST6 (range of "0" to "999", range of "1000" to "1999", range of "2000" to "2999", and range of "3000" or more) Contains word specification data that specifies a word image corresponding to the word image. Word specification data of "325" to "342", "343 to 360" and "361 to 378" are set in the first to third selection condition tables at the end of the ending, and these word specification data Various ranges of the number of game media given in ART state ST6 (range of "0" to "999", range of "1000" to "1999", range of "2000" to "2999", and range of "3000" or more) Contains word specification data that specifies a word image corresponding to the word image.

The first to third selection condition tables corresponding to the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b are read out, and each selection condition table includes the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b. Contains word specification data that specifies a word image that includes a number corresponding to the number. This makes it possible to display text images that include numbers corresponding to the gaming history.

When an opportunity to generate history configuration data occurs, three corresponding selection condition tables (first selection condition table, second selection condition table, and third selection condition table) are read, and each of the three selection condition tables is A total of three word specification data are selected one by one. Then, from among the selected three word specification data, the first word specification data corresponding to the first word image G25 set in the first heading range 151 and the second word specified in the second heading range 152 are selected. Second word specification data corresponding to image G26 and third word specification data corresponding to third word image G27 set in third heading range 153 are determined.

FIG. 86(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the history storage area RAn set as a reference destination in each selection condition table. As shown in FIG. 86(b), the first pre-ART state that is read when a generation trigger occurs in the gaming state before transitioning to the ART state ST6 (a state in which the ART flag is not set to "1"). In the selection condition table, the 0th history storage area RA0 and the 1st history storage area RA1 are set as reference destinations. As already explained, the 0th history storage area RA0 is a counter that allows the production side MPU92 to grasp the number of games before transition to the ART state ST6, and the 1st history storage area RA1 is a counter for the bonus state and This is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of games until one of the ART states ST6 is started. In the first selection condition table before ART, word designation data that designates a word image regarding the number of games is set.

The second selection condition table before ART, which is read when a generation opportunity occurs in the gaming state before transitioning to ART state ST6, includes a second history storage area RA2 and a third history storage area RA3 as reference destinations. It is set. As already explained, the second history storage area RA2 is a counter that allows the production side MPU92 to grasp the number of gaming media that has decreased before transitioning to the ART state ST6, and the third history storage area RA3 is , is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the maximum number of decreases in game media during the period until the transition to the ART state ST6. In the second selection condition table before ART, word designation data that designates a word image regarding the number of game media is set.

The third selection condition table before ART, which is read when a generation opportunity occurs in the gaming state before transitioning to ART state ST6, includes a fourth history storage area RA4 and a fifth history storage area RA5 as reference destinations. It is set. As already explained, the fourth history storage area RA4 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of occurrences of the BB state ST3, and the fifth history storage area RA5 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of occurrences of the RB state ST4. This is a counter that can be grasped by the production side MPU 92. In the third selection condition table before ART, word designation data that designates a word image regarding the number of occurrences of the bonus state (BB state ST3 and RB state ST4) is set.

The first selection condition table read when a generation trigger occurs after transition to ART state ST6 (specifically, the first selection condition table for the first to fourth periods, the first selection condition table at the end of ART) and the first selection condition table at the end of the ending), the 0th history storage area RA0, the 2nd history storage area RA2, the 3rd history storage area RA3, and the 6th history storage area RA6~ are referenced. An eighth history storage area RA8 is set. As already explained, the sixth history storage area RA6 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of times ART winnings have occurred, and the seventh history storage area RA7 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of times ART winnings have occurred, and the seventh history storage area RA7 contains information on the type of role that triggered the ART winnings. The eighth history storage area RA8 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the type information of the ART start production. The first selection condition table is set with word designation data that designates word images corresponding to game history data before and at the time of transition to ART state ST6.

The second selection condition table that is read when a generation trigger occurs after transition to ART state ST6 (specifically, the second selection condition table for the first to fourth periods, the second selection condition table at the end of ART) and the second selection condition table at the end of the ending), the fourth history storage area RA4, the fifth history storage area RA5, and the ninth history storage area RA9 to the eleventh history storage area RA11 are set as reference destinations. has been done. As already explained, the fourth history storage area RA4 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of occurrences of the BB state ST3, and the fifth history storage area RA5 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of occurrences of the RB state ST4. The ninth history storage area RA9 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of games that have been executed after transition to the ART state ST6, and the ninth The 10th history storage area RA10 is a counter that allows the production side MPU92 to grasp the number of game media given after the transition to the ART state ST6, and the 11th history storage area RA11 is a counter that allows the production side MPU92 to grasp the number of game media given after the transition to the ART state ST6. This is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the net increase in the number of game media later. The second selection condition table includes word designation data that specifies word images regarding the number of occurrences of the bonus state (BB state ST3 and RB state ST4), the number of games and the number of gaming media after transition to the ART state ST6. is set.

The third selection condition table read when a generation trigger occurs after transition to ART state ST6 (specifically, the third selection condition table for the first to fourth periods, the third selection condition table at the end of ART) and the third selection condition table at the end of the ending), the 12th history storage area RA12 to the 14th history storage area RA14 are set as reference destinations. As already explained, the 12th history storage area RA12 is a counter that allows the production side MPU92 to grasp the total number of additional games in the ART state ST6, and the 13th history storage area RA13 is a counter that allows the production side MPU92 to grasp the total number of additional games in the ART state ST6. This is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of extra games, and the 14th history storage area RA14 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the total number of extra games in the bonus state. In the third selection condition table, word designation data that designates a word image regarding the number of additional games is set.

A configuration in which 54 word specification data are set in one selection condition table and three word specification data having a high display priority are selected from among the word specification data satisfying the selection conditions in the selection condition table. In this case, the types of words to be displayed tend to overlap. For example, if the net number of sheets added in ART state ST6 is 1,500 sheets or more, the phrase "Net number of sheets added exceeds 1,200 sheets!" is selected on the condition that the net number of sheets added in ART state ST6 is 1,200 sheets or more, There is a possibility that the phrase "Net number of sheets added exceeds 1500!!", which is selected on the condition that the net number of sheets added in ART state ST6 is 1500 or more, may be selected at the same time. In contrast, in this embodiment, three selection condition tables in which 18 word specification data are set are read out, and one word specification data is selected from one selection condition table, thereby creating a total of three word specification data. It is configured to select. This prevents the contents of the words set in the history image G23 from duplicating or creating a sense of discomfort.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, one word specification data is selected from one selection condition table as the word specification data to be displayed. Selection of the wording specification data is performed based on the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b at the time when the generation opportunity of history configuration data occurs.

When one word specification data to be displayed is selected from each selection condition table, the word specification data with the highest display priority among the word specification data whose selection conditions are met in the target selection condition table is displayed first. Selected as a target candidate. Each selection condition table stores up to three pieces of word designation data having the same display priority. If there is one word specification data with the highest display priority among the word specification data whose selection conditions are satisfied in the selection condition table, that one word specification data is selected as a candidate for display. Then, the wording designation data is selected as the wording designation data to be displayed. On the other hand, if there are multiple (specifically two or three) word specification data with the highest display priority among the word specification data that satisfy the selection conditions in the selection condition table, the plurality of word specification data The specified data is selected as a candidate for display. Then, a lottery is held to select one word designation data to be displayed from among the plurality (specifically two or three) word designation data selected as display target candidates.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), the performance side RAM 94 is provided with a first candidate area 171, a second candidate area 172, and a third candidate area 173. As described above, a maximum of three word specification data are selected from one selection condition table as display target candidates. The first to third candidate areas 171 to 173 contain word designation data (7-bit numerical information from 1 to 96) selected as display target candidates and display priority data (0 to 8) of the word designation data. This is a storage area where 3-bit numerical information) is stored. Each candidate area 171 to 173 has a storage capacity of 10 bits, and the upper 7 bits store word specification data, and the lower 3 bits store display priority data corresponding to the word specification data. .

As described above, in each selection condition table, the same display priority data is set for up to three word specification data. Candidate areas 171 to 173 contain the word specification data that has the highest display priority data among the word specification data that satisfies the selection conditions in the target selection condition table, and the display priority data that corresponds to the word specification data. degree data is set. If the selection conditions are met and there are multiple word specification data sets with the same display priority data, up to three combinations of word specification data and display priority data are selected from the first to The third candidate areas 171 to 173 are set.

If two or more word specification data are set in the first to third candidate areas 171 to 173, one word specification data that is actually to be displayed is selected from among the word specification data that is a candidate for display. A lottery will be held to determine the In this way, by having a configuration in which there may be a plurality of word specification data that are candidates for display based on the game history data set in the history storage area 94b, even if the game history is the same, The contents of the history image G23 may differ. By increasing the variations of the history images G23, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the same history images G23 will be generated, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), the performance side RAM 94 is provided with a first selection area 165, a second selection area 166, and a third selection area 167. The first selection area 165 contains one word specification data (7-bit numerical information from 1 to 96) selected as a display target from the first selection condition table and display priority data (0 to 8 This is a storage area where 3-bit numerical information) is stored. The second selection area 166 contains one word specification data (7-bit numerical information from 1 to 96) selected as a display target from the second selection condition table and display priority data (0 to 8 This is a storage area where 3-bit numerical information) is stored. The third selection area 167 contains one word specification data (7-bit numerical information from 1 to 96) selected as a display target from the third selection condition table and display priority data (0 to 8 This is a storage area where 3-bit numerical information) is stored. Each selection area 165 to 167 has a storage capacity of 10 bits, and the upper 7 bits store word designation data, and the lower 3 bits store display priority data corresponding to the word designation data. .

Here, the selection condition table will be explained by taking as an example the second selection condition table at the end of ART, which is read out at the end of ART state ST6. FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second selection condition table at the end of ART.

As shown in FIG. 87, a plurality of word specification data "289" to "306" are set in the second selection condition table at the end of ART, and these word specification data Nine levels of display priority data and selection conditions are set in one-to-one correspondence with each of the following. Specifically, display priority data of any one of "0" to "8" is set for each word designation data, and the larger the value of the display priority data, the higher the display priority.

In the second selection condition table at the end of ART, three word specification data with display priority data of "8", "7", and "6" are set, and three word specification data with display priority data of "5" are set. , "4" and "3" are set, and one display priority data is set as "2", "1", and "0". There is. In this way, since many word specification data with large values of display priority data are set, there are many kinds of wordings that are displayed in the history image G23 when a selection condition that is difficult to achieve is met. It has become. This increases the possibility that wording that the player has never seen before will be displayed when difficult selection conditions are met.

In each selection condition table, word designation data are set in order from the one with the largest display priority data value. Then, word designation data to be determined is set in order of the word designation data having the largest display priority data value, and it is determined whether or not the selection condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the selection condition is not satisfied, the determination target is updated to the next word designation data. On the other hand, if it is determined that the selection condition is satisfied, the current wording specification data to be determined becomes a candidate for display. If there is other word specification data that has the same display priority data as the word specification data, the word specification data that has the same display priority data is set as the judgment target. Then, it is determined whether the selection conditions are satisfied. If it is determined that the selection condition is satisfied, the wording designation data to which the same display priority data is set also becomes a candidate for display. In this way, a plurality of word specification data may be candidates for display.

As shown in FIG. 87, regarding the second selection condition table at the end of ART, specifically, if the value of the 10th history storage area RA10 is "3000" or more, that is, the game after transition to ART state ST6 If the number of media to be provided is 3000 or more, word designation data "289" whose display priority data is "8" becomes a candidate for display. In this case, word designation data of "289" and display priority data of "8" are set in the first candidate area 171.

In the second selection condition table (FIG. 87) at the end of ART, word designation data of "290" also exists as word designation data with display priority data of "8". Therefore, if the selection condition is satisfied, the wording designation data "290" whose priority data is "8" also becomes a candidate for display. Specifically, if the value of the 11th history storage area RA11 is "1500" or more, that is, if the net increase in number of sheets after transitioning to ART state ST6 is 1500 or more, the wording "290" is Specified data is also a candidate for display. In this case, word designation data of “290” and display priority data of “8” are set in the second candidate area 172.

In the second selection condition table (FIG. 87) at the end of ART, word designation data of "291" also exists as word designation data with display priority data of "8". Therefore, if the selection condition is satisfied, the wording designation data "291" whose priority data is "8" also becomes a candidate for display. Specifically, if the value of the fourth history storage area RA4 is "5" or more, that is, if the number of BB winnings has occurred five times or more, the wording specification data of "291" is also displayed. candidate. In this case, word designation data of “291” and display priority data of “8” are set in the third candidate area 173. Then, a lottery is held to select one word specification data to be displayed from among these three word specification data (word specification data "289" to "291"), and the winner is selected in the lottery. The word designation data thus selected becomes the word designation data selected from the second selection condition table at the end of ART. Then, the selected wording designation data and the display priority data of "8" corresponding to the wording designation data are set in the second selection area 166 corresponding to the second selection condition table.

The selection condition table includes word specification data in which a plurality of selection conditions are set. That is, there is word specification data that becomes a display candidate when a plurality of selection conditions are satisfied. For example, as shown in FIG. 87, the word designation data "299" in the second selection condition table at the end of ART indicates that the number of game media given after transition to ART state ST6 is "1000" or more. A selection condition is set that the number of occurrences of BB winning in ART state ST6 is "2" or more. As a result, the total number of word images G25 to G27 that can be displayed in the history image G23 is limited, and only one word designation data is selected for display among the word designation data set in one selection condition table. In a configuration limited to , it is possible to display text images G25 to G27 that reflect the contents of a plurality of game history data. By making it possible to display the history image G23 that reflects the details of the game history data, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the history image G23 and improve the interest in the game.

Even if the result is the same for one parameter, the content of the wording that becomes a display candidate can be changed if the result is different for another parameter. For example, as shown in FIG. 87, in the second selection condition table at the end of ART, for the parameter "Number of occurrences of BB winning" (value of the fourth history storage area RA4), the number of occurrences is "2" or more. If there is, the parameter "number of game media given after transition to ART state ST6" (value of 10th history storage area RA10), if the number given is "1000" or more, the wording "299" is displayed. The designated data becomes a candidate for display, and if the number of assignments is less than "1000", the word designation data of "300" becomes a candidate for display. In this way, by setting selection conditions for combinations of a plurality of parameters, it is possible to reflect the contents of the game history in detail on the history image G23.

Multiple thresholds are set for one parameter, and the content of the wording that becomes a display candidate changes depending on whether each threshold is exceeded, thereby suppressing the increase in the number of parameters to be memorized and keeping track of the history. The content of the image G23 can be made detailed. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the history image G23.

Next, the word selection process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 88. Note that the word selection process is executed in step S5102 of the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85).

In the word selection process, the current gaming state is grasped (step S5201), and the first selection condition table corresponding to the grasped gaming state is read from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94 (step S5202). Specifically, if the ART flag in the production side RAM 94 is not set to "1", the first selection condition table before ART is read. Further, when the number of game media given after transitioning to ART state ST6 is 0 to 999, the first selection condition table of the first period is read, and the number of game media given after transitioning to ART state ST6 is 1000. -1999, reads the first selection condition table for the second period, and reads the first selection condition table for the third period, if the number of game media given after transition to ART state ST6 is 2000 to 2999. , the first selection condition table for the fourth period is read when the number of game media given after transition to ART state ST6 is 3000 or more. Furthermore, when the ART state ST6 ends, the first selection condition table at the end of ART is read out, and when the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 ends, the first selection condition table at the end of the ending is read out.

Thereafter, the first to third candidate areas 171 to 173 in the performance side RAM 94 are cleared (step S5203), and one word is selected from the word specification data set in the selection condition table read out to the performance side RAM 94. The designated data is set as a determination target (step S5204). In step S5204, word specification data is set as a determination target in order of display priority in the selection condition table. Thereafter, wording determination processing is executed for the wording designation data set as the determination target in step S5204 (step S5205). In the wording determination process, the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b of the performance-side RAM 94 is compared against the selection condition table read out to the performance-side RAM 94, thereby determining the wording data to be determined. Determine whether or not the set selection conditions are met.

If the selection condition set in the wording data to be determined is not satisfied (step S5206: NO), it is determined whether wording specification data is set in the first candidate area 171 in the production side RAM 94. (Step S5207) If word specification data is not set (Step S5207: NO), the process returns to Step S5204. Then, the word designation data to be determined is updated in the selection condition table read out to the production side RAM 94. Then, the processes of steps S5204 to S5207 are repeatedly executed until an affirmative determination is made in step S5206. Each selection condition table is set with word specification data in which the display priority data is the lowest "0" and no selection conditions are set. For example, as shown in FIG. 87, in the second selection condition table at the end of ART, the display priority data is "0" and word specification data of "306" with no selection conditions set is set. There is. Therefore, if none of the selection conditions set in the selection condition table is satisfied, the processes from step S5204 to step S5207 are repeatedly executed, and finally the wording specification data for which no selection condition is set is the target of judgment. is set, and an affirmative determination is made in step S5206.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5206 that the selection condition set for the word specification data to be determined is satisfied, the word specification data to be determined and the display priority data corresponding to the word specification data are set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 (step S5208). In step S5208, if word designation data has already been set in the first candidate area 171, the word designation data to be determined and the display priority data corresponding to the word designation data are set in the second candidate area 172. In addition, if the word specification data is already set in the first candidate area 171 and the second candidate area 172, the word specification data to be determined and the display priority data corresponding to the word specification data are set in the third candidate area 173. Set. As mentioned above, each selection condition table has word specification data with no selection conditions set, and if none of the selection conditions set in the selection conditions table is met, no selection conditions are set. Word specification data that does not exist is selected as a candidate for display. Therefore, any word designation data and display priority data are set in candidate areas 171 to 173.

If it is determined in step S5207 that the wording specification data is set in the first candidate area 171, or if the wording specification data and display priority data are set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 in step S5208, It is determined whether or not other word specification data that has the same display priority data as the set word specification data and has not yet been determined exists in the selection condition table (step S5209). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5209, the process returns to step S5204, and the other wording specification data having the same display priority as the wording data set in the first candidate area 171 is set as a determination target. (Step S5204), and word determination processing is executed for the other word specification data (Step S5205).

If a negative determination is made in step S5209, it is determined whether a plurality of word designation data are set in candidate areas 171 to 173 (step S5210). If a plurality of word specification data are set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 (step S5210: YES), one word to be set in the selection areas 165 to 167 of the production side RAM 94 from among the plurality of word specification data. A word designation data lottery process for selecting designation data is executed (step S5211).

In the word designation data lottery process (step S5211), a word designation lottery table corresponding to the number of word designation data set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 is read from the production side ROM 93. The production side ROM 93 includes a first word specification lottery table that is read out when the number of word specification data set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 is "2", and a lottery table set in the candidate areas 171 to 173. A second word designation lottery table that is read out when the number of word designation data is "3" is stored. In these word designation lottery tables, winning probabilities are set so that the winning probabilities for each word designation data are the same or substantially the same. After that, the random number updated in the performance side RAM 94 is obtained. Then, by comparing the obtained random number against the word lottery table, one word specifying data to be selected as a display target is specified from the current selection condition table.

Thereafter, by referring to the image reproduction storage area 94c, the word designation data selected in the word designation data lottery process (step S5211) is the word designation included in the history configuration data generated and stored in the past. It is determined whether the data is the same as the data (step S5212). In step S5212, the word designation data (numerical information of any one of "1" to "378") specified in the word designation data lottery process (step S5211) is the 0th to 31st data in the image reproduction storage area 94c. It is determined whether it is included in the history configuration data stored in the storage areas for reproduction RD0 to RD31, and the history configuration data stored in any of the 0th to 31st storage areas for reproduction RD0 to RD31 is included. If it is included, an affirmative determination is made. Since the wording designation data is a serial number from "1" to "378", the wording designation data specified in the wording designation data lottery process (step S5211) is historical configuration data that has been generated and stored in the past. The process for determining whether or not the content is included in the content has been simplified.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S5212, processing for changing the wording specification data is executed (step S5213). In the word specification data change process, the word designation that was won in the word designation lottery table (the first word designation lottery table or the second word designation lottery table) used in the word designation data lottery process (step S5211) Re-select the word specification data different from the data as the word specification data to be displayed. Specifically, when the first word designation lottery table is read in the word designation data lottery process (step S5211), the word designation data that was the winning word designation data is set in the first candidate area 171. If it is data, the wording designation data set in the second candidate area 172 is reselected as the wording designation data to be displayed, and the wording designation data that was the winning word is the wording set in the second candidate area 172. If it is specified data, the wording specification data set in the first candidate area 171 is reselected as the wording specification data to be displayed. In addition, when the second word specification lottery table is read in the word specification data lottery process (step S5211), even if the word specification data that has been the winning word specification data is the word specification data set in the first candidate area 171. For example, the word specification data set in the second candidate area 172 is reselected as the word specification data to be displayed, and even if the word specification data that has been selected is the word specification data set in the second candidate area 172. For example, if the word designation data set in the third candidate area 173 is reselected as the word designation data to be displayed, and the word designation data that has been selected is the word designation data set in the third candidate area 173. For example, the word designation data set in the first candidate area 171 is reselected as the word designation data to be displayed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the wording designation data selected in step S5213 is the same as wording designation data included in history configuration data generated and stored in the past (step S5214). In step S5214, the wording designation data (numerical information of any one of "1" to "378") selected in the wording designation data changing process (step S5213) is the 0th to 31st data in the image reproduction storage area 94c. It is determined whether or not it is included in the history configuration data stored in the storage areas RD0 to RD31 for reproduction, and the history configuration data stored in any of the 0th to 31st storage areas RD0 to RD31 is included. If it is included, an affirmative determination is made. If a negative determination is made in step S5214, the process advances to step S5217. In this case, the word designation data selected in the word designation data change process (step S5213) becomes the word designation data to be displayed.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5214, the wording included in the history configuration data generated and stored in the past in the wording designation lottery table used in the wording designation data lottery process (step S5211) It is determined whether there is other word designation data that has not been determined whether it is the same as the designation data (step S5215). If the number of word specification data selected as display target candidates from the selection condition table is two, a negative determination is made in step S5215, and the number of word specification data selected as display target candidates is determined. If there are three, an affirmative determination is made in step S5215.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5215, the process returns to step S5213 and the processes from step S5213 to step S5215 are repeated. In this case, in the text specification data change processing (step S5213), if the text specification data set in the first candidate area 171 as the display target is selected, the text specification data is set as the display target in the second candidate area 172. If the wording specification data set in the second candidate area 172 is selected as the display target, the wording specification data set in the third candidate area 173 as the display target is selected again. is reselected, and if the wording specification data set in the third candidate area 173 is selected as the display target, the wording specification data set in the first candidate area 171 is reselected as the display target. Thereafter, it is determined whether the wording designation data selected in step S5213 is the same as wording designation data included in history configuration data generated and stored in the past (step S5214). If a negative determination is made in step S5214, the process advances to step S5217. In this case, the third word specification data selected in the word specification data change process (step S5213) becomes the word specification data to be displayed. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5214, the process advances to step S5215.

If a negative determination is made in step S5215, the word designation data that was first selected in the word designation data lottery process (step S5211) is reselected as the word designation data to be displayed (step S5216), and step S5217 Proceed to.

If a negative determination is made in step S5210, if a negative determination is made in step S5212, if a negative determination is made in step S5214, or if the process in step S5216 is performed, the settings are set in the history configuration data. The word designation data selected as the word designation data to be selected and the display priority data of the word designation data are stored in the selection areas 165 to 167 corresponding to the current selection condition table (step S5217). Specifically, word specification data and display priority data are stored in the first selection area 165 when the current selection condition table is the first selection condition table, and are stored in the first selection area 165 when the current selection condition table is the second selection condition table. It is stored in the second selection area 166, and in the case of the third selection condition table, it is stored in the third selection area 167.

After that, if the current selection condition table is not the third selection condition table (step S5218: NO), the selection condition table is updated (step S5219), and the process returns to step S5203. In step S5219, the selection condition tables that have been read out to the production side RAM 94 in the order of first selection condition table → second selection condition table → third selection condition table are cleared, and the next selection condition table is read out.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5218 that the current selection condition table is any third selection condition table, this means that the selection of the three word specification data set in the history configuration data has been completed. Therefore, the first to third candidate areas 171 to 173 are cleared (step S5220), and the text selection process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85), after the word selection process is performed in step S5102, the three word designation data selected in the word selection process are assigned to the first to third data of the history image G23. A heading setting process for placing the headings in the heading ranges 151 to 153 (FIG. 80(a)) is executed (step S5103). FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the heading setting process.

In the heading setting process, first, the largest one of the three display priority data set in the first to third selection areas 165 to 167 is identified (step S5301), and the identified largest display priority data is A combination of the included word designation data and display priority data is set in candidate areas 171 to 173 in the performance side RAM 94 (step S5302). In step S5302, if there is one combination of wording data and display priority data that includes the maximum display priority data, that combination is set in the first candidate area 171, and the maximum display priority data is set to the first candidate area 171. If there are two combinations of wording data and display priority data, the two combinations are set in the first candidate area 171 and second candidate area 172, and the wording data containing the largest display priority data is set. If there are three combinations of display priority data, the three combinations are set in the first candidate area 171, second candidate area 172, and third candidate area 173.

Thereafter, priority adjustment processing is executed (step S5303). In the priority adjustment process, when a plurality of word designation data are set in the candidate areas 171 to 173, the corresponding Among a plurality of word designation data, word designation data that is the same as word designation data included in history configuration data generated and stored in the past is grasped. If part of the wording specification data set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 is the same as the wording specification data included in the history configuration data generated and stored in the past, the same Combinations of word specification data and display priority data including word specification data are deleted from candidate areas 171 to 173. As a result, if multiple word specification data having the same display priority exist in the candidate areas 171 to 173, the word specification data that is not included in the history configuration data that has been generated and stored in the past is It is possible to preferentially set the top heading ranges 151 to 153. On the other hand, in the priority adjustment process (step S5303), if all of the plural word specification data set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 are not included in the history configuration data generated and stored in the past, If all of the plurality of word designation data are included in history configuration data that has been generated and stored in the past, the combination of word designation data and display priority data is not deleted. Therefore, all combinations of word designation data and display priority data set in candidate areas 171 to 173 are not deleted.

Thereafter, if a plurality of word designation data exist in the candidate areas 171 to 173 (step S5304: YES), a lottery process for word designation data is executed (step S5305). In step S5305, a process similar to the word designation data lottery process in step S5211 of the word selection process (FIG. 88) described above is performed. Specifically, a word designation lottery table corresponding to the number of word designation data set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 is read from the production side ROM 93. Specifically, when the number of word designation data set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 is "2", the first word designation lottery table is read out, and the number of word designation data set in the candidate areas 171 to 173 is read out. When the number of word designation data is "3", the second word designation lottery table is read out. As already explained, the winning probabilities are set in these word designation lottery tables so that the winning probabilities for each word designation data are the same or substantially the same. After that, the random number updated in the performance side RAM 94 is obtained. Then, by comparing the obtained random number against the word designation lottery table, one word designation data is specified from among the plurality of word designation data set in the candidate areas 171 to 173. Thereafter, in the candidate areas 171 to 173, combinations of word designation data and display priority data other than the combination of word designation data and display priority data including the identified word designation data are deleted. As a result, only one combination of word designation data and display priority data is set in candidate areas 171 to 173.

If a negative determination is made in step S5304 or if the process in step S5305 is executed, the combination of one set of word specification data and display priority data set in candidate areas 171 to 173 is stored as configuration data. The counter is set to the highest vacant counter among the first to third wording counters 161a to 161c in the area 161 (step S5306). Specifically, the combination of wording specification data and display priority data is set in the first wording counter 161a when data is not set in any of the first to third wording counters 161a to 161c; When data is set only in the first wording counter 161a, it is set in the second wording counter 161b, and when data is set in the first wording counter 161a and the second wording counter 161b, it is set in the third wording counter 161c. is set to

After that, the selection areas 165 to 167 in which the combination of wording specification data and display priority data set in the configuration data storage area 161 in step S5306 are set are cleared (step S5307), and candidate areas 171 to 173 are cleared. (Step S5308).

Thereafter, it is determined whether word designation data and display priority data are set in the third word counter 161c in the configuration data storage area 161 (step S5309). If a negative determination is made in step S5309, the process returns to step S5301, and the processes of steps S5301 to S5308 are repeated until a positive determination is made in step S5309. As a result, the three word specification data and display priority data set in the first to third selection areas 165 to 167 are stored in the first to third word counters 161a to 161c of the configuration data storage area 161. state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5309, the main heading setting process is immediately terminated.

As already explained, the type of character image G28 displayed in the history image G23 corresponds to the type of the first wording image G25, and the production side MPU 92 selects the first wording image G28 to be displayed based on the first wording designation data. The types of word image G25 and character image G28 are grasped. Therefore, by storing the wording designation data in the first wording counter 161a of the configuration data storage area 161 in the heading setting process (FIG. 89), the type of the first wording image G25 included in the history image G23 is determined. At the same time, the type of character image G28 included in the history image G23 is determined. By having a configuration in which the type of character image G28 is grasped based on the first wording specification data, compared to a configuration in which data for grasping the type of character image G28 is stored separately from the first wording specification data, The storage capacity in the performance side RAM 94 is reduced so that the type of character image G28 included in the history image G23 can be grasped.

Returning to the description of the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85), after performing the heading setting process in step S5103, it is determined whether the value of the 15th history storage area RA15 is "1" (step S5104). If the value of the 15th history storage area RA15 is "1" (step S5104: YES), it means that the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2 has been executed, so the ending image setting process is executed (step S5104: YES). S5105). In the ending image setting process, the ending image flag 161d in the configuration data storage area 161 is set to "1". As a result, the ending image G29 is included in the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data.

In this way, when the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 is executed, the ending image flag 161d is set to "1" without a lottery or the like being performed. Therefore, even if the player does not record the ending effect with a camera or the like during the execution of the ending effect of the advantageous section SC2, the player can confirm that the ending effect has been performed by displaying the history image at any timing. You can check with.

If a negative determination is made in step S5104 or if the process in step S5105 is performed, the wording designation data set in the first to third wording counters 161a to 161c in the configuration data storage area 161 and the effect A point calculation process is executed to calculate the total of history points corresponding to the game history data set in the history storage area 94b of the side RAM 94 (step S5106). FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the point calculation process.

In the point calculation process, first, the heading point table is read from the performance side ROM 93 (step S5401). FIG. 91(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the heading point table. As shown in FIG. 91(a), history points are set in the heading point table in one-to-one correspondence with each display priority data of "0" to "8".

Returning to the explanation of the point calculation process (FIG. 90), after reading the heading point table in step S5401, history point setting process is executed (step S5402). In the history point setting process, the display priority data set in the first wording counter 161a of the configuration data storage area 161 is checked against the heading point table read out in step S5401, thereby setting the first wording specified data. The corresponding history point is specified, and the specified history point is set in the history point counter 161e in the configuration data storage area 161. As already explained, the history point counter 161e is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the history points of the history image G23. Furthermore, in the history point setting process (step S5402), the history point corresponding to the second wording specification data is identified by comparing the display priority data set in the second wording counter 161b against the heading point table. At the same time, by comparing the display priority data set in the third wording counter 161c against the heading point table, the history point corresponding to the third wording designation data is specified. Then, the two specified history points are added to the value of the history point counter 161e. As a result, the history point counter 161e is set to the total value of the history points corresponding to the first word designation data, the second word designation data, and the third word designation data.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the ART flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5403). If the ART flag is set to "1" (step S5403: YES), this means that the trigger for generating the current history configuration data occurred after the transition to ART state ST6, so the additional point table is not set. It is read from the performance side ROM 93 (step S5404). FIG. 91(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the additional point table. As shown in FIG. 91(b), the additional points table includes "Number of games executed in ART state ST6 x 1", "Number of bonus winnings x 500", and "Total number in ART state ST6". The number of additional games x 10 is set.

Returning to the explanation of the point calculation process (FIG. 90), after reading the additional point table in step S5404, the process of adding additional points is executed (step S5405), and this point calculation process ends. In the process of adding additional points, the number of games played in the ART state ST6 is grasped by referring to the ninth history storage area RA9 of the history storage area 94b, and the number of games played in the ART state ST6 x 1 ” are added to the history point counter 161e in the configuration data storage area 161. In addition, after calculating the total value of the value of the fourth history storage area RA4 (number of occurrences of BB winning) of the history storage area 94b and the value of the fifth history storage area RA5 (number of occurrences of RB winning). , calculates additional points of "number of bonus winnings x 500", and adds the additional points to the history point counter 161e. Furthermore, with reference to the 12th history storage area RA12 of the history storage area 94b, the total number of additional games in ART state ST6 is grasped, and additional points of "total number of additional games in ART state ST6 x 10" are calculated. Then, the additional points are added to the history point counter 161e. As a result, the history points of the history image G23 are set in the history point counter 161e.

Returning to the description of the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85), after the point calculation process is executed in step S5106, the process for ranking the history image G23 (steps S5107 to S5108) is performed. Specifically, the rank correspondence table is read from the performance side ROM 93 (step S5107). In the rank correspondence table, a plurality of ranks to be set in the history image G23 are set, and a range of history points corresponding to each rank is set.

After that, rank setting processing is executed (step S5108). In the rank setting process, the rank corresponding to the current history image G23 is identified by comparing the history points calculated in the point calculation process in step S5106 with the rank correspondence table read out in step S5107. Then, rank image designation data corresponding to the characteristic rank is set in the rank counter 161f in the configuration data storage area 161.

Specifically, in the rank setting process in step S5108, if any history point from "0" to "2499" is set in the history point counter 161e of the configuration data storage area 161, the rank counter 161f is set as " If any of the history points from "2500" to "5999" is set in the history point counter 161e, the rank image designation data corresponding to "C rank" is set, and the rank counter 161f corresponds to "B rank". If any of the history points from "6000" to "9999" is set in the history point counter 161e, the rank image designation data corresponding to "A rank" is set in the rank counter 161f. is set, and if any of the history points from "10000" to "14999" is set in the history point counter 161e, rank image designation data corresponding to "S rank" is set in the rank counter 161f, and the history When the history points of "15000" or more are set in the point counter 161e, rank image designation data corresponding to "SS rank" is set in the rank counter 161f.

Thereafter, plate setting processing for setting the background plate image G24, base plate image, and common background plate image is executed (step S5109). FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the plate setting process.

In the plate setting process, first, it is determined whether the ART end generation flag 174 or the ending end generation flag 175 in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5501). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5501, the total number of games played from the end of the previous ART state ST6 to the end of the current ART state ST6 is calculated (step S5502). Specifically, the value of the 0th history storage area RA0 (number of games played until ART state ST6 starts), the value of the 9th history storage area RA9 (number of games executed in ART state ST6), The total number of games is calculated by calculating the total value of .

After that, the current setting value of the slot machine 10 is specified (step S5503), and a plate lottery table corresponding to the combination of the total number of games calculated in step S5502 and the setting value specified in step S5503 is generated from the production side ROM 93. Read out (step S5504). As already explained, the production side MPU 92 grasps the current setting value based on the numerical information set in the setting end command received from the main side MPU 72. The setting end command is transmitted in the winning probability setting process (step S106 of the main process (FIG. 11)).

FIG. 93(a) shows the plate lottery table PA1 that is read when the total number of games executed from the end of the previous ART state ST6 to the end of the current ART state ST6 is between "0" and "1000". 93(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of ~PA6, and FIG. This is an explanatory diagram, and FIG. 93(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the plate lottery tables PD1 to PD6 that are read when the total number of games is "2001" or more.

The production side ROM 93 stores information for each of 18 combinations of the total number of games (0 to 1000 games, 1001 to 2000 games, and 2001 or more games) and setting values (settings 1 to 6). Eighteen plate lottery tables PA1 to PA6, PB1 to PB6, and PD1 to PD6 are stored in one-to-one correspondence.

When the total number of games is "0" to "1000", plate lottery tables PA1 to PA6 corresponding to "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are read out, and the total number of games is "1001" to "2000". ”, plate lottery tables PB1 to PB6 corresponding to “Settings 1” to “Settings 6” are read out, and if the total number of games is “2001” or more, “Settings 1” to “Settings 6” are read out. Plate lottery tables PD1 to PD6 corresponding to "Setting 6" are read out.

This slot machine 10 includes a white plate image that can be displayed in the case of "Setting 1", "Setting 3", and "Setting 5" as the background plate image G24 (FIG. 80(a)) of the history image G23, and "Setting 2", "Setting 4" and "Setting 6", a silver plate image that may be displayed in "Settings 4" to "Setting 6", and "Setting 5" and "Setting 6". There is a gold plate image that can be displayed in the case of “Setting 6” and a rainbow plate image that can be displayed in the case of “Setting 6”. When a white plate image is displayed, it is possible to know that the setting value is an odd number, and when a copper plate image is displayed, it is possible to understand that the setting value is an even number, and a silver plate image is displayed. If the setting value is "4" or more, it will be possible to know that the set value is "4" or more, and if the gold plate image is displayed, it will be possible to know that the set value is "5" or more, and the rainbow plate image will be displayed. In this case, it is possible to understand that the set value is "6".

The larger the total number of games is in the section, the lower the probability of winning one of the background plate images G24 when the setting value is low, and the probability of winning one of the background plate images G24 when the setting value is high. The probability of winning is set high. Specifically, in "Setting 1" and "Setting 2", the probability of winning one of the background plate images G24 is set highest in the first section, and second highest in the second section. It is set lowest in the third section. In "Setting 3" and "Setting 4", the probability of winning one of the background plate images G24 is set to be the same in the first to third sections. The probability of winning one of the background plate images G24 in "Setting 5" and "Setting 6" is set to be the lowest in the first section, the second highest in the second section, and the probability of winning one of the background plate images G24 in the third section. set highest.

When a white plate image is displayed in the first section, there is a probability of about 36% that it is "Setting 1", a probability of about 36% that it is "Setting 3", and a probability of about 27% that it is "Setting 5". ”. When the white plate image is displayed in the second section, there is a probability of about 9% that it is "Setting 1", a probability of about 36% that it is "Setting 3", and a probability of about 55% that it is "Setting 5". ”. When the white plate image is displayed in the third section, there is a probability of about 2% that it is "Setting 1", a probability of about 30% that it is "Setting 3", and a probability of about 68% that it is "Setting 5". ”. Also, when the copper plate image is displayed in the first section, there is a 40% probability that it is "Setting 2", a 30% probability that it is "Setting 4", and a 30% probability that it is "Setting 6". It is. When the copper plate image is displayed in the second section, there is a probability of about 8% that it is "Setting 2", a probability of about 23% that it is "Setting 4", and a probability of about 69% that it is "Setting 6". ”. When the copper plate image is displayed in the third section, there is a probability of about 1% that it is "Setting 2", a probability of about 16% that it is "Setting 4", and a probability of about 82% that it is "Setting 6". ”. In addition, when the silver plate image is displayed in the first section, there is a probability of about 33% that it is "Setting 4", a probability of about 33% that it is "Setting 5", and a probability of about 33% that it is "Setting 4". Setting 6". When the silver plate image is displayed in the second section, there is a probability of about 16% that it is "Setting 4", a probability of about 33% that it is "Setting 5", and a probability of about 50% that it is "Setting 6". ”. When the silver plate image is displayed in the third section, there is a probability of about 11% that it is "Setting 4", a probability of about 33% that it is "Setting 5", and a probability of about 56% that it is "Setting 6". ”. Further, when a gold plate image is displayed in the first section, there is a 50% probability that the setting is "Setting 5", and a 50% probability that it is the "Setting 6". When a gold plate image is displayed in the second section, there is a 40% probability that the setting is "Setting 5", and a 60% probability that it is the "Setting 6". When a gold plate image is displayed in the third section, the probability is about 38% that it is "setting 5", and the probability is about 63% that it is "setting 6".

For white plate images, copper plate images, silver plate images, and gold plate images, the probability that the setting value is on the lower side among the setting values corresponding to the background plate image G24 is high in sections where the total number of games is small. Therefore, in a section where the total number of games is large, the probability that the setting value is on the higher side among the setting values set for the background plate image G24 is high. Therefore, when these background plate images G24 are displayed on the history image G23, the player can predict the setting value of the slot machine 10 from the combination of the type of the displayed background plate image G24 and the total number of games. It becomes possible. By presenting information suggesting the set value, it is possible to make the player guess the set value, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Further, when the rainbow plate image is displayed, the player can be sure that the setting value of the slot machine 10 is "6". In this case, the player can play the game with confidence that the set value is advantageous to the player.

Returning to the explanation of the plate setting process (FIG. 92), after reading out any of the plate lottery tables PA1 to PA6, PB1 to PB6, and PD1 to PD6 in step S5504, the plate lottery process is executed (step S5505). In the plate lottery process, the random number updated in the production-side RAM 94 is acquired, and by comparing the random number with the plate lottery table read out in step S5504, it is possible to determine whether or not the background plate image G24 has won, and the winning background plate image. Identify the type of G24. If any of the background plate images G24 is won in the plate lottery process (step S5506: YES), the background plate image designation data corresponding to the won background plate image G24 is stored in the background plate counter 161g in the configuration data storage area 161. is set (step S5507), and the main plate setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the generation trigger of the current history configuration data does not occur at the end of the ART state ST6 or the end of the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 (step S5501: NO), the plate lottery is not performed. If a negative determination is made in step S5501, a net increase number grasping process is executed to grasp the net increase in the number of game media after the transition to the ART state ST6 (step S5508). In the net increase number grasping process, the net increase number of game media after the transition to the ART state ST6 is grasped by referring to the eleventh history storage area RA11. If the transition to the ART state ST6 is not yet completed (the ART flag in the production side RAM 94 is not set to "1"), the net increase number of game media is determined to be "0" in the net increase number grasping process (step S5508). ”.

Thereafter, a base data table in which base plate image designation data is set corresponding to the range of the net increase in number of sheets is read from the production side ROM 93 (step S5509). Then, by comparing the net increase in the number of gaming media grasped in step S5508 against the base data table, base plate image designation data is specified (step S5510), and the identified base plate image designation data is configured. The base plate counter 161h in the data storage area 161 is set (step S5511), and the plate setting process ends. In the background data table, the number of net additions is "range of 0 to 499", "range of 500 to 1000", "range of 1001 to 1499", "range of 1500 to 1999", "range of 2000 to 2499". ``range'', ``range of 2,500 to 2,999 images'', and ``range of 3,000 images or more'', and as the number of acquired images increases, the color of the base plate image changes to normal color, black, blue, green, red, and silver. , the base plate image designation data is set to change in the order of gold.

If a negative determination is made in step S5501 or if a negative determination is made in step S5506, the value of the background plate counter 161g in the configuration data storage area 161 becomes "0". As already explained, when the value of the background plate counter 161g is "0", the common background plate image is included in the history image G23.

Returning to the explanation of the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85), after performing the plate setting process in step S5109, the current date and time data (specifically, the year and month) is date information and time information) and sets the date and time data in the date and time data counter 161j in the configuration data storage area 161 (step S5110). This allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the date and time when the history image G23 was generated.

Thereafter, a generation trigger data setting process is executed (step S5111). In the generation trigger data setting process, generation trigger data corresponding to the type of generation trigger of history configuration data is stored in the generation trigger counter 161k (FIG. 81(b)) of the configuration data storage area 161. Specifically, when the first break generation flag 176a in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1", "1" is stored in the generation trigger counter 161k, and "1" is set to the second break generation flag 176b. "2" is stored in the generation trigger counter 161k if the third break generation flag 176c is set to "1", "3" is stored in the generation trigger counter 161k, and "3" is stored in the generation trigger counter 161k when the third break generation flag 176c is set. When the flag 174 is set to "1", "4" is stored in the generation trigger counter 161k, and when the ending end generation flag 175 is set to "1", "5" is stored in the generation trigger counter 161k. , and when the intermediate generation flag 177 is set to ``1'', ``6'' is stored in the generation trigger counter 161k.

Thereafter, history configuration data setting processing is performed (step S5112). In the history configuration data setting process, the history configuration data generated this time is stored in the image reproduction storage area 94c. In step S5112, if any of the ART end generation flag 174, ending end generation flag 175, and first to third break generation flags 176a to 176c in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1", the image is played back. In the playback storage area 94c, the playback storage area RDn (n is an integer from 0 to 30) corresponding to the value of the write pointer 162 in the production side RAM 94 is cleared, and the data is set in the configuration data storage area 161. The history configuration data is set in the playback storage area RDn. As already explained, in each playback storage area RDn, the production side determines whether or not the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data stored in the playback storage area RDn can be displayed on the image display device 63. A display enable flag is provided that can be grasped by the MPU 92. When history configuration data is stored in the playback storage area RDn, the display enable flag of the playback storage area RDn is set to "1". This makes it possible to display the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data stored in the reproduction storage area RDn on the image display device 63.

As already explained with reference to FIG. 81(a), the production-side RAM 94 includes a first protection target counter 163 and a second protection target counter 164, which make it possible to grasp the playback storage area RDn that is excluded from the target of deletion. is provided. If the history points of the history configuration data stored in the playback storage area RDn in step S5112 are greater than or equal to the history points in the second protection target counter 164, the history configuration with the second highest history points so far The reproduction storage area RDn in which data is stored is removed from the protection target, and the reproduction storage area RDn in which the current history configuration data is stored is set to be protected.

In the history configuration data setting process (step S5112), the value of the write pointer 162 is then updated by adding one. If the value of the write pointer 162 after the addition of 1 corresponds to the playback storage area RDn to be protected, the value of the write pointer 162 is further updated. Further, if the value of the write pointer 162 after the addition of 1 exceeds "30" which is the maximum value of the write pointer 162, the value of the write pointer 162 is cleared to "0". In the history configuration data setting process (step S5112), after updating the value of the write pointer 162, the configuration data storage area 161 is cleared.

In the history configuration data setting process (step S5112), if the intermediate generation flag 177 in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1", the 31st reproduction storage area RD31 in the image reproduction storage area 94c is cleared, The history configuration data set in the configuration data storage area 161 is set in the 31st reproduction storage area RD31. Thereafter, the configuration data storage area 161 is cleared.

In the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85), after executing the history configuration data setting process (step S5112), "1" is set to the ART end generation flag 174 or ending end generation flag 175 in the performance side RAM 94. It is determined whether or not (step S5113). When an affirmative determination is made in step S5113, clearing processing of game history data is executed (step S5114). In the game history data clearing process (step S5114), the 0th to 5th history storage areas RA0 to RA5 and the 7th to 15th history storage areas RA7 to RA15 in the history storage area 94b are cleared. As a result, the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b is cleared to "0", except for the game history data indicating the number of times ART winnings have occurred.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5113, it is determined whether the mid-generation flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5115). When an affirmative determination is made in step S5115, the intermediate generation end flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5116). The mid-generation completion flag is a flag that enables the performance-side MPU 92 to recognize that the generation of the history configuration data, which was started in response to the operation for mid-generation of the history image G23, has been completed.

If the process of step S5114 is performed, if a negative determination is made in step S5115, or if the process of step S5116 is performed, the corresponding generation flag is cleared to "0" (step S5117), and this history is Finish the configuration data generation process. In step S5117, if the ART end generation flag 174 is set to "1", the ART end generation flag 174 is cleared to "0", and the ending end generation flag 175 is set to "1". If the ending generation flag 175 is set to "0", if the ending generation flag 177 is set to "1", the intermediate generation flag 177 is cleared to "0", and the ending generation flag 177 is cleared to "0". If any of the three break generation flags 176a to 176c is set to "1", the break generation flags 176a to 176c set to "1" are cleared to "0".

Next, the game start corresponding processing executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 94. Note that the game start corresponding process is executed in step S4804 of the history image process (FIG. 82) when the production side MPU 92 receives a game start command from the main side MPU 72.

In the game start response process, first, it is determined whether history display is being executed (step S5601). In step S5601, an affirmative determination is made when the image display device 63 is displaying any one of the history image G23, a history menu screen to be described later, a mode selection screen, a heading list, and a ranking screen. The production-side RAM 94 is provided with a history image displaying flag, a mode selection flag, a heading list displaying flag, and a ranking displaying flag. The history image displaying flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the history image G23 is being displayed on the image display device 63, and the mode selection flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the history image G23 is being displayed on the image display device 63. This is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the selection screen is being displayed, and the heading list displaying flag indicates that the heading list is being displayed on the image display device 63. This is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to understand, and the ranking display flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to understand that the ranking screen is being displayed on the image display device 63. In step S5601, an affirmative determination is made if any of these flags is set to "1".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5601, a history display termination process is executed (step S5602). In the history display termination process, the display data for displaying the history image G23 set in the display setting area 113, the history menu screen, mode selection screen, heading list, and ranking screen, which will be described later, is cleared. do. As a result, the display of any of the history image G23, the history menu screen, the mode selection screen, the heading list, and the ranking screen on the image display device 63 ends.

Thereafter, flag clearing processing for history display is executed (step S5603). In the history display flag clearing process, the flags set to "1" among the history image display flag, mode selection flag, heading list display flag, and ranking display flag in the production side RAM 94 are cleared to "0". do. Thereafter, the history operation valid flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S5604). The history operation valid flag is a flag that enables the performance side MPU 92 to recognize that various selections for displaying history images can be made based on the operation of the performance operation device 64. A state in which the history operation valid flag is set to "1" corresponds to a state in which various selections for displaying history images can be made based on the operation of the performance operation device 64. By clearing the history operation valid flag to "0" based on the presentation side MPU 92 receiving the game start command, a state can be created in which various selections for displaying the history image during the presentation of the game cannot be made.

If a negative determination is made in step S5601 or if the process in step S5604 is performed, it is determined whether the value of the pop display counter provided in the performance side RAM 94 is "1" or more (step S5605). In this slot machine 10, when history configuration data is generated with the end of ART state ST6 as a trigger, when history composition data is generated with the end of the ending performance of advantageous section SC2 as a trigger, and when transition to ART state ST6 If history configuration data is generated after the number of game media given later reaches a predetermined number (specifically, "1000," "2000," or "3000"), a new A pop image indicating that the history image G23 can be displayed is displayed on the image display device 63. Specifically, a pop-up image containing the words "History images can now be displayed" is displayed on the lower right side of the image display device 63. This allows the player to recognize that the new history image G23 can now be displayed. The pop display ends when the corresponding history image display is performed. Furthermore, the pop display ends when three games are played without the corresponding history image display being performed. The pop display counter is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp whether or not three games have been played since the start of the pop display. The pop display counter is set to "3" at the timing when the pop display starts.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5605, the value of the pop display counter is subtracted by 1 (step S5606). Then, if the value of the pop display counter after the subtraction by 1 becomes "0" (step S5607: YES), a pop display end process is executed (step S5608). In the termination process, the display data for pop display set in the display setting area 113 is cleared. As a result, the pop display performed on the image display device 63 ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S5605, if a negative determination is made in step S5607, or if the process in step S5608 is performed, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1. (Step S5609). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5609, date and time data (specifically, date information and time information) is acquired from the RTC in the production control board 91 (step S5610), and the acquired date and time data is A reference time counter provided in the production side RAM 94 is set (step S5611), and the process for starting the game ends. In this slot machine 10, it is predicted that the player will leave his/her seat after 10 minutes have elapsed without the production side MPU 92 receiving a game start command since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal gaming state ST1. If this happens, cancel the history storage mode setting. The production side MPU 92 uses the date and time data set in the reference time counter in step S5611 to determine whether 10 minutes have elapsed since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal gaming state ST1. do.

Next, the history image management process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 95. Note that the history image management process is executed in step S4805 of the history image process (FIG. 82).

In the history image management process, first, it is determined whether an OFF operation command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S5701). As already explained, the OFF operation command is sent when the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop is performed. When an affirmative determination is made in step S5701, the history operation valid flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5702). This makes it possible to make various selections for displaying history images based on the operation of the production operation device 64.

If a negative determination is made in step S5701 or if the process in step S5702 is performed, end effect corresponding processing is executed (step S5703). FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the end effect handling process.

In the end effect corresponding process, it is first determined whether an ART end command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S5801). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5801, the ART end generation flag 174 provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5802). As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S5101 of the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85) described above, and history configuration data is generated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5801, it is determined whether an ending end command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S5803). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5803, the ending end generation flag 175 provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5804). As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S5101 of the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85) described above, and history configuration data is generated.

When the process of step S5802 or the process of step S5804 is performed, a notice pop display start process is executed (step S5805). In this slot machine 10, while the end effect or ending effect of the ART state ST6 is being executed, a preview pop-up display is displayed that foretells that a new history image G23 will be able to be displayed after the end effect of these end effects. This is done in device 63. In the preview pop-up display, a preview pop-up image including the words "history image in preparation" is displayed at the lower right side of the image display device 63. In the preview pop display start process (step S5805), display data for displaying the preview pop image on the image display device 63 is set in the display setting area 113. As a result, a preview pop image is displayed on the lower right side of the image display device 63. By performing a preview pop-up display, the player is made aware that the history image G23 can be displayed after the end effect or ending effect of the ART state ST6 is completed, and this corresponds to the newly generated history configuration data. It is possible to increase the possibility that an operation for displaying the history image G23 will be performed.

Thereafter, a preview displaying flag provided in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5806). The preview displaying flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the preview pop display is being executed. Thereafter, the history operation valid flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S5807), and the main end performance corresponding process is ended. By clearing the history operation valid flag to "0", a state is created in which various selections for displaying history images based on the operation of the performance operation device 64 cannot be made.

Returning to the explanation of the history image management process (FIG. 95), after executing the end effect corresponding process in step S5703, it is determined whether the preview displaying flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" ( Step S5704). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5704, it means that the end effect or ending effect of the ART state ST6 and the preview pop display are being performed on the image display device 63, so the effect side The value of the production side performance timer counter in the RAM 94 is updated by subtracting 1 (step S5705).

After that, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter for the production side performance after being updated in step S5705 has become "0" (step S5706), and the value of the timer counter for the production side production has become "0". If so (step S5706: YES), a notice pop display termination process is executed (step S5707). In the termination process, the display data for the preview pop display set in the display setting area 113 is deleted. As a result, the preview pop image is no longer displayed on the image display device 63, and the preview pop image ends. Thereafter, the preview displaying flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S5708), and the history operation valid flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5709). This makes it possible to make various selections for displaying history images based on the operation of the production operation device 64.

Thereafter, pop display start processing is executed (step S5710). In the start process, display data for displaying a pop image on the image display device 63 is set in the display setting area 113. As a result, a pop-up image including the text "History images can now be displayed" is displayed at the lower right side of the image display device 63, and the pop-up display is started. Thereafter, the pop display counter in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "3" (step S5711).

If a negative determination is made in step S5704, if a negative determination is made in step S5706, or if the process of step S5711 is performed, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1. (Step S5712). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5712, the current date and time data (specifically, date information and time information) is acquired from the RTC (not shown) in the production control board 91 (step S5713), Based on the acquired date and time data and the date and time data set in the reference time counter in the production side RAM 94, it is determined whether 10 minutes have passed since the last operation of the start lever 41 ( Step S5714).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S5714, clearing processing of the displayable flag is executed (step S5715). In the clearing process, all displayable flags set to "1" among the displayable flags provided in each of the playback storage areas RD0 to RD31 of the image playback storage area 94c are cleared to "0". As a result, the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data generated so far and stored in the 0th to 31st reproduction storage areas RD0 to RD31 cannot be selected and displayed on the image display device 63. If 10 minutes have passed without the presentation side MPU 92 receiving a game start command since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal gaming state ST1, and the player is expected to leave his/her seat. , the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data generated before the occurrence of the relevant state and stored in the 0th to 31st reproduction storage areas RD0 to RD31 can be selected and displayed on the image display device 63. become unable. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the act of estimating the set value by referring to the past history image G23 of a player other than the player himself/herself.

When the player is expected to leave his/her seat, the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data stored up to that point cannot be displayed, but the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data stored up to that point cannot be displayed. The stored history configuration data remains without being deleted. Furthermore, as already explained, the image playback storage area 94c is a storage area to which backup power is supplied after the slot machine 10 is powered off. Even when the supply of operating power to the image reproduction storage area 94c is stopped, information is stored and retained in the image reproduction storage area 94c. Therefore, when new history configuration data is generated, it is possible to reduce the possibility that word specification data that is the same as word specification data included in these history configuration data will be selected. This makes it possible to increase the possibility that the history image G23 including word images G25 to G27 that have not been seen before will be displayed.

Thereafter, a game history data clearing process is executed (step S5716). In the game history data clearing process, similarly to the game history data clearing process in step S5114 of the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85), the 0th to 5th history storage areas RA0 to RA5 in the history storage area 94b are and clears the seventh to fifteenth history storage areas RA7 to RA15. In this way, after the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal gaming state ST1, 10 minutes have passed without the production side MPU 92 receiving a game start command, and the player is expected to leave his/her seat. In this case, the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b is cleared to "0", except for the game history data indicating the number of ART winnings. This can prevent the game history data of the next player to be seated from being mixed with the game history data of the player who was seated before the player. Thereafter, the history storage flag 158 in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S5117). As a result, the game history mode is canceled.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the pop display counter in the performance side RAM 94 is "1" or more (step S5118), and if the value of the pop display counter is "1" or more (step S5118: YES), , executes pop-up display termination processing (step S5119). In the end processing, the display data for pop display set in the display setting area 113 is cleared, similar to step S5608 of the game start processing (FIG. 94). As a result, the pop display performed on the image display device 63 ends. Thereafter, the pop display counter in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S5720), and the present history image management process is ended.

Next, prior to explaining the display operation corresponding processing (FIG. 98) executed by the production side MPU 92, the history menu screen displayed on the image display device 63 will be explained. The history menu screen is displayed on the image display device 63 when the center button 64a of the performance operation device 64 is operated in a situation where the performance operation valid flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1".

FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the history menu screen displayed on the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 97, six item images G32 to G37 and a cursor image G38 that allows selection of the item images G32 to G37 are displayed on the history menu screen. The performance side RAM 94 is provided with a cursor position counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the item selected by the cursor on the image display device 63. The value of the cursor position counter has a one-to-one correspondence with the items displayed on the image display device 63, and is updated based on the operation of the upper button 64b or the lower button 64c of the production operation device 64. The player changes the item selected by the cursor image G38 on the image display device 63 by operating the upper button 64b or lower button 64c of the production operation device 64, and changes the item selected by the cursor image G38 on the image display device 63, and by operating the center button 64a. You can confirm the selection of the item. Note that when the screen displayed on the image display device 63 is switched, the maximum value of the cursor position counter is changed according to the number of items displayed on the image display device 63.

When the history menu screen is displayed on the image display device 63, the state where the value of the cursor position counter is "0" corresponds to the state where the item "mode selection" is selected, and the cursor position The state where the counter value is "1" corresponds to the state where the item "Display latest history image" is selected, and the state where the value of the cursor position counter is "2" corresponds to the state where "Past history image" is selected. This corresponds to the state in which the item "Display images" is selected, and the state in which the value of the cursor position counter is "3" corresponds to the state in which the item "Generate history images midway" is selected. The state where the value of the cursor position counter is "4" corresponds to the state where the item "Ranking display" is selected, and the state where the value of the cursor position counter is "5" corresponds to the state where the "History menu" is selected. This corresponds to the state where the item "Close" is selected. When the history menu screen is displayed on the image display device 63, selection of each item is confirmed by operating the center button 64a.

Next, the display operation corresponding processing executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 98. Note that the display operation corresponding processing is executed in step S4806 for displaying history images (FIG. 82).

In the display operation corresponding processing, first, it is determined whether or not the history operation valid flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5901). If a negative determination is made in step S5901, the display operation corresponding process is ended without executing the process corresponding to the operation of the effect operation device 64.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5901, it is determined whether the menu displaying flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5902). The menu displaying flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the history menu screen (FIG. 97) is being displayed on the image display device 63. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5902, selection handling processing is executed (step S5903), and this display operation handling processing ends. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing selection handling processing.

In the selection response processing, cursor update processing is first performed (step S6001). In the cursor update process, when an operation of the up button 64b or the down button 64c on the performance operation device 64 is detected, the value of the cursor position counter in the performance side RAM 94 is updated, and the value of the cursor position counter after the update is updated. The display data set in the display setting area 113 is updated so that the cursor image G38 is displayed at the corresponding position.

After that, it is determined whether or not the operation of the center button 64a on the production operation device 64 is detected (step S6002). If an affirmative determination is made in step S6002, this means that the selection of any item on the history menu screen (FIG. 97) has been confirmed, and therefore, a process for terminating the display of the history menu is executed (step S6003). In the termination process, the display data set in the display setting area 113 for displaying the history menu screen is cleared. As a result, the history menu screen is no longer displayed on the image display device 63.

Thereafter, the menu display flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S6004). This allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the display of the history menu screen has ended. Thereafter, if the value of the cursor position counter in the performance side RAM 94 is "0" (step S6005: YES), mode selection start processing is executed (step S6006), and the main selection corresponding processing is ended.

In the mode selection start process (step S6006), a process is performed to display on the image display device 63 a mode selection screen for selecting setting or cancellation of the history storage mode. Specifically, display data for displaying the mode selection screen is set in the display setting area 113. As a result, a mode selection screen is displayed on the image display device 63. On the mode selection screen, two items can be selected: "Setting history storage mode" and "Cancelling history storage mode." In addition, in the mode selection start process (step S6006), the mode selection flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1". As already explained, the mode selection flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to recognize that the mode selection screen is being displayed on the image display device 63. By setting the mode selection flag to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S5904 of the display operation response process (FIG. 98), and the mode selection process (step S5905) is executed. . FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing mode selection processing.

In the mode selection processing, first, cursor update processing is executed (step S6101). In the cursor update process, similarly to the cursor update process in step S6001 of the selection response process (FIG. 99), when the operation of the upper button 64b or the lower button 64c on the production operation device 64 is detected, the cursor position in the production side RAM 94 The counter value is updated, and the display data set in the display setting area 113 is updated so that the cursor image G38 is displayed at the position corresponding to the updated cursor position counter value.

Thereafter, it is determined whether an operation to select a history storage mode has been performed (step S6102). When an affirmative determination is made in step S6102, the history storage flag 158 in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6103). As a result, the game history mode is set, and game history data is stored in the history storage area 94b.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6102, it is determined whether an operation to cancel the history storage mode has been performed (step S6104). If an affirmative determination is made in step S6104, the history storage flag 158 is cleared to "0" (step S6105). As a result, the setting of the game history mode is canceled, and no game history data is stored in the history storage area 94b.

Thereafter, a game history data clearing process is executed (step S6106). In the game history data clearing process, similarly to the game history data clearing process in step S5114 of the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85), the 0th to 5th history storage areas RA0 to RA5 in the history storage area 94b are and clears the seventh to fifteenth history storage areas RA7 to RA15. In this way, when the setting of the history storage mode is canceled, the gaming history data previously stored in the history storage area 94b is cleared, except for the gaming history data indicating the number of ART winnings. Ru.

When the process of step S6103 or the process of step S6106 is performed, a process for terminating the display of the mode selection screen is executed (step S6107). In the termination process, the display data set in the display setting area 113 for displaying the mode selection screen is cleared. As a result, the mode selection screen is no longer displayed on the image display device 63. Thereafter, the mode selection flag in the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S6108), and this mode selection processing is ended. Thereby, it is possible for the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the display of the mode selection screen that was being performed on the image display device 63 has ended.

Returning to the description of the selection response process (FIG. 99), if a negative determination is made in step S6005, it is determined whether the value of the cursor position counter in the performance side RAM 94 is "1" (step S6007). . If an affirmative determination is made in step S6007, it means that the item "Display latest history image" has been selected on the history menu screen (FIG. 97), so the image is stored in the image playback storage area 94c. The latest history configuration data is grasped from among the 32 history configuration data (step S6008). In step S6008, the date and time data set in the history configuration data stored in each of the playback storage areas RD0 to RD31 are compared, and the playback storage area RDn (where n is 0 to 31).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the displayable flag in the reproduction storage area RDn (n is an integer from 0 to 31) determined in step S6008 is set to "1" (step S6009). As already explained, after the history configuration data is stored in the playback storage area RDn, after the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal gaming state ST1, the MPU 92 on the production side has not received a game start command. When the player is expected to leave his/her seat after a certain period of time has elapsed, the displayable flag of each playback storage area RDn is cleared to "0". If a negative determination is made in step S6009, this selection corresponding processing is ended without executing the processing for displaying the latest history image G23 on the image display device 63 (the processing of steps S6010 to S6012). do.

In this way, after the history configuration data is stored in the playback storage area RDn, the production side MPU 92 will not receive a game start command for 10 minutes after the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal gaming state ST1. If the player is predicted to leave his/her seat after the period has elapsed, the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data stored in each playback storage area RDn is selected and displayed on the image display device 63. It will no longer be possible to display it.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S6009, display data for displaying the history image G23 on the image display device 63 is generated based on the history configuration data grasped in step S6008 (step S6010 ). Then, the generated display data is set in the display setting area 113 (step S6011). As a result, the history image G23 is displayed on the image display device 63. Thereafter, the history image displaying flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6012), and this selection corresponding processing is ended. Thereby, it becomes possible for the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the history image G23 is being displayed on the image display device 63.

If a negative determination is made in step S6007, it is determined whether the value of the cursor position counter in the performance side RAM 94 is "2" (step S6013). If an affirmative determination is made in step S6013, it means that the item "Display past history images" has been selected on the history menu screen (FIG. 97), so the process for starting past history selection is executed. (Step S6014).

In the past history selection start process (step S6014), a heading list generation process is first performed. In this slot machine 10, when the item "Display past history images" is selected on the history menu screen (FIG. 97), the heading list of history images G23 that can be displayed on the image display device 63 is displayed on the image display device 63. will be displayed. As already explained, the history image G23 that can be displayed on the image display device 63 refers to the history image G23 that is displayed among the history configuration data generated in the past and stored in the reproduction storage areas RD0 to RD31 of the image reproduction storage area 94c. This is a history image G23 corresponding to history configuration data whose enable flag is set to "1". The heading list is a list of the first sentence and generation date and time in the history configuration data. In the heading list generation process, display data for displaying a heading list and a cursor image G38 for selecting a heading in the heading list on the image display device 63 is generated. Thereafter, the generated display data for the heading list is set in the display setting area 113. As a result, the heading list and cursor image G38 are displayed on the image display device 63. Thereafter, the heading list displaying flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1". As already explained, the heading list displaying flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the heading list is being displayed on the image display device 63. By setting the heading list displaying flag to "1", an affirmative determination is made in step S5906 of the display operation support process (FIG. 98), and the past history selection process (step S5907) is executed. becomes. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing past history selection processing.

In the past history selection process, first, a cursor update process is executed (step S6201). In the cursor update process, similarly to the cursor update process in step S6001 of the selection response process (FIG. 99), when an operation of the upper button 64b or the lower button 64c on the production operation device 64 is detected, the cursor position in the production side RAM 94 The value of the counter is updated, and the display data set in the display setting area 113 is updated so that the cursor image G38 is displayed at the position corresponding to the updated value of the cursor position counter.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the operation of the center button 64a on the production operation device 64 has been detected (step S6202). If an affirmative determination is made in step S6202, this means that an operation has been performed on the image display device 63 to confirm one of the selections, and therefore, a heading list display end process is executed (step S6203). In the termination process, the display data for displaying the headline list and the display data for displaying the cursor image set in the display setting area 113 are deleted. As a result, the heading list and cursor image G38 are no longer displayed on the image display device 63. Thereafter, the heading list displaying flag in the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S6204). This makes it possible for the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the heading list display has ended.

Thereafter, it is determined whether any heading has been selected based on the value of the cursor position counter in the performance side RAM 94 (step S6205). In step S6205, an affirmative determination is made if a heading corresponding to any past history configuration data is selected, and a negative determination is made if a selection is made to return to the history menu screen. If a negative determination is made in step S6205, steps S5913 to S5916 of display operation support processing (FIG. 98) are executed. Note that the details of the processing in steps S5913 to S5916 will be described later.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6205, the selected heading is grasped based on the value of the cursor position counter (step S6206), and the history configuration data corresponding to the grasped heading is grasped (step S6206). Step S6207). Specifically, in step S6207, the reproduction storage areas RD0 to RD31 in the image reproduction storage area 94c where history configuration data corresponding to the heading identified in step S6206 are stored are determined.

Thereafter, display data for displaying the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data grasped in step S6207 on the image display device 63 is generated (step S6208). Then, the generated display data is set in the display setting area 113 (step S6209). As a result, the history image G23 corresponding to the past history configuration data selected this time is displayed on the image display device 63.

Thereafter, the history image displaying flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6210), and this past history selection process is ended. This allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the history image G23 is being displayed on the image display device 63.

Returning to the description of the selection response process (FIG. 99), if a negative determination is made in step S6013, it is determined whether the value of the cursor position counter in the performance side RAM 94 is "3" (step S6015). . If an affirmative determination is made in step S6015, it means that the item "generation of history images midway" has been selected, so the midway generation flag 177 in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6016), this selection corresponding processing ends. By setting the intermediate generation flag 177 to "1," an affirmative determination is made in step S5101 of the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85) described above, and history configuration data is generated. . As already explained, in the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85), if the history configuration data is generated based on the intermediate generation flag 177 in the performance side RAM 94 being set to "1", the process proceeds to step S5113. A negative determination is made in step S5115, and an affirmative determination is made in step S5115, and the intermediate generation end flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5116).

Returning to the explanation of the history image processing (FIG. 82), after executing the history configuration data generation processing in step S4807, it is determined whether the intermediate generation end flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1". (Step S4808). As already explained, the mid-generation end flag allows the production-side MPU 92 to grasp that the generation of the history configuration data, which was started in response to the operation for mid-generation of the history image G23, has ended. This is the flag to If an affirmative determination is made in step S4808, an intermediately generated history image display process (processing from step S4809 to step S4813) is executed. Specifically, first, the history configuration data stored in the 31st reproduction storage area RD31 is grasped (step S4809). As already explained, the 31st reproduction storage area RD31 is an area where the history configuration data generated based on the selection of the item "Generation of history image midway" is set.

Thereafter, display data for displaying the history image G23 on the image display device 63 is generated based on the history configuration data grasped in step S4809 (step S4810). Then, the generated display data is set in the display setting area 113 (step S4811). As a result, the history image G23 is displayed on the image display device 63. Thereafter, the history image displaying flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4812). This allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the history image G23 is being displayed on the image display device 63. Thereafter, the intermediate generation end flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4813), and this history image processing is ended.

Returning to the description of the selection response process (FIG. 99), if a negative determination is made in step S6015, it is determined whether the value of the cursor position counter in the performance side RAM 94 is "4" (step S6017). . If a negative determination is made in step S6017, the value of the cursor position counter is "5", which means that the item "Close history menu" has been selected on the history menu screen (FIG. 97). This selection process is then terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step 6017, this means that the item "ranking display" has been selected on the history menu screen (FIG. 97), so ranking generation processing is executed (step S6018). In this slot machine 10, when the item "Ranking display" is selected, a ranking screen is displayed in which information on 32 pieces of history configuration data stored in the image playback storage area 94c are arranged in descending order of history points. be done. The ranking screen displays the first wording of each history configuration data, history points, rank, and generation date and time. In the ranking generation process (step S6018), display data for displaying the ranking screen on the image display device 63 is generated.

Thereafter, ranking display start processing is executed (step S6019). In the start process, the display data generated in step S6018 is set in the display setting area 113. As a result, a ranking screen is displayed on the image display device 63. Thereafter, the ranking displaying flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6020), and this selection corresponding processing is ended. As already explained, the ranking displaying flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the ranking screen is being displayed on the image display device 63.

Returning to the explanation of the display operation corresponding processing (FIG. 98), after making a negative determination in step S5906, it is determined whether the ranking display flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5908). . When an affirmative determination is made in step S5908, ranking display processing is executed (step S5909). In the ranking display processing, it is determined whether or not an operation of the center button 64a on the production operation device 64 is detected, and if an operation of the center button 64a is detected, the ranking display on the image display device 63 is ended. Execute the process to do so. Specifically, the display data for displaying the ranking screen set in the display setting area 113 is cleared. As a result, the ranking screen is no longer displayed on the image display device 63. Thereafter, the ranking display flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0". Thereby, it is possible for the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the ranking display has ended.

When a negative determination is made in step S5908, it is determined whether the value of the pop display counter in the performance side RAM 94 is "1" or more (step S5910). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5910, that is, if a pop-up display is being performed on the image display device 63, it is determined whether or not an operation of the lower button 64c on the production operation device 64 is detected. (Step S5911).

If a negative determination is made in step S5910, or if a negative determination is made in step S5911, it is determined whether or not the operation of the center button 64a on the production operation device 64 is detected (step S5912). If an affirmative determination is made in step S5912, processing for displaying the history menu screen (FIG. 97) on the image display device 63 (steps S5913 to S5916) is executed. Moreover, as already explained, even if a negative determination is made in step S6205 of the past history selection process (FIG. 101), the processes of steps S5913 to S5916 are executed.

Specifically, first, the value of the cursor position counter in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S5913). Thereafter, numerical information of "5" is set in the cursor maximum value counter in the performance side RAM 94 (step S5914). As a result, the value of the cursor position counter becomes "5".

Thereafter, a history menu display start process is executed (step S5915). In the start process, display data for displaying the history menu screen on the image display device 63 and display data for displaying the cursor image G38 are read from the production side ROM 93 and set in the display setting area 113. . As a result, the history menu screen and the cursor image G38 are displayed on the image display device 63. Thereafter, the menu displaying flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5916), and this display operation corresponding processing is ended. By setting the menu displaying flag to "1", the production side MPU 92 can grasp that the history menu screen (FIG. 97) is being displayed on the image display device 63.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5911, that is, if the operation of the lower button 64c on the production operation device 64 is detected in a situation where a pop-up display is being performed on the image display device 63 (step S5911: YES), , executes pop-up display termination processing (step S5917). In the termination process, the display data for pop display set in the display setting area 113 is cleared, similar to step S5608 of the game start support process (FIG. 94). As a result, the pop display performed on the image display device 63 ends.

Thereafter, the pop display counter in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S5918), and the process proceeds to step S6008 of the selection correspondence process (FIG. 99), and the processes of steps S6008 to S6012 are executed. As already explained, if the displayable flag in the playback storage area RDn (n is an integer from 0 to 31) in which the latest history configuration data is stored is set to "1" (step S6009: If YES), the history image G23 corresponding to the latest history configuration data is displayed on the image display device 63. As already explained, the clearing process of the displayable flag (step S5715 of the history image management process (FIG. 95)) is performed after the production side MPU 92 receives the game start command after the last operation of the start lever 41. This is carried out when 10 minutes have elapsed and the player is expected to leave his/her seat. Therefore, after the lower button 64c is operated while a pop-up display is being performed on the image display device 63, the latest history configuration data is The displayable flag in the stored playback storage area RDn (n is an integer from 0 to 31) is never cleared to "0".

In this way, if the lower button 64c is operated while a pop-up display is being performed on the image display device 63, the item "Display latest history image" will be displayed on the history menu screen (FIG. 97). The latest history image G23 can be displayed on the image display device 63 without the selection operation. By simplifying the operation for checking the latest history image G23, the possibility that the history image G23 will be checked is increased.

<About gaming history management>
Next, the management process executed by the main MPU 72 to manage the gaming history and notify the management results will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 102. Note that the management process is executed in step S214 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 12).

When one game is newly executed (step S6301: YES), 1 is added to the value of the total number of games counter 74a provided in the performance side RAM 94 (step S6302). The total number of games counter 74a is a counter for measuring the number of games played regardless of the gaming state and the playing period. The total number of games counter 74a is made up of 3 bytes and can measure the number of games with an upper limit of the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the cube of 256. Further, the value of the total number of games counter 74a is not cleared to "0" unless the clearing process of step S105 is executed in the main process (FIG. 11). Therefore, it is possible to measure the total number of games played in a gaming hall over a plurality of business days.

If one game is newly executed (step S6301: YES) and it is in the advantageous section SC2 (step S6303: YES), not only is the value of the total number of games counter 74a incremented by 1, but also the value of the production side RAM 94 is The value of the advantageous game number counter 74b provided in is incremented by 1 (step S6304). The advantageous game number counter 74b is provided separately from the advantageous continuation counter in the production side RAM 94, and even if the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2 is executed, the advantageous game number counter 74b is not cleared to "0". Therefore, when the advantageous section SC2 occurs multiple times with the normal section SC1 in between, it is possible to measure the total number of games played in the plurality of advantageous sections SC2 using the advantageous game number counter 74b. . The advantageous game number counter 74b consists of 3 bytes and can measure the number of games with an upper limit of the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the cube of 256. Further, the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b is not cleared to "0" unless the clearing process of step S105 is executed in the main process (FIG. 11). Therefore, it is possible to measure the total number of games played in the advantageous section SC2 over a plurality of business days in the gaming hall.

If a negative determination is made in step S6301, if a negative determination is made in step S6303, or if the process in step S6304 is executed, it is determined whether the game history management results are being displayed ( Step S6305). If the game history management results are not being displayed (step S6305: NO), it is determined whether an instruction to display the game history management results has been issued (step S6306). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the front door 12 is opened and the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54 is operated while the operating power of the slot machine 10 is being supplied. As already explained, when the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 is started while operating the reset button 56, the clearing process in step S105 is executed in the main process (FIG. 11). If the reset button 56 is operated in a situation where the game history is being supplied, this means that an instruction to display the game history management results has been issued.

If it is determined that an instruction to display the game history management results has been issued (step S6306: YES), the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b to the value of the total number of games counter 74a is calculated (step S6307). That is, the calculation is performed so that the calculation result="value of advantageous game number counter 74b"/"value of total number of games counter 74a".

Thereafter, display start processing is executed (step S6308). In the display start process, the display of the calculation result in step S6307 on the ratio display 85 (FIG. 9) is started. In this case, the identifier "7U." indicating that the value displayed on the ratio display section 87 is the advantageous section stay ratio is displayed on the identifier display section 86. Specifically, "7" is displayed on the left 7-segment display 86a of the identifier display section 86, "U" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 86b of the identifier display section 86, and the auxiliary display for the identifier is The display of the identifier display section 86 is controlled so that the section 86c lights up. Further, of the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result in step S6307 by 100, the tens digit is displayed on the left 7-segment display 87a in the ratio display section 87, and the 1's digit is displayed on the right 7-segment display 87b. The display of the ratio display section 87 is controlled as follows. The above calculation result is reported as a percentage. Specifically, if the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "35", "3" is displayed on the left 7-segment display 87a of the ratio display section 87, and "3" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 87b. 5" is displayed.

However, in the case of display using only the two 7-segment displays 87a and 87b in the ratio display section 87, the display on the ratio display section 87 will be different depending on whether the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "100" or "0". The contents will be the same. Therefore, when the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "100", "0" is not only displayed on each of the left 7 segment display 87a and the right 7 segment display 87b in the ratio display section 87. When the auxiliary display section 87c is turned on and the value obtained by multiplying the above calculation result by 100 is "0", the left 7-segment display 87a and the right 7-segment display 87b in the ratio display section 87 are displayed. Not only "0" is displayed, but the auxiliary display section 87c is also turned off.

On the other hand, when the game history management results are displayed (step S6305: YES), the start detection sensor 41a, the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, the credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a, and the payment detection sensor 51a It is determined whether an ON signal is received from any one of them (step S6309). When an ON signal indicating that the start lever 41 is being pressed is received from the start detection sensor 41a, an ON signal indicating that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is being pressed is received from any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44. If an ON signal indicating that medals have been inserted is received from the detection sensors 42a to 44a, and if an ON signal indicating that medals have been inserted is received from the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, one of the credit input buttons 47 to 49 is pressed. If an ON signal indicating that the credit insertion detection sensor 47a to 49a has received an ON signal indicating that the payment button 51 has been pressed, or if an ON signal indicating that the payment button 51 has been pressed is received from the payment detection sensor 51a, step An affirmative determination is made in S6309. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S6309 regardless of whether each ON signal is generated during the valid period.

That is, an affirmative determination is made in step S6309 regardless of whether the reception of the ON signal from the start detection sensor 41a triggers the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Further, an affirmative determination is made in step S6309 regardless of whether the reception of the ON signal from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a triggers the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop. Furthermore, an affirmative determination is made in step S6309 regardless of whether the reception of the ON signal from the inserted medal detection sensor 45a is subject to bet setting or credit increase. Furthermore, an affirmative determination is made in step S6309 regardless of whether or not the reception of ON signals from the credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a is subject to bet setting. Further, an affirmative determination is made in step S6309 regardless of whether the reception of the ON signal from the payment detection sensor 51a triggers the payment of the credited virtual medals.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S6309, display end processing is executed (step S6310). In the display end process, the display of the calculation result on the ratio display 85 is ended.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In the normal game state ST1, a plurality of effects are executed in parallel based on the occurrence of the first to sixth opportunities during one game. The number of combinations of the plurality of effects is enormous, and if the effect tables corresponding to all the combinations of the plurality of effects are stored in advance in the effect side ROM 93, the effects for storing the effect table can be stored in advance. The storage capacity of the side ROM 93 increases. On the other hand, when the first composite effect table and the second composite effect table are not generated, various effect tables for executing various effects are individually stored in different layers LYn (n is any number from 0 to 11) of the readout area 94a. (an integer), and various effects are executed in parallel according to the various effect tables. In addition, when the first composite effect table or the second composite effect table is generated, the normal base effect executed according to the normal base effect table read out to the 0th layer LY0, and the normal base effect table read out to the first layer LY1. The execution is performed according to the first composite effect table or the second composite effect table. Thereby, it is possible to increase the variation of combinations of executable performances while suppressing an increase in the storage capacity of the performance side ROM 93 for storing the performance table.

When the first composite effect table is generated, the symbol variation effect table, the effective notification effect table, the left stop effect table, the right stop effect table, the reach notification effect table, the middle stop effect table, the first expected effect table, and the second expected effect table. The performance data of the performance table is read into one layer LYn (specifically, the first layer LY1). In addition, when the second composite effect table is generated, the symbol variation effect table, the effective notification effect table, the left stop effect table, the right stop effect table, the long press notification effect table, the middle stop effect table, the first expected effect table, The performance data of the second expected performance table and the re-variation performance table are read out to one layer LYn (specifically, the first layer LY1). As a result, the maximum number of effect tables read out in one game is reduced, and the number of layers LYn in the readout area 94a is reduced.

There is only one type of first synthesis table stored in the production side ROM 93, and the first synthesis effect table converts the production data set in each production table to be executed in each game into the one type. It is created by setting it in the first synthesis table. Further, there is only one type of second synthesis table stored in the production side ROM 93, and the second synthesis production table stores the production data set in each production table that is an execution target in each game. It is created by setting the type in the second synthesis table. Since the number of types of the first composition table and the second composition table that are stored in advance in the production side ROM 93 in order to generate the first composition production table and the second composition production table is one type each, the composition table It is possible to reduce the storage capacity in the performance side ROM 93 for storing.

The normal base effect table for executing the normal base effect is read out to the 0th layer LY0, which is different from the first layer LY1 from which the first combined effect table or the second combined effect table is read. Therefore, even if the pointer information of the reference object in the first layer LY1 jumps, the pointer information of the reference object in the 0th layer LY0 is not affected. This makes it possible to start various performances in response to the occurrence of the first to sixth triggers while continuously displaying the background image G4 and outputting the regular bass music in the regular bass performance. It has become.

By having a configuration that generates a second composite effect table by combining five types of first expected effect tables and five types of second expected effect tables stored in the effect side ROM 93, all combinations (specific Compared to a configuration in which performance tables corresponding to 25 types of performance tables are stored in advance, the first expected performance is It is possible to increase the variations of combinations of the second expected performance and the second expected performance.

The second expected performance starts based on the condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs. be done. If the configuration is such that the second expected effect is started only when the sixth opportunity occurs, if the sixth opportunity occurs while the middle stop effect is being executed, the second expected effect will start before the first expected effect. It will be done. In a configuration in which the expectation level of a bonus win is reported in the first expected performance and the expectation level of a BB win when a bonus win occurs in the second expected performance, the first expected performance and the second expected performance are If the order is reversed, there is a risk of confusion for the players. On the other hand, based on the fact that both the condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs, By having a configuration in which the second expected performance is started, it is possible to execute the first expected performance and the second expected performance in the order of the first expected performance → the second expected performance, and the first expected performance and the second expected performance are This prevents the order of the second expected performance from being reversed.

In the case where the period from the ON operation to the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop is short, and the sixth trigger occurs at a timing before the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period. Even if there is, a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) can be secured as the execution period of the first expected performance. This can prevent the execution period of the first expected performance from becoming so short that the contents of the first expected performance cannot be understood.

The period from the ON operation to the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop is long, and at the timing after the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) 6 trigger occurs, the second expected performance can be started without any delay based on the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's sense of participation by associating the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop with the start of the second expected presentation in a manner that is easy for the player to understand. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The configuration is such that while ensuring the execution period of the first expected performance for a predetermined period (specifically, one second), the second expected performance is started without delay when the sixth trigger occurs. By doing so, it is possible to make the player feel that the second expected performance has started, triggered by the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop. Therefore, after long-pressing the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the third stop, the player performs the OFF operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 while expecting the second expected effect to occur. Become. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In a game in which a second expected performance is performed, the first composite performance table or the second composite performance table includes performance data for executing the first expected performance and performance data for executing the second expected performance. is generated, and the first composite effect table or the second composite effect table is read out to one layer (specifically, the first layer LY1). If the configuration is such that the first expected performance table and the second expected performance table are read out to different layers LYn, when the second expected performance table is read out based on the occurrence of the sixth trigger, the execution period of the first expected performance is predetermined. It becomes necessary to provide a configuration for the production side MPU 92 to grasp whether or not the period (specifically, 1 second) has been reached. On the other hand, a first composite performance table or a second composite performance table including performance data for executing the first expected performance and performance data for executing the second expected performance is placed in the first layer LY1. By having a configuration in which the execution period of the first expected performance has reached a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second), the configuration for the performance side MPU 92 to grasp whether or not is not included. Starting the second expected performance when both the condition that the execution period of the first expected performance reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs are satisfied. I can do it. This makes it possible to simplify the configuration for securing a predetermined period (specifically, one second) as the execution period of the first expected performance.

When both the condition that the execution period of the first expected effect reaches a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs, the display for the second expected effect is The data is set in the fourth effect area 113e of the display setting area 113. In this case, if display data for the first expected performance remains in the fourth performance area 113e, the display data is deleted and display data for the second expected performance is set. In the display setting area 113, the area where the display data for the second expected performance is set is the same area as the area where the display data for the first expected performance is set (fourth performance area 113e). By being set, it is possible to start the second expected performance without requiring the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the progress status of the first expected performance.

The layer LYn from which the mid-stop effect table is read out in the reading area 94a changes depending on the presence or absence of the reach notification effect. In addition, the effect table including the effect data of the symbol variation effect table, the effect table including the effect data of the left stop effect table, the effect table including the effect data of the right stop effect table, the effect data of the reach notification effect table. A layer LYn (from which a production table containing production data of the long-press notification production table, a production table containing production data of the mid-stop production table, and a production table containing production data of the first expected production table) are read out. (n is an integer from 0 to 11) varies depending on whether the first composite effect table and the second composite effect table are generated. In these effect tables, setting destination information of the display data is set in correspondence with address information of the display data. As a result, even if the reading destination of these effect tables changes, it is possible to prevent the setting destination of the display data in the display setting area 113 from changing, and also to prevent the setting destination of the display data from changing. It is possible to prevent the context of the image from changing.

A blank area in which no performance data is set is provided at the beginning of the first expected performance table, and a performance execution in which performance data for performing the first expected performance is set after the blank area. An area is provided. As a result, in a game where the second expected performance is not executed, the middle stop performance table and the first expected performance table are read out based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity, and the first expected performance is performed while the middle stop performance is being executed. It is possible to prevent this from happening. In a game in which the second expected performance is executed, the performance execution area excluding the blank area of the first expected performance table is set in the first composite performance table or the second composite performance table. This makes it possible to start the first expected performance without causing a delay at the end timing of the intermediate stop performance.

The main side MPU 72 does not set numerical information to the freeze counter in the main side RAM 74 at the start of the additional main effect and the additional sub effect. A player who is in a hurry in a situation such as the end of business hours is approaching, can start the next game by operating a start lever 41 in the middle of an additional main performance and an additional sub performance. If the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command while the additional main performance and additional sub performance are being executed, the additional main performance that was being executed ends and the base performance for ART is started based on the reception of the game start command. And the normal performance for ART is started. Further, the gauge increase display in the additional sub performance is switched from high speed display to low speed display, and the display of the additional sub performance is continued. As a result, it is possible to check not only the result of the additional winning but also the additional sub-performance corresponding to the additional winning, and based on the reception of the game start command, the ART base performance and the ART normal performance can be started. After the base performance for ART and the normal performance for ART are started based on the operation of the start lever 41, the additional sub-performance is continuously executed in parallel with these performances, thereby omitting the additional main performance. Even for players who are in a hurry, the entire additional sub effects can be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The number of additional games is suggested by the video display of the additional main effect being executed to the end without ending midway. When the gauge increase display is performed with the top-up main effect being executed to the end and the number of top-up games being suggested, the gauge increase display is displayed at high speed. As a result, the execution period of the gauge increase display that is performed after the number of additional games is suggested can be shortened, and the player's attention can be quickly shifted to the next game. On the other hand, the gauge increase display that is performed when the video display of the additional main performance ends midway without being executed to the end becomes a low-speed display. If the gauge increase display is started without any indication of the number of additional games, the player may change the number and color update mode of the unit gauge images G22 displayed in the gauge display section G19a to "100" for the number of additional games. You will look at the gauge increase display, hoping for a corresponding mode. By switching the gauge increase display from a high-speed display to a low-speed display, it is possible to extend the display period of the gauge increase display, which is of high interest, and to improve the interest of the game.

If the performance side MPU 92 receives an additional command during ART in a situation where an additional sub-performance is being executed, the additional sub-performance that was being executed ends and a new additional main performance based on the reception of the additional command during ART is started. And additional sub effects are started. If the configuration is such that the start of the additional main performance and additional sub-performance based on the reception of the additional command during ART is waited until the additional sub-performance that is being executed ends, the additional main performance will be executed after receiving the additional command during ART. Also, there is a delay before starting the additional sub effects. With this configuration, if additional wins occur consecutively and delays are accumulated, a situation will arise in which the additional main performance and additional sub performance corresponding to the additional wins cannot be started during the game in which the additional wins occur. There is a risk. In contrast, in this embodiment, the additional main effect and the additional sub effect are started without delay based on the reception of the additional command during ART. As a result, even if additional wins occur consecutively, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the additional main performance and additional sub performance corresponding to the additional wins cannot be started during the game in which the additional wins occur. I can do it.

In the case where the performance side MPU 92 receives the top-up command during ART in a situation where the top-up sub-performance is being executed, the top-up sub-performance is the sum of the top-up wins that have occurred consecutively before the current top-up win. The game is played in a manner corresponding to the number of additional games. Therefore, when an add-on command is received during ART, the gauge display section G19a is in a state where the unit gauge image G22 of the final number and color of the added sub-effect that has been executed is blinking. As a result, it is possible to provide continuity to the additional sub effects, and to create a special feeling that the additional winnings have occurred consecutively. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, the final state of the additional sub-performance can be displayed to the player who was watching the additional sub-performance that was being executed. In this way, based on the reception of the additional command during ART, the additional sub-effects that are being executed are terminated and the additional main effects and additional sub-effects are started, without causing any delay. The final state of the additional sub-performance can be displayed to the player who was watching the additional sub-performance.

If additional winnings occur consecutively in a manner where the additional sub effects are not interrupted, instead of the address information of the display data set in the additional sub effect table, the consecutive winnings before the current additional winning will be displayed. The address information of the display data for displaying the gauge blinking and increasing the gauge in a manner corresponding to the total number of additional games of additional winnings that have occurred is set. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the number of additional sub-performance tables stored in advance in the performance-side ROM 93, and the storage capacity of the performance-side ROM 93 for storing the additional sub-performance tables can be reduced.

If additional winnings do not occur consecutively, the number of consecutive games image G18 displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is updated at the end of the additional sub-performance. By making it impossible to grasp the number of additional games based on the continuous game number image G18 until the additional sub-effect ends, the additional main effect indicating the number of additional games and the additional sub-effect indicating the number of additional games can be changed. It can increase interest.

When additional winnings occur consecutively in a manner in which the additional sub-performances are not interrupted, the display of the number of consecutive games is updated at the end of the additional sub-performance of the last additional winning in the continuously occurring additional winnings. By not updating the number of consecutive games image G18 until the last top-up winning sub-performance is finished, interest in the top-up main performance indicating the number of top-up games and the top-up sub-performance indicating the number of top-up games can be increased. In addition, by setting the number of additional games added at one time to the display counter 134 in the performance side RAM 94 to a large value, the impression is that the number of consecutive games in the ART state ST6 has increased greatly due to consecutive additional winnings. can be given.

In the ART state ST6, an ART base performance, an ART normal performance, an additional main performance, and an additional sub performance are executed. There are multiple types of each of these performances, and the number of combinations of these performances is enormous. These effects are such that the ART base effect table, ART normal effect table, additional main effect table, and additional sub effect table are read out to different layers LYn (0th layer LY0 to 3rd layer LY3) in the readout area 94a. , the performance execution control is executed by the performance side MPU 92 according to these performance tables. As a result, compared to a configuration in which production tables for all combinations of these productions are stored in advance in the production side ROM 93, the increase in the data capacity of the production table stored in the production side ROM 93 in advance can be suppressed. It is possible to increase the variation of combinations of these effects. In addition, in a situation where the base performance for ART and the normal performance for ART are being executed, the performance side MPU 92 continues the base performance for ART and the normal performance for ART that are being executed based on the reception of the ART mid-addition command. However, the process for starting the additional main performance and additional sub performance is simplified.

There are four types of top-up main effect tables that are read when a top-up winning with the number of top-up games being "50" occurs, as well as two types of top-up sub effect tables (high-speed first top-up sub-effect table and low-speed first There are two types (with an additional sub-production table). In addition, there are four types of additional main effect tables that are read when an additional winning with the number of additional games of "100" occurs, and two types of additional sub effect tables (high speed second additional sub effect table and low speed second additional effect table). There are two types (the second additional sub-effect table). An additional main effect table and an additional sub effect table are stored in the effect side ROM 93, and the additional main effect and the additional sub effect table are stored in the effect side ROM 93, and the additional main effect and the additional sub effect table are read out to different layers LYn (n=2, 3) of the readout area 94a. Due to the configuration in which the performance is executed, one performance table including performance data for executing the additional main performance and performance data for executing the additional sub performance is stored in the performance side ROM 93. Compared to the configuration, the storage capacity of the performance side ROM 93 for storing the performance table for executing the additional main performance and the additional sub performance is reduced.

If a bonus win occurs in the accessory error state or correction operation standby state, the accessory error state or correction is performed based on the fact that the production side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that the bonus win has been established is set. The operation standby state is canceled and the correction operation of the accessory 75 is started. The correction operation of the accessory 75 is started before the bonus start performance. Further, the time required for the correction operation of the accessory 75 is shorter than the execution period of the bonus start effect. Therefore, the first game in the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) is started in a situation where the accessory error state and the correction operation standby state are canceled and the spherical effect section 77b is staying at the origin. be able to. Even if a bonus win occurs in the accessory error state or the correction action standby state, the accessory action performance is canceled by making it possible to execute the accessory action performance from the first game played after the start of the bonus state. By reducing the frequency, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The accessory error state and the correction operation standby state are canceled based on the production side MPU 92 receiving a winning command in which information indicating that a bonus winning has been established is set. The event in which the performance side MPU 92 receives the winning command is an event that occurs regardless of the presence or absence of the bonus announcement performance and the presence or absence of the re-variation performance. Therefore, when a bonus win is achieved, the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state is canceled and the correction operation of the accessory 75 is executed, regardless of the presence or absence of the bonus announcement performance and the presence or absence of the re-variation performance. I can do it.

The accessory error state or the correction operation standby state is canceled when the production side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus winning has been established is set. Even if a bonus win occurs in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14), the state does not shift to the bonus state until the bonus win is established. If the configuration is such that the performance-side MPU 92 cancels the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state when the production side MPU 92 receives a game start command in which information indicating that a bonus win has occurred is set, the accessory error state or correction operation is canceled. In the origin detection performed from the time the standby state is released until the bonus winning is established, it is determined that the spherical effect section 77b is not staying at the origin, and the value of the correction execution counter 141 increases before shifting to the bonus state. There may be cases where this occurs. In this case, there is an increased possibility that the correction operation standby state will be set in the middle of the bonus state. On the other hand, since the configuration is such that the performance side MPU 92 releases the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state when the presentation side MPU 92 receives the winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus winning has been established is set, the bonus No origin detection is performed before transitioning to the state. Therefore, the value of the correction execution counter 141 does not increase before shifting to the bonus state, and the possibility that the correction operation standby state is set in the middle of the bonus state is reduced.

A configuration in which the performance-side MPU 92 releases the accessory error state or the correction action standby state and executes the motion performance of the accessory 75 based on the presentation-side MPU 92 receiving a game start command in which information indicating that a bonus win has occurred is set. In this case, although it is possible to end the correction operation before the start of the bonus start effect, even if the bonus announcement effect is not won in a game where a bonus win has occurred, the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state will be canceled. Since the correction operation of the accessory 75 is performed, the player will be aware of the occurrence of a bonus win based on the fact that the correction operation has been performed. In response, based on the presentation side MPU 92 receiving a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus win has been established, the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state is canceled and the accessory 75 is corrected. By having a configuration that executes the action, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing that a bonus win has occurred based on the correction action of the accessory 75, and to prevent the player from knowing that a bonus win has occurred based on the correction action of the accessory 75. It is possible to start the object action performance.

In a configuration in which an opportunity to start the accessory action performance occurs during the execution of the bonus announcement performance, the performance-side MPU 92 receives a winning result command corresponding to the establishment of a bonus prize, and enters the accessory error state or the correction action standby state. By configuring the system to release the function, it is possible to start the accessory action performance while the bonus announcement performance is being executed, and it is also possible to release the accessory error state or the correction action standby state at the timing of the bonus winning. It can be done.

If it is determined in the origin detection of the accessory 75 that the spherical effect part 77b is not staying at the origin, the accessory 75 is set to the correction operation standby state and the accessory error state, provided that the conditions for setting it to the accessory error state are not met. This correction operation is performed so that the spherical effect section 77b returns to its origin. Compared to a configuration in which the spherical production section 77b is immediately set to the correction operation standby state or accessory error state when it is determined that it is not staying at the origin, the frequency of maintenance by the game hall manager is reduced. It is possible to reduce the burden on the administrator.

Even if the spherical effect part 77b does not return to the origin during the correction operation of the accessory 75, the correction operation standby state and accessory error state do not occur. In this case, in the next origin detection, it is again determined that the spherical effect section 77b is not staying at the origin. Compared to a configuration in which when the spherical production section 77b does not return to the origin during the correction operation of the accessory 75, it is immediately set to the correction operation standby state or the accessory error state, the frequency at which the accessory error state occurs is reduced. Therefore, the frequency of maintenance by the game hall manager can be reduced.

If it is determined that the spherical effect part 77b of the accessory 75 is not staying at the origin in the origin detection performed in a situation where the value of the correction execution counter 141 is "3", the origin detection and correction operation are not executed. Set to correction operation standby state. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation where correction operations are performed frequently, and to improve the safety of the performance of the accessory motion.

In the correction operation standby state, if a predetermined period (specifically 5 minutes) has elapsed since the start of the correction operation standby state, the number of games played since the start of the correction action standby state has reached the predetermined number. When the number of times (specifically, 30 times) has been reached, when the production side MPU 92 receives an accessory initialization command from the main side MPU 72, or when the production side MPU 92 receives information indicating that a bonus winning has been established from the main side MPU 72. will be canceled if a winning result command with which is set is received. By configuring that the correction operation standby state is canceled without maintenance performed by the administrator of the game hall after the correction operation standby state is entered, and the correction operation of the accessory 75 is returned to the executable state, the game hall The frequency of maintenance by administrators can be reduced. Thereby, the management burden on the administrator can be reduced.

If it is determined that the spherical effect part 77b of the accessory 75 is not staying at the origin in the origin detection performed in a situation where the values of the standby execution counter 142 and the correction execution counter 141 are "3", an accessory error occurs. set to state. Thereby, it is possible to notify the game hall manager that the positional shift of the spherical effect section 77b has occurred so frequently that the value of the standby execution counter 142 reaches "4". Further, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a state requiring maintenance by an administrator continues for a long time.

Detection of the origin of the accessory 75 is performed when the production side MPU 92 receives a game start command. Since the origin is detected in response to a frequently occurring event, it can be detected quickly if the spherical effect part 77b does not stay at the origin in a situation where the drive control of the accessory 75 is not being executed. It becomes possible to return the spherical effect portion 77b to the origin. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the accessory motion performance will be canceled due to the spherical performance section 77b not staying at the origin.

If the spherical effect part 77b is not staying at the origin at the timing of detecting the origin of the accessory 75, priority is given to correcting the accessory 75 and returning the spherical effect part 77b to the origin. Execution of the accessory motion effect is prohibited until the next game after the game in which the correction motion was performed is started. Thereby, it is possible to quickly create a state in which the spherical effect section 77b stays at the origin. In addition, the accessory motion performance is started between the time the spherical performance section 77b returns to the origin due to the correction operation of the accessory 75 and the start of the next game after the game in which the correction operation has been performed. When it is time to detect the origin of the accessory 75, it is possible to prevent the spherical effect section 77b from not staying at the origin again.

When an opportunity to generate history configuration data occurs, the history configuration data is generated based on the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b. The history configuration data is stored in the image playback storage area 94c, and when an opportunity to display the history image G23 occurs, the history image G23 is displayed based on the history configuration data stored in the image playback storage area 94c. is generated. Then, one frame of history image data for displaying the history image G23 on the image display device 63 is generated based on the display data of the history image G23. By storing the history configuration data and generating one frame of history image data based on the history configuration data each time the history image G23 is displayed, the history image data itself can be stored. Compared to the configuration in which the past history images G23 can be displayed, the storage capacity in the performance-side RAM 94 can be reduced. Further, the configuration is such that the game history data used to generate the history configuration data is stored, and one frame of history image data is generated based on the game history data each time an opportunity to display the history image G23 occurs. Compared to this, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity in the performance side RAM 94 for displaying the past history image G23, and it is also possible to reduce the processing load for displaying the past history image G23.

In the first to third selection condition tables, if there are multiple word specification data that satisfy the selection conditions and have the same display priority, select the display target from among the plurality of word specification data. A word designation data lottery process (step S5211 of the word selection process (FIG. 88)) for selecting one word designation data is executed. By having the configuration in which word designation data to be displayed is selected by lottery, it is possible to avoid a situation where the content of the history image G23 can be predicted before the history image G23 is displayed on the image display device 63. This is intended to increase the interest of the game.

The history image G23 is provided with a character image range 154 in which a character image G28 corresponding to the first wording image G25 displayed in the first heading range 151 is displayed. By displaying the character image G28 corresponding to the game history, it is possible to display the history image G23 having a configuration that makes it easy to remember the contents of performances performed in the past.

If an opportunity to generate history configuration data occurs after the ending performance of advantageous section SC2 is performed, the ending image G29 is always included in the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data. Therefore, even if the player does not leave a record of the ending performance with a camera or the like during the execution of the ending performance in the advantageous section SC2, the player can display the history image later and check the record of the ending performance. This makes it possible to thoroughly show the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 to the player.

If a plurality of word specification data are set in candidate areas 171 to 173 as candidates for word specification data set in the first to third selection areas 165 to 167, the previous word specification data among the plurality of word specification data The first word specification data is different from the word specification data included in the history configuration data generated and stored in the reproduction storage area RDn (n is an integer from 0 to 31) of the image reproduction storage area 94c. ~Third selection areas 165-167 are set preferentially. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the contents of the history configuration data that are continuously generated will be duplicated, and to improve the interest of the game.

Using one of the plate lottery tables PA1 to PA6, PB1 to PB6, and PD1 to PD6 corresponding to the combination of the total number of games executed after the previous ART state ST6 ended and the current setting value of the slot machine 10. A plate lottery is performed, and background plate image designation data corresponding to the background plate image G24 suggesting a set value is set in the history configuration data. Thereby, it becomes possible to predict the current set value based on the type of the background plate image G24 included in the history image G23, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When the item "Generation of history image midway" is selected on the history menu screen, history configuration data is generated based on the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b at the selected timing. Thereby, it is possible to select "generation of history image midway" at any timing and display the history image based on the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b up to the relevant timing. For example, when it is desired to display a history image without waiting for the end of the ART state ST6, such as near the end of business hours, it becomes possible to display a history image based on the game history data up to that point.

When history configuration data is generated based on the selection of the item "Generation of history image midway", the history configuration data includes background plate image specification data that specifies the background plate image G24 that suggests the setting value. is not set. Therefore, the intermediately generated history image G23 does not include the background plate image G24 that suggests the setting value. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the user from getting an idea of the current setting value by repeatedly selecting "Generation of history image midway" and checking the type of background plate image G24 many times at short intervals.

The gaming history data stored in the 0th to 5th history storage areas RA0 to PA5 and the 7th to 15th history storage areas RA7 to RA15 in the history storage area 94b is triggered by the end of the ART state ST6. Cleared when history configuration data is generated as . Thereby, the history configuration data can be generated based on the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b from the end of the previous ART state ST6 until the end of the current ART state ST6.

Even if the player does not perform any operation to generate history configuration data, the number of game media awarded after transitioning to ART state ST6 is set to a predetermined number (specifically, "1000", "2000", or 3000), history configuration data is generated. If the configuration is such that when the player does not perform an operation to generate history configuration data, the opportunity for generation of history configuration data occurs only at the end of ART state ST6 and the end of the ending effect in advantageous section SC2, then ART state ST6 As the number of games played increases, the number of game histories that are not reflected in the contents of the history image G23 increases. On the other hand, since the history configuration data is generated every time the number of game media given after the transition to ART state ST6 reaches a predetermined number, the number of games executed in ART state ST6 is If the number increases, the number of history images G23 reflecting the game history in the ART state ST6 can be increased. This makes it possible to confirm past gaming history in detail.

The image reproduction storage area 94c can store a plurality of pieces (specifically, 32 pieces) of history configuration data. The player selects one piece of history composition data from among the history composition data whose displayable flag is set to "1" from among the plurality of history composition data stored in the image playback storage area 94c. A history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data can be displayed on the image display device 63. By enabling confirmation of a plurality of past history images G23, it is possible to confirm a plurality of history images G23 at once without displaying the history image G23 every time history configuration data is generated. . Thereby, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being interrupted in order to check the history image G23.

If the period in which the start lever 41 has not been operated since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal gaming state ST1 reaches 10 minutes, each of the playback storage areas RD0 to RD0 of the image playback storage area 94c Among the displayable flags provided in the RD 31, all displayable flags set to "1" are cleared to "0". As a result, the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data generated so far and stored in the 0th to 31st reproduction storage areas RD0 to RD31 cannot be selected and displayed on the image display device 63. In this way, when a situation occurs where it is predicted that the player will leave the seat, the history configuration data generated before the situation occurs and stored in the 0th to 31st playback storage areas RD0 to RD31. It becomes impossible to select and display the history image G23 corresponding to the image display device 63 on the image display device 63. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the act of estimating the set value by referring to the past history image G23 of a player other than the player himself/herself.

When the player is expected to leave his/her seat, the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data stored up to that point cannot be displayed, but the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data stored up to that point cannot be displayed. The stored history configuration data remains without being deleted. Furthermore, since the image playback storage area 94c is a storage area to which backup power is supplied after the slot machine 10 is powered off, operating power to the production side MPU 92 is reduced when the slot machine 10 is powered off. Even when the supply is stopped, information is stored and retained in the image reproduction storage area 94c. Therefore, when new history configuration data is generated, it is possible to reduce the possibility that word specification data that is the same as word specification data included in these history configuration data will be selected. This makes it possible to increase the possibility that the history image G23 including word images G25 to G27 that have not been seen before will be displayed.

When history configuration data is generated upon completion of ART state ST6, when history configuration data is generated upon completion of the ending effect of advantageous section SC2, or after transition to ART state ST6. When history configuration data is generated when the number of game media given reaches a predetermined number (specifically, "1000," "2000," or "3000"), the image display device 63 displays the latest A pop-up display indicating that the history image G23 of can be displayed is performed. This allows the player to recognize that new history configuration data has been generated, and also prompts the player to perform an operation to display the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data.

If an operation of the lower button 64c on the production operation device 64 is detected in a situation where a pop image is displayed on the image display device 63, the latest history image corresponding to the pop image is displayed directly without going through the history menu screen. G23 can be displayed. By simplifying the operation for displaying the latest history image G23 during pop-up display, the history image G23 corresponding to the history composition data is not displayed even though new history composition data is generated. It is possible to reduce the possibility that there is no such thing.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the content of the effect executed based on the effect that the effect-side MPU 92 receives the add-on command during ART is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

FIG. 103(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 in the ART base effect and the ART normal effect in this embodiment. The performance contents of the ART base performance and the ART normal performance are the same as the performance contents of the ART base performance and the ART normal performance in the first embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the number of consecutive games is displayed in the ART state ST6. In the continuous game number display, as shown in FIG. 103(a), a continuous game number image G18 indicating the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 is displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63. As shown in FIG. 103(a), in this embodiment, the sub-display area 131 (FIG. 57) in the first embodiment is not provided, and the gauge blinking display and gauge increase display are not performed.

In this embodiment, when the effect side MPU 92 receives the ART mid-addition command from the main side MPU 72, an additional effect is performed. FIGS. 103(b) and 103(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 in the additional effect in the ART state ST6. In the additional effect, an additional moving image is displayed on the entire surface of the image display device 63 for a predetermined period (specifically, 4 seconds). In the added video, as shown in FIG. 103(b), the videos of the added character images G20 and G21 are displayed for 3 seconds. The video is a video that suggests the number of additional games. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103(c), an additional game number image G41 is displayed for one second. These additional character images G20, G21 and additional game number image G41 are displayed closer to the screen than the background image G16 and the ART character image G17 (FIG. 103(a)). Therefore, while the added video is being displayed on the image display device 63, the background image G16 and the ART character image G17 are no longer visible. On the other hand, the number of consecutive games image G18 is displayed closer to the screen than the additional character images G20, G21 and the number of additional games image G41, so it is visible even while the additional video is displayed.

Similarly to the first embodiment, the main MPU 72 does not set numerical information to the freeze counter in the main RAM 74 at the start of the additional performance. A player who is in a hurry in a situation such as the end of business hours is approaching, can start the next game by operating the start lever 41 in the middle of an additional performance. If the start lever 41 is operated to start the next game while an additional performance is being executed and the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command, the additional performance that was being executed ends and the received game start command The base performance for ART and the normal performance for ART corresponding to are started. In addition, in parallel with the base performance for ART and the normal performance for ART, a reduced additional performance corresponding to the additional performance that ended midway this time is started. FIGS. 104(a) and 104(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 in the reduction additional effect.

In the reduced added effect, a reduced added video is displayed in the lower right display area 181 provided at the lower right side of the image display device 63, as shown in FIGS. 104(a) and 104(b). The reduced added video of the reduced added performance is obtained by reducing the number of pixels of the image in the corresponding added video of the added performance and reducing the display size. The length (execution period) of the reduced added video is the same as the length (execution period) of the corresponding added video. The reduced added video is played from the continuation of the added video that ended midway.

In the reduced added video display, after the reduced added character images G42 and G43 are displayed in the lower right display area 181 as shown in FIG. 104(a), the reduced added character images G42 and G43 are displayed in one second as shown in FIG. A reduced number of additional games image G44 is displayed over the area. These reduced additional character images G42, G43 and reduced additional game number image G44 are displayed closer to the screen than the background image G16, ART character image G17, and added character images G20, G21.

As shown in FIG. 104(a), when the performance side MPU 92 receives the ART mid-addition command in a situation where the reduction addition performance is being executed, the image display device 63 displays the corresponding An additional performance corresponding to the received ART mid-addition command is started. If the remaining execution period of the reduced additional effect being executed in the lower right display area 181 at the time of receiving the additional command during ART is less than 1 second, that is, the display of the reduced additional game number image G44 has already started. In this case, the reduced additional video continues to be displayed in the lower right display area 181.

On the other hand, if the remaining execution period of the reduced additional effect being executed in the lower right display area 181 at the time of receiving the additional command during ART is longer than 1 second, that is, the reduced additional game number image G44 is displayed in the lower right display area 181. If the display has not started yet, the display of the last one second of the reduced additional video is started in the lower right display area 181. Specifically, display of the reduced number of additional games image G44 is started in the lower right display area 181. As shown in FIG. 104(b), in the lower right display area 181, the reduced added video is displayed closer to the screen than the added character images G20 and G21.

In this way, if the next additional effect is started while the reduced additional effect is being executed, only the result part of the reduced additional effect (reduced number of additional games image G44) is displayed, and the reduced additional effect ends. . Thereby, after the number of additional games in the reduced additional performance is specified, the reduced additional performance can be promptly ended. To increase attention to the additional performance started later by shortening the period during which the reduced additional performance and the additional performance started later than the reduced additional performance are executed in parallel to within 1 second. I can do it.

The display time of the added video is 4 seconds, and the reduced added video is played from the continuation of the corresponding added video. Therefore, when the start lever 41 is operated to start displaying the reduced additional video, the display time of the reduced additional video is less than 4 seconds. As already explained in the first embodiment, from the time when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating in the previous game until the next time the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can start rotating, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, The wait time for the rotation of 32M and 32R to start is 4.1 seconds. Therefore, the number of new games that can be started while the reduced additional effect is being executed is "1" or "0", and the reduced additional effect and the additional effect started after the reduced additional effect are executed in parallel. In the current situation, there is no timing to execute a new additional effect.

If the additional effect is executed to the end, the value of the number of consecutive games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after adding the number of additional games in the additional effect at the end of the additional effect. Ru. In addition, the value of the number of consecutive games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 indicates that the additional performance is switched from the additional performance to the reduced additional performance in the middle of the additional performance, and the new additional performance is displayed during the execution of the reduced additional performance. If the reduced additional performance is executed to the end without starting, at the end of the reduced additional performance, the number of additional games in the reduced additional performance is updated to the value after addition. Furthermore, when multiple top-up wins occur in succession, the value of the number of consecutive games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is the value of the top-up performance or reduced top-up performance that was started with the last top-up win as an opportunity. At the end, the value is updated to the value after addition of the total number of additional games in the consecutive additional winnings. In this embodiment, the case where additional winnings occur continuously is the case where a new additional effect is started while the reduced additional effect is being executed.

Even in a situation where additional winnings occur continuously, the value of the number of consecutive games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is subtracted by 1 each time a game is started. If the value of the number of consecutive games to be displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 becomes "0" or less before the total number of additional games in consecutive additional winnings is added together at the end, “?” is displayed at the upper left side of the image display device 63 instead of the value “0” or less. Therefore, the ART state ST6 will not continue in a state where a value of "0" or less is displayed as the number of consecutive games in the upper left corner of the image display device 63. In a situation where additional wins occur continuously, after the value of the number of consecutive games to be displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 becomes "0" or less, the additional sub effect for the last additional win ends. In this case, the total number of additional games of consecutive additional winnings is added to the value of "0" or less, and the value of the number of consecutive games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is added to the value of "0" or less. updated to the later value.

Next, the configurations of the performance side ROM 93 and performance side RAM 94 for executing various performances in the ART state ST6 will be explained. FIG. 105(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the production side ROM93, and FIG. 105(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the production side RAM94.

As shown in FIG. 105(a), the production side ROM 93 includes an additional production table in addition to the ART base production table storage area 133a and the ART normal production table storage area 133b already explained in the first embodiment. A storage area 133h and a reduced additional effect table storage area 133i are provided. As in the first embodiment, there are ``50'' and ``100'' as the number of additional games in the additional winning that occurs in the ART state ST6. There are eight types of additional effects executed in the ART state ST6, and the additional effect table storage area 133h of the effect side ROM 93 stores four types of additional effects for executing the additional effects corresponding to the number of additional games of "50". An additional effect table and four types of additional effect tables for executing an additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games of "100" are stored. In addition, the reduced additional effect table storage area 133i of the effect side ROM 93 contains 8 types of reduced additional effects for executing 8 types of reduced additional effects corresponding to these 8 types of additional effects. A reduced additional effect table is stored.

In the additional effect table, a plurality of pieces of numerical information are arranged in serial numbers as pointer information, and various effect data are set for the pointer information. The overlay effect table includes address information and setting destination information of display data for displaying the overlay video on the image display device 63, and sound output control of the speaker 62 so that sound corresponding to the overlay video is output. The sound data and sound data for doing this are set. As the setting destination information of the display data for the additional effect, information indicating the third effect area 113d of the display setting area 113 is set. The additional effect table is read out to the second layer LY2 in the readout area 94a.

The same pointer information (numerical information) as the pointer information (numerical information of serial numbers) set in the corresponding additional effect table is set in the reduced additional effect table, and the pointer information (numerical information) that is the same as the pointer information (numerical information of serial numbers) is set in the reduced additional effect table. Data is set. Address information and setting destination information of display data for displaying a reduced additional video in the lower right display area 181 of the image display device 63 and sound corresponding to the reduced video are output to the reduced additional effect table. Sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 is set as follows. As the setting destination information of the display data for the reduced additional effect, information indicating the fourth effect area 113e of the display setting area 113 is set. The reduced additional effect table is read out to the third layer LY3 in the readout area 94a.

In this way, in the readout area 94a, the additional effect table and the reduced additional effect table are read out to different layers LYn (n=2, 3), so that the effect can be improved in a situation where the reduced additional effect is being executed. When the side MPU 92 receives a new addition command during ART, it is possible to start a new addition effect based on the reception of the addition command during ART while continuing the reduced addition effect that is currently being executed. There is.

If an additional effect based on the additional effect table ends midway and a reduced additional effect based on the corresponding reduced additional effect table is started, the pointer information of the additional effect table that was being executed is changed to the pointer information of the reduced additional effect table. Taken over. Further, the frame number information of the display data for the additional effect that was being executed is taken over as the frame number information of the display data for the reduced additional effect. Thereby, it becomes possible to start the reduced additional performance from the continuation of the additional performance that was being executed.

As shown in FIG. 105(b), in addition to the display counter 134 already explained in the first embodiment, the performance side RAM 94 is provided with a total number of additional games counter 182 and an additional performance type counter 183. It is being The total number of additional games counter 182 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the number of additional games that are waiting to be added to the display counter 134. When additional wins occur consecutively, the total number of additional games that occur consecutively is set in the total number of additional games counter 182. The additional performance type counter 183 is a counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the type of additional performance that is being executed. The additional performance type counter 183 is set with numerical information from "1" to "8" depending on the type of additional performance to be executed.

Next, a processing configuration in the performance side MPU 92 for executing various performances in the ART state ST6 will be explained. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the game start process during ART executed by the production side MPU 92. Note that the game start process during ART is executed in step S3015 of the non-normal performance control process (FIG. 62) when a game start command is received from the main MPU 72 in the ART state ST6.

In the game start process during ART, it is first determined whether or not the additional presentation flag provided in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6401). The additional performance flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the additional performance is being executed.

If the flag during additional production is set to "1" (step S6401: YES), progress information storage processing is executed (step S6402). In the progress information storage process, the value of the pointer counter PC2 of the second layer LY2 from which the additional effect table has been read is set in the pointer storage counter provided in the effect side RAM 94. The pointer storage counter is a counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the pointer information of the additional performance table at the timing of switching from the additional performance to the reduced additional performance. Further, in the progress information storage process (step S6402), the frame number information of the display data for the additional effect set in the third effect area 113d of the display setting area 113 is set in the frame number storage counter. The frame number storage counter is a counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the frame number information of the display data for the additional performance at the timing of switching from the additional performance to the reduced additional performance.

Thereafter, processing for ending the additional effect is executed (step S6403). In the process of ending the additional effect, the second layer LY2 of the reading area 94a from which the additional effect table is read is cleared, and the additional effect set in the third effect area 113d of the display setting area 113 is cleared. Clear the display data. As a result, the additional effect being executed on the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 ends.

Thereafter, based on the value of the additional performance type counter 183 in the performance side RAM 94, the type of the additional performance that was completed in step S6403 is grasped (step S6404), and the reduced additional production table corresponding to the grasped type of additional production is determined. is read out from the reduced additional effect table storage area 133i of the effect side ROM 93 to the reading area 94a (step S6405). As already explained, the reduced additional effect table is read out to the third layer LY3.

After that, pointer setting processing is executed (step S6406). In the pointer setting process, the pointer information set in the pointer storage counter in the performance side RAM 94 in the progress information storage process (step S6402) is transferred to the pointer counter PC3 of the third layer LY3 from which the reduced additional performance table was read in step S6405. Set to . As a result, the pointer information of the additional performance table in the currently ended additional performance is inherited as the pointer information of the reduced additional performance table in the reduced additional performance started this time.

After that, based on the pointer information set in the pointer counter PC3 of the third layer LY3 in step S6406, the display data set in the reduced additional effect table is specified, and the specified display data is transferred to the display setting area. 113 in the fourth effect area 113e (step S6407). Specifically, in the reduced additional effect table, from the pointer information inherited in the pointer setting process (step S6406), go back in the direction in which the pointer information decreases and grasp the pointer information for which display data is set first. Then, the display data is set in the fourth effect area 113e of the display setting area 113. As a result, the display data for the reduced additional video corresponding to the display data set in the third performance area 113d at the end of the additional performance is set in the fourth performance area 113e.

Thereafter, frame number setting processing is executed (step S6408). In the frame number setting process, the progress information storage process (step S6402) stores the display data in the production side RAM 94 as the display start frame number information for the reduced additional production display data set in the fourth production area 113e in step S6407. Set the frame number information set in the frame number storage counter in . As a result, the display data for the reduced additional video corresponding to the display data set in the third effect area 113d at the end of the additional effect is reduced from the same number of frames as the number of frames at the end of the additional effect. It is possible to start a reduced added video in the added performance. Therefore, it is possible to play the reduced additional video from the continuation of the added video that ended midway.

Thereafter, the additional performance type counter 183 in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S6409), and the additional performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S6410). This makes it possible for the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the additional performance has ended. Then, "1" is set in the reduced additional performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 (step S6411). This makes it possible for the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the reduced additional performance is being executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S6401 or if the process in step S6411 is performed, the process advances to step S6412. In steps S6412 to S6417, the same processes as steps S3204 to S3209 in the game start process during ART (FIG. 63(b)) of the first embodiment are executed to Finish the process.

Next, the performance adjustment process executed by the performance side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 107(a). Note that the effect adjustment process is executed in step S3017 of the non-normal effect control process (FIG. 62) when an ART mid-add command is received from the main MPU 72 in the ART state ST6.

In the production adjustment process, first, it is determined whether or not the flag for reducing additional production in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6501), and if the flag for reducing additional production is set to "1" ( In step S6501: YES), it is determined whether the remaining time of the reduced additional effect is 1 second or less based on the value of the pointer counter PC3 of the third layer LY3 from which the reduced additional effect table has been read. (Step S6502). If an affirmative determination is made in step S6502, it means that the reduced number of additional games image G44 has already started to be displayed in the lower right display area 181 of the image display device 63, so the main effect adjustment process is performed as it is. end.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6502, the pointer adjustment process for the reduced additional effect is executed (step S6503), and the main effect adjustment process is ended. In the pointer adjustment process for the reduced additional effect (step S6503), the value of the pointer counter PC3 is updated so that the last 1 second of the reduced additional effect is executed. Specifically, the pointer information of the reference target in the reduced additional effect table is converted into address information and setting destination information of display data for displaying the reduced additional game number image G44 (FIG. 104(b)) on the image display device 63. The pointer information that is set is updated.

As described above, when the production-side MPU 92 receives the ART mid-addition command during execution of the reduced addition production, the reduced number-of-additional-games image G44 is displayed in the lower right display area 181. Thereby, the result of the reduced additional effect can be shown in an easy-to-understand manner. The display of the reduced number of additional games image G44 ends within one second. As a result, the period during which the reduced additional performance and the additional performance started after the reduced additional performance are executed in parallel is shortened, and the player's attention can be shifted to the additional performance started later. .

Next, the additional production process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 107(b). Note that the additional effect processing is executed in step S3018 of the non-normal effect control process (FIG. 62) when an additional effect command is received during ART.

In the additional production processing, first, the number of additional games is determined based on the information set in the ART additional command received this time, and the determined number of additional games is set in the additional game number counter 135 in the production side RAM 94 ( Step S6601).

Thereafter, an additional effect lottery process is executed (step S6602). In the additional performance lottery process, first, an additional performance lottery table for selecting an additional performance is read from the performance side ROM 93. As already explained, the additional effect table storage area 133h (FIG. 105(a)) of the effect side ROM 93 contains four types of additional effect tables for executing an additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games of "50", and " Four types of additional effect tables for executing additional effects corresponding to the number of additional games of ``100'' are stored. Type information of four types of additional effect tables is set in the first additional effect lottery table, and numerical ranges for determining validity are set for each type of information. Moreover, the type information of four types of additional effect tables is set in the second additional effect lottery table, and the numerical range for determining the validity of each type of information is set. Thereafter, numerical information of a random number counter that is regularly updated in the performance side RAM 94 is read out, and the read numerical information is compared against the read out additional performance lottery table. This specifies the additional effect table to be read this time. Specifically, an additional effect table in which a numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set is specified as a read target.

Thereafter, the additional effect table specified in the additional effect lottery process (step S6602) is read from the additional effect table storage area 133h of the effect side ROM 93 (step S6603). As described above, the additional effect table is read out to the second layer LY2 in the readout area 94a. By controlling the execution of the performance according to the additional performance table, the additional performance is executed on the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. Thereafter, "1" is set to the additional presentation flag in the presentation side RAM 94 (step S6604). This makes it possible for the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the additional performance is being executed.

After that, the information (numerical information of any one of "1" to "8") of the additional effect table that was won in the additional effect lottery process (step S6602) is set in the additional effect type counter 183 in the effect side RAM 94 ( Step S6605). This makes it possible for the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the type of additional performance that is being executed. Thereafter, the game number update standby flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6606), and the main additional performance process is ended. The add-on update standby flag is a flag that allows the effect-side RAM 94 to grasp that the process of adding the number of add-on games to the display counter 134 is in a standby state.

Next, the flag clearing process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 108. Note that the flag clearing process is executed in step S2006 of the pointer update process (FIG. 48) when the reference target pointer information is updated to the final pointer information and repeat information is not set in the final pointer information. be done.

In the flag clearing process, if the value of the target layer counter 114 is "2" (step S6701: YES), it is determined whether the additional production flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6702 ). If an affirmative determination is made in step S6702, it means that the data table that has reached the end timing this time is an additional effect table, so the additional effect in progress flag in the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S6703 ). This allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the additional performance that was being executed has ended.

After making a negative determination in step S6701, if the value of the target layer counter 114 is "3" (step S6704: YES), "1" is set to the reduction addition production flag in the production side RAM 94. It is determined whether there is one (step S6705). If an affirmative determination is made in step S6705, it means that the data table that has reached the end timing this time is a reduced additional effect table, so the reduced additional effect flag is cleared to "0" (step S6706). Thereby, it becomes possible for the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the reduced additional performance that was being executed has ended.

After making a negative determination in step S6704, in steps S6707 and S6708, the same processes as steps S3507 and S3508 in the flag clearing process (FIG. 66(a)) in the first embodiment are executed, This flag clearing process ends.

Next, the process for updating the number of games executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 109. Note that the process for updating the number of games is executed in step S3022 in the non-normal performance control process (FIG. 62).

In the game number update process, it is determined whether the game number update standby flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6801). When an affirmative determination is made in step S6801, it is determined whether or not the additional performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6802). If a negative determination is made in step S6802, it is determined whether or not the reduced additional performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6803).

If the number of games update standby flag is set to "1" (step S6801: YES), and neither the additional performance flag nor the reduced additional performance flag is set to "1" (step S6802: NO, Step S6803: NO) means that all the additional effects and reduced additional effects have been completed while the process of adding the number of additional games to the display counter 134 is on standby, so the image display device Processing (processing from step S6804 to step S6807) for updating the value of the number of consecutive games displayed on the upper left side of 63 to the value after addition of the number of additional games is executed.

Specifically, first, addition processing for the display counter 134 is executed (step S6804). In the addition process, the value of the total number of additional games counter 182 in the performance side RAM 94 is added to the display counter 134. When the additional performance is started in a situation where the reduced additional performance is not being executed and the said additional performance is executed to the end, the total number of additional games counter 182 is set with the number of additional games of the said additional performance. An additional performance is started in a situation where the reduced additional performance is not being executed, and the reduced additional performance is switched to the reduced additional performance corresponding to the reduced additional performance, and the reduced additional performance is continued without starting a new additional performance while the reduced additional performance is being executed. is executed to the end, the total number of additional games counter 182 is set to the number of additional games of the reduced additional effect. If additional wins occur consecutively and the additional effect or reduced additional effect corresponding to the last additional win is executed to the end, the total number of additional games counter 182 shows the total number of additional games of the consecutive additional wins. is set.

Thereafter, a process of updating the display of the number of consecutive games is executed (step S6805). In the process of updating the display of the number of continuous games, the value of the display counter 134 after the addition process is performed in step S6804 is grasped as the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST6, and the value corresponding to the grasped number of continuous games is grasped. Display data for displaying the number of consecutive games image G18 is set in the fifth effect area 113f of the display setting area 113. By controlling the display of the image display device 63 based on the display data, the value of the number of consecutive games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 changes to the value after adding the number of additional games or the total number of additional games. is updated to the value of

Thereafter, the value of the total number of additional games counter 182 is cleared to "0" (step S6806), the number of games update standby flag is cleared to "0" (step S6807), and the main number of games update process is ended.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in either step S6802 or step S6803, the value of the number of consecutive games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after adding the number of additional games. This process for updating the number of games ends without executing the process (processes from step S6804 to step S6807).

As described above, when at least one of the additional performance and the reduced additional performance is executed, the value of the number of consecutive games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is not updated to the value after the addition of the number of additional games. The value of the number of consecutive games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is the value of the number of consecutive games set in the total number of additional games counter 182 when both the additional effect and the reduced additional effect are not executed. The value is updated to the value after adding the number of games or the total number of additional games.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 110, a description will be given of how the additional effect is executed in the ART state ST6. FIG. 110(a) shows the execution period of the additional effect, FIG. 110(b) shows the execution period of the reduced additional effect, and FIG. 110(c) shows the execution period of the reduced additional effect. 110(d) shows the start timing of the base performance for ART and the normal performance for ART, FIG. 110(e) shows the timing for updating the display of the number of consecutive games, FIG. 110(f) shows the timing at which the production side MPU 92 receives the ART add-on command, and FIG. 110(g) shows the timing at which the production side MPU 92 receives the game start command.

First, a case will be described in which the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command during execution of an additional performance.

As shown in FIG. 110(f), at the timing t1 in the ART state ST6, when the production side MPU 92 receives the ART mid-addition command, the additional production is performed at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 110(a). Begins.

After that, at timing t2 when the additional effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 110(g), when the effect side MPU 92 receives a game start command, at the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 110(a). When the additional performance ends, as shown in FIG. 110(b), a reduced additional performance corresponding to the finished additional performance is started. As already explained, the reduced additional performance is started from the continuation of the additional performance that ended this time. Furthermore, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 110(d), the base performance for ART and the normal performance for ART are started based on the game start command received this time, and with the start of a new game. A process of subtracting 1 from the value of the display counter 134 is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 110(e), at the timing t2, the number of consecutive games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after the subtraction of 1.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110(b), the execution period of the reduced additional effect ends at timing t3, and a process of adding the number of additional games in the reduced additional effect that has ended to the display counter 134 is executed. be done. Then, as shown in FIG. 110(e), at the timing t3, the number of consecutive games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after the addition.

Next, a case will be described in which the performance side MPU 92 receives the ART mid-addition command during execution of the reduced addition performance.

At timing t4 when the reduced additional effect is being executed, the effect side MPU 92 receives the ART medium additional effect command, as shown in FIG. 110(f). If the remaining execution period of the reduced additional effect being executed is longer than 1 second, the reduced additional effect table is set so that the last 1 second of the reduced additional effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 110(c). The value of the pointer counter PC3 of the third layer LY3 that is being read is updated. Further, as shown in FIG. 110(a), at the timing t4, an additional performance corresponding to the currently received ART mid-addition command is started.

At timing t5, when one second has elapsed from timing t4, the reduction additional effect ends as shown in FIG. 110(b). As shown in FIG. 110(a), at the timing of t5, the additional effect is being executed, so as shown in FIG. 110(e), the display of the number of consecutive games is not updated at the timing of t5. Not done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110(a), when the additional effect ends at timing t6, the additional effect and the reduced additional effect are not being executed, so that the display counter 134 is continuously displayed. A process of adding up the total number of additional games for additional winnings is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 110(e), at the timing t6, the number of consecutive games displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 63 is updated to the value after the addition.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

If the production-side MPU 92 receives a game start command while executing an additional production, the additional production that was being executed ends, and the ART base production and ART normal production corresponding to the received game start command are executed. A reduced additional performance corresponding to the finished additional performance is started. Thereby, when the start lever 41 is operated to start a new game, the ART base performance and the ART normal performance corresponding to the operation can be started without any delay.

Since the configuration does not set a freeze period that disables the operation of the start lever 41 while the additional performance is being executed, the additional performance can be used for players who want to hurry up in a situation where the end of business hours is approaching. It is possible to start the next game in the middle of the game. In addition, after the base performance for ART and the normal performance for ART are started based on the operation of the start lever 41, the reduced additional performance is executed in parallel with the base performance for ART and the normal performance for ART. Even for a player who skips the performance and rushes ahead, a reduced additional performance of the content corresponding to the additional performance can be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When switching from an additional effect to a reduced additional effect, the reduced additional effect table corresponding to the additional effect that was being executed is read out, and the pointer information of the additional effect table is changed to that of the read reduced additional effect table. Inherited as pointer information. Further, the display data for the reduced additional effect is set in the fourth effect area 113e of the display setting area 113, and the pointer information of the display data for the reduced additional effect is set to the display data for the reduced additional effect. Inherited as pointer information. Thereby, it becomes possible to start the reduced additional performance from the continuation of the additional performance that ended midway, and the switching from the additional performance to the reduced additional performance can be made continuous and easy to understand.

When the performance-side MPU 92 receives an ART mid-addition command during execution of the reduced addition performance, an additional performance corresponding to the ART mid-addition command received this time is started. Thereby, a new additional effect can be started without causing any delay after receiving the additional command during ART. If the remaining display period of the reduced added video at the timing when the added command is received during ART is longer than 1 second, the reference target in the reduced added effect table is changed so that the last 1 second of the reduced added effect is executed. Pointer information is updated. Thereby, after the number of additional games in the reduced additional performance is specified, the reduced additional performance can be promptly ended. To increase attention to the additional performance started later by shortening the period during which the reduced additional performance and the additional performance started later than the reduced additional performance are executed in parallel to within 1 second. I can do it.

In the ART state ST6, ART base performance, ART normal performance, additional performance, and reduced additional performance are executed. There are multiple types of each of these performances, and the number of combinations of these performances is enormous. These effects include a base effect table for ART, a normal effect table for ART, an additional effect table, and a reduced additional effect table that are read out to different layers LYn (0th layer LY0 to third layer LY3) in the readout area 94a. The execution control of the performance is executed by the performance side MPU 92 according to these performance tables. As a result, compared to a configuration in which production tables for all combinations of these productions are stored in advance in the production side ROM 93, the increase in the data capacity of the production table stored in the production side ROM 93 in advance can be suppressed. It is possible to increase the variation of combinations of these effects. In addition, when the production side MPU 92 receives a game start command in a situation where the base production for ART, the normal production for ART, and the additional production are being executed, the base production for ART and the normal production for ART that are being executed are continued. However, the processing configuration for terminating the additional performance that was being executed and starting the reduced additional performance corresponding to the additional performance has been simplified. Furthermore, when the performance side MPU 92 receives a new ART mid-addition command in a situation where the base performance for ART, the normal performance for ART, and the reduced additional performance are being executed on the image display device 63, In addition to the base performance, the normal performance for ART, and the reduced additional performance, the processing configuration for starting the additional performance based on the reception of the ART mid-addition command in parallel with these performances is simplified. In addition, when the production side MPU 92 receives an addition command during ART in a situation where the execution period of the reduced addition production remains longer than 1 second, while continuing the base production for ART and the normal production for ART that are currently being executed. , it is possible to update the pointer information of the reduced additional effect table to the pointer information corresponding to the last second.

<Third embodiment>
In this embodiment, a situation in which the player is expected to leave his/her seat after 10 minutes have elapsed without the production side MPU 92 receiving a game start command since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal gaming state ST1. This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that even after a situation occurs, it is possible to display a history image G23 corresponding to history configuration data that was generated and stored before the situation occurred. Hereinafter, configurations that are different from the first embodiment will be explained. Note that descriptions of the same configurations as in the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

In this embodiment, the displayable flags in the first embodiment are not provided in the 0th to 30th reproduction storage areas RD0 to RD30 of the image reproduction storage area 94c. As already explained in the first embodiment, when the item "Display past history images" is selected on the history menu screen (FIG. 97), a list of headings is displayed on the image display device 63. In this embodiment, a heading list including all the headings of the history configuration data stored in the 0th to 31st reproduction storage areas RD0 to RD31 is displayed. The player operates the upper button 64b and lower button 64c of the production operation device 64 to select a heading, and by operating the center button 64a to confirm the selection of the heading, the player selects the heading for the 0th to 31st reproductions. The history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data stored in any of the storage areas RD0 to RD31 can be displayed on the image display device 63 for confirmation.

As already explained in the first embodiment, the current setting value of the slot machine 10 is suggested by the type of the background plate image G24 included in the history image G23. In this embodiment, a situation in which the player is expected to leave his/her seat after 10 minutes have elapsed without the production side MPU 92 receiving a game start command since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal gaming state ST1. If a heading of history configuration data that was generated before the occurrence of the situation is selected in the heading list after occurrence of the situation, the history image corresponding to the history configuration data is displayed in a manner that setting values are not suggested. G23 is displayed on the image display device 63. Specifically, regardless of the value of the background plate counter 161g in the playback storage area RDn (n is an integer from 0 to 31), the history image G23 including the common background plate image is used instead of the background plate image G24. Is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the setting value for the current day will be guessed by referring to the type of the background plate image G24 of the history image G23 generated based on the gaming history of another person.

In the history image management process (FIG. 95) in this embodiment, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5714, that is, after the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal gaming state ST1, the production side MPU 92 If 10 minutes have passed without receiving a start command, the date and time data acquired in step S5713 is set in the absence time counter provided in the performance side RAM 94. The leaving time counter indicates that the player is expected to leave his/her seat if 10 minutes have passed since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal gaming state ST1 without the production side MPU 92 receiving a game start command. This is a counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the date and time when the state occurred.

Next, the past history selection process executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 111. Note that the past history selection process is executed in step S5907 of the display operation support process (FIG. 98).

In steps S6901 to S6907, the same processes as steps S6201 to S6207 of the past history selection process (FIG. 101) in the first embodiment are executed. After that, the date and time data stored in the leave counter in the production side RAM 94 is grasped (step S6908), and after the history configuration data corresponding to the heading selected this time is generated, the start lever 41 is finally pressed in the normal gaming state ST1. It is determined whether or not a situation has occurred in which 10 minutes have elapsed without the performance-side MPU 92 receiving a game start command after the operation was performed, and the player is expected to leave the seat (step S6909). In step S6909, the date and time data grasped in step S6908 is compared with the date and time data corresponding to the currently selected heading, and the date and time data grasped in step S6908 is matched to the history configuration data corresponding to the currently selected heading. An affirmative determination is made if the date and time data is newer than the included date and time data.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S6909, the plate adjustment flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6910). The plate adjustment flag is a flag that enables the production side MPU 92 to grasp that the common background plate image should be displayed regardless of the value of the background plate counter 161g in the reproduction storage area RDn. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6909, the process proceeds to step S6911 without setting the plate adjustment flag to "1".

If a negative determination is made in step S6909 or if the process in step S6910 is performed, display data for displaying the history image G23 corresponding to the currently selected history configuration data on the image display device 63 is displayed. Generate (step S6911). In step S6911, if the plate adjustment flag is set to "1", the background plate of the playback storage area RDn (n is an integer from 0 to 31) in which the currently selected history configuration data is stored. Even if the value of the counter 161g is "1" or more and one of the background plate images G24 has been won, the history image G23 including the common background plate image is displayed on the image display device instead of the background plate image G24. Display data to be displayed on 63 is generated.

Thereafter, the display data generated in step S6911 is set in the display setting area 113 (step S6912). As a result, the history image G23 corresponding to the past history configuration data selected this time is displayed on the image display device 63. Thereafter, the plate adjustment flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S6913), the history image displaying flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S6914), and this past history selection process ends. do. This allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the history image G23 is being displayed on the image display device 63.

According to this embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

Even after 10 minutes have passed since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal gaming state ST1 without the production-side MPU 92 receiving a game start command, and a situation in which the player is expected to leave his/her seat has occurred. It is possible to display a history image G23 corresponding to history configuration data that was generated and stored before the situation occurred. Since the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data generated based on the gaming history of another person can be displayed on the image display device 63, it is possible to compare the player's own history image G23 with the other person's history image G23. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

After 10 minutes have passed since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal gaming state ST1 without the production side MPU 92 receiving a game start command, and a situation occurs in which the player is expected to leave his/her seat, When an operation is performed to display the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data generated before the situation occurred, the background of the playback storage area RDn (n is an integer from 0 to 31) Regardless of the value of the plate counter 161g, a history image G23 including a common background plate image is displayed instead of the background plate image G24. By displaying the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data in a manner that does not suggest setting values, it is possible to prevent setting values from being guessed by referring to other people's gaming history. The number of history images G23 that can be displayed on the image display device 63 can be increased.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each embodiment described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the following changes may be made. Incidentally, the configurations of the following alternative embodiments may be applied individually to the configurations of each of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination. Further, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, and the configurations of the following different embodiments may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration in which the configurations of the above embodiments are combined with each other. good.

(1) The layer LYn (where n is an integer from 0 to 11) from which each data table is read out is specified in the readout area 94a. The data table to be read may be read to the highest layer LYn. In this configuration, when sound data is set for pointer information of various data tables read into the reading area 94a, sound priority data is set for the pointer information. Further, sound data and sound priority data are set in various areas 112a to 112c (FIG. 42(b)) of the sound output setting area 112. In the data setting process (step S1906 of the performance execution process (FIG. 47)), if sound data and sound priority data are set for the reference target pointer information, the performance side MPU 92 selects the sound output setting area 112. It is determined whether sound data and sound priority data have already been set in the corresponding areas 112a to 112c. If the sound data and sound priority data are not set, the sound data and sound priority data set for the reference target pointer information are set in the corresponding areas 112a to 112c. On the other hand, if sound data and sound priority data have already been set, whether or not the sound priority data set for the reference target pointer information is greater than the sound priority data that has already been set. (whether the priority is high or not), and if an affirmative determination is made, the sound data and sound priority data set for the reference target pointer information are set in the corresponding areas 112a to 112c. do. As a result, the sound data set in the corresponding areas 112a to 112c are changed to sound data with a higher priority. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made, the sound data and sound priority data are not changed. In this way, with the configuration in which sound data with a high priority based on the sound priority data is preferentially set in the various areas 112a to 112c of the sound output setting area 112, it is possible to Even in a configuration in which the layer LYn (n is an integer from 0 to 11) from which the effect table is read varies, sound data with a high priority can be preferentially output from the speaker 62.

In this configuration, when light emission data is set for pointer information of various data tables read into the read area 94a, light emission priority data is set for the pointer information. Furthermore, light emission data and light emission priority data are set in the light emission setting area 111 (FIG. 41(a)). In the data setting process (step S1906 of the effect execution process (FIG. 47)), if the light emission data and the light emission priority data are set for the reference target pointer information, the effect side MPU 92 sets the light emission setting area 111 to the light emission setting area 111. It is determined whether the light emission data and the light emission priority data have already been set. If the light emission data and light emission priority data are not set, the light emission data and light emission priority data set for the reference target pointer information are set in the light emission setting area 111. On the other hand, if the light emission data and light emission priority data have already been set, check whether the light emission priority data set for the reference target pointer information is greater than the light emission priority data that has already been set. (Whether the priority is high or not), and if an affirmative determination is made, the light emission data and light emission priority data set for the pointer information of the reference target are set in the light emission setting area 111. . As a result, the light emission data set in the light emission setting area 111 is changed to light emission data with a higher priority. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made, the light emission data and light emission priority data are not changed. In this way, by having the configuration in which the light emission data with a high priority is set preferentially in the light emission setting area 111 based on the light emission priority data, the layer LYn from which the production table is read out according to the progress status of the production. Even in a configuration where n is an integer between 0 and 11, the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 can be performed based on light emission data with a high priority.

In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the data table to be read is read to the highest layer LYn that is vacant in the read area 94a when reading the data table, the number of layers LYn in the read area 94a can be reduced. can.

(2) A configuration in which a multiple layer capable of reading out multiple data tables at once is provided in the performance side RAM 94, and various performance tables are read out into one multiple layer in a game in which the second expected performance is executed. You can also use it as By switching the data table to be executed in the multiple layer, the effect to be executed can be switched. Specifically, in a game where the second expected performance is executed and the re-variation performance is not executed, the symbol variation performance table, effective notification performance table, left stop performance table, right stop performance are changed based on the occurrence of the first opportunity. The table, the long press notification effect table, the middle stop effect table, the first expected effect table, and the second expected effect table are read out to the multiple layer. Then, the symbol variation effect table is set as an execution target. After that, based on the occurrence of the second trigger, the effective notification effect table is set as the execution target, based on the occurrence of the third trigger, the left stop effect table is set as the execution target, and based on the occurrence of the fourth trigger, the right stop effect table is set as the execution target. The performance table and the long-press notification performance table are set as execution targets, and the middle stop performance table and the first expected performance table are set as execution targets based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity. After that, the second expected performance is performed based on the condition that the pointer information of the reference target in the first expected performance table reaches a predetermined value and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs. Set the table for execution. Thereby, at least a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) can be secured as the execution period of the first expected effect while eliminating the need for a configuration for generating the first composite effect table.

In addition, in a game where the second expected performance and re-variation performance are executed, based on the occurrence of the first opportunity, the symbol fluctuation performance table, effective notification performance table, left stop performance table, right stop performance table, long press notification performance The table, intermediate stop performance table, first expected performance table, second expected performance table, and re-variation performance table are read out to the multiple layer. Then, the symbol variation effect table is set as an execution target. After that, based on the occurrence of the second trigger, the effective notification effect table is set as the execution target, based on the occurrence of the third opportunity, the left stop effect table is set as the execution target, and based on the occurrence of the fourth opportunity, the right stop effect table is set as the execution target. The performance table and the long press notification performance table are set as execution targets, and the middle stop performance table and the first expected performance table are set as execution targets based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity. After that, the second expected performance is performed based on the condition that the pointer information of the reference target in the first expected performance table reaches a predetermined value and the condition that the sixth opportunity occurs. Set the table and re-fluctuation effect table to be executed. Thereby, at least a predetermined period (specifically, 1 second) can be secured as the execution period of the first expected effect, while eliminating the need for a configuration for generating the second composite effect table.

(3) In a game where the second expected performance is executed and the re-variation performance is not executed, if the performance data in the first expected performance table and the second expected performance table is set in the first composite performance table. , part or all of the symbol variation effect table, effective notification effect table, left stop effect table, right stop effect table, long press notification effect table, and middle stop effect table are read out to a layer LYn different from the first composite effect table. It may also be a configuration. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a first composite effect table is generated in which the effect data of the intermediate stop effect table, the first expected effect table, and the second expected effect table are set. In this configuration, when the first trigger occurs, the normal base effect table is read out to the 0th layer LY0, and the symbol variation effect table is read out to the first layer LY1, and when the second opportunity occurs, the effective notification effect table is read out. Read out to the second layer LY2, read the left stop effect table to the third layer LY3 when the third trigger occurs, read the right stop effect table to the fourth layer LY4 when the fourth trigger occurs, and long press notification The effect table is read out to the fifth layer LY5, and when the fifth opportunity occurs, the first composite effect table is read out. This reduces the amount of performance data set in the first composite performance table in a configuration that secures the execution period of the first expected performance for at least a predetermined period of time (specifically, one second). I can do it. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the first synthesis table stored in advance in the synthesis table storage area 93n (FIG. 41(a)) of the effect side ROM 93, and to generate the first synthesis effect table. The processing load can be reduced.

(4) In a game in which the second expected performance and the re-variation performance are executed, the performance data in the first expected performance table, the second expected performance table, and the re-variation performance table are set in the second composite performance table. If there is, part or all of the symbol variation production table, effective notification production table, left stop production table, right stop production table, long press notification production table, and medium stop production table are in a layer LYn different from the second composite production table. It may also be configured to be read. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a second composite effect table is generated in which the effect data of the intermediate stop effect table, the first expected effect table, the second expected effect table, and the re-variation effect table are set. In this configuration, when the first trigger occurs, the normal base effect table is read out to the 0th layer LY0, and the symbol variation effect table is read out to the first layer LY1, and when the second opportunity occurs, the effective notification effect table is read out. Read out to the second layer LY2, read the left stop effect table to the third layer LY3 when the third trigger occurs, read the right stop effect table to the fourth layer LY4 when the fourth trigger occurs, and long press notification The effect table is read out to the fifth layer LY5, and when the fifth opportunity occurs, the second composite effect table is read out. This reduces the amount of performance data set in the second composite performance table in a configuration that secures the execution period of the first expected performance for at least a predetermined period of time (specifically, one second). I can do it. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the second synthesis table stored in advance in the synthesis table storage area 93n (FIG. 41(a)) of the effect-side ROM 93, and to generate the second synthesis effect table. The processing load can be reduced.

(5) In a game where the second expected performance is executed and the re-variation performance is not executed, the performance MPU 92 satisfies both the condition that the intermediate stop performance ends and the condition that the performance side MPU 92 receives the game start command. Based on the satisfied state, various effects currently being executed may be ended and the effects of the next game may be started. In this configuration, in the stop operation corresponding process (FIG. 25), an OFF operation command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S717), and it is determined that the second expected production flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". If so (step S718: YES), the main MPU 72 proceeds to step S720 without executing the freeze setting process for the second expected performance (step S719), clears the second expected performance flag to "0" ( Step S720), the main stop operation corresponding process ends. By clearing the second expected performance flag to "0", an affirmative determination is made in step S312 of the normal process (FIG. 13). Further, since the freeze setting process for the second expected performance is not executed, an affirmative determination is also made in step S314 of the normal process (FIG. 13). As a result, a game start command is transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the performance side MPU 92 based on the operation of the start lever 41 even if the middle stop performance, the first expected performance, or the second expected performance is being executed. becomes. Note that after the main side MPU 72 transmits the OFF operation command to the performance side MPU 92, it becomes possible to transmit a game start command based on the operation of the start lever 41, so the stop button 42 to 42 corresponding to the third stop is activated. Even if the start lever 41 is operated before the OFF operation of 44 is performed, a game start command will not be transmitted based on the operation of the start lever 41.

Even if only one of the conditions that the mid-stop production ends and the condition that the production side MPU 92 receives the game start command is satisfied, both of these two conditions are still satisfied. The process for ending the performance will not be executed until this point is reached. Specifically, if a game start command is received during execution of a mid-stop performance, the performance MPU 92 ends the performance based on the end of the execution period (specifically, 1 second) of the mid-stop performance. Execute the process. Further, when a game start command is received during execution of the first expected performance or the second expected performance, the performance side MPU 92 executes processing for ending the performance based on receiving the game start command. In the process for ending the performance, the 0th layer LY0 and the first layer LY1 in the readout area 94a are cleared. Thereby, the sound output control of the speaker 62 and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61 in the first expected performance or the second expected performance that were being executed are completed. Furthermore, the production side MPU 92 clears the background area 113a and the first to fifth production areas 113b to 113f in the display setting area 113. The image display device 63 displays a background image G4, a left pattern image G5, a right pattern image G6, a middle pattern image G7, and an expected effect image (a bubble image G8, a water flow image G9, a swirl image G10, a school of fish image G11, or a giant character image G12). By clearing the display data for displaying these images, these images are no longer displayed on the image display device 63, and the performance of the game that was being executed ends.

Thereafter, the production side MPU 92 starts production of the next game based on receiving the game start command. Specifically, if the second expected performance is not executed in the next game, based on the reception of the game start command, the normal base performance table is read out to the 0th layer LY0 in the readout area 94a, and The symbol variation effect table is read out to the first layer LY1. In addition, in the case where the second expected performance is executed in the next game and the re-variation performance is not executed, the first composite performance table is generated based on the reception of the game start command, and the first composite performance table is The normal base effect table is read out to the 0th layer LY0, and the generated first composite effect table is read out to the first layer LY1. Furthermore, when the second expected performance and re-variation performance are executed in the next game, a second composite performance table is generated based on the reception of the game start command, and the 0th The normal base effect table is read out to the layer LY0, and the generated second composite effect table is read out to the first layer LY1.

In this way, in a game where the second expected performance is executed and the re-variation performance is not executed, both the condition that the intermediate stop performance ends and the condition that the performance side MPU 92 receives the game start command are satisfied. Based on this, by configuring the system to end the various performances currently being executed and start the next game's performance, players who are in a hurry can wait until the execution period of the second expected performance ends. It is possible to avoid a situation where the next game cannot be started.

(6) In the above first embodiment, when the video display of the additional main effect is continued to the end without ending midway, a low-speed display of the gauge increase display is performed instead of a high-speed display of the gauge increase display. , a configuration may be adopted in which when the video display of the additional main effect ends midway, a high-speed display of the gauge increase display is performed instead of a low-speed display of the gauge increase display. Specifically, in step S3405 of the additional effect processing (FIG. 65), if the number of additional games set in the additional game number counter 135 in step S3401 is "50," the low-speed first additional sub effect table is set. At the same time, if the number of add-on games set in the add-on game number counter 135 in step S3401 is "100", the low-speed second add-on sub effect table is specified. After that, in step S3406, it is determined whether or not the continuous addition flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S3406, the additional sub-effect table for low-speed display specified in step S3405 is read out to the third layer LY3 of the readout area 94a (step S3407). By controlling the execution of the performance according to the additional sub-performance table for low-speed display, the additional sub-performance including low-speed gauge increase display is executed on the image display device 63.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3406, table rewriting processing is executed (step S3408). In the table rewriting process, as in the first embodiment, the gauge blinking display and the gauge increase display are performed in a manner corresponding to the total number of additional games of additional winnings that occurred consecutively before the current additional winning. The address information of the display data set for each pointer information of the additional sub effect table for low speed display is rewritten as follows. Thereafter, the additional sub effect table for low-speed display after executing the table rewriting process (step S3408) is read out to the third layer LY3 of the readout area 94a (step S3409). By controlling the execution of the performance according to the rewritten additional sub-performance table for low-speed display, the additional sub-performance including low-speed gauge increase display is executed on the image display device 63.

In the additional sub effect table update process executed in step S3203 of the game start process during ART (FIG. 63(b)), the low speed display table read out to the third layer LY3 of the read area 94a Instead of the additional sub-effect table, a corresponding additional sub-effect table for high-speed display is read out to the third layer LY3. Specifically, when the low-speed first additional sub-effect table is read out in the third layer LY3, the high-speed first additional sub-effect table is read out, and the low-speed second additional sub-effect table is read out in the third layer LY3. If it has been read out, the high speed second additional sub effect table is read out. In the additional sub effect table update process (step S3203), the value of the pointer counter PC4 in the third layer LY3 is inherited without being cleared. Furthermore, in the process of updating the additional sub-effect table (step S3203), the fifth effect area 113f of the display setting area 113 in which the display data for the additional sub-effect is set is not cleared. Therefore, a continuation of the gauge flashing display is displayed on the gauge display section G19a. In the process of updating the additional sub-effect table (step S3203), if the data of the additional sub-effect table for low-speed display that has been read out to the fourth layer LY4 has been rewritten, the additional sub-effect table for low-speed display is updated. The rewritten data that was set for each pointer information in the table is set for the corresponding pointer information in the additional sub-effect table for high-speed display that is read out to the fourth layer LY4. As a result, in a situation where additional winnings occur consecutively without interruption of additional sub effects, the total number of additional winnings that have occurred consecutively before the current additional winning will be increased. In a corresponding manner, the gauge blinking display and the gauge increasing display can be executed in the additional sub effects.

In this way, by configuring the gauge increase display to be displayed at high speed when the video display of the additional main performance ends midway, it is possible to end the video display of the additional main performance midway and start the next game. For players who have selected this, it is possible to confirm the gauge increase display in a short period of time. In addition, the base performance for ART and the normal performance for ART in the game started by operating the start lever 41 while the video of the additional main performance is displayed are parallel to the additional sub performance in the game immediately before the game. The execution period can be shortened. By configuring a configuration in which the gauge increase display is displayed at a low speed when the video display of the additional main performance is continued until the end without ending midway, the video display of the additional main performance can be displayed until the end without ending midway. It is possible for the player who viewed the game to carefully check the gauge increase display.

(7) In the first embodiment described above, when an additional winning occurs in the ART state ST6, an additional main performance of a pattern in which an additional number of games occurs is executed, and at the same time, an additional winning does not occur in the ART state ST6. In this case, an additional main effect may be executed in a pattern in which an additional number of games does not occur with a predetermined probability. In step S1202 of the add-on processing (FIG. 31), as already explained in the first embodiment, in the lottery processing of the current winning combination (FIG. 14), "4" to "8", "15", and "16" are selected. ” is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, as already explained in the first embodiment, an additional lottery win is achieved in the additional lottery process (step S1203) (step S1204: YES), and the gaming state is in the ART state ST6. If so (step S1205: YES), an addition setting process during ART is executed (step S1206), and the addition flag during ART in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1207).

On the other hand, in this configuration, when a negative determination is made in step S1202, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute an additional effect of a pattern in which no additional number of games occurs. The probability of winning in this lottery is 1/10. If the lottery is won and the gaming state is ART state ST6, a false ART add-on flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". The false ART medium add-on flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to specify that the game is a target game for performing an add-on effect with a pattern in which no add-on to the number of games occurs in the ART state ST6.

In the ART state processing (FIG. 33), as already explained in the first embodiment, if the ART mid-add flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1401: YES), the production side MPU 92 An additional command during ART is sent to the target (step S1402). When the performance-side MPU 92 receives the add-on command during ART, similarly to the first embodiment, it executes the add-on main performance and the add-on sub-performance of a pattern in which an increase in the number of games occurs. In the video display in the main effect of adding on the number of games in the pattern, an image indicating that the adding on the number of games has occurred is displayed at the end of the video displayed on the image display device 63. The number of additional games is not notified in the video display of the additional main effect, but is notified in the gauge increase display of the additional sub effect.

In the ART state processing (FIG. 33) in this configuration, if the false ART medium addition flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", a false ART medium addition command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. When the performance-side MPU 92 receives the false ART add-on command, it executes an add-on main performance and an add-on sub-performance of a pattern in which no increase in the number of games occurs. In the moving image display in the main effect of adding on a pattern in which no adding on the number of games occurs, an image indicating that no adding on the number of games occurs is displayed at the end of the moving image displayed on the image display device 63. In this additional sub-effect, only the gauge blinking display is executed, and the gauge increase display is not executed.

In this way, by configuring the main effect to display an effect indicating whether or not an additional number of games will occur, even if the video display of the additional main effect has started, the number of games will be displayed at the end of the video display. By making it unclear whether or not the number of games has been added until an image indicating that the number of games has been added is displayed, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the main effect. In addition, by configuring the configuration in which the number of additional games is not announced in the additional main effect, but in the gauge increase display of the additional sub effect, the gauge increase display will be displayed even if the video display of the additional main effect is executed to the end. By keeping the number of additional games unknown until the game ends, attention to the gauge increase display can be increased.

(8) When the production side MPU 92 receives a game start command in which information indicating that a bonus win has occurred is set, the accessory error state and the correction operation standby state are canceled and the correction operation of the accessory 75 is performed. It may also be a configuration. Receipt of a game start command in which information indicating that a bonus win has occurred is an event that always occurs before transition to the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4), so it indicates that a bonus win has occurred. Even if the configuration is such that when the production-side MPU 92 receives a game start command in which information indicating the above is set, the accessory error state and the correction operation standby state are canceled and the correction operation of the accessory 75 is performed, the transition to the bonus state is made. It is possible to increase the possibility that the accessory error state and the correction operation standby state will be released at the start of the first game to be executed after the game is started. Thereby, it is possible to increase the possibility that it will be possible to perform the accessory motion performance from the first game.

(9) If a state in which no correction operation is performed continues for a predetermined period, the values of the correction execution counter 141 and the standby execution counter 142 may be cleared to "0". Specifically, in the normal gaming state ST1, 10 minutes have passed since the last operation of the start lever 41 without the production side MPU 92 receiving a game start command, and the player is predicted to leave the seat. In this case, the setting of the history storage mode may be canceled and the values of the correction execution counter 141 and the standby execution counter 142 may be cleared to "0". Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the correction operation standby state or accessory error state will occur immediately after the player is replaced.

(10) A configuration may be adopted in which the accessory motion performance is executed from the beginning of the bonus start performance. As already explained in the first embodiment, if the production side MPU 92 is in the accessory error state or in the correction operation standby state at the timing when the production side MPU 92 receives the winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus winning has been established is set. Then, the accessory object error state or correction operation standby state is canceled and the correction operation of the accessory object 75 is executed. As already explained in the first embodiment, the time required for the correction operation of the accessory 75 is at most 1.4 seconds, and the correction operation ends at a timing before the start of the bonus start effect. . Therefore, even if there is an accessory error state or a correction operation standby state when a bonus win is established, it is possible to start the bonus start performance with the spherical performance section 77b staying at the origin, and the relevant The accessory motion performance can be executed from the beginning of the bonus start performance. If the bonus start command is received by the production-side MPU 92, the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state is canceled and the correction operation of the accessory 75 is started, and the accessory action performance is started from the beginning of the bonus start performance. You will no longer be able to execute it. In response, based on the presentation side MPU 92 receiving a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus win has been established, the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state is canceled and the accessory 75 is corrected. By being configured to execute the motion, the accessory motion performance can be started from the beginning of the bonus start performance. A configuration in which the performance side MPU 92 cancels the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state and executes the correction performance of the accessory 75 based on the presentation side MPU 92 receiving a game start command in which information indicating that a bonus winning has occurred is set. In this case, although it is possible to end the correction operation before the start of the bonus start effect, the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state will be canceled even if the bonus announcement effect indicating that a bonus win has occurred is not performed. Since the correcting operation of the accessory 75 is executed, the player will know that a bonus win has occurred based on the execution of the correcting operation. In response, based on the presentation side MPU 92 receiving a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus win has been established, the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state is canceled and the accessory 75 is corrected. By having a configuration that executes the action, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the occurrence of a bonus win based on the fact that the correction action of the accessory 75 has been performed, and to prevent the player from knowing that the bonus winning has occurred based on the correction action of the accessory 75. You can start acting.

(11) The spherical effect part 77b has a built-in accessory light emitter, and when the accessory action performance is performed, the accessory light emitter flashes and emits light in a manner that is visible from the outside. good. Specifically, an LED is installed inside the spherical effect part 77b of the accessory 75 as an accessory light emitter. The accessory 75 includes a light emission control board that controls the light emission of the accessory light emitter. The light emission control board is electrically connected to the effect control device 90, and controls the light emission of the accessory light emitter based on the signal received from the effect side MPU92. The spherical effect part 77b is transparent or semi-transparent, and all or part of the light emitted from the accessory light emitter provided inside the spherical effect part 77b passes through the spherical effect part 77b and is emitted from the spherical effect part 77b. visible from the outside. In this configuration, an accessory motion performance table is stored in the performance side ROM 93. In the accessory motion production table, a plurality of pieces of numerical information are arranged in consecutive numbers as pointer information, and the drive data (first drive data and second drive data) of the accessory 75 is assigned to the pointer information. and light emission data for controlling the light emission of the accessory light emitter in accordance with the operation of the spherical effect part 77b are set. When it is time to start the accessory motion performance, the performance side MPU 92 reads out the accessory motion performance table from the performance side ROM 93 to the eleventh layer LY11 of the readout area 94a.

In the role object action effect table, first light emission data for lighting up the role object light emitter and second light emission data for turning off the role object light source are set as light emission data. If the first light emission data is set in the pointer information of the reference object in the role object action production table, the production side MPU 92 transmits the first light emission data to the light emission control board, and also sends the first light emission data to the pointer information of the reference object in the role object action production table. If the second light emission data is set, the second light emission data is transmitted to the light emission control board. The light emission control board turns on the accessory light emitter when receiving the first light emission data, and turns off the accessory light emitter when receiving the second light emission data.

By controlling the drive of the accessory 75 and controlling the light emission of the accessory light emitter in the performance side MPU 92 according to the accessory action production table read out to the 11th layer LY11, the accessory light emitter blinks and emits light and has a spherical shape. The performance part 77b can perform an accessory motion performance in which the performance part 77b moves up and down. Thereby, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the performance of the action of the accessory and to improve the interest of the game.

(12) Instead of the configuration in which the accessory movement performance is performed according to the accessory drive table in which only the drive data for the accessory 75 is set, the drive data for the accessory 75 and the sound data for the accessory movement performance are set. A configuration may also be adopted in which the accessory motion performance is executed according to the designated accessory motion performance table. In the accessory motion production table, a plurality of pieces of numerical information are arranged in consecutive numbers as pointer information, and the drive data (first drive data and second drive data) of the accessory 75 is assigned to the pointer information. and sound data for controlling the sound output of the speaker 62 in accordance with the operation of the spherical effect section 77b. By adopting a configuration in which the sound output of the speaker 62 is controlled in accordance with the vertical movement of the spherical performance part 77b in the performance of the role object movement, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When it is time to start the accessory motion performance, the performance side MPU 92 reads out the accessory motion performance table from the performance side ROM 93 to the eleventh layer LY11 of the read area 94a. If the sound data for the role object movement effect is set for the reference target pointer information in the read role object movement effect table, the performance side MPU 92 transfers the sound data to the sound output setting area 112. It is set in the presentation area 112b (FIG. 42(b)). The sound data set in the accessory motion effect table read out to the 11th layer LY11 is set in various effect tables read out to the first layer LY1 to eighth layer LY8 of the readout area 94a. It is set in the production area 112b of the sound output setting area 112 with priority over the sound data. By giving priority to the sound output control for the role object movement performance over the sound output control for other effects, it is possible to perform the role object movement performance that attracts a high degree of attention without missing any sound.

(13) Instead of the configuration in which the accessory motion performance is performed in all games in the bonus state, a prize action lottery is held to determine whether or not to perform the accessory motion performance in each game in the bonus state, A configuration may be adopted in which the accessory action performance is executed in a game in which the accessory action performance is won in the accessory action lottery. When a game start command is received from the main side MPU 72 in the bonus state, the performance side MPU 92 performs an accessory action lottery. In the accessory action lottery, the accessory action lottery table is first read out from the performance side ROM 93. In the character object action lottery table, each result is set so that the probability of winning the character object action performance is 1/2, and the probability of not winning the character object action performance is 1/2. A numerical range is set for that. Thereafter, the numerical information of the random number counter which is updated periodically in the production side RAM 94 is read out, and the read numerical information is checked against the read out accessory action lottery table. Then, it is determined that a result for which a numerical range including the numerical information read from the random number counter is set (a result of winning the accessory action performance or a result of not winning the accessory action performance) has been won. When a role object action performance is won in the role object action lottery, the performance side MPU 92 reads out the performance table in which the address information of the drive table of the role object 75 is set to the reading area 94a. Thereby, in the bonus state, the accessory action performance can be executed only in the game in which the accessory action performance is won.

(14) There is a bonus accessory effect that indicates to the player that a bonus win has occurred or that a bonus win has been established, and either when a bonus win occurs or when a bonus win is established. A configuration may also be adopted in which a bonus accessory performance is executed. The bonus accessory performance is a performance in which the spherical performance portion 77b of the accessory object 75 moves up and down, similar to the accessory motion performance in the first embodiment. As already explained in the first embodiment, in the normal game state ST1, in a game in which a bonus win has occurred in the role lottery process (FIG. 14), the step of the announcement lottery process (performance content determination process (FIG. 51) S2311) is executed. If the bonus announcement performance is won in the announcement lottery process, the bonus announcement performance is executed in the current game in which the bonus win has occurred. On the other hand, if the re-fluctuation effect is won in the notification lottery process, the re-fluctuation effect is executed in a game that is started after five games have been played without a bonus winning being achieved. The performance-side ROM 93 in this configuration stores a bonus accessory drive table for executing the bonus accessory performance. When a bonus announcement performance is won in a game in which a bonus win has occurred, the performance side MPU 92 selects the fifth opportunity in the readout area 94a based on the occurrence of the fifth opportunity in the game, similar to the first embodiment described above. The middle stop effect table is read out in the sixth layer LY6, the first expected effect table is read out in the seventh layer LY7, and the bonus announcement effect table is read out in the eighth layer LY8. In this configuration, after reading the bonus announcement effect table to the eighth layer LY8, it is determined whether or not the driving table of the accessory 75 is in a readable state so that it can be read to the eleventh layer LY11. Specifically, the accessory error flag, the correction operation standby flag, the accessory initialization flag, the correction operation completion flag, the correction operation completion flag, the return operation flag, and the accessory operation flag in the accessory management area 94d. If "1" is not set in any of the above, it is determined that the state is readable. When it is determined that the state is ready for reading, the accessory performance execution flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1". The accessory performance execution flag is a flag that enables the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the bonus accessory performance has been executed. The address information of the bonus accessory drive table is set in the bonus announcement performance table. In this game where the bonus announcement effect table is read out to the 8th layer LY8, if a bonus prize is not won, the bonus announcement effect table is read out to the 11th layer LY11 based on the address information set in the bonus announcement effect table. The bonus accessory driving table is read. The performance side MPU 92 executes the bonus accessory performance by controlling the drive of the accessory 75 according to the bonus accessory drive table. In this way, when the bonus accessory performance is executed in the bonus announcement performance, the accessory performance execution flag is cleared to "0" when the performance side MPU 92 receives the bonus start command from the main side MPU 72.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the bonus announcement effect table is not in a readable state after being read out to the eighth layer LY8, the bonus accessory drive table is read out to the eleventh layer LY11 even if the bonus announcement effect table has been read out. The process will be canceled. For this reason, when it is determined that the state is not readable, the performance side MPU 92 does not set the accessory performance execution flag in the performance side RAM 94 to "1". This allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the bonus accessory performance is not being executed.

Further, after reading the bonus announcement performance table to the eighth layer LY8 and setting the accessory performance execution flag to "1", the performance side MPU 92 receives a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus winning has been established is set. In this case, similar to step S2803 of the winning result handling process (FIG. 56(a)) in the first embodiment, a process for canceling the bonus announcement performance is executed. In the process of canceling the bonus announcement performance, the eighth layer LY8 from which the bonus announcement performance table is read out is cleared in the reading area 94a, and the bonus announcement performance flag 122 is cleared to "0". As a result, the bonus announcement performance is canceled. Further, in this configuration, the accessory performance execution flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" in the process of canceling the bonus announcement performance. In this way, when the bonus announcement performance is canceled and the bonus accessory performance is also canceled, the accessory performance execution flag is cleared to "0". This makes it possible for the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the bonus accessory performance is not being executed.

If a re-variation effect is won in a game in which a bonus win has occurred, and the target game for the re-variation effect is started after 5 games have been played without a bonus winning, the same as in the first embodiment above. , the production-side MPU 92 generates a second composite production table based on receiving the game start command, reads out the normal base production table to the 0th layer LY0 of the readout area 94a, and outputs the normal base production table to the first layer LY1. Read out the second composite effect table. In this configuration, after reading the second composite effect table to the first layer LY1, it is determined whether the drive table of the accessory 75 is in a readable state where it can be read to the eleventh layer LY11. Specifically, the accessory error flag, the correction operation standby flag, the accessory initialization flag, the correction operation completion flag, the correction operation completion flag, the return operation flag, and the accessory operation flag in the accessory management area 94d. If "1" is not set in any of the above, it is determined that the state is readable. If it is determined that the state is ready for reading, the accessory performance execution flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1". As already explained, the accessory performance execution flag is a flag that enables the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the bonus accessory performance has been executed. The address information of the bonus accessory drive table is set in the performance data of the re-variation performance table set in the second composite performance table. The bonus accessory drive table read out in the re-variation performance is the same drive table as the bonus accessory drive table read out in the above-mentioned bonus announcement performance. In this game in which the second composite effect table is read out to the first layer LY1, if a bonus win is not achieved, the 11th layer The bonus accessory driving table is read out in LY11. The performance side MPU 92 executes the bonus accessory performance in the re-variable performance by controlling the drive of the accessory 75 according to the bonus accessory drive table. When a bonus accessory performance is executed in the re-variation performance, the accessory performance execution flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" when the performance side MPU 92 receives a bonus start command from the main side MPU 72.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the second composite effect table is not in a readable state after being read out to the first layer LY1, even if the second composite effect table is read out to the first layer LY1, the second composite effect table is read out to the first layer LY1. The process of reading the bonus accessory drive table is canceled. Therefore, when it is determined that the readout is not possible, the accessory performance execution flag in the performance side RAM 94 is not set to "1". This allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the bonus accessory performance is not being executed.

Further, after reading the second composite effect table to the first layer LY1 and setting the accessory effect execution flag to "1," the effect side MPU 92 sends a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus winning has been established is set. If received, similar to step S2805 of the winning result handling process (FIG. 56(a)) in the first embodiment, a re-fluctuation effect cancellation process is executed. In the process of canceling the re-fluctuation performance, the performance data for the re-fluctuation performance is deleted from among the performance data set in the second composite performance table read out to the first layer LY1 of the reading area 94a. As a result, the re-variation performance is canceled and the bonus accessory performance is also canceled. Further, in this configuration, the accessory performance execution flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" in the process of canceling the re-variation performance. In this way, in a game where a re-variation effect is executed, if a bonus winning corresponding to a carried-over bonus win is achieved and the re-variation effect is canceled and the bonus accessory effect is also cancelled, the bonus effect is canceled. The performance execution flag is cleared to "0". This makes it possible for the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the bonus accessory performance is not being executed.

Next, a description will be given of the accessory setting process at the time of winning a bonus, which is executed by the production side MPU 92 in this configuration. In addition, similar to the first embodiment, the accessory setting process at the time of bonus winning is performed based on the presentation side MPU 92 receiving a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus winning has been achieved is set. This is executed in step S2806 of the result correspondence process (FIG. 56(a)).

In the accessory setting process when winning a bonus, first, the same processing as steps S4701 to S4705 of the accessory setting process (FIG. 78) when winning a bonus in the first embodiment is executed. Specifically, when the accessory error flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4701: YES), the error release flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1". (Step S4702). As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S4102 of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72), and the process for canceling the accessory error state (steps S4104 to S4106 and steps S4109 to S4111) is performed. will be executed.

If the accessory error flag is not set to "1" (step S4701: NO), it is determined whether the correction operation standby flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4701: NO). S4703). When the correction operation standby flag is set to "1" (step S4703: YES), the standby release flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4704). As a result, an affirmative determination is made in step S4102 of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72), and the process for canceling the correction operation standby state (steps S4104 to S4108) is executed. . Thereafter, the value of the standby execution counter 142 in the accessory management area 94d is cleared to "0" (step S4705). As a result, the number of times the standby execution counter 142 has been set to the correction operation standby state is cleared.

When the process of step S4702 or the process of step S4705 is performed, in this configuration, the bonus winning flag provided in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1". The bonus winning time flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp whether or not the correction operation of the accessory 75 is started in response to establishment of a bonus winning. The bonus winning flag is set in the first clearing process of the accessory management information (step S4107 of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72)) and the second clearing process of the accessory management information (step S4107 of the correction operation start setting process (FIG. 72)). ) is not cleared to "0" in step S4110). Based on the fact that the correction operation flag is set to "1" and the bonus winning flag is set to "1", the production side MPU 92 determines that the correction operation of the accessory 75 is triggered by the bonus winning. Understand that it was started as a. In the accessory setting process at the time of bonus winning, after setting the bonus winning flag to "1", the correction is performed in the same way as step S4706 of the accessory setting process (FIG. 78) at the time of bonus winning in the first embodiment. The operation start setting process (FIG. 72) is executed, and the accessory setting process at the time of winning this bonus is completed.

In the accessory setting process at the time of bonus winning, if neither the accessory error flag nor the correction operation standby flag is set to "1" (step S4701: NO, step S4703: NO), the above first embodiment The same process as step S4707 to step S4709 of the accessory setting process (FIG. 78) at the time of bonus winning is executed. Specifically, the eleventh layer LY11 in the read area 94a is cleared (step S4707). As a result, even if the drive table for the accessory 75 has been read to the eleventh layer LY11, the drive data will not be output to the accessory drive unit 78. Specifically, if a correction operation is in progress, the correction operation is terminated midway.

Thereafter, a third clearing process of accessory management information is executed (step S4708). In the third clearing process (step S4708) of accessory management information, various counters 141 to 144 other than the origin displacement flag in the accessory management area 94d and various flags (specifically, the accessory initializing flag, initialization End flag, accessory error flag, error release flag, correction operation standby flag, standby release flag, correction operation in progress flag, correction operation completion flag, accessory operation flag, first origin standby flag, second origin standby flag and the return operation flag) are cleared to "0". As a result, the management information of the accessory 75 except the information on the origin displacement flag is cleared.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the spherical effect part 77b of the accessory 75 is staying at the origin (step S4709). In this configuration, when the spherical effect part 77b stays at the origin (step S4709: YES), the bonus accessory effect start setting process is executed, and the accessory setting process at the time of winning this bonus is ended. In the bonus accessory performance start setting process, first, it is determined whether the accessory performance execution flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1". If the accessory performance execution flag is set to "1", it means that the bonus accessory performance has already been executed, so the accessory setting process at the time of winning the main bonus is directly ended. In this way, if the bonus accessory performance has already been performed before the bonus start performance is performed, the bonus accessory performance is not performed. On the other hand, if the accessory performance execution flag is not set to "1", it means that the bonus accessory performance has not been executed yet, so the bonus accessory drive table is read from the performance side ROM 93 in the area 94a. At the same time, the bonus accessory operation flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1", and the start setting process of this bonus accessory performance is completed. The performance side MPU 92 executes the bonus accessory performance by controlling the drive of the accessory 75 according to the read bonus accessory drive table. In this way, when the winning result command indicating that a bonus winning has been achieved is received in a state where the bonus accessory effect has not yet been executed, the spherical effect section 77b returns to the origin instead of being in the accessory error state and the correction operation standby state. If the user is staying, a bonus role performance is started.

On the other hand, after executing the third clearing process of accessory management information in step S708, if it is determined that the spherical effect section 77b is not staying at the origin (step S4709: NO), the accessory management area 94d Set the bonus winning flag to "1". Thereafter, the same process as step S4710 and step S4711 of the accessory setting process (FIG. 78) at the time of bonus winning in the first embodiment is executed. Specifically, read processing for correction operation is executed (step S4710). In step S4710, the drive table corresponding to the current origin out of the initial position drive table and displacement position drive table already explained in the first embodiment is read out from the performance side ROM 93 to the readout area 94a. The performance side MPU 92 controls the drive of the accessory 75 according to the initial position drive table or the displacement position drive table read out to the 11th layer LY11, so that the spherical performance part 77b is moved to the origin (initial position or displacement position). ).

Thereafter, the correction operation in progress flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4711), and the accessory setting process at the time of winning this bonus is ended. In this way, the performance side MPU 92 receives the winning result command indicating that a bonus winning has been achieved in a state where the bonus accessory performance has not been executed yet, and the spherical performance part is not in the accessory error state and the correction operation standby state. If 77b is not staying at the origin, the correction operation of the accessory 75 is executed in a manner that allows the production side MPU 92 to understand that the correction operation was started in response to the establishment of a bonus win. .

Next, the accessory flag setting process executed by the production side MPU 92 in this configuration will be explained. Note that, similarly to the first embodiment, the accessory flag setting process is executed in step S3508 of the flag clearing process (FIG. 66(a)).

In the accessory flag setting process, first, the same processes as steps S4601 to S4604 of the accessory flag setting process (FIG. 77) in the first embodiment are executed. Specifically, when the accessory initializing flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4601: YES), the initialization operation of the accessory 75 based on the accessory initialization table is performed. Since this means that the initialization end flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4602), this accessory flag setting process is ended.

When a negative determination is made in step S4601, it is determined whether the correction operation in progress flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" (step S4603). If the correction operation in progress flag is set to "1" (step S4603: YES), this means that the correction operation of the accessory 75 based on the correction operation drive table has been completed, so the correction operation in progress flag is set to "1" (step S4603: YES). is cleared to "0" (step S4604).

In this configuration, after clearing the correction operation flag to "0" in step S4604, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1". When the bonus winning flag is set to "1", it means that the correction operation of the accessory 75 that was started in response to the bonus winning has been completed, so the accessory performance execution flag is set. Determine whether "1" is set. If the accessory performance execution flag is not set to "1", the same process as the bonus accessory performance start setting process described above is executed. As a result, the bonus accessory drive table is read out to the 11th layer LY11, and the drive control of the accessory 75 is executed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the read bonus accessory drive table, so that the bonus accessory is produced. is executed. In this way, if the correction operation of the accessory 75 is started in response to a bonus winning being achieved in a state where the bonus accessory effect has not yet been executed, the bonus will be added based on the completion of the correction operation. The performance of the role begins.

On the other hand, even if it is determined that the bonus winning flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1" after the correction operation flag is cleared to "0" in step S4604, the production side RAM 94 If the accessory performance execution flag is set to "1", it means that the bonus accessory performance has already been executed, so the main role can be executed without executing the bonus accessory performance start setting process. The property flag setting process ends. In this way, if the correction operation of the accessory 75 is started in response to a bonus winning being achieved after the bonus accessory effect has been executed, the bonus accessory effect will start even if the correction operation has ended. Not done. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the bonus accessory performance from being executed twice before the bonus start performance.

In the accessory flag setting process, after clearing the correction operation flag to "0" in step S4604, if the bonus winning flag in the production side RAM 94 is not set to "1", the above first implementation is performed. Similarly to step S4605 of the accessory flag setting process (FIG. 77) in the example, the correction operation completion flag in the accessory management area 94d is set to "1", and the accessory flag setting process ends.

In the accessory flag setting process, if it is determined in step S4603 that the correction operation flag is not set to "1", step S4606 of the accessory flag setting process (FIG. 77) in the first embodiment is performed. ~ Execute the same processing as step S4608.

As mentioned above, when the bonus announcement performance is executed in the readable state, the bonus accessory performance is executed in the bonus announcement performance, and when the re-variation performance is executed in the readable state, the said re-variation performance is executed. In a configuration in which a bonus accessory performance is executed in a variable performance, if a bonus winning is achieved without the bonus accessory performance being executed, the bonus accessory performance is executed using the bonus winning as a trigger. Ru. Further, in the case where a bonus winning is achieved without executing the bonus accessory effect, if the spherical effect part 77b is not staying at the origin, the correction operation of the accessory object 75 is executed, and the correction operation ends. A bonus role performance is started based on what you have done. Thereby, it is possible to show the player that a bonus winning has occurred or that a bonus winning has been achieved by executing the bonus accessory presentation at a timing before the bonus start presentation is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Based on the production side MPU 92 receiving a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus winning has been established is set, the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state is canceled, and the correction operation of the accessory 75 is executed. be done. A configuration in which the performance side MPU 92 cancels the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state and executes the correction operation of the accessory 75 based on the presentation side MPU 92 receiving a game start command in which information indicating that a bonus winning has occurred is set. In this case, even if the bonus announcement effect is not won in a game where a bonus win has occurred, the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state is canceled and the correction operation of the accessory 75 is performed, so the correction operation is not performed. The player is made aware of the occurrence of a bonus win based on the fact that the player has won the bonus. In response, based on the presentation side MPU 92 receiving a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus win has been established, the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state is canceled and the accessory 75 is corrected. By having a configuration that executes the action, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing that a bonus winning has occurred based on the correction action of the accessory 75, and to prevent the player from entering the bonus state. It is possible to secure an opportunity to cancel the accessory error state or the correction operation standby state at the timing of .

In addition, in the configuration (14) above, when the correction operation of the accessory 75 is executed based on the presentation side MPU 92 receiving a winning result command in which information indicating that a bonus winning has been established, the correction The time required for the action is measured, and depending on the length of time required for the corrective action, the operation time of the spherical performance part 77b is shorter than the bonus accessory performance when performing the bonus accessory performance. It may be configured such that there are cases where the shortened bonus accessory performance is performed and cases where the bonus accessory performance is not performed. Specifically, the performance-side ROM 93 includes a bonus accessory drive table in which drive data (first drive data and second drive data) of the accessory 75 for executing the bonus accessory performance is set, and A shortened bonus accessory drive table in which drive data (first drive data and second drive data) of the accessory 75 for executing the bonus accessory effect is set is stored. In the bonus accessory performance, the spherical performance part 77b moves up and down for 1.5 seconds, and in the shortened bonus accessory performance, the spherical performance part 77b moves up and down for 1 second.

If the bonus winning flag in the performance-side RAM 94 is set to "1" in the bonus-winning accessory setting process (step S2806 of the winning result correspondence process (FIG. 56)), the accessory set in the performance-side RAM 94 Numerical information corresponding to 1.5 seconds is set in the performance timer counter. The value of the timer counter for accessory performance is updated by being decremented by 1 each time the performance side MPU 92 executes the accessory management process (FIG. 68) that is executed every 4 milliseconds. In the performance-side MPU 92, in the accessory drive control process (step S1915 of the performance execution process (FIG. 47)) in this configuration, the bonus winning flag in the performance-side RAM 94 is set to "1", and the 11th layer LY11 When the spherical performance section 77b returns to the initial position while the initial position drive table is being read out, or when the bonus winning flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" and the 11th layer LY11 is If the spherical effect section 77b returns to the displacement position while the displacement position drive table is being read, it is determined that the correction operation of the accessory 75 has been completed. When the production side MPU 92 detects the rising of the detection signal received from the initial position sensor 75a from the LOW state to the HI state, the production side MPU 92 grasps that the spherical production section 77b is staying at the initial position, and also detects that the spherical production section 77b is staying at the initial position. When the rise of the detection signal received from the LOW state to the HI state is detected, it is determined that the spherical effect section 77b is staying at the displacement position.

When the performance-side MPU 92 determines that the correction operation of the accessory 75 that was started in response to the bonus winning being completed has been completed, the performance-side MPU 92 determines whether or not the accessory performance execution flag is set to "1". do. If the accessory performance execution flag is not set to "1", it means that the bonus accessory performance has not been executed yet, so based on the value of the accessory performance timer counter in the performance side RAM 94, The time required for the correction operation of the accessory 75 is grasped. If the time required for the correction operation is less than 0.5 seconds, the production-side MPU 92 reads out the bonus accessory drive table from the production-side ROM 93 to the eleventh layer LY11 of the reading area 94a, and also reads the bonus accessory drive table from the accessory management area. The accessory object operation flag in 94d is set to "1". A bonus accessory performance is executed by controlling the drive of the accessory 75 in the performance side MPU 92 according to the bonus accessory drive table read out to the eleventh layer LY11.

If the time required for the correction operation of the accessory 75 is 0.5 seconds or more and less than 1 second, the performance side MPU 92 reads out the shortened bonus accessory drive table from the performance side ROM 93 in the 11th area 94a for reading. At the same time as reading out to layer LY11, "1" is set to the accessory operating flag in the accessory management area 94d. A shortened bonus accessory performance is executed by controlling the drive of the accessory 75 in the performance side MPU 92 according to the shortened bonus accessory drive table read out to the eleventh layer LY11. On the other hand, if the time required for the correction operation is 1 second or more, the production side MPU 92 does not read out either the bonus accessory drive table or the shortened bonus accessory drive table. In this case, neither the bonus accessory performance nor the shortened bonus accessory performance is executed.

In this way, when a bonus win is established without executing the bonus accessory effect and the correction operation of the accessory object 75 is executed, the time required for the correction operation is measured. If the corrective action is not performed or the time required for the corrective action is short (if the time required for the corrective action is less than 0.5 seconds), a bonus accessory effect will be performed and the corrective action will be performed. If the time required for the correction action is medium (if the time required for the correction action is 0.5 seconds or more and less than 1 second), a shortened bonus accessory performance will be performed, and if the time required for the correction action is long, In this case (when the time required for the correction operation is 1 second or more), neither the bonus accessory performance nor the shortened bonus accessory performance is executed. By having a configuration in which the presence or absence of a performance in which the accessory moves and the length of the performance are varied depending on the time required for the correction operation of the accessory 75, the correction operation of the accessory 75 is executed and the correction operation is It is possible to perform a performance (bonus accessory performance or reduced bonus accessory performance) in which the accessory 75 is operated by using the time remaining after the end of the bonus accessory performance. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(15) Instead of storing gaming history data in the history storage area 94b on the condition that the history storage mode is set, gaming history data is always stored in the history storage area 94b. A configuration may also be adopted in which the game history data clearing process is executed when the player performs an operation. Specifically, in the history image processing (FIG. 82), the history storage processing in step S4802 (FIG. 83) is performed unconditionally without determining whether the history storage flag 158 is set to "1". Execute. The history menu screen (FIG. 97) is provided with a "history deletion" item in place of the "mode selection" item. When the item "Erase history" is selected on the history menu screen, the production side MPU 92 executes a process to clear the game history data. In the game history data clearing process, similarly to step S5114 of the history configuration data generation process (FIG. 85) in the first embodiment, the 0th to 5th history storage areas RA0 to RA5 in the history storage area 94b are and clears the seventh to fifteenth history storage areas RA7 to RA15. After the player selects the "Erase history" item on the history menu screen and erases the gaming history data stored in the history storage area 94b, except for the gaming history data indicating the number of ART winnings, By starting the game, it is possible to prevent the history of games played before the player starts the game from being reflected in the history image G23.

Similarly to the first embodiment, in the history image management process (FIG. 95), if it is determined that 10 minutes have passed since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal gaming state ST1 (step S5712 : YES, step S5714: YES), clear processing of game history data is executed (step S5716). In the clearing process, the 0th to 5th history storage areas RA0 to RA5 and the 7th to 15th history storage areas RA7 to RA15 in the history storage area 94b are cleared. This can prevent the game history data of the next player to be seated from being mixed with the game history data of the player who was seated before the player.

In this way, by adopting a configuration in which game history data is always stored in the history storage area 94b, it is possible to eliminate the need for settings by the player to store game history data in the history storage area 94b, and to It is possible to generate history configuration data based on the history data and display the history image G23 corresponding to the history configuration data. Thereby, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the history image G23 cannot be displayed because the player forgets to set the game history data to be stored in the history storage area 94b when starting the game.

(16) The usage frequency of each word designation data is determined based on the history configuration data stored in the image playback storage area 94c, and if the usage frequency exceeds a predetermined reference value, the word designation data is A configuration may also be adopted in which the selection areas 165 to 167 are not set. Further, in the word designation data lottery process executed in step S5211 of the word selection process (FIG. 88), the winning probability of word designation data that is frequently used may be set to be low. This can prevent frequent generation of history configuration data in which the same wording specification data is set.

(17) The word designation data selected in the word designation data lottery process (step S5211 of the word selection process (FIG. 88)) is the reproduction storage area RDn (n is any one of 0 to 31) of the image reproduction storage area 94c. If there is no other wording specification data that is included in the history configuration data stored in the integer (integer), has the same display priority as the wording specification data, and meets the selection conditions, , the word designation data set in the selection areas 165 to 167 may be selected from among the word designation data whose display priority is lower than the word designation data selected in the word designation data lottery process (step S5211). good. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the same wording specification data as history configuration data generated and stored in the past is set.

(18) Instead of the configuration in which the history image G23, which is a still image, is displayed on the image display device 63 based on the history configuration data, a configuration may be adopted in which a history video, which is a moving image, is played back based on the history configuration data. . Thereby, it is possible to look back on the game history in a moving image, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

(19) A plurality of arrangement data in which the arrangement of the first to third heading ranges 151 to 153, the character image range 154 and the ending image range 155 are different is stored in the production side ROM 93, and one of the plurality of arrangement data is selected from among the plurality of arrangement data. A configuration may also be adopted in which a layout lottery is performed to select layout data. Thereby, it is possible to increase variations in the history image G23 and reduce the possibility that the same history configuration data will be generated.

(20) In the first embodiment, the setting value of the slot machine 10 is suggested depending on the type of the displayed background plate image G24, but the image suggesting the setting value is limited to the background plate image G24. do not have. The setting value of the slot machine 10 may be suggested by the type of word images G25 to G27, character image G28, or ending image G29.

(21) In the normal gaming state ST1, 10 minutes have passed since the last operation of the start lever 41 without the production side MPU 92 receiving a game start command, and the player is expected to leave his/her seat. In addition to or in place of the configuration that determines that the player has changed, a change button is provided that makes it possible to determine that the player has changed due to the player's operation, and the player has changed based on the operation of the change button. It may be configured to recognize that the change has occurred. Specifically, the change button is electrically connected to the production control device 90. The production side MPU 92 clears the 0th to 5th history storage areas RA0 to RA5 and the 7th to 15th history storage areas RA7 to RA15 in the history storage area 94b based on the detection of the operation of the change button. do. As a result, the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b is cleared to "0", except for the game history data indicating the number of times ART winnings have occurred. If the performance side MPU 92 detects an operation of the change button while the history storage flag 158 is already set to "1", the performance side MPU 92 maintains this state. Further, if the operation of the change button is detected in a state where the history storage flag 158 is not set to "1", the history storage flag 158 is set to "1". As a result, game history data is stored in the history storage area 94b. In this configuration, when the player changes in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state ST1, the period from when a player finishes playing and leaves his/her seat until the next player takes his/her seat and starts playing is Even if the time is less than 10 minutes, based on the detection of the change button operation, the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b, except for the game history data indicating the number of ART winnings, can be cleared to "0" and new game history data can be stored in the history storage area 94b.

(22) In the normal gaming state ST1, 10 minutes have passed since the last operation of the start lever 41 without the production side MPU 92 receiving a game start command, and the player is expected to leave his/her seat. In addition to or in place of the configuration that determines that the player has changed, an imaging device that can recognize the player may be provided, and a configuration may be used that determines that the player has changed based on the imaging result. Specifically, the imaging device is electrically connected to the production control device 90. The imaging range of the imaging device is set to a range in which the face of the player sitting in front of the slot machine 10 can be imaged in a recognizable manner. The imaging device performs imaging at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 3 minutes). When the production side MPU 92 recognizes a change in the player based on the imaging result, the production side MPU 92 stores the 0th to 5th history storage areas RA0 to RA5 and the 7th to 15th history storage areas RA7 to RA15 in the history storage area 94b. Clear. As a result, the game history data stored in the history storage area 94b is cleared to "0", except for the game history data indicating the number of times ART winnings have occurred. When the performance side MPU 92 recognizes that the player has changed based on the imaging result by the imaging device while the history storage flag 158 is already set to "1", the performance side MPU 92 maintains the state. Further, when it is recognized that the player has changed based on the image capturing result by the image capturing device while the history memory flag 158 is not set to "1", the history memory flag 158 is set to "1". As a result, game history data is stored in the history storage area 94b. In this configuration, when the player changes in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state ST1, the period from when a player finishes playing and leaves his/her seat until the next player takes his/her seat and starts playing is Even if the time is less than 10 minutes, if a change in player is recognized based on the imaging result by the imaging device, the game history data excluding the gaming history data indicating the number of ART winnings will be stored in the history storage area 94b. The existing game history data can be cleared to "0" and new game history data can be stored in the history storage area 94b.

(23) A configuration may be adopted in which a player can log in by inputting a password or the like, and a configuration in which it is determined whether or not a player is replaced based on the login information. With this configuration, only the history image G23 of the logged-in player can be selected for display. As a result, while it is possible to display the history image G23 based on the past gaming history of the player himself/herself, it is possible to prevent the act of guessing the setting value of the slot machine 10 by displaying the history image G23 based on the gaming history of another person. can.

(24) As a configuration in which a premium effect is executed, which may result in a case where a large profit is given to the player, based on the execution of the premium effect, the history image G23 always indicates that the premium effect has been executed. A configuration may also be adopted in which a premiere effect image shown is displayed. Specifically, in the ART state ST6, there is a special bonus win in which the number of bonus games of 100 or more is awarded. When a special additional winning occurs, a premium performance lottery is held in the performance side MPU 92, and when a premium performance is won in the premium performance lottery, the premium performance is executed. A premium performance flag is provided in the history storage area 94b. The premiere performance flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to grasp that the premiere performance has been executed. The premier performance flag is set to "1" when a premium performance is won in the premium performance lottery. The configuration data storage area 161 is provided with a premiere flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to recognize that the premiere performance image is to be displayed. If the premium performance flag is set to "1" at the generation timing of the history configuration data, the premium flag is always set to "1". This eliminates the need for the player to keep records such as photographs during the execution of the premiere performance, and allows the history image G23 including the premiere performance image to be displayed at any timing, thereby preserving the history of the execution of the premiere performance. It can be made possible.

(25) In the first embodiment, when the setting value is changed in the winning probability setting process (step S106 of the main process (FIG. 11)), the image reproduction storage area 94c (FIG. 41(a)) The display possible flag of the playback storage area RDn (n is an integer from 0 to 31) in which the history configuration data is stored may be set to "1". By setting the display enable flag to "1", history configuration data that could not be selected as a display target before the setting value was changed can be made selectable as a display target. To improve the interest of a game by increasing the number of history configuration data that can be selected for display while preventing the act of guessing the setting value of a slot machine 10 by displaying a history image G23 based on another person's game history. be able to.

(26) Instead of the configuration in which both the 10th history storage area and the 11th history storage area RA11 are provided in the history storage area 94b, the 10th history storage area and the 11th history storage area RA11 are provided. A configuration may be adopted in which only one of them is provided. As already explained in the first embodiment, the tenth history storage area RA10 is a counter that allows the presentation side MPU92 to grasp the number of game media given after the transition to the ART state ST6, and 11 history storage area RA11 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to grasp the net increase in the number of gaming media after the transition to the ART state ST6. In a configuration in which the history storage area 94b is provided with the 10th history storage area RA10 but the 11th history storage area RA11 is not provided, the transition to the ART state ST6 is similar to the first embodiment described above. It is possible to generate history configuration data including wording designation data corresponding to the number of game media provided after the transition. In this configuration, similarly to the first embodiment, the number of game media given after transition to ART state ST6 is a predetermined number of divisions (specifically, "1000," "2000," or "3000") Historical configuration data can be generated based on the reached. Further, in a configuration in which the history storage area 94b is provided with the eleventh history storage area RA11 but the tenth history storage area RA10 is not provided, the ART state ST6 It is possible to generate history configuration data including wording designation data corresponding to the net increase in the number of gaming media after the transition to . In this configuration, the history configuration data is triggered when the net increase in the number of game media after the transition to ART state ST6 reaches a predetermined number of delimiters (specifically, "400," "800," or "1200"). can be generated.

(27) In the second embodiment, the image display device 63 has one display area (only the lower right display area 181) in which the reduced video is displayed in the reduced additional effect, but the reduced video display is A configuration may be adopted in which two or more display areas are provided. With this configuration, the image display device 63 can simultaneously display two or more reduced moving images in the reduced additional effect. As a result, even if it is time to execute a new reduced additional effect while a reduced additional effect is being executed, the reduced additional effect that was being executed will not be terminated midway, and the reduced additional effect that was being executed will be replaced. , and a newly started reduction additional effect can be executed at the same time.

(28) When the number of consecutive games played in the advantageous section SC2 reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games), after moving to the advantageous section SC2, the winning combination lottery process (Fig. 14) is performed. Regardless of whether the winning numbers "1" to "3" are set and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is announced, which makes it possible to win the first bell, the advantageous section SC2 is It may be configured to end. Specifically, in the second control process of the game section (FIG. 29), if the value of the advantage continuation counter reaches a predetermined number of games, the initialization process of the advantage section SC2 is performed regardless of the state of the unreported flag. Execute (step S1014). This ends the advantageous section SC2. Thereafter, processing to turn off the advantageous section display is executed (step S1015). Thereby, the end of the advantageous section SC2 can be made easy to understand.

(29) Even if it is in the advantageous section SC2, if it is not in the ART state ST6, the winnings that are advantageous to the player will be established when different winning combinations are won depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. A configuration may also be adopted in which the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped is not notified. Specifically, in the notification control process (step S420) of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 14), the lottery processing for the winning combination (FIG. 14) is performed in a situation where the advantageous section flag in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". If any of the winning numbers "1" to "3" is set in , the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R make it possible to win the first bell, provided that the gaming state is in the ART state ST6. Executes processing for notifying the stop order of. This allows the player to pay attention to whether or not the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the ART state ST6 only in the ART state ST6. It becomes possible to collect.

(30) The ratio display 85 may be configured to display the accessory ratio including instructions. The main side RAM 74 includes a first award number counter to which the number of game media awarded when game media are awarded in a game for which a stop order notification is given, and a first award number counter to which the number of game media awarded is added in a game executed in a bonus state. A second awarded number counter to which the number of awarded game media is added when a medium is awarded, and an overall awarded number to which the number of awarded game media is added when a gaming medium is awarded regardless of the gaming state A counter is provided. When game media are awarded in a game in which the stop order notification is performed, the number of game media awarded is added to both the first award number counter and the overall award number counter. Further, when game media are awarded in a game executed in the bonus state, the number of game media awarded is added to both the second award number counter and the overall award number counter.

The ratio display 85 calculates the ratio of the sum of the values of the first award number counter and the second award number counter to the value of the overall award number counter when an instruction to display the game history management results is issued. That is, the calculation is performed so that the calculation result=("value of first grant number counter"+"value of second grant number counter")/"value of total grant number counter".

After that, display start processing is executed. In the display start process, display of the calculation result on the ratio display 85 is started. In this case, the identifier "7P." indicating that the value displayed on the ratio display section 87 is the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio is displayed on the identifier display section 86. Specifically, "7" is displayed on the left 7 segment display 86a of the identifier display section 86, "P" is displayed on the right 7 segment display 86b of the identifier display section 86, and the auxiliary display for the identifier is The display of the identifier display section 86 is controlled so that the section 86c lights up. Further, the ratio is set such that, of the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100, the 10's digit is displayed on the left 7-segment display 87a in the ratio display section 87, and the 1's digit is displayed on the right 7-segment display 87b. Display control is performed on the display section 87. Thereby, it is possible to confirm the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio.

The values of the first grant number counter, the second grant number counter, and the total grant number counter are not cleared to "0" unless the clearing process in step S105 of the main process (FIG. 11) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to measure the ratio of accessories including instructions for games executed in a gaming hall over a plurality of business days.

(31) When a shift to the advantageous section SC2 occurs in the normal gaming state ST1, the end occurs every time the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell prize in the advantageous section SC2 is announced. A lottery process may be executed, and a transition to the normal section SC1 may occur when a final winning is achieved in the final lottery process. In this case, it is possible to make it possible to notify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R multiple times, which makes it possible to achieve the first bell prize even in the advantageous section SC2 shifted in the normal gaming state ST1. becomes.

(32) The number of notifications of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell prize necessary to generate the opportunity to end the advantageous section SC2 is not limited to one time, but is not limited to two times. It may be multiple times, such as once, three times, or four or more times.

(33) Instead of the configuration in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell prize is set to be notified as the trigger for the end of the advantageous section SC2, If there is a specific win that is a win with a large number of game media awarded and is achieved when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a predetermined order, then the specific win is established. The advantageous section SC2 may not end until the notification of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R occurs a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice). In other words, in this configuration, the reel 32L allows the winning for which the number of game media awarded is the maximum to be realized when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in a predetermined order. , 32M, and 32R are notified a predetermined number of times, the advantageous section SC2 will not end. In this case, even in the advantageous section SC2 shifted in the normal gaming state ST1, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be stopped until the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R occurs a predetermined number of times, which makes it possible to achieve a specific winning. If a win is won in which a first bell prize is established according to the stopping order of the reels, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the first bell winning to be established may be notified.

(34) When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first bell prize in the normal gaming state ST1 and advantageous section SC2 is notified, the notification is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66. However, the image display device 63 may not perform the process. In this case, it is possible to inconspicuously notify the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which enables the establishment of the first bell prize that triggers the end of the advantageous section SC2.

(35) In a configuration in which the advantageous section display section 67 is in a light emitting state (that is, a display state) in the advantageous section SC2, if a predetermined abnormal state has occurred in the slot machine 10, the advantageous section display section 67 is in an extinguished state. (that is, a non-display state). Further, in this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a display corresponding to the type of abnormal state is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66. In this configuration in which the common display area 68 includes the combined display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67, if a predetermined abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 10, the advantageous section display section 67 By turning off the light and displaying a display corresponding to the type of abnormal condition on the dual-purpose display section 66, even if the same abnormal condition is occurring, a common display is displayed depending on whether it is in the advantageous section SC2 or not. Since an event in which the display mode of the display area 68 changes does not occur, it becomes easier to identify the type of abnormal state.

(36) The freeze period at the end of the ending may be longer when the BB effect is started after the ending effect than when the BB effect is not started after the ending effect. In this case, when the ending performance is finished and the BB performance is started, the longer period can be used to execute the BB start performance after the end performance of the ending performance is executed.

(37) The ending effect may be executed on the condition that the total number of game media awarded in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. This makes it possible to prevent the ending performance from being executed even though the game media has not been provided to the extent that the player is satisfied.

(38) When the ending effect is executed, a video effect is performed in 5-game increments, and at the end, the end screen shows the number of game media acquired in the current ART state ST6 and the number of games executed in the current ART state ST6. The configuration may be such that the is displayed.

(39) If the number of games played in the advantageous section SC2 during the bonus state becomes equal to or greater than the number of games compatible with endings, the bonus performance may be terminated and the ending performance may be started. The ending effect may be started after the state ends, or the ending effect may be started when the transition from the preparation state ST5 to the ART state ST6 occurs after the bonus state ends. .

In a configuration in which the ending performance is started after the bonus state ends, the start of the ending performance will be delayed relative to the number of games played in the advantageous section SC2. In this case, the ending effect is basically a video effect every 5 games, but by making the video effect every 3 games, all the effects can be displayed before the ending effect ends. You can do it like this. Furthermore, if all the performance contents cannot be displayed by the final game of the ending performance, all the performance contents may be displayed using a freeze period that occurs when the ending performance ends.

In addition, multiple types of effects are prepared as ending effects, such as effects for 30 games, effects for 40 games, and effects for 50 games, and the ending effects are started for the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2. A configuration may be adopted in which a performance is selected depending on the timing.

(40) The number of games played in the bonus state may be excluded from the measurement of the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of games executed in advantageous section SC2 from reaching the upper limit number of games during the bonus state, and it is also possible to prevent the ending effect from starting during the bonus state. becomes.

(41) The configuration of the offset table 97 for associating each index value IV of the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table with the winning number is limited to the configuration in the first embodiment above. Not done. For example, instead of setting the order of minor role group → bonus role group → replay role group, the configuration may be such that the order of bonus role group → replay role group → minor role group is set. .

(42) The offset table 97 is not set in common for the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, but an offset table is set individually corresponding to each lottery table. It is also possible to have a configuration in which it is provided. For example, in the normal mode lottery table, a group of winning combinations whose winning probability changes depending on the set value and a group of winning hands whose winning probability does not change according to the setting value are summarized separately. An offset table may be provided to separate and aggregate the small winning combination group, the bonus winning combination group, and the replay winning combination group. Furthermore, for the same purpose, an offset table may be provided for the first RT mode lottery table, and an offset table may also be provided for the second RT mode lottery table. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the winning numbers of each offset table are set so as not to overlap between the offset tables. Even with this configuration, the index value IV is set in each lottery table in a manner that is easy to design, and the winning numbers are set in each offset table in a manner that makes it easy to handle winning combination information in subsequent processing. Can be set.

(43) In the bonus internal state ST2, a configuration may be adopted in which symbols corresponding to bonus combinations are given priority in stop control over symbols corresponding to combinations that generate the award of game media. In this case, if a winning number of "1" to "3" is set in the bonus internal state ST2, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to win the first bell is announced, and A configuration may be adopted in which a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning bonus combination is notified. When the notification is executed in this way, the bonus winning can be achieved by performing the stopping operation in the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at the stopping operation timing that does not make the bonus winning possible, but that makes it possible to make the first bell winning. Instead, it becomes possible to win the first bell.

(44) It is limited to a configuration in which a normal section SC1 in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not reported and an advantageous section SC2 in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be notified as the game sections. However, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be notified in any of the sections, but a plurality of sections may be set in which the types of winning data to be notified of the stop order are different. Although the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be notified, a plurality of sections may be set in which the stop order is notified at different frequencies. Even in this case, it is possible to draw the attention of players to the transition of game sections by giving different degrees of advantage regarding the notification of the stop order in a plurality of sections.

(45) A configuration may be adopted in which notification for making the player recognize which game section is in is executed outside the advantageous section display section 67. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 executes an effect that allows the player to recognize which game section is in. Additionally, in addition to or in place of these configurations, a configuration may be adopted in which information indicating which gaming section is in is outputted externally to the hall computer of the gaming hall.

(46) When calculating the ratio of the total number of games in the advantageous section SC2 to the total number of games, the number of games executed in the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 may not be added to the total number of games in the advantageous section SC2. good.

(47) A configuration may be adopted in which the ratio of the total number of games in the advantageous section SC2 to the total number of games is calculated for each set value. In this case, even if the set value is changed, it is necessary to have a configuration in which the calculation is continued without initializing the ratio information that is performed for each set value. According to this configuration, it becomes possible to grasp the above-mentioned ratio for each set value.

(48) A configuration that stores the total number of played games and the number of advantageous games, which is the total number of games played in the advantageous section SC2, as history information, and calculates the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to store the number of winnings and the total number of games of a predetermined role to be drawn in the lottery process as history information, and calculate the winning probability of the predetermined role. Good too. In this case, there are a first predetermined combination and a second predetermined combination as target predetermined combinations, and the number of winnings for each of the first and second predetermined combinations is individually stored as history information, and the first The winning probability may be calculated for each of the predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination. Alternatively, the number of winnings for each of all the winning combinations may be individually stored as history information, and the probability of winning for each winning combination may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the game hall manager of the probability of winning the winning combination to be managed.

Alternatively, the total number of game media awarded and the total number of games may be stored as history information, and the number of game media awarded per unit number of games may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the game hall manager of the number of game media given per unit number of games. In addition, the combination of the total number of game media given and the total number of games is stored as history information separately for each gaming state and advantageous section SC2, and the number of game media given per unit number of games is calculated for each game. It may be configured to calculate each of the state and advantageous section SC2 separately.

Alternatively, the number of transitions to the bonus state and the total number of games played in non-bonus state gaming states may be stored as history information, and the probability of transition to the bonus state may be calculated.

(49) In addition to or in place of the configuration in which the advantageous section SC2 ends when the number of games executed in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the result of the ending lottery process executed in the advantageous section SC2 is It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the advantageous section SC2 ends and shifts to the normal section SC1 when it is a final winning result. The trigger for executing this termination lottery process is arbitrary, but for example, the configuration may be such that the termination lottery process is executed in each game, such as when a predetermined lottery trigger combination is won or a predetermined lottery trigger prize is established. A configuration may also be adopted in which the end lottery process is executed at the end of the lottery. In addition, on the condition that the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section SC2 is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games, a termination lottery process is executed every time a lottery opportunity occurs, and if the result of the termination lottery process is a final winning result, It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the advantageous section SC2 ends and shifts to the normal section SC1.

(50) In the advantageous section SC2, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, so the structure is not limited to the advantageous section SC2 being more advantageous than the normal section SC1, for example, winning a small prize. A configuration may be adopted in which the advantageous section SC2 is more advantageous than the normal section SC1 because the number of game media given increases when the following is established, and the number of game media required to start one game is reduced. Therefore, the advantageous section SC2 may be more advantageous than the normal section SC1.

(51) Notification of the calculation results using the game history is not limited to the configuration in which the notification is performed on the dual-purpose display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67, and may be performed using the credit display section 65, for example. Often, the credit display section 65 and the dual-purpose display section 66 may be used. Furthermore, if there are multiple types of calculation results to be notified, a configuration may be adopted in which each type of event to be notified is sequentially switched and displayed. When the display is switched sequentially in this way, for example, the credit display section 65 displays the type of event to be notified, and the dual-purpose display section 66 displays the calculation result for the event to be notified or the content of the calculation result. A configuration may also be adopted in which corresponding information is displayed. Thereby, even if there are multiple types of events to be notified, it is possible to notify the multiple types of events to be reported using a small number of display units.

(52) A configuration may also be adopted in which an upper limit number of consecutive games is set for the normal section SC1 as well. In this case, when the number of games continuously played in the normal section SC1 reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section SC2 is set. This makes it possible to compensate for the fact that the normal section SC1 continues until it reaches the upper limit number of games. In addition, by making the upper limit number of games in the normal section SC1 the same between the setting values of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", no advantage or disadvantage will occur depending on the set value regarding the upper limit number of games. becomes possible.

(53) The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which the number of effective lines is only one main line ML, and may be a configuration in which there are two, three, or four or more effective lines. In this case, it may be configured such that the number of active lines increases as the number of game media bet is large, or the maximum number of active lines may be set regardless of the number of game media bet.

(54) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that the privilege of paying out medals is given when a small winning prize is achieved, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and the configuration is such that some kind of benefit is granted to the player. That's fine. For example, it may be configured to pay out prizes other than medals when a small winning combination is achieved. Furthermore, in a slot machine that does not have an actual medal insertion or medal payout function and manages credit for medals owned by a player, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the granting of a benefit.

(55) The present invention may be applied to a so-called B type slot machine, a C type, a combination type of A type and C type, a combination type of B type and C type, furthermore, an RT game, a CT game, or an AT game. The present invention may be applied to any type of slot machine, such as a type equipped with a game.

(56) The symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, letters, etc., but may also be geometric lines, figures, etc. Further, it is possible to form a pattern using light, color, etc., a pattern may be formed using a three-dimensional shape, or a combination of these may form a pattern. That is, the pattern may be any pattern as long as it has a function as information with distinctiveness.

(57) In each of the above embodiments, a specific example of the slot machine 10 was shown, but it may also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a game is played using game balls as a game medium, and the slot machine and pachinko The present invention may also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of the above and the other machines.

<About inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. Note that, in the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance side MPU 92) that controls performance execution,
The performance control means is
The first performance control means (steps S2712 and S2714 in the performance side MPU 92) starts the first performance (first expected performance) based on the occurrence of the first execution opportunity (fifth opportunity) during the execution of the performance. functions) and
If the second execution trigger (sixth trigger) occurs during the performance, the second performance (sixth trigger) is executed based on the subsequent occurrence of a predetermined start trigger (the execution period of the first expected performance reaches 1 second). a second performance control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2009 to S2014 in the production side MPU 92, a function of executing the processing of steps S2415 and S2419 in the production side MPU 92) that starts the second expected production);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature A1, the first performance can be started based on the occurrence of the first execution opportunity during the execution of the performance. If a second execution opportunity occurs during execution of the performance, the second performance is started based on the subsequent occurrence of a predetermined start opportunity. For this reason, while setting the condition that the second execution opportunity occurs as one of the conditions for starting the second performance, the start of the second performance is held until the predetermined start opportunity occurs after the second execution opportunity occurs. It can be put on standby. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the second performance from being executed before the predetermined start opportunity occurs.

Feature A2. The effect control means controls the execution of the effect according to the effect information (the effect data in the effect table) read out to the execution target area (layers LY0 to LY11 in the readout area 94a),
A plurality of execution target areas are set,
The first performance control means reads the performance information corresponding to the performance being executed when the first execution trigger occurs in the execution target area of a different type from the execution target area from which the performance information is being read. Execution control of the first performance is performed according to first performance information (performance data of a first expected performance table) corresponding to the first performance being issued,
The second performance control means is configured to control whether predetermined performance information (performance data in either the first expected performance table or the intermediate stop performance table) corresponding to the performance that is being executed when the second execution opportunity occurs. The second performance information (in the second expected performance table) corresponding to the second performance that has been read out is in an area different from the area from which the predetermined performance information has been read in the execution target area that has been read out. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein execution control of the second performance is performed according to performance data).

According to feature A2, the execution control of the first performance is performed in an execution target area of a different type from the execution target area from which the performance information corresponding to the performance being executed when the first execution opportunity occurs is read. This is performed in accordance with the first performance information corresponding to the first performance that has been read out. Thereby, when the first execution opportunity occurs, the first performance can be started in parallel with the current performance without affecting the progress of the current performance.

The execution control of the second performance is carried out when the predetermined performance information is read out in the execution target area where the predetermined performance information corresponding to the performance being executed is read when the second execution opportunity occurs. This is performed in accordance with the second performance information corresponding to the second performance read out to an area different from the area. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for continuing the currently running performance until a predetermined start opportunity occurs, and switching from the currently running performance to the second performance when the predetermined start opportunity occurs. .

Feature A3. The plurality of execution target areas include a first execution target area (for example, first layer LY1) and a second execution target area (for example, second layer LY2),
When the performance information is read into each of the first execution target area and the second execution target area, execution of the performance according to the performance information of the second execution target area, at least regarding specific performance content. The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein control is given priority over execution control of the performance according to the performance information of the first execution target area.

According to feature A3, at least regarding specific performance contents, execution control of the performance according to the performance information of the second execution target area is given priority over execution control of the performance according to the performance information of the first execution target area. Thus, the performance according to the performance information of the second execution target area and the performance according to the performance information of the first execution target area can be executed in parallel. Since the execution control of the effect according to the effect information of the second execution target area is given priority over the execution control of the effect according to the effect information of the first execution target area, the execution control of the effect according to the effect information of the second execution target area is performed in the manner intended at the design stage. A combination of effects can be performed. Thereby, the contents of these performances executed in parallel can be made easy to understand.

Feature A4. The effect information is configured to be read out to each of the first execution target area and the second execution target area in a situation where the first execution opportunity may occur,
In a situation where the second execution opportunity may occur, the predetermined performance information and the second performance information are read into either the first execution target area or the second execution target area. The gaming machine according to feature A3.

According to feature A4, in a situation where the first execution opportunity may occur, a plurality of performances can be executed in parallel according to the performance information read to each of the first execution target area and the second execution target area. . In a situation where a second execution opportunity may occur, the predetermined performance information and the second performance information are read into one execution target area (either the first execution target area or the second execution target area). Therefore, it is possible to execute the second performance according to the second performance information while eliminating the need for a configuration for grasping the progress status of the predetermined performance according to the predetermined performance information.

Feature A5. Equipped with predetermined operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated by the player,
The first execution opportunity occurs based on the start of operation of the predetermined operation means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the second execution opportunity occurs based on the completion of the operation of the predetermined operation means.

According to feature A5, the first execution opportunity occurs based on the start of the operation of the predetermined operation means during execution of the performance, and the first performance is started based on the occurrence of the first execution opportunity. be able to. In addition, a second execution opportunity occurs based on the completion of the operation of the predetermined operation means during execution of the performance, and when the second execution opportunity occurs, a predetermined start opportunity occurs thereafter. A second performance can be started. In a configuration in which the period from the occurrence of the first execution opportunity to the occurrence of the second execution opportunity varies depending on the operation mode of the predetermined operation means by the player, the predetermined start opportunity is determined when the operation of the predetermined operation means is completed. By having a configuration in which the second effect is started on the condition that the second effect occurs, it is possible to guarantee the execution period of the first effect over the period from the occurrence of the first execution opportunity until the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity. can. This prevents the execution period of the first performance from becoming so short that the content of the performance cannot be understood even if the period from the occurrence of the first execution opportunity to the occurrence of the second execution opportunity is shortened. be able to.

Feature A6. The second performance control means is configured such that the execution status of a predetermined performance (either a first expected performance or a mid-stop performance), which is either the first performance or a performance different therefrom, is in a predetermined state (execution of the first expected performance). If the second execution opportunity occurs in a situation where the period does not reach 1 second, the second performance is then started based on the completion of the predetermined situation as the occurrence of the predetermined start opportunity. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5.

According to feature A6, when the second execution opportunity occurs when the execution status of the predetermined effect is a predetermined situation, the start of the second effect can be made to wait until the predetermined situation ends. As a result, even if the second execution opportunity occurs earlier than the end of the predetermined situation, the execution period of the predetermined effect is secured until the end of the predetermined situation, with the start of the second effect being on standby. be able to. Then, the second performance can be started based on the completion of the predetermined situation.

Feature A7. The predetermined situation is described in feature A6, characterized in that the predetermined situation is a situation in which a predetermined period of time (in the first embodiment, 1 second from the start of the first expected presentation) has not elapsed since the predetermined presentation was started. gaming machines.

According to feature A7, the predetermined situation does not end until a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the predetermined effect was started. With the configuration of feature A6 above, when a second execution opportunity occurs when the execution status of the predetermined effect is a predetermined situation, the start of the second effect is waited until the predetermined situation ends. Therefore, if the second execution opportunity occurs before the predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the predetermined effect, the start of the second effect can be made to wait until the predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the predetermined effect. . Thereby, it is possible to secure a period during which the predetermined effect is executed over a predetermined period in a state where the second effect is not executed. Therefore, even if the second execution opportunity occurs before the predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the predetermined effect, the execution period of the predetermined effect is prevented from becoming so short that the content of the predetermined effect cannot be understood. can do.

Feature A8. When the second execution opportunity occurs when the execution status of the predetermined effect is not the predetermined situation, means for starting the second effect (a function of executing the processing of steps S2009 to S2014 in the effect side MPU 92); The gaming machine according to feature A6 or A7.

According to feature A8, in the configuration in which when the second opportunity occurs when the execution status of the predetermined effect is a predetermined situation, the start of the second effect is waited until the predetermined situation ends, the execution of the predetermined effect is If the situation is not the predetermined situation, the second effect can be started without causing a delay when the second execution opportunity occurs. Thereby, it is possible to give the impression that the second performance has been started based on the occurrence of the second execution opportunity, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, with respect to the configuration of features A1 to A8, any one or more of the configurations of features A1 to A8, features B1 to B9, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D17, features E1 to E9, and features F1 to F7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance side MPU 92) that controls performance execution,
The performance control means is
A predetermined unit performance (base performance for ART and normal performance for ART) is started based on the occurrence of a performance start opportunity (the performance side MPU 92 receives a game start command in the ART state ST6), and the predetermined unit performance is When the performance start opportunity occurs in the situation where the performance is being executed, the performance start means (in the first embodiment, the step in the performance side MPU 92 A function to execute the processes from S3204 to S3207, a function to execute the processes from steps S6412 to S6415 in the production side MPU 92 in the second embodiment),
When the performance start opportunity occurs in a situation where a specific performance (in the first embodiment, an additional main performance and an additional sub-performance, in the second embodiment, an additional performance) is being executed in the predetermined unit performance, the predetermined unit performance is executed. When a new unit performance is started, a specific corresponding performance (an additional sub-performance in the first embodiment, a reduced additional performance in the second embodiment) corresponding to the specific performance is executed in the predetermined unit performance. (In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S3201 to S3203 in the production side MPU 92, and in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S6401 to S6411 in the production side MPU 92) and,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B1, when a predetermined unit performance is newly started due to the occurrence of a performance start opportunity in a situation where a specific performance is being executed, a specific performance is executed by executing a specific corresponding performance corresponding to the specific performance. To make it possible to grasp performance contents corresponding to a specific performance based on the corresponding performance, and to newly start a predetermined unit performance without causing a delay based on the occurrence of a performance start opportunity.

Feature B2. The specific response means is configured to newly start the predetermined unit performance when the performance start opportunity occurs in a situation where the specific performance is being executed in the predetermined unit performance. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the specific corresponding performance is started in a manner corresponding to the content of execution of the specific performance immediately before it is started.

According to feature B2, the specific corresponding performance is started in a manner corresponding to the execution content of the specific performance immediately before a new predetermined unit performance is started, so that the specific performance corresponds to the content of the specific performance and the specific performance. The content of the specific corresponding performance can be made continuous. Thereby, by checking the content of the specific corresponding performance, it is possible to grasp the continuation of the performance content of the specific performance.

Feature B3. When the specific performance is executed, at least both the first specific performance (additional main performance in the first embodiment) and the second specific performance (additional sub performance in the first embodiment) are executed. can be,
The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, wherein the second specific performance is executed as the specific corresponding performance, and the first specific performance is not executed.

According to feature B3, which has the configuration of feature B1 above, and when a predetermined unit performance is newly started due to the occurrence of a production start opportunity in a situation where a specific production is being executed, a specific response corresponding to the specific production is provided. In the configuration in which the performance is executed, the first specific performance is not executed as the specific corresponding performance, but the second specific performance is executed. When the first specific performance ends, the player's interest can be shifted from the first specific performance to a predetermined unit performance that is newly started. Moreover, it is possible to check the second specific performance in parallel with the newly started predetermined unit performance, so that it is possible to grasp the content of the performance corresponding to the specific performance.

Feature B4. When the predetermined unit performance is newly started due to the generation of the performance start opportunity in a situation where the specific performance is being executed in the predetermined unit performance, the specific response means is configured to perform The gaming machine according to feature B3, characterized in that the second specific performance is continued from the start of the predetermined unit performance.

According to feature B4, the second specific performance is prevented from being interrupted by continuing the second specific performance from the start of the predetermined unit performance that is newly started based on the occurrence of a performance start opportunity. Thus, the content of the second specific performance can be made continuous and easy to understand.

Feature B5. The specific response means is configured to perform the second specific response as the specific response performance when the performance start opportunity occurs in a situation where the specific performance is being executed in the predetermined unit performance and the predetermined unit performance is newly started. The gaming machine according to feature B3 or B4, characterized in that when executing a specific performance, the progressing speed of the second specific performance is changed from the progressing speed of the second specific performance up to that point.

According to feature B5, when a second specific performance is executed as a specific compatible performance, the progress speed of the second specific performance is made slower than the previous progress speed, thereby starting a new predetermined unit performance. By making it possible to carefully check the specific response performance that is executed in parallel with the above, it is possible to easily understand the content of the specific response performance. In addition, when a second specific performance is executed as a specific response performance, by making the progress speed of the second specific performance faster than the previous progress speed, the predetermined unit performance and the specific response performance are newly started. It is possible to shorten the period in which these are executed in parallel, and to quickly shift the player's attention to the newly started predetermined unit performance.

Feature B6. The performance control means controls the execution of the performance according to performance information (performance data in the performance table),
Any of features B3 to B5, characterized in that the performance information for executing the second specific performance is set as performance information different from the performance information for executing the first specific performance. The gaming machine described in (1) above.

According to feature B6, the performance information for executing the second specific performance is set as performance information different from the performance information for executing the first specific performance, so that the first specific performance and the second specific performance are It is possible to simplify the processing configuration for ending the first specific performance and continuing the second specific performance in a situation where both specific performances are being executed. In addition, when there are multiple types of first specific effects and second specific effects, compared to a configuration in which the first specific effects and second specific effects are executed based on one effect information, the number of types stored in advance is It is possible to increase the variation of combinations of the first specific performance and the second specific performance while suppressing an increase in the amount of data of performance information stored, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Feature B7. The effect control means controls the execution of the effect according to the effect information read out to the execution target area (layers LY0 to LY11 in the readout area 94a),
A plurality of execution target areas are set,
The performance information for executing the second specific performance is read into the execution target area different from the execution target area from which the performance information for executing the first specific performance is read. The gaming machine described in feature B6.

According to feature B7, the execution target area from which the performance information for executing the first specific performance is read is different from the execution target area from which the performance information for executing the second specific performance is read, It is possible to simplify the processing configuration for ending the first specific performance and continuing the second specific performance in a situation where both the first specific performance and the second specific performance are being executed.

Feature B8. The performance control means is configured to control the specific performance when an opportunity to execute the specific performance (the performance side MPU 92 receives an additional command during ART) occurs in a situation where the specific corresponding performance is being executed in the predetermined unit performance. A specific effect starting means (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S3301 to S3305 in the effect side MPU 92, and steps S3401 to S3401 in the effect side MPU 92) that starts the specific effect in a manner corresponding to the execution content of the corresponding effect. A function of executing the process of step S3412, a function of executing the process of steps S6501 to step S6503 in the production side MPU 92 in the second embodiment, a function of executing the process of steps S6601 to step S6606 in the production side MPU 92). The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7.

According to feature B8, when an opportunity to execute a specific performance occurs in a situation where a specific performance is being executed, the content of the execution of the specific performance that was being executed before the trigger for execution of the specific performance occurs, and the specific It is possible to have a correspondence relationship with the execution content of a specific performance that is started based on the occurrence of an opportunity to perform the performance. Thereby, when an opportunity to execute a specific performance occurs, the performance can be switched in a continuous and easy-to-understand manner.

Feature B9. The execution trigger for the specific performance is configured to occur when it is decided to provide a predetermined profit to the player (additional number of consecutive games in ART state ST6),
The player is configured to be able to recognize the content of the predetermined profit (the number of additional games) that triggered the execution of the specific performance by executing the specific performance,
When starting the specific performance when an opportunity to execute the specific performance occurs in a situation where the specific response performance is being executed in the predetermined unit performance, the specific performance starting means starts the specific performance during the execution of the specific performance. The gaming machine according to feature B8, characterized in that the particular performance is started in a state where the player can recognize the content of the predetermined profit that triggered the execution of the performance.

According to feature B9, if an opportunity to execute a specific performance occurs in a situation where a specific response performance is being executed in a predetermined unit performance, the specific response performance is executed for the player who was watching the specific response performance. It is possible to prevent a specific performance from being started based on the occurrence of an opportunity to execute the specific performance without indicating the details of the predetermined benefit that triggered the specific performance. Thereby, when an opportunity to execute a specific performance occurs in a situation where a specific corresponding performance is being executed in a predetermined unit performance, the content of the performance can be switched in a manner that allows the content of the predetermined profit to be grasped.

In addition, for the configuration of features B1 to B9, any one or more of the configurations of features A1 to A8, features B1 to B9, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D17, features E1 to E9, and features F1 to F7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to each of the inventions of the feature A group and the feature B group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which a lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the lottery. Further, a general configuration is such that an effect is performed to make the player predict or recognize the result of the lottery. These gaming machines are equipped with display devices, speakers, light emitting devices, movable objects, etc., and depending on the progress of the game, visual effects, sound effects, light effects, effects using movable objects, etc. are executed. Ru.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, a performance selected by lottery is executed by operating a start lever. Further, an opening effect is executed when a predetermined game state is started, and an ending effect is executed when a predetermined end opportunity occurs.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to suitably control the execution of performances, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A movable object (spherical production part 77b of accessory 75),
an operation control means for controlling the operation of the movable object (a function for executing the processing of steps S4501 to S4507 in the production side MPU 92);
A transition means (main) that transitions the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) based on the fulfillment of a predetermined transition condition (any of the first to fourth BB winnings and the first to second RB winnings). a function of executing the processing of step S1502 and step S1506 in the side MPU 72);
a prohibition setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S4201 to S4209 in the performance side MPU 92) for setting a motion prohibition state (correction operation standby state, accessory error state) in which the movement of the movable object is prohibited;
The operation is prohibited based on the establishment of the predetermined transition condition in the operation prohibition state (bonus winning has been achieved) or the occurrence of a transition to the predetermined gaming state (the gaming state has shifted to the bonus state). A prohibition release means for canceling the state (a function of executing the processing of steps S4101 to S4111 in the production side MPU 92, a function of executing the processing of steps S4701 to S4705 of the production side MPU 92),
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature C1, by setting the movable object to the motion prohibited state, the motion of the movable object can be prohibited. In addition, by canceling the operation prohibited state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition or the occurrence of a transition to a predetermined gaming state, if the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the operation prohibited state or the transition to a predetermined gaming state If this occurs, it is possible to make the movable object move after transitioning to a predetermined game state.

Feature C2. A winning lottery means (a function of executing the processing of steps S401 to S413 in the main side MPU 72) that executes the lottery processing of the winning combination,
If you have won a prescribed role (any of the 1st to 4th BB roles and 1st to 2nd RB roles) in the lottery process for the above-mentioned roles, The predetermined transition condition is satisfied if any of the following is satisfied;
The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the prohibition canceling means cancels the operation prohibition state based on the fact that the predetermined winning combination is established in the operation prohibition state.

According to feature C2, even if the operation is prohibited when the predetermined winning combination is established, the operation prohibited state can be canceled based on the establishment of the specified combination winning. Thereby, it is possible to secure an opportunity to cancel the movement inhibited state before transitioning to the predetermined gaming state, and to make the movable object move after transitioning to the predetermined gaming state.

Feature C3. The operation control means is a winning response control means (step S2503 in the production side MPU 92, step A function to execute the process of S2516 to step S2518, a function to execute the process of step S2607 in the production side MPU 92, a function to execute the process of step S2715 in the production side MPU 92, a function to execute the process of step S4401 to step S4405 in the production side MPU 92 The gaming machine according to feature C2, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of executing the processing of steps S4501 to S4507 in the production side MPU 92).

According to feature C3, when a predetermined combination is won in a situation where the movement is not prohibited, the movable object moves based on the fact that the predetermined combination has been won. Furthermore, it has the configuration of feature C2 described above, and is configured such that the operation prohibited state is canceled based on the establishment of a predetermined winning combination in the operation prohibited state. If a configuration is adopted in which the operation prohibition state is canceled based on the occurrence of an opportunity to execute the action of a movable object based on winning a predetermined role, if the action of the movable object is cancelled, the predetermined game The opportunity to cancel the operation-prohibited state is lost before the state changes. On the other hand, by having a configuration in which the operation prohibited state is canceled based on the establishment of a predetermined winning combination, it is possible to secure an opportunity to cancel the operation prohibited state before shifting to the predetermined gaming state. Thereby, it is possible to increase the possibility that the movable object can be operated in a predetermined gaming state.

Feature C4. When the operation prohibited state is canceled by the prohibition canceling means, a means for moving the movable object (a function of executing the processing of steps S4104 and S4105 in the production side MPU 92, a function of executing the processing of steps S4501 to S4507 in the production side MPU 92) The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing (a function of executing).

According to feature C4, by operating the movable object when the operation prohibited state is released, it is possible to secure an opportunity to operate the movable object before shifting to the predetermined game state. Further, after transition to a predetermined gaming state, a state can be made in which it is possible to perform an effect in which a movable object is moved.

Feature C5. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein the prohibition setting means sets the operation prohibition state based on a repeated event in which the movable object does not operate normally.

According to feature C5, the configuration is configured such that the operation prohibition state is set based on repeated events in which the movable object does not operate normally, so that when an event in which the movable object does not operate normally occurs once, Compared to a configuration in which the operation is immediately set to the prohibited state, the frequency of setting the operation prohibited state can be reduced. As a result, if an event in which a movable object does not operate normally is repeated, the movable object is set to a prohibited state, and the number of times the movement of the movable object is canceled is reduced, thereby improving the interest of the game. I can do it.

In addition, for the configuration of features C1 to C5, the configuration of any one or more of features A1 to A8, features B1 to B9, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D17, features E1 to E9, and features F1 to F7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to the invention of feature C group described above, it is possible to solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which a lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the lottery. Further, a general configuration is such that an effect is performed to make the player predict or recognize the result of the lottery. These gaming machines are equipped with display devices, speakers, light emitting devices, movable objects, etc., and depending on the progress of the game, visual effects, sound effects, light effects, effects using movable objects, etc. are executed. Ru.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, a performance selected by lottery is executed by operating a start lever. Further, an opening effect is executed when a predetermined game state is started, and an ending effect is executed when a predetermined end opportunity occurs.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately control movable objects, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. History storage execution means (function for executing the processing of steps S4901 to S4917 in the performance side MPU 92, step S5001 in the performance side MPU 92) for storing game history information (game history data) in the history storage means (history storage area 94b) ~Function to execute the process of step S5015);
When a predetermined generation trigger (the end of ART state ST6, the end of the ending effect of advantageous section SC2, and the number of game media given after transition to ART state ST6 reaches a predetermined number of divisions) occurs. , history correspondence information (history configuration data) that enables display means (image display device 63) to display a history correspondence image (history image G23) based on the history information stored in the history storage means. A generating means (a function for executing the processing of steps S5101 to S5111 in the production side MPU 92),
storage execution means (a function for executing the process of step S5112 in the production side MPU 92) for storing the history correspondence information generated by the generation means in the correspondence information storage means (image reproduction storage area 94c);
Predetermined display triggers (when the item "Display latest history image" is selected on the history menu screen, when a heading is selected on the heading list display, and when the lower button 64c is pressed in a situation where pop-up display is being performed) history display control means (production side MPU 92) that causes the display means to display the history corresponding image based on the history correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means. (a function of executing the processing of steps S6008 to step S6012 in the production side MPU 92, a function of executing the processing of steps S6205 to step S6210 in the production side MPU 92),
Equipped with
The history corresponding information, which has become a display target of the history corresponding image based on the occurrence of the predetermined display trigger, can become a display target of the history corresponding image again based on the subsequent occurrence of the predetermined display trigger. A gaming machine that does.

According to feature D1, game history information is stored in the history storage means, and when a predetermined generation trigger occurs, a history corresponding image is displayed on the display means based on the history information stored in the history storage means. History correspondence information is generated that makes it possible to Then, based on the occurrence of a predetermined display trigger, the history corresponding image is displayed on the display means based on the history correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means. Therefore, while the player does not need to use a camera or the like to record the game while the game is in progress, it is possible to display the history-compatible image later and check the game history. . This allows the player to concentrate on the performance performed during the game.

By storing the generated history correspondence information in the correspondence information storage means, the history correspondence information that is the display target of the history correspondence image based on the occurrence of a predetermined display trigger is made history compatible based on the occurrence of a subsequent predetermined display trigger. When the image becomes a display target again, the history corresponding image can be displayed again on the display means based on the history correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means for the display target. Compared to a configuration in which game history information is stored and history corresponding information is generated based on the history information each time a predetermined display opportunity occurs, it is possible to store the history information in order to display the history corresponding image on the display means again. The amount of data to be stored can be reduced, and the processing load for displaying the history-corresponding image again on the display means can be reduced.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the correspondence information storage means stores a plurality of pieces of the history correspondence information in which the predetermined generation trigger occurs at different times.

According to feature D2, it is possible to repeatedly display a plurality of history-corresponding images on the display means based on the plurality of history-correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means. By making it possible to display a history-corresponding image on the display means based on the history-corresponding information that has been generated and stored in the past, it is possible to check the past game history and improve the interest in the game. .

Feature D3. The predetermined display trigger occurs when the player performs a display selection operation (operation of the production operation device 64),
The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the history display control means causes the history corresponding information corresponding to the display selection operation to be displayed as the history corresponding image.

According to feature D3, the player can arbitrarily select history correspondence information to be displayed as a history correspondence image from among a plurality of pieces of history correspondence information generated and stored in the past and display it on the display means. It can be made possible. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the history display control means sets one piece of the history correspondence information to be displayed as the history correspondence image for one display selection operation.

According to feature D4, since there is only one piece of history-corresponding information to be displayed as a history-corresponding image for one display selection operation, only one history-corresponding image is displayed on the display means at a time. , it is possible to carefully check the history-compatible images. Further, it is possible to prevent unnecessary history-compatible images that are not selected from being displayed together.

Feature D5. The generation means includes a content adjustment means (in the production side MPU 92) that adjusts the content of the history correspondence information so that the history correspondence information already stored in the correspondence information storage means and the content of the history correspondence image are not the same. The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D4, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the process of step S5213 and a function of executing the process of step S5303 in the production side MPU 92.

According to feature D5, it is possible to reduce the possibility of generation of history correspondence information in which the contents of the history correspondence image are the same as the history correspondence information already stored in the correspondence information storage means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the history-corresponding images from decreasing due to frequent generation of history-corresponding information in which the contents of the history-corresponding images are the same.

Feature D6. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein there are a plurality of types of the predetermined generation triggers.

According to feature D6, compared to a configuration in which there is only one type of predetermined generation trigger, the possibility that the history information stored in the history storage means will be different at the timing when the predetermined generation trigger occurs is increased. At the same time, it is possible to increase the possibility that the history correspondence information generated based on the history information will be different. Thereby, it is possible to increase the variations of the history-corresponding images displayed on the display means, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Feature D7. A setting means (a function for executing the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage level,
In any one of the features D1 to D6, the history corresponding image is configured to include a suggestion image (background plate image G24 in the first embodiment) that suggests the setting value of the usage target. The game machine described.

According to feature D7, based on the suggestion image included in the history corresponding image, it is possible to estimate the setting value of the target of use, which is information corresponding to the player's advantage and is of high interest to the player, thereby improving the game performance. This can increase people's interest in history-corresponding images.

Feature D8. Based on the occurrence of a restriction trigger (10 minutes have elapsed without the production side MPU 92 receiving a game start command since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal gaming state ST1), at least the above suggestion is made. Limiting means for preventing images from being displayed (in the first embodiment, a function that executes the processing of steps S5712 to S5715 in the production side MPU 92, and in the third embodiment, a function that executes the processing of steps S6908 to S6910 in the production side MPU 92) The gaming machine according to feature D7, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following function:

According to feature D8, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being predicted based on the suggestion image included in the history corresponding image based on the history corresponding information generated and stored before the restriction trigger occurs. .

Feature D9. The gaming machine according to feature D8, wherein the restriction means prevents the history correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means from being displayed based on the occurrence of the restriction trigger.

According to feature D9, based on the occurrence of a restriction trigger, the display of the history corresponding image based on the history corresponding information stored in the correspondence information storage means is disabled, and the display is disabled based on the suggestion image included in the history corresponding image. This can prevent the set value from being guessed.

Feature D10. Based on the occurrence of the restriction trigger, the restriction means controls information for displaying the suggestion image from among the history correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means and the setting value of the usage target. The gaming machine according to feature D8, characterized in that the information is changed to display a non-suggestive image (common background plate image).

According to feature D10, even when a restriction trigger occurs, it is possible to display a history compatible image based on the history correspondence information, while the history correspondence is displayed based on the history correspondence information that was generated and stored before the restriction trigger occurred. It is possible to prevent setting values from being estimated based on the image.

Feature D11. The restriction trigger is based on the occurrence of a change operation indicating that the player has been changed or the situation in which no games have been played for a predetermined period (10 minutes in the first embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features D8 to D10, characterized in that the game occurs.

According to feature D11, at least the suggestion image is not displayed based on the occurrence of a change operation indicating that the player has been changed, so that when the player is changed, the changed player is It is possible to prevent the act of guessing the setting value to be used based on the player's game history before the change. In addition, by preventing the display of at least a suggestive image based on a situation in which no games have been played for a predetermined period of time, if a situation in which there is a high possibility that the player has changed occurs, it is possible to It is possible to prevent a player from guessing the set value to be used based on the player's game history before the change.

Feature D12. comprising a data storage means (character ROM in the production control board 91) for storing in advance image data for displaying an image on the display means,
The history display control means includes:
By reading the image data corresponding to the history correspondence information from the data storage means and setting the image data in the display setting means (frame area in the video RAM 96), the display setting means corresponds to the history correspondence information. A display data generation means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2101 to S2114, S2119 and S2120 in the production side MPU 92) that generates display data for
Means for displaying the history corresponding image corresponding to the display data on the display means based on outputting an image signal corresponding to the display data to the display means (a function for executing the process of step S2116 in the production side MPU 92) )and,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D11, characterized by comprising:

According to feature D12, the display data corresponding to the history correspondence information is generated by reading the image data corresponding to the history correspondence information from the data storage means and setting it in the display setting means. For this reason, compared to a configuration in which display data for all patterns of image data combinations that can be displayed as history-compatible images are stored in advance, display data for all patterns of image data combinations that can be displayed as history-compatible images is stored in advance in order to be able to display history-compatible images. The data capacity of data can be reduced. Further, it has the configuration of feature D1 described above, and is configured to display a history-corresponding image on the display means based on the history-correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means, based on the occurrence of a predetermined display trigger. For this reason, compared to a configuration in which display data that has been generated once is stored and a history-compatible image is displayed again based on the display data, the amount of data that must be stored in order to be able to display a history-compatible image is The data capacity can be reduced, and a configuration for storing display data can be made unnecessary. Thereby, the configuration for displaying history-compatible images on the display means can be simplified.

Feature D13. The history correspondence information includes a plurality of element correspondence information (background plate image specification data, base plate image specification data, first word specification data, second word specification data, third word specification data, rank image specification data, ending image Data indicating the presence or absence of G29 and data indicating history points) are included.
The display data generation means reads the image data corresponding to each of the plurality of element correspondence information included in the history correspondence information from the data storage means, and sets the image data in the display setting means. The gaming machine according to feature D12, wherein the display setting means generates the display data corresponding to the history correspondence information.

According to feature D13, the history correspondence information includes a plurality of element correspondence information, and the history correspondence image is configured to have image data corresponding to each of the plurality of element correspondence information. It is possible to increase variations in combinations of image data corresponding to element correspondence information included in corresponding images. Furthermore, the display data corresponding to the history correspondence information is such that image data corresponding to each of the plurality of element correspondence information included in the history correspondence information is read from the data storage means and set in the display setting means. Generated by For this reason, compared to a configuration in which display data for all combination patterns of multiple element correspondence information that can be displayed is stored in advance, data stored in advance to enable display of history correspondence images is Data capacity can be reduced.

Feature D14. The plurality of element correspondence information includes predetermined element correspondence information (for example, word specification data) and specific element correspondence information (for example, background plate image specification data),
A plurality of selection candidate information that can be selected as the predetermined element correspondence information are set,
The gaming machine according to feature D13, wherein a plurality of selection candidate information that can be selected as the specific element correspondence information are set.

According to feature D14, a plurality of selection candidate information that can be selected as the predetermined element correspondence information are set, and a plurality of selection candidate information that can be selected as the specific element correspondence information are set, so that the predetermined element correspondence information and the selection candidate information that can be selected as the specific element correspondence information are set. It is possible to increase the variations of combinations of specific element correspondence information. Thereby, it is possible to increase the variations of history-corresponding images that can be displayed on the display means and increase interest in the history-corresponding images. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D15. The generation means is configured to generate adjustment target information (first word specification data, second word specification data, and third word specification data) that is part of the plurality of element correspondence information, which is already stored in the correspondence information storage means. A content adjustment means (a function for executing the process of step S5213 in the production side MPU 92, a production side The gaming machine according to feature D13 or D14, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S5303 in the MPU 92.

According to feature D15, it is possible to reduce the possibility that history correspondence information having the same content of adjustment target information will be generated. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the history-corresponding images from decreasing due to frequent generation of history-corresponding information in which the contents of the history-corresponding images are the same. Since some of the plurality of pieces of element correspondence information are adjustment target information, it is possible to generate history correspondence information with less duplication as the history correspondence information as a whole in a manner that includes element correspondence information that is not adjustment target information.

Feature D16. When an intermediate display operation (operation of selecting "intermediate generation of history image" on the history menu screen) is performed before the predetermined generation trigger occurs, the generation means is configured to determine the timing at which the intermediate display operation is performed. Intermediate generation means for generating the history corresponding information based on the history information set in the history storage means (a function of executing the processing of steps S5101 to S5111 in the production side MPU 92, and step S6015 in the production side MPU 92) The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D15, further comprising a function of executing the process of step S6016.

According to feature D16, by performing an intermediate display operation, it is possible for the player to generate history correspondence information based on the history information stored in the history storage means at any timing, and also to generate the history correspondence information based on the history correspondence information. The history-corresponding image can be displayed on the display means. This makes it possible to display the history-corresponding image to a player who wants to check the history-corresponding image before the predetermined generation trigger occurs in a situation where closing time is approaching.

Feature D17. Equipped with a setting means (a function for executing the process of step S106 in the production side MPU 92) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage level,
The history corresponding image corresponding to the history corresponding information generated based on the occurrence of the predetermined generation trigger includes a suggestion image (background plate image G24 in the first embodiment) that suggests the setting value of the usage target. is a configuration that can include
The gaming machine according to feature D16, wherein the intermediate generation means generates the history correspondence information so that the suggestion image is not included in the history correspondence image.

According to feature D17, based on the suggestion image included in the history corresponding image, it is possible to infer the setting value of the target of use, which is information corresponding to the player's advantage and is of high interest to the player, thereby improving the game performance. This can increase people's interest in history-corresponding images. By configuring a configuration in which no suggestion image is set in the history corresponding information generated based on the intermediate display operation, the intermediate display operation can be repeatedly executed in a short period of time, and multiple images contained in multiple history corresponding images can be displayed. It is possible to prevent setting values to be used from being incorrectly guessed based on the types of the plurality of suggestion images by checking the suggestion images of the plurality of suggestion images.

In addition, with respect to the configuration of features D1 to D17, the configuration of any one or more of features A1 to A8, features B1 to B9, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D17, features E1 to E9, and features F1 to F7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. History storage execution means (function for executing the processing of steps S4901 to S4917 in the performance side MPU 92, step S5001 in the performance side MPU 92) for storing game history information (game history data) in the history storage means (history storage area 94b) ~Function to execute the process of step S5015);
When a predetermined generation trigger (the end of ART state ST6, the end of the ending effect of advantageous section SC2, and the number of game media given after transition to ART state ST6 reaches a predetermined number of divisions) occurs. , history correspondence information (history configuration data) that enables display means (image display device 63) to display a history correspondence image (history image G23) based on the history information stored in the history storage means. A generating means (a function for executing the processing of steps S5101 to S5111 in the production side MPU 92),
storage execution means (a function for executing the process of step S5112 in the production side MPU 92) for storing the history correspondence information generated by the generation means in the correspondence information storage means (image reproduction storage area 94c);
a data storage means (character ROM in the production control board 91) that stores in advance image data for displaying an image on the display means;
Predetermined display triggers (when the item "Display latest history image" is selected on the history menu screen, when a heading is selected on the heading list display, and when the lower button 64c is pressed in a situation where pop-up display is being performed) operation) has occurred, the image data corresponding to the history correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means is read out from the data storage means, and the image data is set for display. Display data generation means (steps S2101 to S2114, step S2119, and step S2120 in the production side MPU 92) that generates display data corresponding to the history corresponding information in the display setting means by setting in (frame area in the video RAM 96) function) and
Means for displaying the history corresponding image corresponding to the display data on the display means based on outputting an image signal corresponding to the display data to the display means (a function for executing the process of step S2116 in the production side MPU 92) )and,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature E1, game history information is stored in the history storage means, and when a predetermined generation trigger occurs, a history corresponding image is displayed on the display means based on the history information stored in the history storage means. History correspondence information is generated that makes it possible to Then, based on the occurrence of a predetermined display trigger, the history corresponding image is displayed on the display means based on the history correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means. Therefore, while the player does not need to use a camera or the like to record the game while the game is in progress, it is possible to display the history-compatible image later and check the game history. .

By storing the generated history correspondence information in the correspondence information storage means, when a predetermined display trigger occurs, the history correspondence image is displayed on the display means based on the history correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means. be able to. In comparison with a configuration in which game history information is stored and history corresponding information is generated based on the history information when a predetermined display trigger occurs, it is possible to store game history information in order to display a history corresponding image on the display means. It is possible to reduce the amount of data to be stored, and also to reduce the processing load for displaying history-corresponding images on the display means.

A history-corresponding image can be displayed by combining the image data stored in the data storage means. Display data corresponding to the history correspondence information is generated by reading image data corresponding to the history correspondence information from the data storage means and setting it in the display setting means. For this reason, compared to a configuration in which display data for all combination patterns of image data that can be displayed as history-compatible images is stored in advance, data that is stored in advance to enable display of history-compatible images data capacity can be reduced.

Feature E2. The history correspondence information includes a plurality of element correspondence information (background plate image specification data, base plate image specification data, first word specification data, second word specification data, third word specification data, rank image specification data, ending image Data indicating the presence or absence of G29 and data indicating history points) are included.
The display data generation means reads the image data corresponding to each of the plurality of element correspondence information included in the history correspondence information from the data storage means, and sets the image data in the display setting means. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that the display setting means generates the display data corresponding to the history correspondence information.

According to feature E2, the history correspondence information includes a plurality of element correspondence information, and the history correspondence image is configured to have image data corresponding to each of the plurality of element correspondence information. It is possible to increase variations in combinations of image data corresponding to element correspondence information included in corresponding images. Further, the display data corresponding to the history correspondence information is such that image data corresponding to each of the plurality of element correspondence information included in the history correspondence information is read from the data storage means and set in the display setting means. Generated by For this reason, compared to a configuration in which display data for all combination patterns of multiple element correspondence information that can be displayed is stored in advance, data stored in advance to enable display of history correspondence images is Data capacity can be reduced.

Feature E3. The plurality of element correspondence information includes predetermined element correspondence information (for example, word specification data) and specific element correspondence information (for example, background plate image specification data),
A plurality of selection candidate information that can be selected as the predetermined element correspondence information are set,
The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein a plurality of selection candidate information that can be selected as the specific element correspondence information are set.

According to feature E3, a plurality of selection candidate information that can be selected as the predetermined element correspondence information are set, and a plurality of selection candidate information that can be selected as the specific element correspondence information are set, so that the predetermined element correspondence information and the selection candidate information that can be selected as the specific element correspondence information are set. It is possible to increase the variations of combinations of specific element correspondence information. Thereby, it is possible to increase the variations of history-corresponding images that can be displayed on the display means and increase interest in the history-corresponding images. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E4. The generation means is configured to generate adjustment target information (first word specification data, second word specification data, and third word specification data) that is part of the plurality of element correspondence information, which is already stored in the correspondence information storage means. A content adjustment means (a function for executing the process of step S5213 in the production side MPU 92, a production side The gaming machine according to feature E2 or E3, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the process of step S5303 in the MPU 92.

According to feature E4, it is possible to reduce the possibility that history correspondence information having the same content of adjustment target information will be generated. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the history-corresponding images from decreasing due to frequent generation of history-corresponding information in which the contents of the history-corresponding images are the same. Since some of the plurality of pieces of element correspondence information are adjustment target information, it is possible to generate history correspondence information with less duplication as the history correspondence information as a whole in a manner that includes element correspondence information that is not adjustment target information.

Feature E5. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein the correspondence information storage means stores a plurality of pieces of the history correspondence information in which the predetermined generation trigger occurs at different times.

According to feature E5, it is possible to repeatedly display a plurality of history-corresponding images on the display means based on a plurality of pieces of history-correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means. By making it possible to display a history-corresponding image on the display means based on history-corresponding information that has been generated and stored in the past, it is possible to check the past game history and improve the interest in the game. .

Feature E6. The predetermined display trigger occurs when the player performs a display selection operation (operation of the production operation device 64),
The gaming machine according to feature E5, wherein the display data generation means sets the history correspondence information corresponding to the display selection operation as a display target of the history correspondence image.

According to feature E6, the player can arbitrarily select history correspondence information to be displayed as a history correspondence image from among a plurality of pieces of history correspondence information generated and stored in the past and display it on the display means. It can be made possible. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E7. The gaming machine according to feature E6, wherein the display data generation means sets one piece of the history correspondence information as a display target of the history correspondence image for one display selection operation.

According to feature E7, since there is only one piece of history-corresponding information to be displayed as a history-corresponding image for one display selection operation, only one history-corresponding image is displayed on the display means at a time. , it is possible to carefully check the history-compatible images. Further, it is possible to prevent unnecessary history-compatible images that are not selected from being displayed together.

Feature E8. The generation means includes a content adjustment means (in the production side MPU 92) that adjusts the content of the history correspondence information so that the history correspondence information already stored in the correspondence information storage means and the content of the history correspondence image are not the same. The gaming machine according to any one of features E5 to E7, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with a function of executing the process of step S5213 and a function of executing the process of step S5303 in the production side MPU 92.

According to feature E8, it is possible to reduce the possibility of generation of history correspondence information in which the contents of the history correspondence image are the same as the history correspondence information already stored in the correspondence information storage means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the history-corresponding images from decreasing due to frequent generation of history-corresponding information in which the contents of the history-corresponding images are the same.

Feature E9. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, characterized in that there are a plurality of types of the predetermined generation triggers.

According to feature E9, compared to a configuration in which there is only one type of predetermined generation trigger, the possibility that the history information stored in the history storage means will be different at the timing when the predetermined generation trigger occurs is increased. At the same time, it is possible to increase the possibility that the history correspondence information generated based on the history information will be different. Thereby, it is possible to increase the variations of the history-corresponding images displayed on the display means, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, for the configuration of features E1 to E9, the configuration of any one or more of features A1 to A8, features B1 to B9, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D17, features E1 to E9, and features F1 to F7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group F>
Feature F1. a setting means (a function for executing the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from among setting values in a plurality of stages corresponding to the player's advantage level;
History storage execution means (function for executing the processing of steps S4901 to S4917 in the performance side MPU 92, step S5001 in the performance side MPU 92) for storing game history information (game history data) in the history storage means (history storage area 94b) ~Function to execute the process of step S5015);
When a predetermined generation trigger (the end of ART state ST6, the end of the ending effect of advantageous section SC2, and the number of game media given after transition to ART state ST6 reaches a predetermined number of divisions) occurs. , history correspondence information (history configuration data) that enables display means (image display device 63) to display a history correspondence image (history image G23) based on the history information stored in the history storage means. A generating means (a function for executing the processing of steps S5101 to S5111 in the production side MPU 92),
storage execution means (a function for executing the process of step S5112 in the production side MPU 92) for storing the history correspondence information generated by the generation means in the correspondence information storage means (image reproduction storage area 94c);
Predetermined display triggers (when the item "Display latest history image" is selected on the history menu screen, when a heading is selected on the heading list display, and when the lower button 64c is pressed in a situation where pop-up display is being performed) history display control means (production side MPU 92) that causes the display means to display the history corresponding image based on the history correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means. (a function to execute the processes of steps S6008, S6010, and S6011 in , a function to execute the processes of steps S6205 to S6209 in the production side MPU 92),
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the history corresponding image can include a suggestion image (background plate image G24 in the first embodiment) that suggests the setting value of the usage target.

According to feature F1, game history information is stored in the history storage means, and when a predetermined generation trigger occurs, a history corresponding image is displayed on the display means based on the history information stored in the history storage means. History correspondence information is generated that makes it possible to Then, based on the occurrence of a predetermined display trigger, the history corresponding image is displayed on the display means based on the history correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means. Therefore, while the player does not need to use a camera or the like to record the game while the game is in progress, it is possible to display the history-compatible image later and check the game history. .

By storing the generated history correspondence information in the correspondence information storage means, when a predetermined display trigger occurs, the history correspondence image is displayed on the display means based on the history correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means. be able to. In comparison with a configuration in which game history information is stored and history corresponding information is generated based on the history information when a predetermined display trigger occurs, it is possible to store game history information in order to display a history corresponding image on the display means. It is possible to reduce the amount of data to be stored, and also to reduce the processing load for displaying history-corresponding images on the display means.

Based on the suggestion image included in the history-compatible image, it is possible to infer the setting value of the target of use, which is information that corresponds to the player's advantage and is of high interest to the player. can increase interest in

Feature F2. Based on the occurrence of a restriction trigger (10 minutes have elapsed without the production side MPU 92 receiving a game start command since the last operation of the start lever 41 in the normal gaming state ST1), at least the above suggestion is made. Limiting means for preventing images from being displayed (in the first embodiment, a function that executes the processing of steps S5712 to S5715 in the production side MPU 92, and in the third embodiment, a function that executes the processing of steps S6908 to S6910 in the production side MPU 92) The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following function:

According to feature F2, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being predicted based on the suggestion image included in the history corresponding image based on the history corresponding information generated and stored before the restriction trigger occurs. .

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F2, wherein the restriction means prevents the history correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means from being displayed based on the occurrence of the restriction trigger.

According to feature F3, based on the occurrence of a restriction trigger, the display of the history corresponding image based on the history corresponding information stored in the corresponding information storage means is disabled, and the display is disabled based on the suggestion image included in the history corresponding image. This can prevent the set value from being guessed.

Feature F4. Based on the occurrence of the restriction trigger, the restriction means controls information for displaying the suggestion image from among the history correspondence information stored in the correspondence information storage means and the setting value of the usage target. The gaming machine according to feature F2, characterized in that the information is changed to display a non-suggestive image.

According to feature F4, even when a restriction trigger occurs, it is possible to display a history compatible image based on the history correspondence information, while the history correspondence is displayed based on the history correspondence information that was generated and stored before the restriction trigger occurred. It is possible to prevent setting values from being estimated based on the image.

Feature F5. The restriction trigger is based on the occurrence of a change operation indicating that the player has been changed or the situation in which no games have been played for a predetermined period (10 minutes in the first embodiment). The gaming machine according to any one of features F2 to F4, characterized in that the game machine generates the game.

According to feature F5, at least the suggestion image is not displayed based on the occurrence of a change operation indicating that the player has been changed, so that when the player is changed, the changed player is It is possible to prevent the act of guessing the setting value to be used based on the player's game history before the change. In addition, by preventing the display of at least a suggestive image based on a situation in which no games have been played for a predetermined period of time, if a situation in which there is a high possibility that the player has changed occurs, it is possible to It is possible to prevent a player from guessing the set value to be used based on the player's game history before the change.

Feature F6. When an intermediate display operation (operation of selecting "intermediate generation of history image" on the history menu screen) is performed before the predetermined generation trigger occurs, the generation means is configured to determine the timing at which the intermediate display operation is performed. Intermediate generation means for generating the history corresponding information based on the history information set in the history storage means (a function of executing the processing of steps S5101 to S5111 in the production side MPU 92, and a function of executing the processing of step S6016 in the production side MPU 92) The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of executing processing.

According to feature F6, by performing an intermediate display operation, it is possible for the player to generate history correspondence information based on the history information stored in the history storage means at any timing, and also to generate the history correspondence information based on the history correspondence information. The history-corresponding image can be displayed on the display means. This makes it possible to display the history-corresponding image to a player who wants to check the history-corresponding image before the predetermined generation trigger occurs in a situation where closing time is approaching.

Feature F7. The gaming machine according to feature F6, wherein the intermediate generation means generates the history correspondence information so that the suggestion image is not included in the history correspondence image.

According to feature F7, based on the suggestion image included in the history corresponding image, it is possible to infer the setting value of the target of use, which is information corresponding to the player's advantage and is of high interest to the player. This can increase people's interest in history-corresponding images. By configuring a configuration in which no suggestion image is set in the history corresponding information generated based on the intermediate display operation, the intermediate display operation can be repeatedly executed in a short period of time, and multiple images contained in multiple history corresponding images can be displayed. It is possible to prevent setting values to be used from being incorrectly guessed based on the types of the plurality of suggestion images by checking the suggestion images.

In addition, for the configuration of features F1 to F7, the configuration of any one or more of features A1 to A8, features B1 to B9, features C1 to C5, features D1 to D17, features E1 to E9, and features F1 to F7 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

According to each invention of the feature D group, the feature E group, and the feature F group, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. These gaming machines are known to have a configuration in which a lottery is held based on the fulfillment of predetermined lottery conditions, and a bonus is awarded to a player according to the result of the lottery. Further, a general configuration is such that an effect is performed to make the player predict or recognize the result of the lottery. These gaming machines are equipped with display devices, speakers, light emitting devices, movable objects, etc., and depending on the progress of the game, visual effects, sound effects, light effects, effects using movable objects, etc. are executed. Ru.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, a performance selected by lottery is executed by operating a start lever. Further, an opening effect is executed when a predetermined game state is started, and an ending effect is executed when a predetermined end opportunity occurs.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball firing means that fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path that guides the fired game ball to a predetermined gaming area, A game machine comprising game parts arranged within a region, and giving a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage part of each game part.

Reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines: The rotating body starts rotating based on the operation of the start operation means, the rotation of the orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player A gaming machine that gives benefits to

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10...Slot machine, 41...Start lever, 42-44...Stop button, 63...Image display device, 64...Operation device for production, 64c...Lower button, 72...Main side MPU, 75...Accessories, 77b...Spherical production Part, 91... Production control board, 92... Production side MPU, 94a... Reading area, 94b... History storage area, 94c... Image playback storage area, 96... Video RAM, G23... History image, G24... Background plate image , G29... Ending image, LY0 to LY11... 0th to 11th layers, SC2... Advantageous section, ST1... Normal gaming state, ST3... BB state, ST4... RB state, ST6... ART state.

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means for controlling the execution of a performance,
The performance control means is
a first effect control means for controlling the execution of the first effect according to the first effect information based on the occurrence of a first execution opportunity during the execution of the effect;
If a second execution opportunity occurs during execution of the performance, a second performance control means controls the execution of the second performance according to the second performance information based on the subsequent occurrence of a predetermined start opportunity;
means for controlling the execution of a specific performance according to specific performance information based on the occurrence of a specific opportunity;
means for reading out the first performance information and the specific performance information into separate storage areas in a predetermined situation in which the second performance is not executed;
means for reading out the first performance information, the specific performance information, and the second performance information into the same storage area in a specific situation in which the second performance is executed;
Equipped with
A plurality of display effects are set as the display effects to be executed as the first effect,
A gaming machine characterized in that the plurality of display effects executed as the first effect include a common effect that may be executed as a display effect of the second effect .

Images